A Comprehensive Grammar to Hammurabi’s Stele 9781463236090

Citation preview

A Comprehensive Grammar to Hammurabi’s Stele

Gorgias Handbooks

Gorgias Handbooks provides students and scholars with reference books, textbooks and introductions to different topics or fields of study. In this series, Gorgias welcomes books that are able to communicate information, ideas and concepts effectively and concisely, with useful reference bibliographies for further study.

A Comprehensive Grammar to Hammurabi’s Stele

M. E. J. Richardson

9

34 2014

Gorgias Press LLC, 954 River Road, Piscataway, NJ, 08854, USA www.gorgiaspress.com Copyright © 2014 by Gorgias Press LLC

All rights reserved under International and Pan-American Copyright Conventions. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning or otherwise without the prior written permission of Gorgias Press LLC. 2014

9

‫ܕ‬

ISBN 978-1-4632-0284-2 Reprinted from the 2008 edition.

Printed in the United States of America

ISSN 1935-6838

This edition contains additional electronic material. The additional material may be accessed at the following web site: www.gorgiaspress.com/download

CONTENTS Preface

VII

INTRODUCTION

1

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION

7

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS

91

OVERVIEW OF GRAMMAR Script Phonology Morphology: Nouns Morphology: Verbs Morphology: Non-Declining Words Syntax Conjectural Errors and Variant Readings

117 117 119 123 127 133 134 135

DETAILED GRAMMATICAL NOTES Phonology Nouns Verbal Forms with Nominal Inflection Verbs G-Theme Derived Themes Quadriliteral or Quinquiliteral Roots Perfect Forms Subjunctive Forms Injunctive Forms Object Pronominal Suffixes Ventive Forms

137 137 148 167 177 178 189 197 197 201 206 210 212

VI

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE Stative Forms Non-Declining Words Enclitic Particles Syntax and Style

213 218 244 252

GLOSSARY

273

Bibliography

343

PREFACE Soon after clearing my desk of the manuscript of my Hammurabi’s Laws (Richardson 2000) I was pestered with thoughts that I had had to omit from that book much material most serious students would find indispensable. First and foremost of these thoughts was a convenient summary of the various grammatical items illustrated in the text of Codex Hammurabi (CH). Of course, once upon a time such a summary would have been superfluous, since the meticulously detailed grammatical commentary of G.R. Driver (1955) seemed to cover every word and phrase of the stele on which this “codex” was written. It will be recalled that Driver published his book just a little while after the publication of the first edition of what he himself referred to as “Professor Dr. W. von Soden’s admirable Grundriss der akkadischen Grammatik” (GAG), but he admitted that “only sporadic references could be inserted in the notes” (see p. vi). Now, more than half a century later, when grammarians naturally refer to GAG in its third edition, it is somewhat remarkable that of all the new subsequent translations of CH that have appeared following Driver’s work, not one of them has attempted to provide a systematic, line after line, grammatical exegesis of the text. Recently Huehnergard has rectified this situation to a large extent in his paedogogic grammar of Old Babylonian (first published in 1997, but see now the second edition published in 2006), in which he provides a comprehensive set of illustrative quotations from CH. But, when it is read closely, it becomes clear that if some different quotations had been chosen to illustrate particular grammatical features, a wider range of functions could have been attributed to those features. Therefore, I have set out in the present volume to provide a much fuller set of citations so that a student will discover some of the more subtle nuances of meaning in the text. The other most dominant pestering thought concerned the cuneiform text itself. It has for years been acceptable for teachers of Akkadian to begin their courses with Old Babylonian grammar, but to begin their

VIII

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

instruction of the script with New Assyrian signs. The obvious paedogogical advantages of this approach are overshadowed by anachronistic tensions, which make it rather difficult (some would say impossible) for average students to read for themselves the actual inscription in Old Babylonian script on the granite stele in Paris or on one of the scattered facsimiles. In an attempt to overcome this difficulty, I give here a reproduction of the most recent hand-copy of the inscription (the one by Bergmann published in 1953) opposite my phonetic transcription of the text, which has been aligned in a similar three-column format. I have also arranged for digital scans to be included of the nineteenth-century photographs made when the stele was originally excavated; this combines the technical quality of a bygone age with the convenience of our own. Every Old Babylonian sign that is used is then indexed according to its phonetic value, with cross-references to the conventional numerical value as given in standard sign-lists arranged according to the NeoAssyrian forms. To complete the work has perhaps taken more time than it would have done if I had worked ab initio from a flagged digital text. But I lacked the confidence to expose myself to the psychosomatic complexities of state-of-the-art software. My feeling is that, although the result may be less precise mathematically, it may more closely reflect the recurring human dilemma of distilling langue from parole. Formal thanks are due to the directors of Gorgias Press, who have done so much to make the heritage of the ancient Mesopotamian culture accessible to the reading public of today, for agreeing to accept my work for publication. It has been a delight to put the final touches to my work under the skilled guidance of their reader, Duncan Burns, who, when faced with a manuscript that had been pieced together from notes collected over several different years, introduced a much greater measure of consistency into the text as a whole. The names of individuals who have given me permission to quote from previously published material are recorded in appropriate places later in the book. Thanks are also due to the Trustees of the British Academy whose financial support enabled the project to be completed. Less formally, I wish to pay tribute to all my colleagues at Leiden University who have tolerated me working with them on what has been simply an incidental contribution to their Assyriological research. I have been particularly overwhelmed by the time spent in pointing out many ways in which my choice of words needed improving from the point of view of both accuracy and clarity by Emeritus Professor Marten Stol . Although the praise I ascribe to him

PREFACE

IX

must sound faint amid the tumult ascribed by the grandees of Babyloniaca, it is nonetheless heartfelt. So I would wish that it be sustained as he continues to enjoy the leisure of retirement; as Cicero declaimed, id quod est praestantissimum maximeque optabile omnibus sanis et bonis et beati, cum dignitate otium. And finally, because it is in the nature of things for such an undertaking not to be confined to one’s library desk but to spread the necessary appendages into hearth and home, I wish to express my admiration to my closest family and circle of friends, who have always been a constant support to body, mind and spirit. Leiden November 2007

M.E.J.R.

INTRODUCTION The growing interest in the ideas embodied in the literature of Ancient Mesopotamia, especially those of historians and theologians, demands some familiarity with the linguistic structures through which those ideas were conveyed. An appreciation of the potential of the language originally used in a text (as well as an appreciation of its limitations) is essential for understanding expressions which may look strange in a modern translation and which may be easily misunderstood. Some help comes from the fact that Akkadian, soon after it was rediscovered and deciphered by nineteenth-century philologists, could without difficulty be classified as a member of the Semitic language group. Arabic and Hebrew are very well known Semitic languages, and both of them have a longer established history of research than Akkadian itself has. Not infrequently words in those languages with a similar phonetic structure and a similar semantic range can be shown to be directly comparable with similar words in Akkadian. Moreover, inflectional morphemes follow a similar pattern in all three languages when categorised according to form and function. Those who know something about Classical Arabic and Classical Hebrew language and literature will soon find in Akkadian a third series of directly comparable data from texts which predate those of the others by a millennium or more. The three languages together can be regarded a triangular framework on which rest the major branches of the Semitic family of languages. It is therefore obvious that a familiarity with the elements of one of the major Semitic languages is a great advantage in understanding Akkadian. But the grammatical notes presented here, which are restricted to the description of the language of the stele inscribed with Hammurabi’s laws, have been formulated in a way that is mindful of the needs of someone who wishes to learn Akkadian without that advantage. A major difficulty confronting the learner of Akkadian is the fact that, unlike Arabic or Hebrew, it did not survive as a spoken language but has remained only in written form. The learner of Arabic or Hebrew

2

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

is always able to approach ancient literature through the corresponding spoken language. A discussion with a native speaker attempting to explain what exactly is meant by an apparently obscure ancient expression, even though in the classical period a comparable modern expression may have embodied different overtones, is likely on balance to illuminate the pathway to knowledge. However, alluding to the wider world of Semitic is not always sufficient to explain problems with Akkadian. Akkadian took over cuneiform writing from Sumerian (which is not Semitic), and the very close contact between the two cultures ensured that a great many Sumerian words were included within the essentially Semitic vocabulary of Akkadian. In fact, Akkadian contains a far greater proportion of non-Semitic words than any other ancient Semitic language, and Sumerian, beset as it is with a whole range of lexical and grammatical obscurities, is the source of most of them. It must also be remembered that Akkadian literature emanates from the last two and a half millennia before the Christian era, a little longer than the duration of human experience within the Christian era. It is, therefore, to be expected that literal translations of what would have been considered normal expressions then may seem a little mysterious today. One of the main reasons why Akkadian is often considered a strange language probably stems from the fact that most people today are not used to writing in syllables. It generally seems easier to learn a couple of dozen signs comprising an alphabet, which between them more or less adequately represent the sounds of what one wants to say, than to be confronted with hundreds of different signs of which the meaning is very often essentially ambiguous. To learn all these signs with their principal meanings is a challenge facing any serious student of Akkadian, who has to cope with the fact that most cuneiform signs can symbolise more than one syllable or word. To learn Akkadian, it is probably best first to consult one of the more recently published overviews of the language.1 For a comprehensive reference grammar there is that of von Soden (1995),2 which 1

Those by Buccellati (see Hetzron 1997: 69-99) and Huehnergard and Woods (see Woodard 2004: 218-87) are particularly clear. 2 Von Soden (1995) is in fact the third edition of his monumental work, Grundriss der akkadischen Grammatik (usually abbreviated as GAG), and he prepared it in cooperation with Werner R. Mayer. It was published more than forty years after the first edition (1952), which was photographically reprinted

INTRODUCTION

3

describes the language from a traditionally philological point of view, or the more modern linguistic approaches of Reiner (1966) and Buccellati (1996). Several teaching manuals have been published over the years.3 The normal approach of these manuals has been to select specimen texts from a wide range of literature of different periods, in order to provide the beginner with an introduction to the language as a whole and to illustrate features of the most important genres and dialects. Such an approach has the obvious advantage of helping students select which types of text, which historical periods and which geographical areas are of most interest to them. The most recent chrestomathy of such texts in Akkadian was compiled by Borger (1963; it was republished in 1979), which was based on the one compiled by Bauer (1953). The disadvantage of such a general introduction to all types of Akkadian language is that at the end of the course the student has probably not read the whole of any major text, and as a consequence it may appear that the grammatical rules that have been taught are not quite sufficient to be applied to every expression in a long literary text. Huehnergard (1997; 2006),4 the most recent teaching grammar written in English, has been much more focussed by restricting his choice of texts to those written in Old Babylonian, the dialect exemplified by Hammurabi’s laws, a convenient point from which to start reading contemporary but less literary documents like the large corpus of Old Babylonian letters or a wider range of Akkadian literature from other periods. In the course of 38 lessons, Huehnergard succeeds in explaining the text of almost every one of the laws as well as expressions from a range of contemporary documents.5 It is a paedogogical companion to the line by line but outdated lexical and grammatical observations of Driver (1955). The text of CH happens to be sufficiently long to embody a reasonably comprehensive set of grammatical features, many of which are for the second edition (1969a). This edition also included a substantial supplement (pp. i**-viii** and 1**-35**), which the publishers made available as a separate item (1969b). The book has never been translated from German. 3 In general, the more recently published ones are more accessible and more reliable. Significant differences can be observed between the approaches of different authors: Malbran-Labat (2001); Bodi (2001); Huehnergard (1997; 2006); Hoffner (1992; a translation of Ungnad 1964); Caplice (1988); Marcus (1978); Riemschneider (1969). 4 The terminology Huehnergard uses closely follows that of Buccellati. It is much fuller than earlier teaching grammars in English. 5 See GrAkk. §17.4; pp. 639-43 (index of texts).

4

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

repeated in more or less similar formats. The Laws for the most part embody a series of short sentences, which are reasonably simple to understand and which involve limited and repeated items of vocabulary. They were formulated in such a way that in the later tradition scribes came to use them as a classical model of style, a little like Ciceronian prose was used as a model by Latin writers. The language of the Laws is defined as the Old Babylonian dialect of Akkadian, which is also well attested in other more ephemeral documents such as letters. It is this dialect that has for many years been regarded as the base on which a student can best build a knowledge of the Akkadian language as a whole.6 The more rhetorical style of the Prologue and the Epilogue uses a very rich range of vocabulary, and in these sections of the stele it may seem that sentence boundaries have almost been forgotten. The contrast between this more florid, poetic language and that of the Laws is so obvious that it has been categorised separately as the hymno-epic dialect of Akkadian. Von Soden considered this dialect sufficiently complex that it should be presented to students as a much later element in their curriculum.7 The monumental script of the stele is more elaborate than that used some one thousand years later by the stonemasons of Assyria in the north of the country. The shape of the Assyrian signs is the traditional basis for the standard numerical sequence. Assyrian monuments were discovered relatively early in the excavation of Iraq and caused much excitement among the peoples of the West. Many of them were shipped wholesale into the magnificent galleries of museums of Europe and North America, where they were displayed publicly for the first time for millennia. So, it was natural that the New Assyrian script should be given priority in introductory manuals, and it became the norm for 6

Any doubts about this view have not been sustained (perhaps they have never been raised) since von Soden explicitly stated that a student should begin by learning just one dialect, and that the closest there is to a classical dialect is Old Babylonian: “nach Lage der Dinge kann dieses nur der altbabylonische Dialekt sein, weil er dem Ideal einer klassischen Sprache am nächsten kommt” (von Soden 1950: 334, in his review of Franz M. Th. Böhl, Akkadian Chrestomathy). His words echo those he wrote several years earlier when he added that the Babylonians themselves would have agreed: “das Altbabylonische dem Ideal einer klassischen Sprache am nächsten kommt und so auch von den Babyloniern selbst gewertet wurde” (von Soden 1942: 348, in his review of P. Naster, Chrestomathie akkadienne). 7 Von Soden 1942: 349.

INTRODUCTION

5

Akkadian chrestomathies to be dominated by New Assyrian texts in New Assyrian script. But once Hammurabi’s stele had been discovered, it clearly deserved a place in the chrestomathies. At first the cuneiform text was presented more or less as it appeared on the stele, as for example the Laws selected by Naster, but later the Old Babylonian signs were transcribed into standard forms of the New Assyrian script.8 This had the paedogogical advantage of making what von Soden had defined as the “classical” language of Akkadian available in the “classical” form of the script, but the disadvantage of being anachronistic. In the following pages a copy of the whole stele in its original format is presented side by side with a phonetic transcription of the text. This is supplemented by a detailed index of all the signs according to their phonetic values. This has been done so that the demands of the student and those of textual accuracy should both be met adequately. As an appendix, copies of the original detailed photographs of the stele are provided to enable collations to be made wherever that seems necessary. In this way the student will become familiar with the original script and be able to relate that to the simpler, later script. The conventional numerical sequence in sign lists is designed to answer the question “What sound can a particular sign suggest?” Since it is not straightforward to arrange Old Babylonian signs according to their shape, and since a new numerical sequence would be confusing, here the signs are listed alphabetically according to their phonetic value, which is designed to answer the question “What sign can be used for a particular sound?” When analysing the grammar of the text of CH, an essentially descriptive scheme is followed. The three basic patterns of inflection for words in Akkadian are correlated with three basic word classes. The main contrast is between words inflected according to a nominal pattern and those inflected according to a verbal pattern; the other words, which are essentially uninflected, are grouped together as non-declining words. This is, of course, less refined than the somewhat greater number of parts of speech usually recognised in English, where the distinguishing classifying feature is the function of a word in a sentence rather than its written form. Therefore, not infrequently, attention is drawn to 8

In Naster (1941: 56-72), Old Babylonian script is used. In Bauer (1953: I, 17-37), all the Laws are presented in New Assyrian script. In the two revisions of Bauer by Riekele Borger (1963; 2nd ed. 1979: 286-314, Tables 2-30) the stele as a whole is presented, with the Prologue and Epilogue in Old Babylonian script, but the Laws as before in New Assyrian script.

6

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

circumstances where the form of a word seems to conflict with its function, such as when a participle, which is inflected like a noun, functions like a verb. Similarly, personal pronouns and adverbs, which do not follow the normal pattern of nominal inflection, are nevertheless treated together with nouns. Once the essential points of Akkadian grammar have been presented in outline, following the conventional order of phonology, morphology and syntax, all grammatical features exemplified in CH are systematically illustrated by a reasonably comprehensive set of detailed notes.

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION The most recent copy of the cuneiform text of CH was made by Bergmann and published in 1953, which is here reproduced by permission of the publishers.1 It is generally regarded as the most reliable hand-copy to have been published of the original inscription on the stele.2 Bergmann regularly annotated his copy to mark where his readings differed from those of his predecessors. Very often the justification for his new readings can be found by reference to the original photographs of the stele, which are included at the end of this book. The volume in which these early photographs appeared was published in the last years of the nineteenth century. The volume is not generally available to the public and the photographs have not been reproduced before. Because they are now no longer under copyright restrictions, the occasion of the publication of this book was an appropriate time to have them reproduced. The quality of these old photographs is exceptionally good, in part due to the fact that the long columns of inscriptions are displayed over a double spread of folio pages.3

1

E. Bergmann, Codex Hammurabi. Textus Primigenius (Editio Tertia; Rome: Biblical Institute, 1953). 2 A. Deimel, Codex Hammurabi Textus Primigenius. Escriptus a Rud. Wessely. Denuo om lucem editus ab Ant. Deimel S.I. (Rome: Biblical Institute, 1930). The three sections of this book comprised: 1. Codex Hammurabi transscriptio et translatio Latina denuo in lucem edita; 2. tabulae signorum collectae a Don Laurentio van den Eerenbeemt; 3. vocabularium denuo in lucem editus. Anton Deimel (1865–1954) had earlier published a hand copy in Codex Hammurabi textus primigenius, transcriptio, translatio Latina, vocabularia, tabula comparationis inter leges Mosis et Hammurabi, ad usum privatum auditorum (Rome: Biblical Institute, 1910). 3 The photographs were first published in the contribution by V. Scheil to La délégation en Perse du Ministère de l’Instruction Publique. Mémoires publiées sous la direction de Jaques de Morgan, délégué général. Tome IV,

8

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Bergmann set out his hand-copy of the text in three columns, but it was not possible because of limitations of space for him to make the content of his columns correspond with the content of a column of text on the stele. In this book a romanised transcription of the stele text is displayed in three columns on pages facing Bergmann’s copy, so that they correspond with one another more or less exactly line by line. Sometimes lack of space has made it necessary for one line of transcription to correspond to two lines of the stele and, conversely, one line of cuneiform has sometimes had to appear as two lines of transcription (xlvi:84 = Law 280). On occasions, there was not enough space to entitle every separately numbered Law; where other Laws share one subheading the first line number of those laws has been emboldened. A phonemic transcription of the cuneiform and not a phonetic transliteration4 has been given, for only in this way could the many citations to illustrate the grammar of the inscription be identified in their wider linguistic context. Furthermore, it is more natural for the grammarian to aim to read a sequence of cuneiform signs as a whole word rather than to be satisfied with an epigraphist’s transliteration. When relying on the transcription of individual syllables, the student is often obliged to extract cumbersomely a sequence of individual sounds just to articulate a single word. Numerals which were written ideographically in cuneiform are transcribed as numbers; otherwise they are transcribed phonetically. Within the transcription are incorporated a number of epigraphic observations which arise from the fact that on the original inscription the stonemason normally wrote phrases in small boxed sections, and the first editors decided to assign a line number to every boxed section. But in fact the stonemason often wrote two lines in one boxed section. Here the conventional line number of a boxed section has been underlined to mark such double lines, and a vertical stroke (|) marks the position the stonemason chose for the line break. Wherever possible, the second line of a boxed section has been set out as a separate line in the transcription, but lack of space has sometimes prevented separation. The second part of a double line was almost always indented; for those few occasions Textes élamites—sémitiques, deuxième série (Paris: E. Leroux, 1902). These photographs are now out of copyright. 4 For a meticulously detailed transliteration see Borger 1979 (BAL) I, 2-50, who lists all the variant manuscripts known to him and their variant readings, the most significant of which are noted here.

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION

9

where there was no indentation, an oblique stroke (/) is used to mark the line break. Usually it seems that indentation was avoided because there were too many characters to be written within the marked width of the column (xv:15; xxv:9 = Law 107; xxvii:75, 77 = Law 125; xlviii:79). When there appears to have been sufficient width available, the stonemason may perhaps on that occasion have wished to keep a bound form and its genitive closer together (gigunƝ / Aya, ii:28; bƝl / ¨ubullišu, xiv:11 = Law 48). On rare occasions he decided to indent the first or only line of a boxed section, and this may have given some emphasis to the introductory words of the sentence; initial indentation is marked in the transcription with a vertical stroke at the beginning of a line (| Anum, i:45; | Ɨlum, i:45). Double lines are usually broken at a word-boundary but occasionally the line-break occurs before a word has been written in full. To mark such truncated words a hyphen (-) is used in the transcription, both at the end of the first line and the beginning of the next. On one occasion the break is made at the morpheme-boundary of a compound word (Sîn|-muballiÓ, iv:70). Less frequently a word is broken between separately numbered single lines (nƗdinƗ-nišu, xlvi:62-63 = Law 278; warki-Ɨt, xlviii:59-60). More often than not the line-break separates two CV signs, which does not usually cause any great problem in making a transcription (itnj-|-ramma, x:38 = Law 28). And when it separates a VC from a CV sign, a transcription is also easy if the consonants are different (iÑÑab-|-tuma, xi:1 = Law 30), or when a geminated consonant is divided (innad-|-diššum, x:68 = Law 30). But some allowance will have to made for the technical inaccuracy of those transcriptions of words where the division occurs between a CV and a VC sign (mušte-|-ešmi, v:10; innaddi-|-iššumma, x:38 = Law 28; innaddi-|-inma, x:48 = Law 29; naba-alkattim, xxvii:71-2 = Law 125). In regular transcriptions the vowel would be written only once, but here for clarity it has been repeated. Although a transcription such as ana la ¨a-|-ssim rƝqƗ “to the mindless they are useless” (xlviii: 103-4) will at first sight look strange, it seemed the clearest way to show that a division has been made between two CV signs (¨a and si) in a defectively written word and a geminated consonant is represented by the second CV sign. It would appear from a preliminary analysis of the broken words that the positioning of the line division was more or less spontaneous, and this is supported by the fact that one and the same word is differently divided in the same column (išakka-|-akma and išak-|-kakma, iv:14 and 29 = Laws 43 and 44).

10

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Sometimes it seems that the concentration of the stonemason wilted, as when he had enough space to avoid an awkward line break but failed to do so. It may not be coincidental that Ma-|-aškanšapir (iv:3) occurs a few lines before the mistake made in iv:12 (MA3.AL.NAG.A for MA3.AL.GU7.A), the ideographic spelling of Malgium, the small Babylonian kingdom located east of the Tigris; and the fact that maškanim is not written on a line of its own in Law 113 (u lu ina ma-|aškanim, xxvi:4) may not be unconnected with the fact that the first four lines of the column are all double lines. Some of the epigraphic features marked here suggest that the stonemason may have had some inherent awareness of grammar and syntax. For example, a preposition almost always shares the same line as its noun, but there seems to have been no reticence in separating a bound form from its following genitive (warad | ekallim, xxxvi:57 = Law 175); a verb in final position is often written on a separate line, or indented as the second part of a double line (col. xxviii:1, 2, 3 = Law 119); a truncated noun with pronominal suffix will often be divided before the suffix; conversely, the enclitic particle –ma is never separated from the word with which it is associated. From a syntactic perspective it would seem reasonable to have expected some words to have been arranged differently. For example, ritti | gallƗbim šuƗti (xlii:41 = Law 226) seems less good than ritti gallƗbim | šuƗti, for which ample space was available. There is occasional evidence to show that a stonemason was distracted from his attention: he failed to mark off the end of one Law from the beginning of the next (išakkannjši šumma awƯlum, xxxii: 66-67 = Laws 153-4); conversely, what appears to be intended as a double line in one boxed section (the second line is indented) is written as two separate lines (adi šinƯšu | itbalam, xxxv:33a-33b = Law 169); there is unnecessary repetition of a word at the end of one column and the beginning of the next (litƝr {litƝr}, l:106-li:1). Such preliminary observations suggest that further systematic investigation into the relationship between scribal behaviour and grammatical stucture is likely to reveal more of interest. There are some more complex details, which will be of special interest to an epigraphist but which have not been noted in this transcription. It can happen that the signs in the first line of a boxed section are widely spaced but the signs in the second line fill all the space available. This implies that there were occasions when a stonemason was reticent to truncate a word. In the penultimate column of the stele we find two widely spaced signs followed by five equally spaced signs (aplam |

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION

11

lƯÓeršuma, col. li:44). Similar considerations may apply to u lu / bibbulum (xiv:5), but a moment later we find the second part of a double line indented, u lu | ina la mê (xiv:7); here it is a phrase not a word that is apparently deliberately being kept together. Following the text and transcription is a sign list which has been organised phonetically. Except for the commonest CV and VC signs, references are given to all those words in which a given sign is found. This will make it possible quickly to locate the transliteration value of any unfamiliar sign. And because that list is provided with cross-references to the numbers used in standard sign lists, any extra information required about a given sign (including its form in New Assyrian script) will be readily accessible.

12

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION PROLOGUE i:1-26

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Ưnu1 Anum | ÑƯrum šar AnunnakƯ Ellil bƝl šamê u erÑetim šƗim šƯmƗt mƗtim ana Marduk mƗrim rƝštîm ša Ea ellilnjt2 kiššat nišƯ išƯmnjšum in3 IgigƯ ušarbinjšu BƗbilam4 šumšu ÑƯram | ibbinj in5 kibrƗtim ušƗternjšu ina6 lib-|-bišu šarrnjtam7 dƗrƯtam8 ša kƯma šamê u erÑetim išdƗša9 šuršudƗ ukin-|-nnjšum10

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

i:50-62

50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

i:27-49

innjmišu11 Ñammurabi12 rubâm nadam13 pƗli¨ ilƯ | iâti 32 mƯšaram14 27 28 29 30 31

ina mƗtim ana šnjpîm raggam u ÑƝnam ana ¨ullu-|-qim15 dannum enšam ana la ¨abƗ-|-lim kƯma ¼amaš ana ÑalmƗt qaqqadim waÑêmma16 mƗtim nuwwurim | Anum u Ellil ana šƯr nišƯ Óubbim šumƯ17 ibbû

60 61 62

Ñammurabi rƝûm nibƯt Ellil | anƗku mukammer nu¨šim u Óu¨dim mušaklil mimma šumšu ana Nippur | markas šamê erÑetim zƗninum nadum ša Ekur

i:63-2:1

63 64 65 66

šarrum18 lƝûm mutƝr Eridu ana ašrišu mubbib

13 1

šulu¨ Eabzu

ii:2-12

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

tƯb kibrƗt19 erbettim mušarbi20 zikru BƗbilim muÓƯb libbi Marduk bƝlišu 21 ša njmƯšu* izzazzu ana22 Esagil

ii:13-21

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

zƝr šarrnjtim ša Sîn ibniušu23 muna¨¨iš Urim wašrum24 muštƝmiqum bƗbil ¨egallim ana Egišnugal

ii:22-31

22 šar tašƯmtim 23 šƝmû ¼amaš | dannum25 24 mukƯn 25 išdƯ Sippar 26 mušalbiš 27 warqim 28 gigunƝ / Aya 29 muÑƯr 30 bƯt Ebabbar26 31 ša kî šubat | šamƗi ii:32-36

32 qarrƗdum gƗmil 33 Larsa 34 muddiš Ebabbar

14

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION

35 ana ¼amaš 36 rƝÑišu ii:37-47

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

bƝlum muballiÓ Uruk27 šƗkin mê nu¨šim28 ana nišƯšu29 mullî30 rƝš Eanna mukammer ¨iÑbim ana Anim u Ištar

ii:48-54

48 Ñulnjl31 mƗtim 49 mupa¨¨ir 50 nišƯ / sap¨Ɨtim32 51 ša Isin 52 muÓa¨¨id33 53 nu¨šim 54 bƯt34 Egalma¨ ii:55-67

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67

ušumgal šarrƯ talƯm Zababa mušaršid šubat | Kiš muštas¨ir35 melemmƝ36 Emeteursag mušteÑbî37 parÑƯ | rabûtim ša Ištar pƗqid bƯtim38 Ñursagkalamma

ii:68-iii:6

68 sapar nakirƯ39 69 ša Erra40 rnjšu

70 1 2 3 4 5 6

ušak-|-šidu41 nizmassu42 mušƗter43 Kutî murappiš mimma šumšu ana Meslam44

iii:7-16

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

rƯmum kadrum munakkip | zƗirƯ narƗm Tutu murƯš Barsippa nadum la mupp-|-arkûm ana Ezida ilu45 šarrƯ

iii:17-23

17 18 19 20 21 22 23

mudƝ igigallim mušaddil 46 mƝreštim ša* Dilbat mugarrin | karê ana Uraš gašrim

iii:24-35

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

bƝlum simat ¨aÓÓim u agêm ša ušak-|-lilušu47 erištum Mama mukƯn uÑurƗtim

15

32 33 34 35

ša Keš mudeššƯ mƗkalƯ | ellnjtim ana Nintu48

iii:36-46

36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

muštƗlum gitmƗlum šƗim49 mirƯtim u mašqƯtim ana Lagaš u Giršîm mukƯl50 nindabê rabûtim ana Eninnu

iii:47-54

47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

mutamme¨ ayyƗbƯ migir telƯtim51 mušaklil 52 tƝrƝtim ša* Sugal53 mu¨addi libbi Ištar

iii:55-64

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

rubûm ellum ša nƯš qƗtišu Adad idû munƝ¨ libbi Adad qurƗdim ina Karkara54 muštak-|-kin simƗtim ina Eudgalgal

iii:65-69

65 šarrum nƗdin 66 napištim 67 ana Adab

16

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 68 Ɨšer55 69 bƯt56 Ema¨

30 nišƯ Mera78 31 u Tuttul79

iii:70-iv:6

iv:32-44

70 71 72 1 2 3 4 5 6

eÓel šarrƯ qabal la ma¨Ɨrim šû57 iqƯšu napšatam58 ana59 Ma-|-aškanšƗpir mušešqi60 nu¨šim ana Meslam61

iv:7-22

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

62

emqum muttabbilum63 šû64 ikšudu nagab uršim 65 mušpazzir nišƯ Mal-|-gƯm66 in67 karašîm mušaršidu šubƗtišin68* in69 nu¨šim ana Ea u Damgalnunna70 mušarbû71 šarrnjtišu dƗriš išƯmu72 zƯbƯ ellnjtim

iv:23-31

23 ašared | šarrƯ 24 mukanniš73 25 dadmê74 26 nƗr Purattim 27 75ittum Dagan 28 bƗnîšu76 29 šû77 igmilu

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

rubûm nadum munawwer pani81 Tišpak82 šƗkin83 mƗkalƯ | ellnjtim84 ana Ninazu 85 šƗÓip nišƯšu in pušqim mukinnu86 išdƯšin87 qerbum88 BƗbilim šulmƗniš

iv:45-52

45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

80

89

rƝî nišƯ ša epšƝtušu eli Ištar ÓƗbƗ* mukinni90 Ištar ina Eulmaš91 qerbum92 Akkadim93 ribƯtim

iv:53-58

53 54 55 56 57 58

mušƝpƯ94 kƯnƗtim mušnjšer95 | ammi96 mutêr lamassišu97 damiqtim ana98 Ɨlim Aššur

iv:59-63

99

59 mušeppi100 | nƗbi¨Ư101 102 60 šarrum ša ina | Ninua103 61 ina Emesmes 62 ušnjpiu104 63 mê105 Ištar

17 iv:64-v:13

106

nadum muštƝmiqum107 ana ilƯ rabûtim108* liplippim ša Sumulael109 aplum dannum110 ša Sîn-|-muballiÓ zƝrum dƗrium111 ša šarrnjtim šarrum dannum112 šamšu BƗbilim mušƝÑi nnjrim113 ana mƗt ¼umerim u Akkadîm šarrum mušte|-ešmi 11 kibrƗt114 12 arbaim 13 migir Ištar115 | anƗku 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

v:14-24

14 innjma 15 Marduk116 16 ana šutƝšur | nišƯ 17 mƗtim njsim 18 šnj¨uzim117 19 uwaeranni 20 kittam 21 u mƯšaram 22 ina pƯ mƗtim 23 aškun 24 šƯr nišƯ | uÓƯb v:25

25 innjmišu118

18

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION LAWS: Law 1 (v:26-31)

26 šumma awƯlum | awƯlam 27 ubbirma 28 nƝrtam elišu 29 iddƯma 30 la uktƯnšu 31 mubbiršu 32 iddâk Law 2 (v:33-56)

33 šumma awƯlum 34 kišpƯ 35 eli awƯlim | iddƯma 36 la uktƯnšu 37 ša elišu 38 kišpnj nadû 39 ana Id 40 illak 41 Id išal-|-liamma 42 šumma Id 43 iktašassu 44 mubbiršu 45 bƯssu itabbal 46 šumma awƯlam | šuƗti 47 Id 48 njtebbi|-baššuma119 49 ištalmam120 50 ša elišu 51 kišpƯ iddû 52 iddâk 53 ša Id 54 išliam 55 bƯt mubbirišu 56 itabbal Law 3 (v:57-67)

57 šumma awƯlum 58 ina dƯnim

ana šƯbnjt121 sarrƗtim njÑiamma awat iqbû la uktƯn šumma dƯnum | šû 65 dƯn napištim 66 awƯlum šû 67 iddâk 59 60 61 62 63 64

Law 4 (v:68-vi:5)

68 1 2 3 4 5

šumma ana šƯbnjt šeim u kaspim njÑiam aran122 dƯnim123 šuƗti ittanašši124

Law 5 (vi:6-30)

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

šumma dayyƗnum dƯnam idƯn purussâm iprus kunukkam ušƝzib warkƗ-|-numma dƯnšu Ưtene dayyƗnam šuƗti ina dƯn | idƯnu enêm ukannnjšuma rugummâm ša ina dƯnim | šuƗti ibaššû adi 12-šu inaddin u ina pu¨-|-rim

19 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

ina kussî dayyƗnnjtišu ušetbûšuma ul itârma itti dayyƗnƯ ina dƯnim ul uššab125

Law 6 (vi:31-40)

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

šumma awƯlum makknjr ilim u126 ekallim išriq awƯlum šû iddâk u ša šurqam ina qƗtišu im¨uru iddâk

Law 7 (vi:41-56)

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

šumma awƯlum lu127 kaspam lu ¨urƗÑam lu wardam lu amtam lu alpam lu immeram lu imƝram u lu mimma |šumšu ina qƗt128 | mƗr awƯlim u lu warad awƯlim balum šƯbƯ u riksƗtim ištƗm u lu ana maÑÑarnjtim im¨ur awƯlum šû šarrƗq iddâk

Law 8 (vi:57-69)

57 šumma awƯlum 58 lu alpam lu immeram | lu imƝram lu ša¨âm

20

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69

u lu eleppam išriq šumma ša ilim šumma ša ekallim adi 30-šu inaddin šumma ša muškƝnim adi 10-šu iriab šumma šarrƗ|-qƗnum ša nadƗnim | la išu iddâk

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Law 9 (vi:70-vii:47)

70 šumma awƯlum 1 ša mimmûšu | ¨alqu 2 mimmƗšu 3 ¨alqam 4 ina qƗti | awƯlim 5 iÑÑabat 6 awƯlum ša ¨ul|-qum 7 ina qƗtišu 8 Ñabtu 9 nƗdinƗnummi | iddinam 10 ma¨ar šƯbƯmi 11 ašƗm 12 iqtabi 13 u bƝl ¨ul|qim 14 šƯbƯ mudƝ 15 ¨ulqiyami 16 lublam 17 iqtabi 18 šƗyyimƗnum

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

nƗdin iddinušum u šƯbƯ ša ina ma¨ri|-šunu išƗmu itbalam u bƝl ¨ul-|-qim šƯbƯ mudƝ | ¨ulqišu itbalam dayyƗnnj awâtišunu immarnjma šƯbnj ša ma¨ri|-šunu šƯmum iššƗmu u šƯbnj129 mudƝ ¨ulqim mudnjssunu ma¨ar ilim iqabbûma nƗdinƗnum šarrƗq iddâk bƝl ¨ulqim ¨uluqšu ileqqe šƗyyimƗnum ina bƯt nƗdinƗnim kasap išqulu ileqqe

Law 10 (vii:48-61)

48 šumma šƗyyi|-mƗnum 49 nƗdin130 50 iddinušum 51 u šƯbƯ ša ina | ma¨rišunu

21 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61

išƗmu131 la itbalam bƝl ¨ul-|-qimma šƯbƯ mudƝ ¨ulqišu | itbalam šƗyyimƗnum šarrƗq iddâk bƝl ¨ulqim ¨uluqšu ileqqe

Law 11 (vii:62-viii:3)

62 šumma bƝl | ¨ulqim 63 šƯbƯ mudƝ 64 ¨ulqišu 65 la itbalam 1 sƗr 2 tuššamma | idki! 132 3 iddâk Law 12 (viii:4-9)

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

šumma nƗdi|-nƗnum ana šƯmtim ittalak šƗyyimƗnum ina bƯt nƗdinƗnim rugummƝ133 dƯnim šuƗti adi 5-šu ileqqe

Law 13 (viii:14-24)

14 šumma awƯlum | šû 15 šƯbnjšu | la qerbu 16 dayyƗnnj adannam

22

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION

17 ana 6 war¨Ư 18 išakka-|-nnjšumma 19 šumma ina šeššet war¨Ư 20 šƯbƯšu | la irdeam 21 awƯlum šû 22 sƗr 23 aran dƯnim | šuƗti 24 ittanašši Law 14 (viii:25-29)

25 26 27 28 29

šumma awƯlum mƗr awƯlim Ñe¨ram ištariq iddâk

Law 15 (viii:30-36)

30 31 32 33 34 35 36

šumma awƯlum lu warad ekallim lu amat ekallim lu warad muškƝnim lu amat muškƝnim abullam uštƝÑi iddâk

Law 16 (viii:37-48)

37 šumma awƯlum 38 lu wardam lu amtam 39 ¨alqam 40 ša ekallim 41 u lu muškƝnim 42 ina bƯtišu 43 irtaqƯma 44 ana šisƯt 45 Ɨgirim 46 la uštƝÑiam 47 bƝl bƯtim šû 48 iddâk Laws 17-20 (viii:49-ix:13)

49 šumma awƯlum 50 lu wardam lu amtam

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58

¨alqam ina ÑƝrim iÑbatma ana bƝlišu irtediaššu 2 šiqil kaspam bƝl wardim inaddiššum

Law 18 (viii:59-67)

59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67

šumma wardum šû bƝlšu la izzakar ana ekallim ireddƯšu warkassu ipparrasma ana bƝlišu utarrnjšu

Law 19-20 (viii:68-ix:13)

68 69 70 71 72 1 2 3 4 5 6-7 8 9 10 11 12 13

šumma wardam šuƗti ina bƯtišu iktalƗšu warka wardum ina qƗtišu ittaÑbat awƯlum šû iddâk šumma wardum ina qƗt ÑƗbitƗnišu i¨taliq awƯlum šû ana bƝl wardim nƯš ilim izakkarma njtaššar

Law 21 (ix:14-21)

14 šumma awƯlum 15 bƯtam 16 ipluš

23

17 18 19 20 21

ina pani pilšim šuƗti idukknj-|-šuma i¨al-|-lalnjšu

Law 22 (ix:22-27)

22 23 24 25 26 27

šumma awƯlum ¨ubtam i¨butma ittaÑbat awƯlum šû iddâk

Law 23 (ix:28-45)

28 šumma ¨abbƗ|-tum 29 la ittaÑ|bat 30 awƯlum 31 ¨abtum 32 mimmâšu134 33 ¨alqam 34 ma¨ar 35 ilim 36 ubârma 37 | Ɨlum135 38 u rabiƗnum 39 ša ina erÑe-|-tišunu 40 u paÓÓišunu 41 ¨ubtum 42 i¨¨abtu 43 mimmâšu 44 ¨alqam 45 iriab-|-bnjšum136 Law 24 (ix:46-50)

46 šumma napištum137 47 Ɨlum u rabi|-Ɨnum

24

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 48 1 mana kaspam 49 ana nišƯšu 50 išaqqalnj138 Law 25 (ix:51-65)

51 šumma ina bƯt | awƯlim 52 išƗtum 53 innapi¨ma 54 awƯlum 55 ša ana bul-|-lîm139 56 illiku 57 ana numƗt 58 bƝl bƯtim 59 Ưnšu iššƯma 60 numƗt 61 bƝl bƯtim 62 ilteqe!140 63 awƯlum šû 64 ana išƗtim | šuƗti 65 innaddi Law 26 (ix:66-x:12)

66 šumma lu141 rƝdûm 67 u142 lu143 bƗirum 68 ša ana ¨arrƗn | šarrim144 69 alƗkšu 1 qabû145 2 la illik146 3 u147 lu agram 4 Ưgurma 5 pnj¨šu 6 iÓÓarad148 7 lu rƝdûm 8 u149 lu bƗirum šû 9 iddâk 10 munaggi-|-iršu

11 bƯssu 12 itabbal Law 27 (x:13-29)

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

šumma lu150 rƝdûm u151 lu152 bƗirum ša ina dannat šarrim turru153 warkišu154 eqelšu u kirƗšu155 ana šanîm156 iddinnjma ilikšu ittalak šumma ittnj|-ramma Ɨlšu | iktašdam157 eqelšu u kirƗšu utar-|-rnjšumma šûma ilikšu illak

Law 28 (x:30-40)

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

šumma lu rƝdûm u lu bƗirum ša ina dannat šarrim turru mƗrušu ilkam alƗkam ilei eqlum u kirûm innaddi-|-iššumma ilik abišu illak

Law 29 (x:41-50)

41 42 43 44

šumma mƗrušu Ñe¨erma ilik abišu alƗkam

45 la ilei 46 šalušti | eqlim u kirîm 47 ana ummišu 48 innaddi-|-inma 49 ummašu 50 urabbƗšu Law 30 (x:51-xi:4)

51 šumma lu rƝdûm 52 u lu bƗirum 53 eqelšu kirƗšu | u bƯssu 54 ina pani | ilkim 55 iddƯma 56 uddappir 57 šanûm 58 warkišu 59 eqelšu | kirƗšu 60 u bƯssu 61 iÑbatma 62 3 šanƗtim158 63 ilikšu 64 ittalak 65 šumma itnj|-ramma 66 eqelšu kirƗšu | u bƯssu 67 irriš 68 ul innad|-diššum159 1 ša iÑÑab-|-tuma160 2 ilikšu 3 ittalku161 4 šûma | illak

25

26

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION Law 31 (x:5-12)

38 ul inna-|-addin

šumma šattam ištiatma162 uddap-|-pirma ittnjram eqelšu163 kirƗšu | u bƯssu 10 innaddi-|-iššumma164 11 šûma165 ilikšu 12 illak

Law 33 (xi:39-50)

5 6 7 8 9

Law 32 (xi:13-38)

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

šumma lu rƝdûm u lu bƗirum ša ina ¨arrƗn šarrim turru tamkƗrum ipÓu|-raššuma alšu uštak|-šidaššu šumma ina bƯtišu ša paÓƗrim166 ibašši šûma ramanšu ipaÓÓar šumma ina bƯtišu ša paÓƗrišu la ibašši ina bƯt il Ɨlišu ippaÓÓar šumma ina bƯt il Ɨlišu ša paÓƗrišu la ibašši ekallum ipa|-aÓÓarišu!167 eqelšu kirnjšu168 u bƯssu ana ipÓerišu169

39 šumma lu170 ša ¨aÓÓƗtim 40 u171 lu172 laputtûm 41 ÑƗb nis¨Ɨtim173 42 irtaši 43 u lu ana ¨arrƗn 44 šarrim 45 agram pnj¨am 46 im¨urma 47 irtede174 48 lu ša ¨aÓÓƗtim 49 u175 lu laputtûm šû 50 iddâk Law 34 (xi:51-64)

51 šumma lu ša ¨aÓÓƗtim 52 u lu176 laputtûm 53 numƗt rƝdîm | ilteqe 54 rƝdiam i¨ta-|-bal 55 rƝdiam 177ana igrim 56 ittadin* 57 rƝdiam ina dƯnim 58 ana dannim ištarak 59 qƯšti šarrum 60 ana rƝdîm iddinu178 61 ilteqe! 179 62 lu ša ¨aÓÓƗtim 63 u180 lu laputtûm šû 64 iddâk Law 35 (xi:65-xii:4)

65 66 67 68 69 70 1

šumma awƯlum liƗtim181 u ÑƝnƯ ša šarrum ana rƝdîm iddinu ina qƗti rƝdîm

2 3 4

27 ištƗm ina kaspišu Ưtelli

Law 36 (xii:5-9)

5 6 7 8 9

eqlum kirûm | u bƯtum ša rƝdîm bƗirim u nƗši | biltim ana kaspim ul inad-|-din!182

Law 37 (xii:10-21)

10 šumma awƯlum 11 eqlam kirâm u bƯtam 12 ša rƝdîm bƗirim 13 u nƗši biltim 14 ištƗm 15 Óuppašu 16 i¨¨eppe 17 u183 ina kaspƯšu184 18 Ưtelli 19 eqlum kirûm u bƯtum 20 ana bƝlišu 21 itâr Law 38 (xii:22-30)

22 rƝdûm bƗirum 23 u nƗši biltim 24 ina eqlim kirîm | u bƯtim 25 ša ilkišu 26 ana aššatišu 27 u mƗrtišu 28 ul iša-|-aÓÓar 29 u ana eil-|-tišu 30 ul in-|-addin Law 39 (xii:31-39)

31 ina eqlim kirîm | u bƯtim

28

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

ša išammuma iraššû ana aššatišu u mƗrtišu išaÓÓar u ana ei-|-iltišu inaddin

Law 40 (xii:39-48)

39 nadƯtum tamkƗrum 40 u ilkum | a¨ûm 41 eqelšu kirƗšu 42 u bƯssu ana kaspim 43 inaddin 44 šƗyyimƗnum 45 ilik eqlim 46 kirîm u bƯtim 47 ša išammu 48 illak Law 41 (xii:49-62)

49 šumma awƯlum 50 eqlam kirâm u bƯtam 51 ša rƝdîm bƗirim 52 u nƗši biltim 53 upƯ¨ 54 u niplƗtim 55 iddin 56 rƝdûm bƗirum 57 u nƗši biltim 58 ana eqlišu kirîšu | u bƯtišu 59 itâr 60 u niplƗtim 61 ša innad-|-nušum 62 itabbal Law 42 (xii:63-xiii:5)

63 šumma awƯlum 64 eqlam ana errƝ|-šnjtim

65 ušƝÑƯma 66 ina eqlim šeam | la uštabši 67 ina eqlim šip-|-rim 1 la epƝšim 2 ukannnjšuma 3 šeam kƯma itƝšu 4 ana bƝl eqlim 5 inaddin Law 43 (xiii:6-16)

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

šumma eqlam | la Ưrišma ittadi šeam kƯma itƝšu ana bƝl eqlim inaddin u eqlam ša id-|-dû mayyƗrƯ ima¨¨aÑ185 išakka-|-akma ana bƝl eqlim utâr

Law 44 (xiii:17-34)

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

šumma awƯlum kankallam ana 3 šanƗtim ana teptƯtim186 ušƝÑƯma a¨šu iddƯma eqlam la iptete187 ina rebûtim šattim eqlam mayyƗrƯ ima¨¨aÑ imarrar u išak-|-kakma

30 31 32 33 34

29 ana bƝl eqlim utâr u ana 1 burum 10188 kur šeam imaddad

Law 45 (xiii:35-46)

35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

šumma awƯlum eqelšu ana biltim ana errƝšim189 iddinma u bilat eqlišu imta¨ar warka eqlam Adad irta¨iÑ190 u lu bibbulum itbal bitiqtum ša errƝšimma

Law 46 (xiii:47-57)

47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57

šumma bilat eqlišu la imta¨ar u lu ana miš-|-lƗni u lu ana šaluš eqlam iddin šeam ša ina eqlim ibbaššû errƝšum u bƝl eqlim ana apšƯtêm izuzznj

Law 47 (xiii:58-70)

58 šumma errƝšum 59 aššum ina ša|-attim 60 ma¨rƯtim 61 mƗna¨Ɨtišu 62 la ilqû 63 eqlam erƝšam | iqtabi 64 bƝl eqlim

30

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 65 66 67 68 69 70

ul uppas errƝssuma eqelšu irri-|-išma ina191 ebnjrim* kƯma rik-|-sƗtišu šeam ileqqe

Law 48 (xiii:71-xiv:17)

71 72 73 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

šumma awƯlum ¨ubullum192 elišu ibaššƯma eqelšu193 Adad irta¨iÑ u lu / bibbulum itbal u lu | ina la mê šeum ina eqlim la ittabši ina šattim | šuƗti šeam ana bƝl / ¨ubullišu ul utâr Óuppašu uraÓÓab u Ñibtam ša194 šattim | šuƗti ul ina-|-addin

Law 49 (xiv:18-44)

18 šumma awƯlum 19 kaspam itti | tamkƗrim

20 ilqƝma 21 eqel epšƝtim 22 ša šeim u lu | šamaššammƯ 23 ana tamkƗrim iddin 24 eqlam erišma 25 šeam u lu | šamaššammƯ 26 ša ibbaššû 27 esip tabal 28 iqbƯšum 29 šumma errƝšum 30 ina eqlim šeam 31 u lu šamaššammƯ 32 uštabši 33 ina ebnjrim šeam | u šamaššammƯ 34 ša ina eqlim | ibbaššû 35 bƝl eqlimma 36 ileqqƝma 37 šeam ša kaspišu 38 u Ñibassu 39 ša itti tamkƗrim 40 ilqû 41 u mƗna¨Ɨt 42 erƝšim 43 ana tamkƗrim 44 inaddin Law 50 (xiv:45-55)

45 šumma eqel 195 eršam 46 u lu 47 eqel šamaššammƯ 48 eršam iddin 49 šeam u lu šamaššammƯ 50 ša ina eqlim 51 ibbaššû 52 bƝl eqlimma 53 ileqqƝma

31

54 kaspam u Ñibassu 55 ana tamkƗrim | utâr Law 51 (xiv:56-66)

56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66

šumma kaspam ana turrim la išu 196 šamaššammƯ ana ma¨ƯrƗ|-tišunu ša kaspišu u Ñibtišu ša itti tamkƗrim | ilqû ana pƯ Ñim-|-dat šarrim ana tamkƗrim | inaddin

Law 52 (xv:1-6)

1 2 3 4 5 6

šumma errƝšum ina eqlim šeam u lu šamaššammƯ la uštabši riksƗtišu ul inni

Law 53 (xv:7-20)

šumma awƯlum ana kƗr eqlišu dunnunim a¨šu iddƯma kƗršu la udanninma ina kƗrišu pƯtum ittepte u ugƗram / mê uštƗbil 16 awƯlum 17 ša ina kƗrišu 18 pƯtum ippetû 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

32

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 19 šeam ša u¨alliqu 20 iriab Law 54 (xv:21-30)

21 šumma šeam riƗbam 22 la ilei 23 šuƗti 24 u bƯšašu 25 ana kaspim 26 inaddinnjma 27 mƗrnj ugƗrim 28 ša šešunu 29 mû ublnj 30 izuzznj Law 55 (xv:31-38)

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

šumma awƯlum atappašu ana šiqƯtim ipte a¨šu iddƯma eqel itƝšu mê uštƗbil šeam kƯma itƝšu imaddad

Laws 56-57 (xv:39-64)

39 šumma awƯlum 40 mê iptƝma 41 epšƝtim ša eqel itƝšu 42 mê uštƗbil 43 ana 1 burum 44 10 kur šeam 45 imaddad 46 šumma rƝûm 47 ana šammƯ 48 ÑƝnim šnjkulim 49 itti bƝl eqlim 50 la imtagarma 51 balum bƝl eqlim 52 eqlam ÑƝnam 53 uštƗkil 54 bƝl eqlim eqelšu 55 iÑÑid

56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

rƝûm ša ina balum bƝl eqlim eqlam ÑƝnam ušƗkilu elƝnumma197 ana 1 burum 20 kur šeam ana bƝl eqlim inaddin198

Law 58 (xv:65-xvi:3)

65 šumma ištu | ÑƝnum 66 ina ugƗrim 67 Ưtelianim 68 kannu / gamartim 69 ina abullim 70 itta¨lalnj 71 rƝûm ÑƝnam 72 ana eqlim iddƯma 73 eqlam ÑƝnam 74 uštƗkil 75 rƝûm eqel ušƗkilu 76 inaÑÑarma 77 ina ebnjrim 78 ana 1 burum 1 60 kur šeam 2 ana bƝl eqlim 3 imaddad Law 59 (xvi:4-9)

4 5 6 7 8 9

šumma awƯlum balum bƝl kirîm ina kirƯ awƯlim iÑam ikkis ½ mana kaspam išaqqal

Law 60 (xvi:10-26)

10 šumma awƯlum 11 eqlam ana kirîm | zaqƗpim

12 ana nukaribbim | iddin 13 nukaribbum 14 kiriam izqup 15 4 šanƗtim 16 kiriam urabba 17 ina ¨amuštim 18 šattim 19 bƝl kirîm 20 u nukaribbum 21 mit¨Ɨriš 22 izuzznj 23 bƝl kirîm 24 zittašu 25 inassaqma 26 ileqqe Law 61 (xvi:27-33)

27 šumma nukaribbum 28 eqlam ina zaqƗpim 29 la igmurma 30 nidƯtam Ưzib 31 nidƯtam 32 ana libbi | zittišu 33 išakkannjšum Law 62 (xvi:34-47)

34 šumma eqlam 35 ša innadnušum 36 ana kirîm | la izqup 37 šumma šerum199 38 bilat eqlim 39 ša šanƗtim 40 ša innadû 41 nukaribbum 42 ana bƝl eqlim 43 kƯma itƝšu 44 imaddad 45 u eqlam šipram 46 ippešma

33

34

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 47 ana bƝl eqlim | utâr Law 63 (xvi:48-57)

48 šumma kankallum200 49 eqlam šipram 50 ippešma 51 ana! 201 bƝl eqlim 52 utâr 53 u ana 1 burum 54 10 kur šeam 55 ša šattim 56 ištiat 57 imaddad Law 64 (xvi:58-70)

58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70

šumma awƯlum kirƗšu ana nukaribbim ana rukkubim iddin nukaribbum adi kirâm Ñabtu ina bilat kirîm šittƯn ana bƝl kirîm inaddin šaluštam šû ileqqe

Law 65 (xvi:71-xvii:1)

71 šumma nukaribbum 72 kirâm la ura|-akkibma 73 biltam umtaÓÓi 74 nukaribbum 75 bilat kirîm 76 ana itƝšu [imaddad…] Damage to the stele means that cols. xvii-xxiii (Laws 66-100) are missing. This part of the text can only be partially restored from parallel manuscripts.

Law 100 (ms. S iii:8’-21’: šumma tamkƗrum ana šamallêm kaspam ana [nadƗnim u ma¨Ɨrim] iddinma ana ¨arrƗnim iÓrussu šamallûm ina ¨arrƗnim […] šumma 202 ašar illiku [nƝmelam] Ưtamar ) … xxiv:1-7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

ÑibƗt kaspim mala ilqû isaddarma njmƯšu imannnj-|-njma tamkƗršu ippal

Law 101 (xxiv: 8-14)

šumma ašar | illiku nƝmelam la Ưtamar kasap ilqû uštašannƗma šamallûm ana tamkƗrim 14 inaddin

8 9 10 11 12 13

Law 102 (xxiv:15-23)

15 šumma tamkƗrum 16 ana šamallîm 17 kaspam ana tad|-miqtim 18 |ittadi-|-inma 19 ašar illiku 20 bitiqtam 21 Ưtamar 22 qaqqad kaspim 23 ana tamkƗrim | utâr Law 103 (xxiv:24-31)

24 25 26 27 28 29 30

šumma ¨arrƗnam ina alƗkišu nakrum mimma | ša našû uštaddƯšu šamallûm | nƯš ilim izakkarma

35

31 njtaššar Law 104 (xxiv:32-45)

32 šumma tamkƗrum 33 ana šamallîm 34 šeam šipƗtim šamnam 35 u mimma | bƯšam 36 ana pašƗrim203 37 iddin 38 šamallûm kaspam 39 isaddarma 40 ana tamkƗrim 41 utâr 42 šamallûm / kanƯk kaspim 43 ša ana tamkƗrim 44 inaddinu 45 ileqqe204 Law 105 (xxiv:46-54)

46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

šumma šamallûm ƯtegƯma205 kanƯk kaspim ša ana tamkƗrim iddinu la ilteqe kasap la kanƯ-|-kim ana nikka-|-assim ul iššakkan

Law 106 (xxiv:55-67)

55 šumma šamallûm 56 kaspam itti | tamkƗrim 57 ilqƝma 58 tamkƗršu 59 ittakir 60 tamkƗrum šû 61 ina206 ma¨ar ilim | u šƯbƯ 62 ina kaspim leqêm

36

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION šamallâm ukânma šamallûm kaspam mala ilqû adi 3-šu ana tamkƗrim207 67 inaddin

63 64 65 66

Law 107 xxiv:68-xxv:14)

68 šumma tamkƗrum 208 kaspam 69 šamallâm iqƯpma* 70 šamallûm mimma 71 ša tamkƗrum iddinušum 72 ana tamkƗrišu209 1 uttƝr 2 tamkƗrum mimmƗ 3 ša šamallûm 4 iddinušum 5 ittakiršu 6 šamallûm šû 7 ina210 ma¨ar ilim | u šƯbƯ 8 tamkƗram ukânma 9 tamkƗrum / aššum šamallâšu 10 ikkiru 11 mimma | ša ilqû 12 adi 6-šu 13 ana šamallîm 14 inaddin Law 108 (xxv:15-25)

šumma sƗbƯtum ana šƯm šikarim šeam la imta¨ar ina abnim | rabƯtim kaspam imta¨ar u ma¨Ưr šikarim ana ma¨Ưr šeim | umtaÓÓi 22 sƗbƯtam | šuƗti211

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

23 ukannnjšima212 24 ana mê 25 inaddûši Law 109 (xxv:26-35)

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

šumma sƗbƯtum sarrnjtum ina bƯtiša ittarkasnjma sarrnjtim | šunnjti la iÑÑab-|-tamma ana ekallim la irdeam sƗbƯtum | šî iddâk

Law 110 (xxv:36-44)

36 šumma nadƯtum213 ugbabtum214 37 ša ina gagîm 38 la wašbat 39 bƯt sƯbim | iptete 40 u lu ana šikarim 41 ana bƯt sƯbim 42 Ưterub 43 awƯltam | šuƗti 44 iqallûši Law 111 (xxv:45-49)

45 46 47 48 49

šumma sƗbƯtum 1 pƯ¨am215 ana qƯptim iddin ina ebnjrim 5 sâ šeam ileqqe

Law 112 (xxv:50-74)

šumma awƯlum ina ¨arrƗnim wašibma216 kaspam217 ¨urƗÑam218 abnam 54 u219 bƯš220 qƗtišu 55 ana awƯlim 50 51 52 53

37

iddinma221 ana šƝbultim222 ušƗbilšu223 awƯlum šû mimma ša224 šnjbulu225 ašar šnjbulu226 la iddinma itbal bƝl šƝbultim awƯlam šuƗti ina mimma ša šnjbuluma la iddinu ukânšuma227 awƯlum šû adi 5-šu mimma ša innadnnjšum ana bƝl | šƝbultim228 74 inaddin

56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73

Law 113 (xxv:75-xxvi:16)

75 šumma awƯlum 76 eli awƯlim 1 šeam u kaspam | išnjma 2 ina balum | bƝl šeim 3 ina našpa-|-kim 4 u lu ina ma-|-aškanim 5 šeam ilteqe 6 awƯlam šuƗti 7 ina balum | bƝl šeim 8 ina našpakim 9 u lu ina229 maškanim 10 ina šeim leqêm

38

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION ukannnjšuma šeam mala 230ilqû utâr* u ina231 mimma | šumšu 15 mala iddinu 16 Ưtelli

11 12 13 14

Law 114 (xxvi:17-25)

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

šumma awƯlum eli awƯlim šeam u kaspam la išnjma nipûssu | ittepe ana nipûtim ištiat ̃ mana kaspam išaqqal

Law 115 (xxvi:26-37)

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

šumma awƯlum eli awƯlim šeam u kaspam išnjma nipûssu ippƝma232 nipûtim ina bƯt nƝpƯša ina šƯmƗtiša imtnjt dƯnum šû rugummâm ul išu

Law 116 (xxvi:38-53)

38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45

šumma nipûtim ina bƯt nƝpƯša ina ma¨ƗÑim u lu ina uš-|-šušim imtnjt bƝl nipûtim tamkƗršu ukânma

46 šumma mƗr awƯlim 47 mƗrašu idukknj 48 šumma warad awƯlim 49 ̃ mana kaspam 50 išaqqal 51 u ina mimma | šumšu 52 mala iddinu 53 Ưtelli Law 117 (xxvi:54-67)

54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67

šumma awƯlam eiltum iÑbassuma aššassu mƗrašu |u mƗrassu ana kaspim | iddin u lu ana kiš-|-šƗtim ittandin šalaš šanƗtim bƯt šƗyyimƗ|-nišunu u kƗšišišunu ippešnj233 ina re|-bûtim šattim andurƗršunu iššakkan

Law 118 (xxvi:68-73)

68 šumma wardam234 u lu amtam235 69 ana kiššƗtim 70 ittandin 71 tamkƗrum ušetteq 72 ana kaspim inaddin 73 ul ibbaqqar Law 119 (xxvi:74-xxvii:3)

šumma awƯlam eiltum iÑbassuma amassu ša mƗrƯ uldušum 78 ana kaspim ittadin

74 75 76 77

1 2 3

39 kasap tamkƗrum | išqulu bƝl amtim | išaqqalma amassu | ipaÓÓar

Law 120 (xxvii:4-23)

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

šumma awƯlum šeašu ana naš|-paknjtim ina bƯt awƯlim išpukma ina qarƯtim ibbûm | ittabši u lu bƝl bƯtim našpakam | iptƝma šeam ilqe236 u lu šeam | ša ina bƯtišu iššapku237 238 ana gamrim* ittakir bƝl šeim | ma¨ar ilim šeašu ubârma bƝl bƯtim šeam ša ilqû uštašannƗma239 ana bƝl šeim inaddin

Law 121 (xxvii:24-30)

24 25 26 27 28

šumma awƯlum ina bƯt awƯlim šeam išpuk ina šanat ana240 1 kur šeim | 5 qa šeam

40

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 29 idƯ našpakim 30 inaddin241 Law 122 (xxvii:31-43)

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

šumma awƯlum ana awƯlim kaspam ¨urƗÑam u mimma šumšu ana maÑÑarnjtim inaddin242 mimma mala inaddinu šƯbƯ ukallam riksƗtim išakkanma ana maÑÑarnjtim inaddin

Law 123 (xxvii:44-52)

44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

šumma balum šƯbƯ u riksƗtim ana maÑÑarnjtim iddinma243 ašar iddinu ittakrnjšu dƯnum šû rugummâm ul išu

Law 124 (xxvii:53-65)

53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65

šumma awƯlum ana awƯlim kaspam ¨urƗÑam u mimma šumšu ma¨ar šƯbƯ ana maÑÑarnjtim iddinma ittakiršu awƯlam šuƗti ukannnjšuma mimma | ša ikkiru uštašannƗma inaddin

Law 125 (xxvii:66-xxviii:7)

66 šumma awƯlum 67 mimmâšu 68 ana maÑÑarnjtim id|-dinma 69 ašar iddinu 70 u lu ina pi-|-ilšim 71 u lu ina naba72 |-alkattim 73 mimmûšu 74 itti mimmê 75 bƝl bƯtim i¨taliq / bƝl bƯtim ša Ưgnjma 76 mimma ša ana 77 maÑÑarnjtim / iddinušumma 78 u¨alliqu 79 ušallamma 1 ana bƝl makknjrim 2 iriab 3 bƝl bƯtim 4 mimmâšu | ¨alqam 5 išteneƯma 6 itti šarrƗ-|-qƗnišu 7 ileqqe Law 126 (xxviii:8-24)

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

šumma awƯlum mimmûšu la ¨aliqma mimmê ¨aliq | iqtabi babtašu njtebbir244 kƯma mimmûšu la ¨alqu

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

41 babtašu ina245 ma¨ar ilim ubâršuma mimma ša246 irgumu uštašannƗma ana babtišu inaddin

Law 127 (xxviii:25-34)

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

šumma awƯlum eli ugbabtim247 u aššat awƯlim ubƗnam | ušatriÑma la uktƯn awƯlam šuƗti ma¨ar dayyƗnƯ inaÓÓûšu u muttassu ugallabnj

Law 128 (xxviii:35-41)

35 36 37 38 39 40 41

šumma awƯlum aššatam Ư¨uzma riksƗtiša la iškun sinništum šî ul aššat

Law 129 (xxviii:42-53)

42 šumma aššat | awƯlim 43 itti zikarim 44 šanîm 45 ina itnjlim 46 ittaÑbat 47 ikassûšunnjtima 48 ana mê 49 inaddû-|-šunnjti 50 šumma bƝl | aššatim

42

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 51 aššassu uballaÓ 52 u šarrum 53 warassu uballaÓ Law 130 (xxviii:54-67)

54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67

šumma awƯlum aššat awƯlim ša zikaram la idûma ina bƯt abiša wašbat ukabbilšima ina snjniša ittatƯ-|-Ưlma iÑÑabtnjšu awƯlum šû iddâk sinništum šî njtaššar

Law 131 (xxviii:68-76)

68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76

šumma aššat awƯlim mussa ubbi-|-iršima itti zikarim | šanîm ina utnjlim la iÑÑabit nƯš ilim izakkarma ana bƯtiša itâr

1 2 3 4 5 6

šanîm ina utnjlim la ittaÑ-|-bat ana mutiša Id išalli

Law 133a (xxix:7-17)

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

šumma awƯlum iššali-|-ilma ina bƯtišu ša akƗlim ibašši aššassu [adi mus]sa | Ñabtu pagarša inaÑÑar]248 ana bƯt šanîm ul irrub

Law 133b (xxix:18-26)

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

šumma sinništum šî pagarša la iÑÑurma ana bƯt šanîm Ưterub sinništam šuƗti ukannnjšima ana mê inaddûši

Law 132 (xxviii:77-xxix:6)

Law 134 (xxix:27-36)

77 šumma aššat 78 awƯlim 79 aššum zika/-rim šanîm 80 ubƗnum 81 eliša 82 ittariÑma 83 itti zika-|-rim

27 28 29 30 31 32 33

šumma awƯlum išša-|-lilma ina bƯtišu ša akƗlim la ibašši aššassu ana bƯt šanîm

43

34 irrub 35 sinništum šî 36 arnam | ul išu Law 135 (xxix:37-56)

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

šumma awƯlum išša-|-lilma ina bƯtišu ša akƗlim la ibašši ana panƯšu aššassu ana bƯt šanîm Ưterubma mƗrƯ | ittalad ina warka mussa ittnjr|-amma Ɨlšu iktašdam sinništum šî ana ¨Ɨwiriša itâr mƗrnj warki abišunu illaknj

Law 136 (xxix:57-73)

57 šumma awƯlum 58 Ɨlšu | iddƯma 59 ittƗbit 60 warkišu 61 aššassu 62 ana bƯt šanîm 63 Ưterub 64 šumma awƯlum | šû 65 ittnjramma

44

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73

aššassu iÑÑabat aššum Ɨlšu izƝruma innabitu aššat munnabtim ana mutiša ul itâr

Law 137 (xxix:74-xxx:13)

74 šumma awƯlum 75 ana šugƯtim 76 ša mƗrƯ uldušum / u lu nadƯtim ša mƗrƯ 77 ušaršûšu 78 ezƝbim 79 panƯšu 80 ištakan 81 ana sinništim šuƗti 82 šeriktaša 83 utarrnjšim 84 u muttat 85 eqlim kirîm u bƯšim 1 inaddinnj-|-šimma 2 mƗrƯša 3 urabba 4 ištu mƗrƯša 5 urtabbû 6 ina mimma 7 ša ana mƗrƯša 8 innadnu 9 zittam 10 kƯma aplim | ištƝn 11 inaddinnj-|-šimma 12 mutu | libbiša

13 i¨¨assi Law 138 (xxx:14-24)

14 šumma awƯlum 15 ¨Ưrtašu 16 ša mƗrƯ | la uldušum 17 izzib 18 kaspam mala 19 ter¨atiša 20 inaddiš-|-šim 21 u šeriktam 22 ša ištu / bƯt abiša ublam 23 ušallam-|-šimma 24 izzibši Law 139 (xxx:25-29)

25 26 27 28 29

šumma ter¨atum la ibašši 1 mana kaspam ana uzub-|-bêm inaddiš-|-šim

Law 140 (xxx:30-32)

30 šumma muškƝnum 31 ̃ mana kaspam 32 inaddiš-|-šim Law 141 (xxx:33-59)

33 šumma aššat | awƯlim 34 ša ina bƯt | awƯlim 35 wašbat 36 ana waÑêm 37 panƯša 38 ištakanma 39 sikiltam 40 isakkil 41 bƯssa | usappa¨

42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

45 mussa uša-|-amÓa ukannnj-|-šima šumma mussa ezƝbša iqtabi izzibši ¨arrƗnša uzubbnjša mimma ul innad-|-diššim šumma mussa la ezƝbša | iqtabi mussa sinništam249 šanƯtam i¨¨az sinništum šî kƯma amtim ina bƯt mutiša uššab

Law 142 (xxx:60-xxxi:5)

60 šumma sinništum | mussa izƝrma 61 ul ta¨¨a-|-zanni 62 iqtabi 63 warkassa 64 ina bƗb-|-tiša 65 ipparra-|-asma 66 šumma naÑ-|-ratma 67 ¨iÓƯtam 68 la išu 69 u mussa 70 waÑƯma

46

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 71 72 73 1 2 3 4 5

magal ušam-|-ÓƗši sinništum šî arnam | ul išu šeriktaša ileqqƝma ana bƯt abiša ittallak

Law 143 (xxxi:6-12)

šumma la na|-aÑratma 7 waÑiƗt 8 bƯssa | usappa¨ 9 mussa ušamÓa 10 sinništam šuƗti 11 ana mê 12 inaddûši 6

Law 144 (xxxi:13-27)

13 šumma awƯlum 14 nadƯtam Ư¨u|-uzma 15 nadƯtum šî 250 16 amtam ana mutiša* 17 iddinma 18 mƗrƯ uštabši 19 awƯlum šû 20 ana šugƯtim 21 a¨Ɨzim 22 panƯšu 23 ištakan 24 awƯlam | šuƗti 25 ul imag-|-garnjšu 26 šugƯtam 27 ul i¨¨az

Law 145 (xxxi:28-42)

28 šumma awƯlum 29 nadƯtam Ư¨uzma 30 mƗrƯ la ušar|-šƯšnjma251 31 ana šugƯtim 32 a¨Ɨzim 33 panƯšu 34 ištakan 35 awƯlum šû 36 šugƯtam 37 i¨¨az 38 ana bƯtišu 39 ušerre-|-ebši252 40 šugƯtum | šî 41 itti nadƯtim 42 ul ušta-|-ma¨¨ar Law 146 (xxxi:43-59)

43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57

šumma awƯlum nadƯtam Ư¨uzma amtam ana mutiša iddinma253 mƗrƯ itta-|-lad warkƗnum254 amtum šî itti | bƝltiša uštatam¨ir aššum mƗrƯ | uldu bƝlessa ana kaspim ul inad-|-dišši255 abuttam išakka-|-anšimma

47

58 itti amƗtim 59 imannûši Law 147 (xxxi:60-64)

60 61 62 63 64

šumma mƗrƯ la njlid bƝlessa ana kaspim inaddi-|-išši

Law 148 (xxxi:65-81)

65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81

šumma awƯlum aššatam Ư¨uzma labum iÑÑabassi ana šanƯtim a¨Ɨzim panƯšu ištakkan i¨¨az aššassu ša labum256 iÑbaÓu ul iz-|-zibši ina bƯt Ưpušu uššamma adi balÓat / ittanaššƯši

Law 149 (xxxii:1-9)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

šumma sinništum šî ina bƯt mutiša wašƗbam la imtagar šeriktaša ša ištu | bƯt abiša ublam ušallamšimma ittallak

48

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION Law 150 (xxxii:10-25)

10 šumma awƯlum 11 ana aššatišu 12 eqlam 257kirâm bƯtam* 13 u bƯšam 14 išrukšim 15 kunukkam 16 Ưzibšim 17 warki | mutiša 18 mƗrnjša ul | ipaqqarnjši 19 ummum 20 warkassa 21 ana mƗriša 22 ša irammu 23 inaddin 24 ana a¨îm258 25 ul inaddin Law 151 (xxxii:26-51)

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41

šumma sinništum ša ina bƯt awƯlim wašbat259 aššum bƝl260 | ¨ubullim ša mutiša la ÑabƗtiša mussa / urtakkis Óuppam uštƝzib šumma | awƯlum šû lƗma sinništam šuƗti261 i¨¨azu ¨ubullum elišu ibašši bƝl262 ¨ubul-|-lƯšu

42 aššassu 43 ul iÑa-|-bbatu263 44 u šumma | sinništum šî 45 lƗma ana bƯt | awƯlim 46 irrubu 47 ¨ubullum 48 eliša 49 ibašši 50 bƝl ¨ubul-|-lƯša 51 mussa ul | iÑabbatu264 Law 152 (xxxii:52-60)

52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

šumma ištu sinništum šî ana bƯt awƯlim Ưrubu elišunu265 ¨ubullum ittabši kilallƗšunu266 tamkƗram ippalnj

Law 153 (xxxii:61-66)

61 šumma aššat | awƯlim 62 aššum zika-|-rim 63 šanîm 64 mussa ušdƯk 65 sinništam šuƗti / ina gašƯšim 66 išakkannjši Law 154 (xxxii:67-71)

267

(67) /šumma awƯlum 68 mƗrassu 69 iltamad 70 awƯlam šuƗti 71 Ɨlam ušeÑ-|-Ñûšu

49

Law 155 (xxxii:72-xxxiii:1)

72 šumma awƯlum 73 ana mƗrišu 74 kallatam | i¨Ưrma 75 mƗrušu ilmassi 76 šû war-|-kƗnumma 77 ina snjniša 78 ittatƯlma 79 iÑÑabtnjšu 80 awƯlam šuƗti 81 ikassûšuma 82 ana mê 1 inaddûšu268 Law 156 (xxxiii:2-17)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

šumma awƯlum 269 ana mƗrišu* kallatam i¨Ưrma mƗrušu la il|-massima šû ina snjniša ittatƯl ½ mana kaspam išaqqal-|-šimma u270 mimma ša ištu bƯt abiša ublam ušallam-|-šimma mutu271 | libbiša i¨¨assi

Law 157 (xxxiii:18-23)

18 šumma awƯlum 19 warki | abišu

50

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 20 ina snjn | ummišu 21 ittatƯl 22 kilallƯšunu 23 iqallû-|-šunnjti

50 51 52 53 54

Law 158 (xxxiii:24-32)

24 šumma awƯlum 25 warki | abišu 26 ina snjn 27 rabƯtišu272 28 ša mƗrƯ | waldat273 29 ittaÑbat 30 awƯlum šû 31 ina bƯt abim274 32 innassa¨ Law 159 (xxxiii:33-46)

33 šumma awƯlum 34 ša ana bƯt | emišu275 35 biblam 36 ušƗbilu 37 ter¨atam iddinu276 38 ana sinništim šanƯtim 39 uptalli-|-isma277 40 ana emišu278 41 mƗratka 42 ul a¨¨az | iqtabi 43 abi mƗrtim 44 mimma 45 ša ibbab-|-lušum279 46 itabbal Law 160 (xxxiii:47-59)

47 šumma awƯlum 48 ana bƯt emim 49 biblam

55 56 57 58 59

ušƗbil280 ter¨atam iddinma abi mƗrtim mƗrtƯ ul ana|-addikkum iqtabi mimma mala281 ibbablušum uštašannƗma utâr

Law 161 (xxxiii:60-77)

60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77

šumma awƯlum ana bƯt emišu biblam ušƗbil ter¨atam iddinma ibiršu uktarrissu emušu ana bƝl282 aššatim mƗrtƯ ul | ta¨¨az iqtabi mimma mala ibbablušum283 uštašannƗma utâr u aššassu ibiršu ul i¨¨az

Law 162 (xxxiii:78-xxxiv:6)

78 79 80 81 82 83 1

šumma awƯlum aššatam Ư¨uz mƗrƯ njli-|-ssumma sinništum šî ana šƯmtim ittalak

2 3 4 5 6

51 ana šerik-|-tiša abuša ul ira-|-aggum šeriktaša ša mƗrƯšama

Law 163 (xxxiv:7-23)

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

šumma awƯlum aššatam Ư¨uzma mƗrƯ la uša|-aršƯšu sinništum šî ana šƯmtim ittallak šumma ter¨atam ša awƯlum šû ana bƯt 284emišu | ublu* emušu uttƝršum285 ana šerikti sinništim šuƗti mussa ul | iraggum šeriktaša ša bƯt abišama

Law 164 (xxxiv:24-32)

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

šumma emušu ter¨atam la uttƝršum ina šerik-|-tiša mala | ter¨atiša i¨arraÑma šeriktaša ana bƯt abiša286 utâr

52

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION Law 165 (xxxiv:33-50)

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

šumma awƯlum ana aplišu ša Ưnšu | ma¨ru eqlam kirâm u bƯtam išruk kunukkam išÓuršum warka abum ana šƯmtim ittalku innjma a¨¨nj izuzznj qƯšti abum iddinušum ileqqƝma elƝnumma ina makknjr bƯt abim mit¨Ɨriš izuzznj

Law 166 (xxxiv:51-73)

51 šumma awƯlum 52 ana mƗrƯ287 ša iršû288 53 aššƗtim Ư¨uz289 54 ana mƗrišu 55 Ñe¨rim 56 aššatam 57 la Ư¨uz290 58 warka abum 59 ana šƯmtim 60 ittalku 61 innjma a¨¨nj 62 izuzznj 63 ina makknjr bƯt abim 64 291ana a¨¨išunu* 65 Ñe¨rim 66 ša aššatam292 67 la a¨zu 68 eliƗt 69 zittišu

70 71 72 73

kasap ter¨atim išakka-|-nnjšumma aššatam uša¨-|-¨aznjšu

Law 167 (xxxiv:74-xxxv:8)

šumma awƯlum aššatam Ư¨uzma mƗrƯ njlissum sinništum šî ana šƯmtim ittalak warkiša sinništam šanƯtam Ưta¨a-|-azma mƗrƯ itta-|-lad warkƗnum293 abum | ana šƯmtim 87 ittalku 1 mƗrnj ana um|-mƗtim 2 ul izu-|-uzznj 3 šerikti 4 ummƗtišunu 5 ileqqûma 6 makknjr bƯt abim 7 mit¨Ɨriš 8 izuzznj

74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

Law 168 (xxxv:9-24)

9 10 11 12

šumma awƯlum ana mƗrišu nasƗ¨im panam ištakan

53

13 ana dayyƗnƯ 14 mƗrƯ anassa¨ | iqtabi294 15 dayyƗnnj 16 warkassu 17 iparrasnjma 18 šumma mƗrum | arnam kabtam 19 ša ina aplnjtim 20 nasƗ¨im 21 la ublam 22 abum mƗrašu 23 ina aplnjtim 24 ul inassa¨ Law 169 (xxxv:25-36)

25 šumma arnam kabtam 26 ša ina aplnjtim 27 nasƗ¨im 28 ana abišu 29 itbalam 30 ana ištiššu 31 panƯšu ubbalnj 32 šumma arnam | kabtam 33a adi šinƯšu 33b | itbalam 34 abum mƗrašu 35 ina aplnjtim 36 inassa¨ Law 170 (xxxv:37-59)

šumma awƯlum ¨Ưrtašu mƗrƯ njlissum u amassu mƗrƯ njlissum abum ina bulÓišu ana mƗrƯ ša 295amtum | uldušum* 45 mƗrnja | iqtabi

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

54

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 46 itti mƗrƯ | ¨Ưrtim 47 imtanûšunnjti 48 warka | abum 49 ana šƯmtim 50 ittalku 51 ina makknjr | bƯt abim 52 296mƗrnj ¨Ưrtim 53 u mƗrnj amtim* 54 mit¨Ɨriš297 55 izuzznj 56 298aplum mƗr* ¨Ưrtim 57 ina zittim299 58 inassaqma300 59 ileqqe

77 ul iraggumnj Law 171b (xxxv:78-xxxvi:5)

78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 1 2 3 4 5

¨Ưrtum šeriktaša u nudunnâm ša mussa iddinušim307 308 ina Óuppim* išÓurušim ileqqƝma ina šubat mutiša uššab adi balÓat | ikkal ana kaspim ul inad-|-din warkassa ša mƗrƯšama

Law 171a (xxxv:60-77)

Law 172 (xxxvi:6-40)

60 u301 šumma abum 61 302ina bulÓišu* 62 ana mƗrƯ ša amtum | uldušum 63 mƗrnja | la iqtabi303 64 warka304 | abum 65 ana šƯmtim 66 ittalku 67 ina makknjr bƯt abim 68 mƗrnj amtim 69 itti mƗrƯ | ¨Ưrtim 70 ul izuzznj 71 andurƗr 72 amtim u mƗrƯša 73 ištakan!305 74 mƗrnj ¨Ưrtim 75 ana mƗrƯ amtim 76 ana wardnjtim306

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

šumma mussa nudunnâm la iddiššim šeriktaša ušallamnj-|-šimma ina makknjr bƯt mutiša zittam kƯma aplim | ištƝn ileqqe šumma mƗrnjša aššum ina bƯtim | šnjÑîm usa¨¨amnjši dayyƗnnj warkassa309 iparrasnjma

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

55 mƗrƯ arnam immidnj sinništum šî ina bƯt mutiša ul uÑÑi šumma sinništum šî ana waÑêm panƯša ištakan nudunnâm ša mussa iddinušim ana mƗrƯša izzib šeriktam ša bƯt abiša ileqqƝma mut lib-|-biša i¨¨assi

Law 173 (xxxvi:41-50)

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

šumma sinništum šî ašar Ưrubu ana mutiša warkîm mƗrƯ ittalad warka sinništum šî | imtnjt šeriktaša mƗrnj ma¨rûtum u warkûtum izuzznj

Law 174 (xxxvi:51-56)

51 52 53 54 55

šumma ana mutiša warkîm mƗrƯ la it-|-talad šeriktaša mƗrnj ¨Ɨwiri|-šama310

56

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 56 ileqqû Law 175 (xxxvi:57-68)

57 šumma lu warad | ekallim 58 u lu warad 59 muškƝnim 60 mƗrat awƯlim 61 Ư¨uzma 62 mƗrƯ 63 ittalad 64 bƝl wardim 65 ana mƗrƯ311 66 mƗrat awƯlim 67 ana war-|-dnjtim 68 ul iraggum Law 176a (xxxvi:69-xxxvii:9)

69 u šumma312 | warad ekallim 70 u313 lu warad muškƝnim 71 mƗrat awƯlim 72 Ư¨uzma 73 innjma Ư¨uzuši 74 qadum 75 šeriktim 76 ša bƯt abiša314 77 ana bƯt warad ekallim 78 u lu warad muškƝnim 79 Ưrubma 80 ištu innemdnj 81 bƯtam Ưpušnj 82 bƯšam iršû 83 warkƗnumma315 84 lu warad ekallim 85 u lu warad muškƝnim 86 ana šƯmtim316 87 ittalak 88 mƗrat awƯlim 89 šeriktaša317 90 ileqqe

91 u mimma 92 ša mussa u šî 1 ištu | innemdnj 2 iršû 3 ana šinƯšu 4 izuzznjma 5 mišlam | bƝl wardim 6 ileqqe 7 mišlam 8 mƗrat awƯlim 9 ana mƗrƯša | ileqqe Law 176b (xxxvii:10-21)

10 šumma | mƗrat awƯlim 11 šeriktam | la išu 12 mimma / ša mussa u šî 13 ištu | innemdnj 14 iršû 15 ana šinƯšu 16 izuzznjma 17 mišlam | bƝl wardim 18 ileqqe 19 mišlam 20 mƗrat awƯlim 21 ana mƗrƯša | ileqqe Law 177 (xxxvii:22-60)

22 23 24 25 26

šumma almattum ša mƗrnjša Ñe¨¨eru ana bƯt šanîm erƝbim

panƯša ištakan balum dayyƗnƯ ul irrub innjma ana bƯt šanîm irrubu dayyƗnnj warkat bƯt mutiša panîm iparrasnjma bƯtam ša mutiša panîm ana mutiša warkîm318 u sinništim šuƗti ipaqqidnjma319 Óuppam ušezzebnj-|-šunnjti bƯtam inasÑÑarnj u Ñe¨¨ernjtim urabbû uniƗtim ana kaspim ul inaddinnj šƗyyimƗnum ša unnjt mƗrƯ almattim išammu ina kaspišu Ưtelli makknjrum ana bƝlišu 60 itâr

27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

Law 178 (xxxvii:61-xxviii:19)

61 šumma ugbabtum320 | nadƯtum 62 u lu sekre-|-etum321

57

58

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 1 2 3 4 5

ša abuša šeriktam išrukušim Óuppam išÓurušim ina Óuppim ša išÓurušim warkassa Ɲma eliša ÓƗbu nadƗnam322 la išÓuršimma mala libbiša la ušamÑƯši warka abum ana šƯmtim ittalku eqelša u kirƗša a¨¨njša ileqqnjma kƯma emnjq zittiša ipram piššatam | u lubnjšam inaddinnjšimma libbaša uÓabbnj šumma a¨¨njša kƯma emnjq zittiša ipram piššatam u lubnjšam la ittad|-nnjšimma libbaša la uÓÓibbnj eqelša u kirƗša ana errƝšim ša eliša | ÓƗbu

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

inaddinma errƝssa ittanaššƯši323 eqlam kirâm324 u mimma ša abuša iddinušim325 adi balÓat | ikkal ana kaspim ul inaddin šaniam ul uppal aplnjssa ša a¨¨Ư-|-šama

Law 179 (xxxviii:20-42)

20 šumma ugbabtum326 nadƯtum327 21 u lu se-|-ekretum328 22 ša abuša 23 šeriktam 24 išrukušim 25 kunukkam 26 išÓurušim 27 ina Óuppim 28 ša išÓurušim 29 warkassa 30 Ɲma eliša | ÓƗbu 31 nadƗnam 32 išÓuršimma 33 mala libbiša 34 uštamÑƯši 35 warka abum 36 ana šƯmtim 37 ittalku 38 warkassa 39 Ɲma eliša ÓƗbu

59

40 inaddin 41 a¨¨njša 42 | ul ipa-|-aqqarnjši Law 180 (xxxviii:43-59)

43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

šumma abum ana mƗrtišu nadƯt329 gagîm u lu se-|-ekretim330 šeriktam la išrukšim!331 warka abum ana šƯmtim ittalku ina makknjr bƯt abim zittam kƯma aplim ištƝn izâzma adi balÓat ikkal warkassa ša a¨¨Ưšama

Law 181 (xxxviii:60-75)

60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

šumma abum nadƯtam qadištam u lu kulmašƯtam ana ilim iššƯma šeriktam la išrukšim warka abum ana šƯmtim ittalku ina makknjr bƯt abim ̃ aplnjtiša izâzma adi balÓat ikkal warkassa ša a¨¨Ưšama

60

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION Law 182 (xxxviii:76-xxxix:1)

76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 1

šumma abum ana mƗrtišu nadƯt Marduk ša BƗbilim šeriktam la išrukšim kunukkam la išÓuršim warka | abum ana šƯmtim ittalku ina makknjr | bƯt abim ̃ aplnjtiša itti a¨¨Ưša izâzma ilkam ul illak nadƯt Marduk warkassa Ɲma eliša | ÓƗbu inaddin

Law 183 (xxxix:2-14)

šumma abum ana mƗrtišu | šugƯtim 4 šeriktam 5 išrukšim 6 ana mutim 7 iddišši 8 kunukkam 9 išÓuršim 10 warka | abum 11 ana šƯmtim 12 ittalku

2 3

13 ina makknjr | bƯt abim 14 ul izâz Law 184 (xxxix:15-30)

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

šumma awƯlum ana mƗrtišu šugƯtim šeriktam la išrukšim ana mutim la iddišši warka | abum ana šƯmtim ittalku a¨¨njša kƯma emnjq | bƯt abim šeriktam išarraknj-|-šimma ana mutim inaddinnjši

Law 185 (xxxix:31-38)

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

šumma awƯlum Ñe¨ram ina mêšu ana mƗrnjtim ilqƝma urtabbƯšu tarbƯtum šî ul ibbaqqar

Law 186 (xxxix:39-49)

39 šumma awƯlum 40 Ñe¨ram 41 ana mƗrnjtim | ilqe 42 innjma 43 ilqûšu 44 abašu 45 u ummašu

46 47 48 49

61 i¨iaÓ tarbƯtum šî ana bƯt abišu itâr

Law 187 (xxxix:50-53)

50 51 52 53

mƗr girseqîm muzzaz ekallim u mƗr sek-|-retim332 ul ibbaqqar

Law 188 (xxxix:54-59)

54 šumma mƗr ummƗnim 55 Ñe¨ram333 ana tarbƯtim 56 ilqƝma 57 šipir qƗtišu 58 uštƗ¨issu 59 ul ibbaqqar Law 189 (xxxix:60-64)

60 šumma šipir | qƗtišu 61 la uštƗ¨issu 62 tarbƯtum šî 63 ana bƯt abišu 64 itâr Law 190 (xxxix:65-74)

65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74

šumma awƯlum Ñe¨ram ša ana mƗrnjtišu ilqûšuma urabbûšu itti mƗrƯšu la imtannjšu tarbƯtum šî ana bƯt abišu itâr

Law 191 (xxxix:75-95)

75 76 77 78 79 80 81

šumma awƯlum Ñe¨ram ša ana mƗrnjtišu ilqûšuma urabbûšu bƯssu334 Ưpuš warka mƗrƯ

62

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 82 irtašƯma 83 ana tarbƯtim nasƗ¨im 84 panam ištakan 85 Ñe¨rum335 šû rƝqnjssu336 86 ul ittallak 87 abum murabbƯšu 88 ina makknjrišu 89 ̃ aplnjtišu 90 inaddiššumma 91 ittallak 92 ina eqlim kirîm 93 | u bƯtim 94 ul inaddi95 |-iššum Law 192 (xxxix:96-xl:9)

95 šumma mƗr girseqîm 1 u lu mƗr se| -ekretim337 2 ana abim 3 murabbƯšu 4 u ummim 5 murabbƯtišu 6 ul abƯ | atta 7 ul ummƯ | atti iqtabi 8 lišƗnšu 9 inakkisnj Law 193 (xl:10-22)

10 šumma mƗr girseqîm 11 u lu mƗr se|-ekretim 12 bƯt abišu 13 uweddƯma 14 abam 15 murabbƯšu 16 u ummam 17 murabbƯssu 18 izƝrma

19 20 21 22

ana bƯt abišu ittalak Ưnšu inassa¨nj

Law 194 (xl:23-40)

23 šumma awƯlum 24 mƗrašu ana mušƝ|-niqtim 25 iddinma 26 Ñi¨rum338 šû 27 ina qƗt / mušƝniqtim 28 imtnjt 29 mušƝniqtum 30 balum abišu 31 u ummišu 32 Ñi¨ram šaniamma 33 irtakas 34 ukannnjšima 35 aššum balum abišu 36 u ummišu 37 Ñi¨ram šaniam 38 irkusu 39 tulƗša 40 inakkisnj Law 195 (xl:41-44)

63

Law 198 (xl:54-59)

54 šumma Ưn | muškƝnim 55 u¨tappid 56 u lu eÑemti!339 | muškƝnim 57 ištebir 58 1 mana kaspam 59 išaqqal Law 199 (xl:60-65)

60 šumma Ưn | warad awƯlim 61 u¨tappid 62 u lu eÑemti | warad awƯlim 63 ištebir 64 mišil | šƯmišu 65 išaqqal Law 200 (xl:66-70)

66 šumma awƯlum 67 šinni | awƯlim 68 me¨rišu 69 ittadi 70 šinnašu | inaddû

41 šumma mƗrum abašu 42 imta¨aÑ 43 rittašu 44 inakkisnj

Law 201 (xl:71-74)

Law 196 (xl:45-49)

Law 202 (xl:75-81)

45 46 47 48 49

šumma awƯlum Ưn mƗr awƯlim u¨tappid Ưnšu u¨appadnj

Law 197 (xl:50-53)

50 šumma eÑemti | awƯlim 51 ištebir 52 eÑemtašu 53 išebbirnj

71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81

šumma šinni340 muškƝnim ittadi ̃ mana kaspam išaqqal šumma awƯlum lƝt awƯlim ša elišu rabû imta¨aÑ ina pu¨rim ina qinnaz alpim 1 šnjši imma¨¨aÑ

Law 203 (xl:82-87)

82 šumma mƗr awƯlim 83 lƝt mƗr awƯlim 84 ša kƯma šuƗti

64

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 85 imta¨aÑ 86 1 mana kaspam 87 išaqqal Law 204 (xl: 88-91)

88 89 90 91

šumma muškƝnum lƝt muškƝnim imta¨aÑ 10 šiqil kaspam išaqqal

Law 205 (xl:92-xli:3)

92 šumma warad awƯlim 93 lƝt mƗr awƯlim 1 imta¨aÑ 2 uzunšu 3 inakkisnj Law 206 (xli:4-13)

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

šumma awƯlum | awƯlam ina ris-|-bƗtim341 imta¨aÑma simmam ištakanšu awƯlum šû ina idû la am¨aÑu342 itamma u asâm | ippal

Law 207 (xli:14-19)

14 šumma ina ma|-¨ƗÑišu 15 imtnjt 16 itammƗma 17 šumma mƗr awƯlim 18 ½ mana kaspam 19 išaqqal

25 26 27 28 29 30

im¨aÑma ša libbiša uštaddƯši 10 šiqil kaspam ana ša lib-|-biša išaqqal

Law 210 (xli:31-34)

31 32 33 34

šumma sinništum šî imtnjt mƗrassu idukknj

Law 212 (xli:41-44)

Law 218-220 (xli:74-94)

41 šumma sinništum šî343 42 imtnjt 43 ½ mana kaspam 44 išaqqal

74 šumma asûm awƯlam 75 simmam kabtam 76 ina karzilli siparrim 77 Ưpušma 78 awƯlam uštamƯt 79 u lu nakkapti344 awƯlim 80 ina karzilli siparrim 81 iptƝma Ưn awƯlim 82 u¨tappid 83 rittašu inakkisnj 84 šumma asûm simmam kabtam 85 warad muškƝnim 86 ina karzilli siparrim 87 Ưpušma uštamƯt 88 wardam kƯma wardim iriab 89 šumma nakkaptašu 90 ina karzilli siparrim 91 iptƝma 92 Ưnšu u¨tapda! 345 93 kaspam mišil 94 šƯmišu išaqqal

Law 213 (xli:45-50)

45 šumma amat awƯlim 46 im¨aÑma 47 ša libbiša 48 uštaddƯši 49 2 šiqil kaspam 50 išaqqal Law 214 (xli:51-54)

51 52 53 54

šumma amtum šî imtnjt ̃ mana kaspam išaqqal

Law 215 (xli:55-66)

20 šumma mƗr muškƝnim 21 ̃ mana kaspam 22 išaqqal

55 šumma asûm 56 awƯlam | simmam kabtam 57 ina karzilli siparrim 58 Ưpušma 59 awƯlam | ubtalliÓ

23 šumma awƯlum 24 mƗrat awƯlim

Law 216-217 (xli:67-73)

35 šumma mƗrat | muškƝnim 36 ina ma¨ƗÑim 37 ša libbiša 38 uštaddƯši 39 5 šiqil kaspam 40 išaqqal

Law 208 (xli:20-22)

Law 209 (xli:23-30)

60 u lu nakkapti | awƯlim 61 ina karzilli siparrim 62 iptƝma 63 Ưn awƯlim 64 ubtalliÓ 65 10 šiqil kaspam 66 ileqqe 67 šumma mƗr muškƝnim 68 5 šiqil kaspam 69 ileqqe 70 šumma warad awƯlim 71 bƝl wardim | ana asîm 72 2 šiqil kaspam 73 inaddin

Law 211 (xli:35-40)

65

Law 221 (xli:95-xlii:9)

95 šumma asûm

66

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 96 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

eÑemti awƯlim šebirtam uštallim u lu šerƗnam marÑam ubtalliÓ bƝl simmim ana asîm 5 šiqil kaspam inaddin

Law 222 (xlii:10-12)

10 šumma | mƗr muškƝnim 11 3 šiqil kaspam 12 inaddin Law 223 (xlii:13-17)

13 šumma | warad awƯlim 14 bƝl wardim 15 ana asîm 16 2 šiqil kaspam 17 inaddin Law 224 (xlii:18-28)

18 šumma asî alpim 19 | u lu imƝrim 20 lu alpam u lu imƝram 21 simmam kabtam 22 Ưpušma 23 ubtalliÓ 24 bƝl alpim | u lu imƝrim 25 1⁄6 kaspam346 26 ana asîm 27 idƯšu 28 inaddin

33 ¼ šƯmišu 34 ana bƝl alpim | u lu imƝrim 35 inaddin Law 226 (xlii:36-42)

šumma gallƗbum balum bƝl wardim abbutti wardim la šêm ugallib ritti | gallƗbim šuƗti 42 inakkisnj

36 37 38 39 40 41

Law 227 (xlii:43-55)

43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55

šumma awƯlum gallƗbam idƗÑma abbutti wardim la šêm ugdallib awƯlam šuƗti idukknjšnjma ina bƗbišu i¨alla-|-lnjšu gallƗbum ina idû la ugallibu itammƗma utaššar

Law 228 (xlii:56-63)

56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

šumma itinnum bƯtam ana awƯlim Ưpušma ušakli-|-ilšum ana 1 musar bƯtim 2 šiqil kaspam ana qƯštišu inaddiššum

Law 225 (xlii:29-35)

Law 229 (xliii:64-72)

29 šumma alpam u lu imƝram 30 simmam | kabtam 31 Ưpušma 32 uštamƯt

64 šumma itinnum 65 ana awƯlim 66 bƯtam Ưpušma

67 68 69 70 71 72

67 šipiršu la udanninma bƯt Ưpušu imqutma bƝl bƯtim | uštamƯt itinnum šû iddâk

Law 230 (xlii:73-76)

73 šumma mƗr bƝl bƯtim 74 uštamƯt 75 mƗr itinnim šuƗti 76 idukknj Law 231 (xlii:77-81)

77 šumma warad bƝl bƯtim 78 uštamƯt 79 wardam kƯma wardim 80 ana bƝl bƯtim 81 inaddin Law 232 (xlii:82-92)

82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92

šumma makknjram u¨talliq mimma ša u¨alliqu iriab u aššum bƯt Ưpušu la udanninuma imqutu ina makknjr ramanišu bƯt imqutu ippeš

Law 233 (xlii:93-xliii:3)

93 šumma itinnum bƯtam 94 ana awƯlim Ưpušma 95 šipiršu 96 la ušteÑbƯma 97 igƗrum iqtnjp 98 itinnum šû 1 ina kasap | ramanišu 2 igƗram šuƗti 3 udannan

68

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION Law 234 (xliii:4-9)

4 5 6 7 8 9

šumma malƗ¨um elep 60 kur ana awƯlim ip¨e 2 šiqil kaspam ana qƯštišu inaddi-|-iššum

Law 235 (xliii:10-26)

10 šumma malƗ¨um 11 eleppam | ana awƯlim 12 ip¨Ɲma 13 šipiršu 14 la utak-|-kilma 15 ina šattimma | šuƗti 16 eleppum šî 17 iÑÑabar 18 ¨iÓƯtam irtaši 19 malƗ¨um 20 eleppam šuƗti 21 inaqqarma 22 ina makknjr | ramanišu 23 udannanma 24 eleppam dannatam 25 ana bƝl eleppim 26 inaddin Law 236 (xliii:27-37)

šumma awƯlum eleppašu ana malƗ¨im ana igrim iddinma malƗ¨um | ƯgƯma 33 eleppam uÓÓebbi 34 u lu u¨ta-|-alliq

27 28 29 30 31 32

35 malƗ¨um eleppam 36 ana bƝl eleppim 37 iriab Law 237 (xliii:38-55)

38 šumma awƯlum 39 malƗ¨am | u eleppam 40 Ưgurma 41 šeam šipƗtim šamnam suluppƯ 42 u mimma | šumšu 43 ša Ñênim 44 iÑƝnši 45 malƗ¨um šû 46 ƯgƯma 47 eleppam uÓÓebbi 48 u ša lib-|-biša 49 u¨talliq 50 malƗ¨um 51 eleppam ša uÓe|-ebbû 52 u mimma 53 ša ina libbiša 54 u¨alliqu 55 iriab

Law 240 (xliii:67-80)

67 šumma elep 68 ša mƗ¨irtim 69 elep ša muq|-qelpƯtim 70 im¨aÑma 71 uÓÓebbi 72 bƝl eleppim ša eleppašu | Óebiat 73 mimma ša ina | eleppišu ¨alqu 74 ina ma¨ar ilim 75 ubârma 76 ša mƗ¨irtim 77 ša elep ša muq|-qelpƯtim 78 uÓebbû 79 eleppašu u mim|-mâšu ¨alqam 80 iriabšum Law 241 (xliii:81-84)

81 82 83 84

Law 238 (xliii:56-61)

šumma malƗ¨um elep awƯlim uÓÓebbƯma uštƝlliašši kaspam mišil | šƯmiša 61 inaddin

56 57 58 59 60

Law 239 (xliii:62-66)

62 63 64 65 66

šumma awƯlum malƗ¨am [Ưgur] 6 [kur šeam] ina šanat inaddi-|-iššum

69

šumma awƯlum alpam ana nipûtim ittepe ̃ mana kaspam išaqqal

Laws 242-243 (xliii:85-91)

85 šumma awƯlum 347 86 ana šattim ištiat Ưgur 87 idƯ alpim ša warka 88 4 kur seam348 89 idƯ alpim ša qabla 90 3 kur šeam ana bƝlišu 91 inaddin Law 244 (xliv:1-5)

1 2 3 4 5

šumma awƯlum alpam imƝram Ưgurma ina ÑƝrim nƝšum iddnjkšu ana bƝlišuma

Law 245 (xliv:6-13)

6 7

šumma awƯlum alpam Ưgurma

70

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 8 9 10 11 12 13

ina mƝgûtim u lu ina ma¨Ɨ|-Ñim uštamƯt alpam kƯma alpim ana bƝl alpim iriab

Law 246 (xliv:14-21)

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

šumma awƯlum alpam Ưgurma šƝpšu ištebir u lu labiƗnšu ittakis alpam kƯma alpim ana bƝl alpim iriab

Law 247 (xliv:22-27)

22 23 24 25 26 27

šumma awƯlum alpam Ưgurma Ưnšu u¨tappid 349 kaspam ½ šƯmišu ana bƝl alpim inaddin*

Law 248 (xliv:28-35)

šumma awƯlum alpam Ưgurma qaranšu išbir350 zibbassu ittakis u lu šašallašu ittasak351 kaspam ¼? sƯmišu 35 inaddin 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Law 249 (xliv:36-43)

šumma awƯlum alpam Ưgurma ilum im¨assuma352 imtnjt awƯlum ša alpam | Ưguru 41 nƯš ilim 42 izakkarma 43 njtaššar

36 37 38 39 40

Law 250 (xliv:44-51)

44 šumma alpum snjqam 45 ina alƗkišu 46 awƯlam 47 ikkipma 48 uštamƯt 49 dƯnum šû 50 rugummâm 51 ul išu Law 251 (xliv:52-65)

52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65

šumma alap awƯlim nakkƗpƯma kƯma nakkƗ-|-pû bƗbtašu ušƝdƯšumma qarnƯšu la ušarrim alapšu la us|-anniqma alpum šû mƗr awƯlim ikkipma uštamƯt ½ mana kaspam inaddin

Law 252 (xliv:66-68)

66 šumma warad awƯlim 67 ̃ mana kaspam 68 inaddin Law 253 (xliv:69-82)

69 šumma awƯlum | awƯlam 70 ana panƯ eqlišu 71 uzuzzim 72 Ưgurma 73 aldâm 74 iqƯpšu 75 liƗtim353 | ipqissum 76 [ana] eqlim erƝšim | urakkissu

77 78 79 80 81 82

71 šumma awƯlum šû zƝram u lu ukullâm išriqma ina qƗtišu ittaÑbat rittašu inakkisnj

Law 254-256 (xliv:83-100)

83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

šumma aldâm ilqƝma liƗtim utenniš354 tašna šeam ša im¨uru355 iriab šumma liƗt awƯlim ana igrim ittadin u lu zƝram išriqma ina eqlim la uštabši awƯlam šuƗti ukannnjšuma ina ebnjrim ana 1 burum 60 kur šeam imaddad šumma pƯ¨assu356 apƗlam la ilei ina eqlim šuƗti357 / ina liƗtim358 imtanaššarnjšu

Laws 257-258 (xliv:101-xlv:9)

101 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

šumma awƯlum ikkaram359 Ưgur 8 kur šeam ina šattim ištiat inaddiššum šumma awƯlum kullizam Ưgur 6 kur šeam ina 360šattim ištiat* inaddiššum

Law 259 (xlv:10-15)

10 šumma awƯlum 11 epinnam ina ugƗrim

72

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 12 13 14 15

išriq 5 šiqil kaspam ana bƝl epinnim inaddin

Law 260 (xlv:16-20)

16 17 18 19 20

šumma ¨arbam u lu maškakƗtim ištariq 3 šiqil kaspam inaddin

Law 261 (xlv:21-27)

21 šumma awƯlum 22 nƗqidam | ana liƗtim 23 u ÑƝnim 24 reîm Ưgur 25 8 kur šeam 26 ina šattim ištiat 27 inaddiššum Law 262 (xlv:28-36) 28 damaged

29 šumma awƯlum 30 alpam u lu immeram 31 ana [nƗqidim … 32-36 damaged Law 263 (xlv:37-43)

37 šumma [alpam] | u lu [immeram] 38 ša innadnušum 39 u¨talliq 40 alpam kƯma [alpim] 41 immeram kƯma [immerim] 42 ana bƝlišu361 43 iriab Law 264 (xlv:44-60)

44 45 46 47

šumma [rƝûm] ša liƗtum u lu ÑƝnum ana reîm

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

innadnušum idƯšu gamrƗtim ma¨ir libbašu ÓƗb liƗtim uÑÑa¨¨ir ÑƝnam uÑÑa¨¨ir tƗlittam | umtaÓÓi ana pƯ rik|-sƗtišu tƗlittam u biltam inaddin

Law 265 (xlv:61-75)

61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

šumma rƝûm ša liƗtum u lu ÑƝnum ana reîm innadnušum usar-|-rirma šimtam | uttakkir u ana kaspim ittadin ukannnjšuma adi 10-šu | ša išriqu liƗtim u ÑƝnam ana bƝlišunu iriab

Law 266 (xlv:76-81)

76 šumma ina tarbaÑim 77 362lipit ilim* | ittabši 78 u lu nƝšum iddnjk | rƝûm ma¨i!363 ilim

79 ubbamma364 80 miqitti365 tarbaÑim 81 bƝl tarbaÑim ima¨¨aršu Law 267 (xlv:82-89)

82 šumma rƝûm Ưgnjma366 83 ina tarbaÑim pissatam uštabši 84 rƝûm ¨iÓƯt pissatim 85 ša ina tarbaÑim ušabšû 86 liƗtim u ÑƝnam 87 ušallamma 88 ana bƝlišunu 89 inaddin Laws 268-271 (xlv:90-xlvi:2)

90 šumma awƯlum alpam 91 ana diƗšim Ưgur 92 2 snjt šeum idnjšu 93 šumma imƝram 94 ana diƗšim Ưgur 95 1 snjt šeum idnjšu 96 šumma urƯÑam 97 ana diƗšim Ưgur 98 1 qa šeum idnjšu 99 šumma awƯlum 100 liƗtim ereqqam 101 u murteddƯ|-ša Ưgur 1 ina njmim ištƝn 3 parsikat šeam 2 inaddin Laws 272-273 (xlvi:3-19)

šumma awƯlum ereqqamma ana ramaniša | Ưgur ina njmim ištƝn 4 snjt šeam 7 inaddin 8 šumma awƯlum 9 agram Ưgur 10 ištu rƝš šattim 11 adi ¨amšim | war¨im

3 4 5 6

73

74

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

6 uÓÓet kaspam ina njmim ištƝn inaddin ištu ši|-ššim war¨im adi taqtƯt | šattim 5 uÓÓet kaspam ina njmim ištƝn inaddin

Law 274 (xlvi:20-44)

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

šumma awƯlum mƗr ummƗnim iggar idƯ [ ] 5 uÓÓet kaspam idƯ kƗmidim 5 uÓÓet kaspam [idƯ] ša kitîm [… uÓÓet] kaspam [idƯ] purkullim [… uÓÓet] kaspam [idƯ] sasinnim [… uÓÓet] kaspam [idƯ] nappƗhim [… uÓÓet] kaspam idƯ naggƗrim 4? uÓÓet kaspam idƯ aškƗpim [ ] uÓÓet kaspam idƯ atkuppim [ ] uÓÓet kaspam [idƯ] itinnim [… uÓÓet] kaspam [ina njmim] ištƝn [inaddin]

Law 275 (xlvi:45-48)

45 [šumma] awƯlum 46 [ ] Ưgur 47 ina njmim ištƝn

48 3 uÓÓet kaspum idnjša Laws 276-277 (xlvi:49-57)

49 šumma mƗ¨irtam Ưgur 50 2½ uÓÓet kaspam | idƯša 51 ina njmim ištƝn 52 inaddin 53 šumma awƯlum 54 elep šnjšim Ưgur 55 ina njmim ištƝn 56 1⁄6 kaspam | idƯša 57 inaddin Law 278 (xlvi:58-66)

58 šumma awƯlum367 59 368wardam amtam* išƗmma 60 wara¨šu369 la imlƗma 61 benni elišu 62 imtaqut ana nƗdinƗ63 -nišu370 utârma371 64 šƗyyimƗnum 65 kasap išqulu 66 ileqqe372 Law 279 (xlvi:67-71)

67 šumma awƯlum 68 373wardam amtam* išƗmma 69 baqrƯ | irtaši 70 nƗdinƗnšu 71 baqrƯ374 ippal375 Law 280 (xlvi:72-87)

72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81

šumma awƯlum ina mƗt nukurtim wardam amtam ša | awƯlim ištƗm innjma ina libbnj mƗtim ittalkamma bƝl wardim u lu amtim lu warassu u lu amassu

75

82 njteddi 83 šumma wardum u amtum šunu 84 mƗrnj mƗtim 85 balum kaspimma 86 andurƗršunu 87 iššakkan Law 281 (xlvi:88-96)

88 šumma mƗrnj mƗtim | šanƯtim 89 šƗyyimƗnumma! 376 90 ina ma¨ar ilim 91 kasap išqulu377 92 iqabbƯma378 93 bƝl wardim u lu amtim 94 kasap išqulu ana tamkƗrim 95 inaddinma 96 lu warassu lu amassu ipaÓÓar379 Law 282 (xlvi:97-102)

97 šumma wardum ana bƝlišu 98 ul bƝlƯ atta 99 iqtabi 100 kƯma warassu 101 ukânšuma 102 bƝlšu uzunšu | inakkis EPILOGUE xlvii:1-8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

dƯnƗt mƯšarim ša Ñammurabi šarrum lƝûm ukinnuma mƗtam njsam | kƯnam u rƯdam | damqam ušaÑbitu

xlvii:9-58

9 Ñammurabi 10 šarrum git|-mƗlum anƗku 11 ana ÑalmƗt qaqqadim

76

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 12 ša Ellil | išrukam 13 rƝûssina 14 Marduk iddinam 15 ul Ɲgu 16 a¨i ul addƯ 17 ašrƯ šulmim 18 ešteƯšinƗšim380 19 pušqƯ | wašÓnjtim 20 upetti 21 nnjram ušƝÑi|-šinƗšim 22 ina kakkim | dannim 23 ša Zababa 24 u Ištar 25 ušatlimnjnim 26 ina igigallim 27 ša Ea | išƯmam381 28 ina lƝûtim382 29 ša Marduk | iddinam383 30 nakrƯ384 eliš 31 u šapliš | assu¨ 32 qablƗtim | ubelli 33 šƯr mƗtim 34 uÓƯb 35 nišƯ dadmƝ 36 aburrƯ 37 ušarbiÑ 38 mugallitam 39 ul ušaršƯ|-šinƗti 40 ilnj rabûtum

41 ibbûninnima 42 anƗkuma 43 rƝûm mušal|-limum 44 ša ¨aÓÓašu 45 išarat 46 ÑillƯ ÓƗbum 47 ana Ɨliya 48 tariÑ 49 ina utliya 50 nišƯ mƗt | ¼umerim 51 u Akkadîm 52 ukƯl 53 ina lamassiya 54 i¨¨išƗ 55 ina šulmim 56 attabbal|-šinƗti 57 ina nƝmeqiya 58 uštapzir|-šinƗti385 xlvii:59-78

59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71

dannum enšam ana la ¨abƗlim eknjtam almattam šutƝšurim ina BƗbilim Ɨlim ša Anum | u Ellil rƝšƯšu ullû ina Esagil bƯtim ša kƯma | šamê u erÑetim | išdƗšu kƯnƗ dƯn mƗtim ana diƗnim386 purussê mƗtim

77

72 ana parƗsim387 73 388¨ablim šutƝšurim* 74 awƗtiya šnjqurƗtim 75 ina narîya ašÓurma 76 ina ma¨ar Ñalmiya 77 šar mƯšarim 78 ukƯn xlvii:79-xlviii:2

šarrum ša in šarrƯ šnjturu anƗku awƗtnja nasqƗ lƝûtƯ šƗninam ul išû389 ina qibƯt ¼amaš390 391 dayyƗnim rabîm ša šamê u erÑetim mƯšarƯ ina mƗtim* lištƝpi ina awat Marduk bƝliya uÑurƗtnja mušassikam ay iršiƗ 93 ina Esagil 94 ša arammu392 / šumƯ ina damiqtim 1 ana dƗr 2 lizzakir 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92

xlviii:3-19

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

awƯlum ¨ablum ša awatam iraššû ana ma¨ar | ÑalmƯya šar mƯšarim lillikma 393 narî šaÓram lišta|-assƯma

78

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

awƗtiya šnjqurƗtim lišmƝma narî awatam394 likallimšu dƯnšu | lƯmur libbašu linappišma

xlviii:20-38

20 Ñammurabimi395 21 bƝlum ša kƯma /abim 22 wƗlidim 23 ana nišƯ 24 ibaššû 25 ana awat 26 Marduk bƝlišu 27 uštakti|-itma 28 irnitti Marduk 29 eliš u 30 šapliš396 31 ikšud 32 libbi Marduk 33 bƝlišu uÓƯb 34 u šƯram ÓƗbam 35 ana nišƯ 36 ana dƗr | išƯm397 37 u mƗtam 38 uštƝšer xlviii::39-58

39 40 41 42 43 44 45

annƯtam liqbƯma ina ma¨ar Marduk bƝliya ZarpƗnƯtum bƝltiya ina libbišu

46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58

gamrim likrubam šƝdum | lamassum ilnj Ɲribnjt Esagil libitti Esagil igirrê njmišam ina ma¨ar Marduk bƝliya ZarpƗnƯtum bƝltiya lidammiqnj

xlviii:59-94

ana warki/-Ɨt njmƯ ana mƗtima šarrum ša ina mƗtim ibbaššû awƗt mƯšarim ša ina narîya ašÓuru liÑÑur dƯn mƗtim ša adƯnu purussƝ mƗtim ša aprusu ay unakkir uÑurƗtiya ay ušassik šumma awƯlum šû tašƯmtam išûma mƗssu šutƝšuram | ilei 78 ana 398awƗtim 79 ša* ina narîya / ašÓuru liqnjlma399 80 kibsam rƯdam 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94

79 dƯn mƗtim ša adƯnu purussƝ mƗtim ša aprusu narûm šû likallimšuma ÑalmƗt qaqqadišu lištƝšer dƯnšina lidƯn purussƗšina liprus ina mƗtišu raggam u ÑƝnam lissu¨ šƯr nišƯšu liÓƯb.

xlviii:95-xlix:17

95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Ñammurabi šar mƯšarim ša ¼amaš kƯnƗtim išrukušum anƗku awƗtnja nasqƗ epšƝtnja šƗninam ul išâ ela ana la ¨a|-ssim rƝqƗ ana emqim ana tanƗdƗ|-tim šnjÑâ šumma awƯlum | šû ana awƗtiya ša ina narîya | ašÓuru iqnjlma dƯnƯ la u|-šassik awƗtiya la uštepƝl

80

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

uÑurƗtiya la unakkir awƯlum šû kƯma ƯƗti šar mƯšarim ¼amaš ¨aÓÓašu lirrik nišƯšu ina mƯšarim | lirƝ

xlix:18-44

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

šumma awƯlum | šû ana awƗtiya ša ina narîya ašÓuru la iqnjlma errƝtiya imƝšma errƝt ilƯ la Ưdurma dƯn adƯnu uptassis awƗtiya uštepƝl400 uÑurƗtiya401 uttakkir šumƯ šaÓram ipšiÓma šumšu ištaÓar402 aššum errƝtim!403 | šinƗti šaniamma uštƗ¨iz awƯlum šû lu šarrum lu bƝlum lu iššiakkum u lu awƯlnjtum

44 ša šumam | nabiat xlix:45-52

45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

Anum rabûm abu ilƯ nƗbû palêya melemmƯ šarrnjtim lƯÓeršu ¨aÓÓašu lišbir šƯmƗtišu | lƯrur

xlix:53-80

53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74

Ellil bƝlum mušƯm | šƯmƗtim ša qibƯssu la uttakkaru mušarbû šarrnjtiya tƝšî la šub|-bîm gabara¨ ¨alƗqišu ina šubtišu lišappi|-¨aššum404 palê tƗnƝ¨im njmƯ ƯÑnjtim šanƗt ¨uša¨¨im iklet la nawƗrim mnjt niÓil | Ưnim ana šƯmtim lišƯmšum ¨alƗq Ɨlišu naspu¨ | nišƯšu

75 76 77 78 79 80

81 šarrnjssu šupƝlam šumšu u zikiršu ina mƗtim la šubšâm ina pƯšu kabtim liqbi

xlix:81-97

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97

Ninlil ummum rabƯtum ša qibƯssa ina Ekur kabtat bƝltum mudammiqat igirrƝya ašar šipÓim u purussêm ina ma¨ar Ellil awassu lilemmin šulput mƗtišu ¨alƗq nišƯšu tabƗk napištišu kƯma mê ina pƯ Ellil šarrim lišaškin

xlix:98-l:13

Ea rubûm rabium ša šƯmƗtušu ina ma¨ra illakƗ apkal ilƯ mudƝ mimma šumšu 103 mušƗriku 1 njm balƗÓiya 2 uznam 3 u nƝmeqam 4 lƯÓeršuma 5 ina mƯšƯtim 6 littarrušu 7 nƗrƗtišu 8 ina nagbim

98 99 100 101 102

82

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION liskir ina erÑetišu ašnƗn405 napišti | nišƯ 13 ay ušabši 9 10 11 12

l:41-63

41 42 43 44 45

l:14-40

14 ¼amaš dayyƗnum | rabium 15 ša šamê 16 u erÑetim 17 muštƝšer 18 šaknat | napištim 19 bƝlum tukultƯ 20 šarrnjssu | liskip 21 dƯnšu 22 ay idƯn 23 uru¨šu | lƯši 24 išdƯ ummƗnišu 25 liš¨elÑi 26 ina bƯrišu 27 šƯram lemnam 28 ša nasƗ¨ 29 išdƯ šarrnjtišu 30 u ¨alƗq mƗtišu liškunšum 31 awatum maruštum 32 ša ¼amaš ar¨iš 33 likšussu 34 eliš 35 ina balÓnjtim 36 lissu¨šu 37 šapliš 38 ina erÑetim 39 eÓemmašu 40 mê lišaÑmi

46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

Sîn bƝl šamê ilum bƗnî ša tƝressu!406 ina ilƯ šnjpât agâm kussiam | ša šarrnjtim lƯÓeršu arnam kabtam šƝressu rabƯtam ša ina zumrišu la i¨alliqu lƯmussuma njmƯ war¨Ư šanƗt palƝšu ina tƗnƝ¨im u dimmatim lišaqti kammƗl šarrnjtim lišaÓÓi-|-ilšu balƗÓam ša itti mnjtim šitannu ana šƯmtim lišƯmšum

l:64-80

64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76

Adad bƝl ¨egallim gugal šamê u erÑetim rƝÑnja zunnƯ ina šamê mƯlam ina nagbim lƯÓeršu mƗssu ina ¨uša¨¨im u bubnjtim li¨alliq eli Ɨlišu

83

77 ezziš 78 lissƯma 79 mƗssu ana til | abnjbim 80 litƝr l:81-91

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91

Zababa qarrƗdum rabium mƗrum rƝštûm ša Ekur Ɨliku imniya ašar tam¨Ɨrim kakkašu lišbir njmam ana mnjšim litƝršumma nakiršu elišu lišziz

l:92-li:23

92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 {1 2 3 4 5

Ištar bƝlet tƗ¨azim u qablim pƗtiat kakkiya lamassƯ damiqtum rƗimat palêya ina libbiša aggim ina uzzƗtiša rabiƗtim šarrnjssu lƯrur damqƗtišu ana lemnƝtim litƝr litƝr}407 ašar tƗ¨azim | u qablim kakkašu lišbir išƯtam

84

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

sa¨maštam liškunšum qarrƗdƯšu lišamqit damƯšunu erÑetam lišqi gurun408 šalmƗt ummƗnƗtišu409 ina ÑƝrim littaddi410 ummƗnšuma! 411 rƝmam ay412 ušarši šuƗti ana413 qƗt | nakrƯšu limallƯšuma ana mƗt nuku/-urtišu kamîš lƯrûšu

li:24-39

24 Nergal 25 dannum ina ilƯ 26 414qabal | la ma¨Ɨr* 27 mušakšidu 28 irnittiya 29 ina kašnjšišu 30 rabîm 31 kƯma išƗtim415 32 ezzetim | ša416 apim 33 nišƯšu 34 liqmi 35 in417 kakkišu | dannim 36 lišaÓÓƯšuma 37 biniƗtišu

38 kƯma Ñalam | Óiddim 39 li¨buš li:40-49

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

Nintu418 bƝltum ÑƯrtum ša mƗtƗtim ummum bƗnƯtƯ aplam | lƯÓeršuma šumam ay ušar|-šƯšu ina qerbƯt | nišƯšu zƝr awƯlnjtim ay ibni

li:50-69

50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

Ninkarrak mƗrat Anim qƗbiat dumqiya ina Ekur murÑam | kabtam asakkam lemnam simmam | marÑam ša la ipašše¨nj asûm qerebšu la ilammadu ina ÑimdƯ la una|-a¨¨ušu kƯma nišik mnjtim la innassa¨u ina biniƗ|-tišu

65 lišƗÑia|-aššumma 66 adi napiš|-tašu 67 ibellû 68 ana eÓlnjtišu 69 liddammam li:70-85

ilnj rabûtum ša šamê u erÑetim Anunnaknj ina nap¨arišunu šƝd419 bƯtim libitti Ebabbara šuƗti zƝrašu mƗssu ÑƗbašu nišƯšu u ummƗnšu errƝtam maruštam | lƯrurnj 84 errƝtim420 85 anniƗtim! 421

70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83

li:86-91

86 Ellil 87 ina pƯšu 88 ša la utta|-akkaru422 89 lƯruršuma423 90 ar¨iš 91 likšudašu

85

86

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Notes The sigla for the supplementary mss used in the following notes are those given in BAL. A note placed after a word refers to that word; a note placed before a word refers to the next sequence of words as far as the * in the transcription. 1 A: innjma; B:major textual variant. 2 A: ililnjt. 3 A: ina. 4 B: lipit qƗtišun rƝ njtim (read rƝ njt) mƯšarium (read mƯšarim) ana širikti išruknjšu ušatlimnjšu ¨aÓÓim (read ¨aÓÓam) u agƯ (read agâm) sƯmƗt šarrnjtim. 5 A: ina. 6 B: in. 7 B: šarrnjtim. 8 B: dƗrƯti. 9 B: išdƗšu. 10 B: ukinnnjšu. 11 A: ina njmišu; B: ø. 12 B: + šarra mƯšaram (read šar mƯšarim). 13 B: rubâm na da!. 14 B: mƯšariam!. 15 B: ¨ulluqiam!. 16 B: waÑêm (haplography). 17 B: šumƯam!. 18 B: ø. 19 B: kibrƗtim. 20 B: mušarbi u. 21 B: njmƯšam. 22 A: ina. 23 A: ibnƗšu. 24 B: wašrim.

25

55 Stele: da-num2 as iv:69 A: wƗšer. 56 and v:3; A: da-a-ni; B: B: ø. DI.KUD!, epithet of ¼amaš. 57B: ša. 26 58 Stele: E2 E2.babbar, B: napšatim. 59 transcribed as bƯt Ebabbar A: + Ɨlim instead of KI (Roth) or bƯtim Ebabbar determinative. 60 (BAL); B: E2.bar6-ra; cf. A: mušašqi; B: mu-še-eš[Stele ii:34: E2.babbar. še]-qi. 27 Stele: UNUG.KI; E: + u2- 61A, B: E2.mes-lam ru-uk (gloss). (preferred by Roth). 28 62 B: nu¨šu. Passage omitted by A, C 29 and F. E: + bƝlum. 30 63 B: mu-ul-la!. B: muttabbilam. 31 64 E: su!-lu-ul. A, B: ša. 32 65 E: dap¨Ɨtim!. A, B, C: ø. 33 66 E: muÓe¨¨ed. For Stele: MA3.AL.NAG.A 34 read MA3.AL.GU7.A; Roth A: ina; B: ø; E: ¨epi, “broken, missing”. transcribes Malgium. 35 67 E: muštaspi¨ir!. Roth: ina. 36 68 B: melammnj!; C: B: šubƗtišina. 69 melemmƯ. A: ina. 37 70 B: muštƝšir. Stele: dam.gal.nun.na; A: 38 dam.ki.na; B: dam.ki.en.na; Stele: bi-tim; A: bi-ti E2; Roth: Enki u Damkina B: E2 (=? bƯt). 39 (emendation). B: na-ki-du!. 40 71 B: er3-ra{-ra}. A: mušarbi. 41 72 A, B: ušakšidušu. B: ia-ši-im!. 42 ! 73 B: nizmasšu . A: mukannišu. 43 74 B: mu Ɨter!. A: Ɨšib. 44 75 Roth: -meslam. Stele: i3-tum; A: it-tu-um 45 Stele: i-lu; A: i-li; B, E: i3- Dagan; B: DINGIR. ID2! u li2; Roth reads ili Dagan. 76 (p. 140 n. 1). A: bƗnu. 46 77 E: mƯrišti. B: ša. 47 78 A: ušaklilušum. A: Mari; B: Meri. 48 79 Stele A: DINGIR nin-tu; A: Tutu. B: Tultul. 80 B: DINGIR be-let i3-li2; D: A, F: omit iv:38-44. DINGIR MAÑ (= bƝlet ilƯ). 81B: pan. 49 82 A, D: šƗkin. B: usually has 50 ? DINGIR.INANNA for B, D : mukƯn. 51 DINGIR.SUÑ (= Tišpak). Perhaps TelƯtu. 52 83 A: tƝrƝt. A, B: muštakkin. 53 84 Formerly read Zabalam; B: ellnjtu. 85 Roth reads Zabala. A, F: ø. 54 86 A: + a-lim (instead of B: mukƯn. 87 determinative URU). B: išdƯšina.

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 88

B: qereb. A, F: omit this passage. 90 B: mukƯn. 91 A: Ulmaš. 92 A, C: qerbu (preferred by Roth). 93 Roth: Akkade. 94 B, C: mušarbi?. 95 A, B: mušešer; C: mušišer. 96 A: ¨ammi. 97 Stele: DINGIR.LAMMAšu; A: la-ma-si2-šu; B: DINGIR.LAMMA-su. 98 A: + Ɨlim. 99 A, C: omit iv:60-63. 100 B: mušeb!. 101 A: na-bi-i; B: na-bi-i¨?. 102 A, C: ø. 103 B: unclear. 104 B: ušƝpu; C: ušƯpu. 105 B: mƝsu!. 106 A, C: omit iv:64-66. 107 B: muštƝmiq. 108 B: rabi njtim. 109 B: su-la-il. 110 F: eÓlu!. 111 A, B, F: dƗru. 112 E: eÓlum; cf. iv:69: dannum/eÓlum ša SinmuballiÓ. 113 B: nnjrium!. 114 B: kibrƗti. 115 B: EN2.LIL2. 116 B: EN2.LIL2. 117 B: šnj¨uzu. 118 A: ina njmišu. 119 r: njtabbibaššuma. 120 r: ištalma. 121 F: šebnjt. 122 r: rugummƗne?. 123 r: ø. 124 r: ippal. 125 Stele: uš-ta-ab; read ušša-ab 126 F: ša. 127 F: ø passim. 89

128

I: qƗti. r: šibƯ!. 130 r: nƗdinƗn followed by Roth. 131 r: šƯmu iššamu, i.e. passive. 132 Stele: idkƝ!; r: iqbƯ; read iddƯ following BAL and Roth. 133 r: rugummƗne?. 134 r: mimmnjšu. 135 r: Ɨlu?. 136 r: iriabbušu?. 137 J: napištum?. 138 J: išaqqalnj?. 139 r: išƗti bullƯ. 140 Stele: il-te-di; BAL: for di read qe following J and r; Roth also reads ilteqe. 141 J, r: ø. 142 J: ø. 143 r: ø. 144 J: šar-ri-a !. 145 r: qabûma. 146 r: illiku!. 147 r: ø. 148 J: ittarad. 149 J: ø. 150 J: ø. 151 J: ø. 152 r: ø. 153 r: turruma. 154 J: arkišu. 155 r: + u bƯssu. 156 r: šƗnîmma. 157 r: iktašda. 158 MU 3 KAM. 159 J: inaddinšum. 160 J: iÑÑabtušu!. 161 J: ittalka. 162 J: išteatat!. 163 J: ø. 164 J: innadinšuma. 165 J: šumma!. 166 J: paÓƗrišu. 167 Stele: i-pa-aÓ-Óa-ri-šu; BAL (following r): for ri 129

87

read ar; Roth also reads ipaÓÓaršu; J: ipaÓÓaršum!. 168 Stele: KIRI6; BAL: kirnjšu (nom., i.e. subject of a passive verb; Roth: kirƗšu (acc., construed according to sense). 169 r: ipÓirišu. 170 J and r: ø. 171 J: ø. 172 r: ø. 173 r: ana nisi¨tim. 174 r: irde. 175 r: ø. 176 r: ø. 177 r: ø …*. 178 r: + ina qƗti rƝdîm. 179 Stele: il-te-qe2; read il-tedi. 180 r: ø. 181 Stele: AB2.BI.ÑA2, read AB2.GU4.ÑA2; r: liƗtim?. 182 Stele: i-na-ad-di-in = inaddin (G prs.); BAL: for i read in (= innaddin, N prs.); r: innadin (N prt.). 183 r: ø. 184 r: kaspƯ. 185 r: + imarrar u. 186 r: tiptƯti. 187 r: ipti. 188 r: 60?. 189 O: errƝšnjtim. 190 O: + u. 191 O: ø …*. 192 The function within the sentence of awƯlum (nomv.) is defined by elƯšu (with its resumptive pronoun). 193 L: eqelšu. 194 L: ø. 195 restored thus in BAL and Roth. 196 restored thus in BAL and Roth. 197 An adverb widely separated from its verb.

88

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

198 The second clause appears to explain la imtagar and the third clause, a temporal one, introduces the apodosis. 199 ab.sin2 can also be read as abšinnum. 200 Stele: A.A2 KANKAL, transcribed eqel nidûtim (BAL) or kankallum (Roth). 201 Stele: a-A3, but read ana. 202 Stele resumes here after large break. 203 P: pa-ša-ri-em!. 204 T: i-le-eq!. 205 The unusual writing of the Stele is perhaps influenced by KI in the next column. 206 t: ø. 207 S: tamkƗršu. 208 S: samallâm kaspam iqimma. 209 t: tamkƗrim. 210 S: ø. 211 S: šiƗti. 212 S: ikassnjšima “they shall bind her and”. 213 S: + u. 214 NIN.DINGIR was read by Borger as entum (cf. BAL, Laws 110; 127; 178; 179; AHw, s.v. entum; CAD s.v. Ɲntum); but the reading now preferred is ugbabtum (cf. AHw; Roth). 215 Stele: NI for GAG in ideogram. 216 P: ašibma; t: ašimma lu. 217 t: + lu. 218 t: + lu. 219 t: lu. 220 t: bƯši?. 221 t: iddimma. 222 t: šubulti.

223 P: ušƗbilaššu; t: ušƗbil; see Roth. 224 S: ø. 225 P: šnjbula?. 226 P: šnjbula?. 227 Stele: ukannnjšuma!; S: a[n-x]-šu. 228 t: šubultim. 229 t: ø. 230 Stele: il-qú-ú ú-ta-ar; but S: il-qú ú-ta-ar (perhaps haplography). 231 S: ø. 232 t: it-te[…]. 233 t: ippušuma?. 234 P: + SAG. 235 P: + SAG. 236 t: ilteqe. 237 t: šapku. 238 P: ina gamriam!; S: ana gamrišu. 239 P: uš-ta-aš-na-ma with aš written over an erasure. 240 t: 1 E.GUR for Stele: 1 E.GUR.E. 241 t: ileqqe. 242 t: iddinma?. 243 t: iddimma. 244 t: njtabbir. 245 t: u. 246 t: ø. 247 For ugbabtum see Law 110. 248 Restoration according to BAL, not followed by Roth. 249 S: si2-ni-in-iš-tam, with ni and in transposed. 250 S: ana mutƯša amtam. 251 V: ušaršƯšu. 252 V: ušerreb. 253 V: inaddinma. 254 V: arkƗnum. 255 V: inaddinši. 256 S: li-i -bu-um. 257 S: bƯtam u kirâm. 258 V: a¨îtim. 259 V: ašbat.

260

V: bƝli. S: šiƗti. 262 V: bƝli. 263 The function of the subjunctive here and in the next sentence is not clear. 264 See previous note. 265 V: eli mutiša. 266 S: kilallnjšunu. 267 It is exceptional to find the last line of one Law and the first line of the next in one boxed section. 268 Stele: -ši!. 269 X: ø. 270 The particle u is rarely preceded by -ma. 271 V: mnjt. 272 Meek (1969: 173 n. 117) emended to murabbƯtišu, but V corroborates Stele (see CAD M/II 216b). 273 V: aldat. 274 S: abišu. 275 V: ewišu. 276 V: iddinma. 277 V: uttalliÑ!. 278 V: e-wi-šu, but wi glossed as mi. 279 S: unclear. 280 S: uštƗbil. 281 S: ša. 282 S: bƝli. 283 V: -u. 284 V: ewišu ublam. Bergmann notes that on the Stele the pronominal suffix appears to have been deliberately erased. 285 V: uttƝršu. 286 Stele: a-ta!-ša, perhaps influenced by še-ri-ik-ta-ša at the end of the previous line. 287 Thus Stele; Roth: mƗrƯ. 261

TEXT AND TRANSCRIPTION 288 Roth prefers to emend reading irbû “for his eligible sons”, i.e. for the sons who have grown up. 289 The proposal to emend and read i¨Ưr (see BAL) is not supported by V, which agrees with Stele here. 290 See previous note. 291 m: unclear. 292 m: -tum. 293 Borger: wa-ar-ka{-nuum}. 294 This verb could be transcribed as a present tense if it seems preferable to begin the apodosis here rather than later. 295 y: amatšu uldušu. 296 y: DUMU. ME GEME2 u DUMU. ME ¨Ưrtim (plural for Stele singular). 297 y: -ri. 298 V: IBILA for Stele: IBILA DUMU. 299 BAL3: zittam. 300 y: inassaqnjma. 301 Y: ø. 302 Y: ø. 303 Z: iq-KA!-bi for iqDUG4-bi. 304 Z: wa-ar. 305 Read iššakkan (N-theme, so BAL and Roth), unless the infixed -t- conveys passive meaning. 306 V: ardnjtim. 307 a: iddinuši. 308 V: ø. 309 V: arkassa. 310 Y: ma¨-u1-tum. 311 V: ø; perhaps haplography. 312 V: + lu. 313 V: ø. 314 A: abuša!. 315 V: warkƗnum.

316

V: šimƗtišu. V: + elƝnumma. 318 V: arkim. 319 V: ipaqqidnj. 320 For ugbabtum, see Law 110. 321 MI 2 ZI.IK.|RU.UM. 322 Thus BAL; Roth: nadƗnamma. 323 V: ittanašši. 324 V: + bƯtam. 325 V: išÓurušim. 326 For ugbabtum, see Law 110. 327 Perhaps here read kulmašitum for nadƯtum (Finkelstein). 328 MI 2.ZI.|IK.RU.UM (as Law 179, xxxviii:46). 329 Perhaps here read kallatum for nadƯtum (Stol). 330 MI 2. ZI.|IK.RU.UM (as Law 180, xxxviii:21). 331 Read Stele: iš-ukši-im; see BAL. 332 Thus Roth; Stele: MI 2.ZI.IK.|RU.UM (no transcription in BAL). 333 Stele: DUMU transcribed in BAL as mƗram but by Roth as Ñe¨ram; see also L:191 and 194. 334 Stele: E2-ba!. 335 Following Roth for DUMU as Law 188; BAL: mƗrum. 336 An unusual adverbial form, where the regular marker -um is followed by a suffixed pronoun. 337 MI 2.ZI.|IK.RU.UM. 338 For DUMU; see above n. 333; cf. BAL: mƗrûm (Laws 188 and 191). 339 Stele GIR3.NIG2.DU for GIR3.PAD.DU. 340 Stele ši-in-gag!. 317

89

341 Roth prefers to read the word as a fem. sg. and transcribes risbatim. 342 Roth transcribes am-¨aÑu2, thus assuming a subjunctive form; it is possible that the expected affixed pronoun -šu has been assimilated giving an alternative transcription am¨aÑÑu (< *am¨aÑšu). 343 Stele ši for usual ši-i. 344 Stele: na-id!-ti. 345 Stele u¨-tap-da for u¨tap-pi-id. 346 Stele: IGI.6 GAL2; here and elsewhere (see Law 225) no ideogram for šiqlu is written when the numeral is a fraction. 347 Restoration according to BAL but not in Roth. 348 Law 242 was thought to end here but it is better to run on the text and treat Law 243 together with it. 349 p: mišil šƯmƯšu kaspam išaqqal (I3.LA2[.E]). 350 Roth restores išbir. 351 Following Stele it-ta-saag; BAL prefers to read ittasa¨!, see nasƗ¨u. 352 b: imta¨assuma. 353 BAL suggests sugullum as an alternative transcription for the Sumerogram ab2. gu4.¨a2 here and in subsequent clauses. 354 Stele u2-te-en-gag!-iš. 355 Stele im-ri!-ru. 356 p: IGI-¨a-su for pi-¨a-su. 357 p: šuƗtu!. 358 p: GU4. 359 Poorly written on Stele. 360 p: [ša-at]-ti-šu.

90

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

361 BAL restores a plural suffix bƝlišunu. 362 c: lipitti ilim, perhaps because dictated text misheard. 363 Read ma-¨ar for Stele: ma-¨i!. 364 c: ubbabma. 365 c: miqit. 366 Stele: i-GEME2!-ma. c: egi-šu!. 367 e: unclear. 368 d, q: amtam wardam; c, d: + determinative SAG. 369 d: ištƝn war¨u. 370 e: -ima. 371 e: utâr. 372 e: ilaqqe. 373 e: + determintive SAG. 374 e: + -šu. 375 e: i-ip-pa-il!. 376 BAL: šƗyyimƗnum, followed by Roth. 377 Stele: išlulu!. 378 Stele: bi for qa. 379 Stele: ag for Óar. 380 e: -šinƗšinim!. 381 e: -a. 382 e: tu!-u-tim. 383 e: išrukam.

384

e: nakiri. pazƗru and paÑƗru are both uncertain. 386 f: -u. 387 f: -u. 388 f: ø … *. 389 f: iši. 390 f: + u Adad. 391 e: dƗ inu dênim pƗrisu purussê dêni*; f: dƗ in dêni […]. 392 e: -um. 393 i: u? narû šaÓru. 394 h: amƗtu. 395 i: Hammurabi. 396 i: +issu¨. 397 i: dƗrƯ išƯm. 398 h: awƗt*. 399 K 19375: li-ši-it-ma (perhaps an error). 400 o: uštapƗl. 401 o: usurƗtiya!. 402 o: ištaÓra. 403 Stele: er-re-šum; BAL, Roth: er-re-tim; cf. c and o: ]ti. 404 BAL: uncertain; CAD: lišappi¨aššum s.v. šuppu¨u “to incite rebellion” (tƝšû), occurring only once; cf. 385

AHw: šapƗ¨u, D-theme, occurring twice. 405 i: Nisaba. 406 Stele: še-re-su; CAD (vol. A/2: p. 203b) emends to read têressu “his oracular decision”, see apû A 4 (= šnjpû) b. 407 Delete (dittography). 408 e: qurun. 409 e: ummƗnišu. 410 e: lištaddi. 411 Thus Stele; Borger questions reading; Roth: ummƗnšu. 412 e: Ɨ. 413 e: adi. 414 e: qabal la imma¨aru*. 415 e: i-il!-ti. 416 e: iš!. 417 e: ina; followed by Roth. 418 e: rubƗtum. 419 e: DINGIR.RA[?. 420 e: errƝtum. 421 Stele: DA-ni-a-tim, read a2-ni-a-tim. 422 e: nakƗrim. 423 e: -ušuma.

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS The Old Babylonian monumental script is more complicated than the simpler geometric arrangement of wedges used on the New Assyrian monuments from the north of the country a thousand years later. The relative simplicity of that script lent itself to the composition of a numerical sequence for the signs based on their shape. Since it is not at all straightforward to list Old Babylonian signs according to shape, the best alternative is to index them alphabetically, according to the phonetic values of the various signs. All the signs occurring on the stele are listed below, alphabetically according to their phonetic value. For the Sumerian values of logograms cross-references are given to the corresponding Akkadian words. The words in which the signs occur are also listed with full citations, except for those signs the primary value of which is simply a consonant plus a vowel (CV signs) or a vowel plus a consonant (VC signs). Column and line numbers are not usually given for citations from the Laws (prefixed with L). This list can also be used as a concordance for the words occurring in the Code, except for those written only with CV and VC signs with their primary phonetic values. It will be noted that some syllables are regularly written with a sign for which that syllable has traditionally been given as a secondary value. The siglum :: is used to distinguish similar or identical words attested with different writings and > indicates a crossreference.1 A much simpler list of signs follows, and this is arranged according to the conventional numerical sequence as given in Rykle Borger, Mesopotamisches Zeichenlexikon (2004), replacing Assyrisch-babylonische Zeichenliste (1988), and René Labat, Manuel d’épigraphie akkadienne (1988). It may also help to consult Catherine Mittermayer, Altbabylonische Zeichenliste der sumerisch-literarischen Texte (Fribourg: 1

A citation where the referent occurs more than once is marked with +.

92

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Academic Press; Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 2006). The numerical list is intended to answer the question implicit in conventional sign lists, “What sound does a given sign suggest?” By contrast, the alphabetically arranged list is intended to answer the question, “What sign is used for a given sound or a given word?”

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS value 1 ⁄6 ѿ ½ 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 30 a

sign number 571 74 480 570 593 597 598a 598b 411 472 579

A2

334

ab

128

AB2 ABGAL abnu abu

420

ABUL abullu ad adi ag AGA agru agû a¨ ak al ALAM aldû almattu 2

145 97 347

398 = ag 298 358

Or AL.DU3.A-am.

93

citations šeššet ¼U¼ANA šaluštu; see also IGI MA¼ mišlu DI¼ ištƝn MIN šinâ E¼5 šalƗš LIMMU erbe IA2 ¨amiš A¼3 šeššu U ešer; U.MIN = 12 U¼U3 šalƗša A.BA abu; A.GAR3 ugƗru; A.RA2 adi; A.¼A3 eqlu; A.ZU asû; DUMU A.GAR3.ME¼ mƗrnj ugƗrim; DUMU.UM.MI.A mƗr ummânim (> mƗru); E2.GI4.A kallatu; GA2.GI4.A gagû; LU2[TUG2].DU8.A kƗmidu; UM.MI.A ummƗnu idu; A2.ZAG2 asakku; GU4.A2.UR3.RA alpim warkim (> alpu) AB.SIN2 šerum; GU4.AB2.MURU2.SAG alpim qablim (> alpu) AB2.GU4.ÑA2 littu, sugullu (= NUN + ME) apkallu NA4 abnam (L112) A.BA abim (L165; 166; 167; 170; 171a); E2 A.BA bƯt abim (L158; 180; 181; 182; 183; 184; cf. E2 a-bi-šu bƯt abƯšu (L186; 189; 190; 193+) (= KA2 + GAL) abullu ABUL abullam (L15); abullim (L58) AD.KID atkuppu A.RA2 adi (L106; 107; 112) AGA agû; AGA.U¼ redû ÑUN.GA2 agram (L26; 33; 273) AGA agâm (l:45) agêm (iii:26)

[A]L.DU3 aldû > §almnj AL.DU3-a-am2 aldâm (L253; 254) NU.MU.SU almattim (xlvii:61); almattum (L177)

94

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE GU4 alpam (L7); alpum (L202); GU4.AB2.MURU2.SAG alpim qablim3 (L“243”); GU4.A2.UR3.RA alpim warkim4 (L242) URU Ɨlim (xlvii:64); Ɨlum (L23); URU-šu Ɨlšu (L32; 135; 136); ƗlƯšu (xlix:73; l:76); URU-ia ƗlƯya (xlvii:47)

alpu

Ɨlu am AMA AMAR

170 237 437

amtu

an AN¼E ap APIN apkallu aplu

13 208 = ab 56

aplnjtu aq ar ardu

= ag 451

as as2

131 339 = aš2

asakku asû a‰ aš aš2 A¼3 A¼GAB aššatu aškƗpu Ašnan at 3 4

ummu AMAR.UTU Marduk; LUKUR DAMAR.UTU nadƯt Marduk (> nadƯtu) GEME2 amat (L213); amtam (L7; 17; 118; 144; 146); amtim (L119; 141; 170; 214); GEME2-su2 amassu (L119+; 169); GEME2ÑA2 amƗtim (L146) AN šamû; AN.DUL3 ‰ulnjlu; DUR.ANKI BƗbilu imƝru epinnu; GI¼APIN.TUG2.KIN ¨arbu NUN.ME (= ABGAL) apkal (xlix:101) IBILA aplam (li:44); aplim (L172); aplum (iv:69; L170); IBILA-šu: aplƯšu (L165) IBILA-ša aplnjtiša (L181; 182); IBILA-šu aplnjtišu (L191)

IR3 warad (L116; 175); wardam (L7; 17; 118); IR3-su2 warassu (L129)

= as 1 339 = as2 598b 104

= ad

Or alpim ša qabla. Or alpim ša warka.

ip-pa-ar-ra-as2-ma (L18; 142); ir-ta-ka-as2 (L194); liiš-ta-as2-si-ma (xlviii:11); mu-uš-ta-as2-¨i-ir (ii:60); naas2-pu-u¨2 (xlix:74); na-as2-qa2 (xlvii:81; xlviii:99) A2.ZAG2 asakkam (li:56) A.ZU asâm (L206); asûm (L215); A.SU! (li:59)

ik-ta-aš2-dam (L27; 135); ta-[aš/aš2?]-na (L254) 6-šu (L107) aškƗpu DAM-su2 aššassu (L117) A¼GAB aškƗpim (L274) D EZINA2 (= D¼E.TIR) ašnan (l:11)

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS atkuppu am az ba ba4 BABBAR BƗbilu

95

AD.KID atkuppim (L274) = ad = as 5 233 381

bƗbu bƗiru BALA BAN2 BANDA3 BAR bat be2

9 74 144 74 69 214

bƝltu bƝlu bi bi2

= be2 172

bil2

173

biltu bƯtu

bu BUR BUR3 BURANUN

371 349 411 381

buru BURU14

54

da dam

335 557

BA: A.BA abu; I3.BA ipru, piššatu; SIG2.BA lubnjšu D Za-ba4-ba4 (xlvii:23; l:81) E2 .BABBAR.RA Ebabbara; KU3.BABBAR kaspu DUR.ANKI (i:59); KA2.DINGIR.RAKI (ii:6), E2!.DINGIR.RAKI (L182) BƗbilim KA2-šu bƗbƯšu (L227) ¼U.ÑA bƗirum (L26) palû snjtu NU.BANDA3 laputtû NU.BAR kulmašƯtu it-ta-a‰-bat (L129) be2-en-ni (L278); er-be2-tim (ii:4); i-be2-el-lu-u2 (li:67); ni-in-da-be2-e (iii:44); u2-be2-el-li (xlvii:32); u2zu-ub-be2-em (L139) NIN bƝltu (xlix:85; li:41) EN bƝlum, Ɲnum (xlix:41) mu-šar-bi2 (ii:5); qi2-bi2-it (xlvii:84); qi2-bi2-sa3 (xlix:83); qi2-bi2-su2 (xlix:55); ra-bi2-a-tim (l:102); rabi2-tum (xlix:81); u2-šar-bi2-i‰ (xlvii:37); u2-šar-bi2-u3šu (i:15) ba-bil2 (ii:20); u2-ša-bil2-šu (L112); uš-ta-bil2 (L53; 55; 56); u-kab-bil2-ši-ma (L130) GUN biltim (L37; 38 :: bi-il-tim L36; 41) E2: bƯt (L115; 116; 117; 161; 163+); bƯtim (iii:69; L191; xlvii:68); E2-šu bƯtšu, bissu (L134; 135); E2-ša bƯtša, bissa (L109) BUR.GUL purkullu BUR3.IKU.E ana 1 burum (> buru) (= UD+KIB+NUN); ID2 BURANUN.NA Purattim (iv:26) BUR3.IKU.E ana 1 burum (L44; 56; 57; 63; 255) BURU14 ebnjru MAR.GID2.DA ereqqu li-da!-dam-ma-am (li:69); dam-qa2-am (xlvii:7); damqa2-ti-šu (l:104); li-dam-mi-qu (xlviii:58); mu-dam-mi-

96

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

dan

322

dar di DIM din

114 457 94 465

DINGIR

13

DI¼ du DU3 DU6 DU8 DUL3 dum DUMU

480 206 230 459 = til2 167 329 207 144

dur

108

e E2

308 324

ebnjru ekallu eknjtu el eleppu

ellilnjtu EME en ENGAR ENSI2 entu Ɲnum

qa2-at (xlix:85); ik-ta-aš2-dam (L135); na-a-dam (i:30); ri-dam (xlvii:7; xlviii:80); DAM aššatu; DAM.GAR3 tamkƗru dan-na-at (L27; 28); dan-nim (L34; li:35 :: da-an-nim xlvii:22); dan-nu-um (i:37; xlvii:59; li:25) i-sa-ad-dar-ma (L104) [ZA].DIM? sassinu (L274) i-din-nam (xlvii:14 :: id-di-nam L9; xlvii:29); i-na-addin (L118); it-ta-din (L119) ilu; DDa-gan; DAMAR.UTU Marduk; KA2.DINGIR.RAKI BƗbilu; NIN.DINGIR entu 1 pƯ¨am (L111); 1 ¼E.GUR.E 5 qâ SILA3 (L121) GIR3.PAD.DU e‰emtu [A]L.DU3 aldâm tƯlu LU 2[TUG]2.DU8.A kƗmidu AN.DUL3 ‰ulnjlu dum-qi2-ia (li:53) mƗru; DUMU.MI2 mƗrtu; DUMU GIR3.SI3.GA mƗr girsiqêm; DUMU A.GAR3.ME¼ mƗrnj ugƗrim; DUMU UM.MI.A mƗr ummânim i-dur-ma (xlix:26); DUR.ANKI DUR BƗbilu BUR3.IKU.E ana 1 burum (> buru) bƯtu; E2 A.BA bƯt abim; E2.GAL ekallu, and specifically named temples; E2.GAR8 igƗru; E2.GI4.A kallatu; E2! (for KA2) > BƗbilu BURU14 ebnjrim (L47; 111; 255) E2.GAL ekallim (L6; 109; 175; 187); ekallum (L32) NU.SIG2 eknjtim (xlvii:61)

564 GI¼

32 99 56 295

MA2 elep (L238); eleppam (L235); GI¼MA2-šu: eleppašu (L236); GI¼MA2 60 GUR elep šnjšim (L234; 277) EN.LIL2-ut ellilnjt (i:11) lišƗnu EN bƝlu, Ɲnu; EN.LIL2-ut: ellilnjtu; MA¼.EN.GAG muškƝnu; EN + LIL2KI = NIBRU Nippur ikkaru iššiakkum NIN.DINGIR entim (L127; 178; 179); entum (L110) EN Ɲnum (xlix:41)

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS epinnu eqlu ereqqu ERIM er‰etu e‰emtu

393

E¼5 ememmu EZINA2

593

ga

319

GA2 GAD GAG

233 90 230

367

gagû gal

343

gal2

80

gallƗbum gan GAN2 GANBA gar3

143 105 461 333

GAR8 GEME2 gi gi4

567 558 85 326

5

97

APIN epinnam (L259) A. ¼A3 eqlim (L137; 191); A. ¼A3-am eqlam (L43); A. ¼A3-um eqlum (L36); A. ¼A3-šu eqelšu (L27) MAR.GID2.DA ereqqam (L271); MAR.GID2.DA-ma ereqqamma (L272) ‰Ɨbnj; ummƗnu KI er‰etim (xlvii:86) GIR3.PAD.DU e‰emti (L197); GIR3.PAD.DU-šu e‰emtašu (L197) 3-šu (L106) GIDIM4.GIDIM4-šu ememšu (l:39) (= ¼E+TIR); DEZINA2 Ašnan DUMU GIR3.SI3.GA mƗr girsiqêm; NIG2.GA namknjru (makknjru) GA2.GI4.A gagû; ÑUN.GA2 agru LU 2GAD kitû; NA.GAD nƗqidu GIR2.GAG ZABAR karzillu; KA¼.U2.SA.KA.GAG pƯ¨u; MA¼.EN.GAG muškƝnu GA2.GI4.A gagîm (L110); nadƯt gagîm (L180; perhaps read E2.GI4.A or nadƯtim kallatim5) gu2-gal (l:65); u2-gal-la-bu (L127); DDam-gal-nun-na, E2-gal-ma¨, E2-ud-gal-gal and other proper names; D GAL.GAL ilnj rabûtum (li:70); GAL.U¼UM ušumgallu (ii:55); E2.GAL ekallu; ABUL (= KA2 + GAL) abullu; ¼A3.GAL ukullû (L253) E2-kiš-nu-gal2 (ii:21); ÑE2.GAL2 ¨egallu; IGI.GAL2 igigallu; IGI 3 GAL2 ̃; IGI 6 GAL2 1⁄6 ¼U.I gallƗbu (L226) D Da-gan (iv:27) GI¼ GAN2.UR3 maškakƗtu (= KI+LAM); ma¨Ưru im-ta-gar3 (L149); im-ta-gar3-ma (L57); [pa]-g[a]r3-ša (L133b [L133a]); DAM.GAR3 tamkƗru; A.GAR3 ugƗru (cf. DUMU A.GAR3.ME¼ mƗrnj ugƗrim) E2.GAR8 igƗru amtu mi-gi4-ir (iii:48; v:13); šu-gi4-tim (L183; 184 :: MI šugi4-tim L137; 144); I-gi4-gi4 (i:14); E2.GI4.A kallatu; GA2.GI4.A gagû

See BAL2, note to L180, quoting Stol; BAL3 xv.

98

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE GI6 GID2 GIDIM4 GIDRU GIG GIN2 GIR2 GIR3

427 371 577 295 = pa 446 595 10 444

girsiqû GI¼

296

gu gu2 gur GU4 GUL GUN GUR GUR7 GU¼KIN

559 106 111 297 429 108 111 542 468

¨a ÑA2

589 404

¨al

2

¨ar

401

¨arbu ¨arrƗnu ¨ammu ÑE ¨egallu ¨i ¨u ÑUN ¨urƗ‰u

396 396 78 536

SAG.GI6 ‰almat qaqqadim (> ‰almatu) MAR.GID2.DA ereqqu GIDIM4.GIDIM4 ememmnj GI¼ GIDRU ¨ammu NU GIG qadištu GIN2 šiqlu GIR2.GAG ZABAR karzillu šƝpšu; GIR3.PAD.DU e‰emtu; DUMU GIR3.SI3.GA mƗr girsiqêm (> mƗru) mƗr girsiqêm (> mƗru) GI¼ MA2 eleppu; GI¼GIDRU ¨ammu; GI¼APIN.TUG2.KIN ¨arbu; GI¼KIRI6 kirû; GI¼GU.ZA kussû; GI¼GAN2.UR3 maškakƗtu; NU.GI¼.KIRI6 nukarippu; ¼E.GI¼.I3 šamaššammnj; I3.GI¼ šamnu GI¼ GU.ZA kussu gu2-gal (l:65) i-gur-ma (L26) alpu; ¼A3.GU4 kullizu; AB2.GU4.ÑA2 sugullu, littu BUR.GUL purkullu GUN biltu (L37; 38 :: bi-il-tim L36; 41) ¼E.GUR šeu; GI¼MA2 60 GUR > eleppu GUR7.GUR7 karû ¨urƗ‰u ÑA.LA zittu; ¼U.ÑA bƗiru AB2.GU4.ÑA2 sugullu, littu; GEME2.ÑA2 amtu; U8.UDU.ÑA2 (= USDUÑA) ‰Ɲnnj ¨al-qu2 (L9; 126); ¨al-qa2-am (L9; 16; 17; 23; 125); i¨al-li-qu2 (l:50); li-¨al-li-iq (l:75); u2-¨al-li-qu2 (L53; 125) im-ta-¨ar (L46; 108); ma-¨ar (L9; 106; 107; xlvii:76; xlviii:41; 54; xlix:89); ¨ar-ra-an (L26; 32); ¨ar-ra-nam (L103); ¨ar-ra-nim (L112) GI¼ APIN.TUG2.KIN ¨arbam (L260) KASKAL ¨arran (L33) GI¼ GIDRU-šu ¨ammašu (xlvii:44; xlix:14; 50 :: ¨a-aÓ-Óiim L25) ÑE2.GAL2 ¨egallu ÑE2.GAL2 ¨egallim (ii:20; l:64)

ÑUN.GA2 agru GU¼KIN ¨urƗ‰am (L7; 112)

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS

i i3

142 231

ia/u IA2 ib IBILA id ID2 idu ig igƗru IGI

= i+a 598a 535 144 334 579

iššiakkum iš it itinnu ITU im iu iz

¼U.I gallƗbu i3-kal; (L178); i3-li2 (i:31; xlix:25; 46; l:44; li:24); i3-nu (i:1); i3-tum (i:27); I3.BA ipru, piššatu; I3.GI¼ šamnu; ¼E.GI¼.I3 šamaššammnj le-iu-um (i:63); re-iu-um (i:51); BAN2.IA 5 sa > sutu 5-šu (L12; 112); 1 ¼E.GUR.E 5 qâ SILA3 (L121) IBILA aplu; aplnjtu ID2 nƗrnj A2 idƯ (L121; 242); A2-šu idƯšu (L224)

80 449

igigallu i¨ ikkaru IKU ilu imƝru immeru in Ưnu ip ipru iq ir IR3 is i‰ išdu

99

E2.GAR8 igƗrum (L233) IGI Ưnu; IGI.GAL2 igigallu; IGI 3 GAL2 ̃; IGI 6 GAL2 1⁄6 IGI.GAL2 igigallim (xlvii:26); IGI.GAL2-im igigallim (iii:17)

398 105

ENGAR ikkaram (L257) > buru (BUR3.IKU.E ana 1 burum) DINGIR ilim (L266) AN¼E imƝram (L7; 244) UDU immeram (L7; 262)

148 IGI-šu Ưnšu (L247) = ib I3.BA ipram (L178+) = ig 232 50 296 = is

IR3 ardu

SUÑU¼ išdƯ (ii:25; l:29; DU! l:24); SUÑU¼-šu išdašu (xlvii:69) ENSI2 iššiakkum (xlix:42) 212 = id 52 = id = ia = is

¼ITIM itinnim (L274); itinnum (L228) ITU war¨u

100

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

ka KA2

15 133

kab

88

kakku

kal2

343

KALAM kallatu kam

312

kƗmidu KANKAL kar

406

376*

kƗru karû karzillu KASKAL kaspu

166

KA¼ ki

214 461

KID KIN kir KIRI6 kirû KISAL KISLAH KI¼ KI¼IB kitû ku

313 538 346 331e 249 461 425 314 536

KA pû; KA¼.U2.SA.KA.GAG pƯ¨u KA2 bƗbnj; ABUL (= KA2 + GAL) abullu; KA2.DINGIR.RAKI BƗbilu (ii:6; L182: E2!.DINGIR.RAKI) u-kab-bil2-ši-ma (L130); kab-ta-at (xlix:84); kab-tam (li:55); kab-tim (xlix:79) GI¼ TUKUL kakkim (xlvii:22); GI¼TUKUL-ia kakkƯya (l:95); GI¼TUKUL-šu kakkašu (l:87; li:3); kakkƯšu (li:35) li-kal2-lim-šu (xlviii:16); li-kal2-lim-šu-ma (xlviii:85); u2-kal2-lam (L122) mƗtu E2.GI4.A kallatam (L155; 156) kam-ma-al (l:57); mu-kam-me-er (i:54; ii:44); iš-rukam (xlvii:12); a-la-kam (L28; 29); il-kam (L28); kunu-uk-kam (L5; 150); mu-ša-si2-ka[m] (xlvii:92); naaš-pa-kam (L120); MU.3.KAM, MU.4 KAM > šattu LU 2[TUG2].DU8.A kƗmidim (L274) nidûtu i-za-kar-ma (L20; 103; 131); iz-za-kar (L18); KAR kƗru KAR kƗr (L53) GUR7.GUR7 karê (iii:21) GIR2.GAG ZABAR karzil siparrim (L215; or GIR2.GAGZABAR karzillim) ¨arranu KU3.BABBAR kasap (L101; 105; 119); kaspam (L102; 113; 138); kaspim (L102; 117; 118; 119; 166) šikaru; KA¼.U2.SA.KA.GAG pƯ¨u KI er‰etu; terminating place names, e.g. KA2.DINGIR.RAKI BƗbilu AD.KID atkuppu GI¼ APIN.TUG2.KIN ¨arbu zi-kir-šu (xlix:76) (or = SAR); GI¼KIRI6 kirû; NU.GI¼.KIRI6 nukarippu GI¼ KIRI6 kirîm (L137; 191); GI¼KIRI6-šu kirâšu (L27) (= sa + par4) saparru maškanu kiššatu KI¼IB.LA2 rittu LU 2GAD kitîm (L274)

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS KU3 kul2 kullizu kulmašitu kum KUN KURUN kussû

468 429

la LA2 LAH5 lam

55 481 206 435

LAM2 laputtû lem li li2

172

libittu LIL2 lim

191 77 214

449 59 231

313 449

LIMMU lišƗnu littu

597

lu LU2 lubnjšu LUGAL lu¨ LUKUR

537 330 151 321 554

101

KU3.BABBAR kaspu tu-kul2-ti (l:19) ¼A3.GU4 kullizam (L258) NU.BAR kulmašƯtam (L180) il-kum (L40); a-na-ad-di-ik-kum (L160) zibbu MI 2 KURUN.NA sƗbƯtu GI¼ GU.ZA kussi (L5); kussiam (l:45) ÑA.LA zittu KI¼IB.LA2 rittu; ¼AMAN2.LA2 šamallû (= DU+DU) MA2.LAÑ5 mala¨u šu-pe2-lam (xlix:75); a-wi-lam (L112; 113; 119); bi-iblam (L159; 160); mi-lam (l:69); ne-me-lam (L101); itba-lam (L9; 10+; 11); ub-lam (L138; 149; 156); lu-ublam (L9); u2-ša-lam-ma (L125); u2-[š]a-lam-šim-ma (L138; 149); i-lam-ma-du (li:60); ‰a-lam (li:38); u2kal2-lam (L122) ME.LAM2 melemmnj NU.BANDA3 laputtûm (L33) lem-nam (l:27) :: le-em-nam (li:57) be-li2 (L282); be-li2-ia (xlvii:90; xlviii:42); be-li2-šu (ii:9; L17; 18; L37 vnt. be-li-šu); 77; “243”; 282; xlviii:26; 33); be-li2-šu-ma (L244); i3-li2 (i:31; xlix:25; 46; l:44; li:24); mu-ba-li2-im (ii:37); ‰i-li2 (xlvii:46) SIG4 libitti (xlviii:51; li:76) EN.LIL2 ellilnjtu; NIBRU (= EN + LIL2KI) Nippur a-ka-lim (L133a); ap-lim (L137); a-wi-lim (L112; 113); ¨a-ab-lim (xlvii:73); ¨a-ba-lim (xlvii:60); ¨u-buul-lim (L151); i-lim (L103; 106); i-tu-lim (L129); šuku-lim (L57); u2-tu-lim (L131; 132); li-kal2-lim-šu-ma (xlviii:85) 4, cf. BAN2.LIMMU 4 sâ (> sutu) EME-šu lišƗnšu (L192) AB2.GU4.ÑA2 liƗtim (L253; 254; 255; 256; 261; 264; 265; 267; 271); liƗtum (L264; 265); cf. sugullu LU 2GAD

kitû; LU2[TUG2].DU8.A kƗmidu SIG2.BA lubnjšam (L178; 178) šarru šu-lu¨ (ii:1) nadƯtu; LUKUR DAMAR.UTU nadƯt Marduk

102

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

lum

565

a-wi-lum (L112; xlviii:3; 75; xlix:2; 11; 18; 39); balum (L7; 57; 59; 113+; 123); be-lum (ii:37; iii:24; xlix:53; l:19); bi-ib-bu-lum (L45; [48]); el-lum (iii:55); gi-it-ma-lum (iii:37); ¨a-ab-lum (xlviii:3); ¨u-bu-ullum (L48; 151+; 152); mu-uš-ta-lum (iii:36); mu-tabbi-lum (iv:8); ZU2.LUM suluppnj

ma MA2 ma¨

342 122 57

MA.NA mana MA2 eleppu; MA2.LAÑ5 mala¨u ma¨-ra (xlix:100); ma¨-ri-šu-nu (L9+; 10); ma¨-ri-tim (L47); E2-ma¨ (iii:69); UR.MAÑ nƝšu GANBA ma¨Ưr (L108) MA2.LAÑ5 mala¨um (L234) 1 mana kaspam (L24; 139); ѿ MA.NA kaspam (L140); ½ MA.NA kaspam (L59) i-ta-mar (L101; 102); i-mar-ra-ar (L44); mar-‰a-am (li:57); MAR.GID2.DA ereqqu AMAR.UTU Marduk passim; LUKUR DAMAR.UTU nadƯt Marduk (L182+) DUMU.MI2 mƗrat (L175; li:51); DUMU.MI2-i mƗrti (L161); DUMU.MI2-ka mƗratka (L159); DUMU.MI2šu mƗrtƯšu (L38; 180; 182; 183; 184) DUMU mƗr (L170); mƗram (L188); mƗrim (i:9); mƗrum (L168; 191; l:83); DUMU-i: mƗri (L168); DUMU-ša mƗrƯša (L172; 176); DUMU-šu mƗrašu (L116; 168; 169); mƗrišu (L166; 168); DUMU.ME¼ mƗrƯ (L119; 135+; 162; 163; 166; 167+; 191; 170++; 172; 173; 174; mƗrnj (L167; 170+; 173; 174); DUMU.ME¼-ša: mƗrƯša (L171a); mƗrnjša (L172); DUMU.ME¼-ša-ma mƗrƯšama (L162; 171b); DUMU.ME¼-šu mƗrƯšu (L190); DUMU.ME¼-u2-a mƗrnja (L170; 171a); DUMU GIR3.SI3.GA mƗr girsiqêm (L187; 192; 193); DUMU A.GAR3.ME¼ mƗrnj ugƗrim (L54); DUMU.UM.MI.A mƗr ummânim (L188) ½ = mišlu (L156); MA¼.EN.GAG muškƝnu urƯ‰u GI¼ GAN2.UR3 maškakƗtim (L260) KISLAÑ maškanim (L113) KALAM mƗt (xlvii:50); mƗtam (L280); mƗtim (i:7; xlvii:87; xlviii:62; 70; 81; 82 :: ma-tim i:33) ME.LAM2 melemmnj; NUN.ME apkallu tƗ¨Ɨzu (l:93 :: ME6! li:2) tƗ¨Ɨzu (> ME3)

ma¨Ưru mala¨u mana mar

307

Marduk mƗrtu

mƗru

MA¼ MA¼2 maškakƗtu maškanu mƗtu

74 76

ME ME3 ME6!

532 98 97

GI¼

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS melemmnj ME¼ mi MI2

533 427 554

mi3 MIN mu mur MURU2 mušaru muškƝnu

532 570 61 401 337

na

70

NA4 nadƯtu

229

NAGAR nagƗru nam

560

namknjru

nap¨aru nappƗ¨u nƗqidu nƗrnj narû

6

79

103

ME.LAM2 melemmƯ (xlix:48) DUMU.ME¼ mƗrnj; DUMU A.GAR3.ME¼ mƗrnj ugƗrim UM.MI.A ummânim; DUMU.UM.MI.A mƗr ummânim sinništu; DUMU.MI2 mƗrtu; feminine prefix: MI2 KURUN.NA sƗbƯtu; MI2 šu-gi4-tim (L137; 144); MI MI 2ZI.IK.RU.UM (L178; 179; 180; cf. DUMU 2ZIIK.RU.UM L187; 192; 193) li-iq-mi3 (li:34) 2 (L17); BAN2.MIN 2 sâ (> sutu) šattu; NU.MU.SU almattu ig-mur-ma (L61); mur-‰a-am (li:55) GU4.AB2.MURU2.SAG alpim qablim (> alpu) SAR mušara (L228) MA¼.EN.GAG muškƝnim (L8; 175); MA¼.EN.NI! muškƝnum (L140) NA.GAD nƗqidu; NA.RU narû; MI2 KURUN.NA sƗbƯtu; MA.NA mana abnu LUKUR nadƯt (L180); nadƯtam (L144; 181); nadƯtim (L137); nadƯtum (L40; 110; 178; 179); nadƯt Marduk > Marduk nagƗru NAGAR nagƗrim (L274) a-da-nam (L13); ar-nam (L134; 142; l:47); da-a-a-nam (L5); di-nam (L5); ¨ar-ra-nam (L103); id-di-nam (L9; xlvii:29); ki-n[a]m (xlvii:6); lem-nam (l:27 :: le-em-nam li:57); ‰e-nam (i:35; xlviii:92); ša-ni-nam (xlvii:82; xlviii:101); u2-ba-nam (L127); uz-nam (l:2). or makknjru. NIG2.GA namknjr (L6; 165; 166; 167; 170; 171a; 172; 180; 181; 182; 183); namknjrim (L125); NIG2.GA-šu namknjrƯšu (L191) ¼U.NIGIN2-šu-nu nap¨arƯšunu (li:74) [SI]MUG nappƗ¨im (L274) NA.GAD nƗqidam (L261) ID2.ID2-šu nƗrƗtƯšu (l:7); ID2 BURANUN.NA Purattim (iv:26) NA.RU-i narî (xlviii:9; 15); NA.RU-ia narîya (xlvii:75; xlviii:66; 79; xlix:4; 20); NA.RU-um narûm (xlviii:84)6

Vnt.: xlviii:9 na-ru-u2 (ms. i); xlviii:15 NA4NA.RU2.A (ms. i); xlviii:66 NA.RU2[A-ia] (ms. g); xlviii:79 NA4NA.RU2.A-i[a] (ms. h).

104

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

nƝšu nidûtu ni NIBRU NIE¼ NIG2 NIGIN2 nim

231 99 585c 597 483 433

nin

556

nu

75

nukarippu num2 NUMUN NUN

565 72 87

pa PAD par4 palû

295 469 249

parsiktu pe2

214

pi pi2

383 214

UR.MAÑ nƝšum (L244; 266) KANKAL nidûtim (L44; 63) MA¼.EN.NI! (for MA¼.EN.GAG) > muškƝnu (= EN.LIL2KI) Nippur 3 parsikat (> parsiktu) NIG2.GA namknjru, makknjru ¼U.NIGIN2 nap¨aru da-a-a-nim (xlvii:85); da-an-nim (xlvii:22) :: dan-nim (L34; li:35); di-a-nim (xlvii:70); di-nim (L3; 12; 34); du-un-nu-[n]im (L53); ¨ar-ra-nim (L112); i-nim (xlix:70); ma-aš-ka-nim (L113); na-da-nim (L8); na-dina-nim (L9; 12); i-te-li-a-nim (L58); u2-ša-at-li-munim (xlvii:25) ib-bu-u2-nin-ni-ma (xlvii:41); NIN bƝltu; NIN.DINGIR entu NU.BAR kulmašƯtu; NU.BANDA3 laputtû; NU.GIG qadištu; NU.GI¼.KIRI6 nukarippu; NU.MU.SU almattu; NU.SIG2 eknjtu NU.GI¼.KIRI6 nukarippim (L60) da-num2 (ii:23; v:3) zƝru rubûm; NUN.ME apkallu PA.PA ša ¨ammƗtim, wakil ¨ammƯm GIR3.PAD.DU e‰emtu sa-par4 (ii:68) > KISAL BALA palê (xlix:64); BALA-ia palêya (xlix:47; l:98); BALA-šu palêšu (l:53) NIE¼ 3 parsikat (L271) e-pe2-ši-im (L42); i¨-¨e-ep-pe2 (L37); ip-pe2-ma (L115); i-ip-pe2-eš (L232); i-ip-pe2-eš-ma (L62; 63); ip-pe2-šu (L117); ip-pe2-tu-u2 (L53); it-te-pe2 (L114); it-te-pe2 (L241); pe2-sa3-tam (L267); šu-pe2-lam (xlix:75) a-pi2-im (li:32); ¨a-am-mu-ra-pi2 (xlvii:9; xlviii:95); ¨aam-mu-ra-pi2-mi (xlviii:20); in-na-pi2-i¨-ma (L25); kiiš-pi2 (L2); l[i-n]a-ap-pi2-iš-ma (xlviii:19); li-pi2-it (L66); li-ip-li-ip-pi2 (iv:67); li-iš-te-pi2 (xlvii:88); muuq-qe2-el-pi2-tim (L240); mu-ra-pi2-iš (iii:4); mu-še-pi2 (iv:53); mu-še-ep-pi2 (iv:59); na-ak-[k]a-pi2-ma (L251); na-pi2-iš-ta-šu (li:66); na-pi2-iš-ti (l:12); na-pi2iš-tim (iii:66) :: na-pi2-iš-tim3 (l:18); na-pi2-iš-tum

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS

pƯ¨u piš piššatu pu pû Purattim

346

105

(L24); ne-pi2-ša (L115; 116); pi2-¨a-su2 (L256); pi2-ilši-im (L21; 125); pi2-tum (L53); ši-pi2-ir (L188; 189); ši-pi2-ir-šu (L229; 233; 235); šu-pi2-i-im (i:34); šu-uppi2-im (xlix:59); mup-pi2-im (L171b; 178); ud-da-appi2-ir (L30; 31); u¨2-tap-pi2-id (L196; 198; 247); u2pi2-i¨ (L41); u2-šu-pi2-u3 (iv:62); za-qa2-pi2-im (L60; 61) KA¼.U2.SA.KA.GAG pƯ¨am (L111) na-piš-ti-šu (xlix:93) I3.BA piššatam (L178)

= bu KA pƯ (v:22; xlix:95); KA-šu pîšu (xlix:79; li:87) BURANUN.NA (= UD. KIB.NUN.NA) Purattim (iv:26) BUR.GUL purkullim

ID 2

purkullu qa qa2

62 319

qablu qadištu qal

343

qaqqadu qar

333

qarnu qarrƗdu qe2

461

dam-qa2-am (xlvii:7); dam-qa2-ti-šu (l:104); ¨al-qa2-am (L9; 17; 23; 125; 240); i-ba-qa2-ru-ši (L150); i-ba-aqaq2-ru-ši (L179); iqabbƯma (i-bi!-ab-bi-ma, L281); iqa2-ab-bu-ma (L9); i-ša-qa2-lu (L24); mu-dam-mi-qa2at (xlix:85); na-as2-qa2 (xlvii:81; xlviii:99); ne-me-qa2am (l:3); qa2-ab-la-tim (xlvii:32); qa2-at (L7; 20; 194; li:20); qa2-ba-al (iii:71; li:26 :: ¼EN.¼EN qablim l:93; li:2); qa2-bi-a-at (li:52); qa2-bu-u2 (L26); qa2-du-um (L176a); qa2-qa2-ad (L102); qa2-qa2-di-šu (xlviii:86); qa2-ri-tim (L120); qa2-ti (L9; 35); qa2-ti-šu (iii:56; L6; 9; 19; 112; 188; 189; 253); ri-qa2 (xlix:104); su2?-qa2am (L250); za-qa2-pi2-im (L60; 61); šar-ra-[qa2-ni-šu (L125); šar-ra-qa2-nu-um (L8); šu-ur2-qa2-am (L6) ¼EN.¼EN qablim (l:93; li:2) NU GIG qadištam (L180) i-ša-qal (L59; 114; 116); i-ša-qal-ma (L119); i-ša-qalši-im-ma (L156); i-qal-lu-u2-ši (L110); i-qal-lu-u2-šunu-ti (L157) > ‰almat qaqqadim ib-ba-qar (L118); qar-ra-du-um (l:82); qar-ra-di-šu (li:8) SI-šu qaranšu (L248); qar-ni-šu (L251) UR.SAG qarrƗdun (ii:32) i-le-qe2 (L9; 10; 12; 47; 60; 63; 170; 172; 176a+; 216; 278; i-le-qe2-ma (L49; 50; 106; 142; 165; 171b; 172); il-qe2 (L104; 111; 120; 186); il-qe2-ma (L49; 185; 188;

106

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

qer qi qi2

346 538 461

qinnazu qu qu2

191 536

qû qul2 qum

429 191

ra RA2

328 206

rƝû rƝdû ri! ri2

86 38

rittu ru rubûm

68

sa

104

254); il-te-qe2 (L25) :: il-te-di! (L34; 105; 113); le-qe2em (L106; 113); mu-uq-qe2-el-pi2-tim (L240); qe2-reeb-šu (li:59) qer-bi-it (li:47); qer-bu (L13) dum-qi2-ia (li:53); ¨u-ul-qi2-im (L9+++; 10; 11); ¨u-ulqi2-ia-mi (L9); ¨u-ul-qi2-im-ma (L10); ¨u-ul-qi2-šu (L9; 10; 11); ¨u-ul-lu-qi2-im (i:36); ip-qi2-sum (L253); i-qi2-ip-šu (L253); i-qi2-ip-ma (L107); i-qi2-šu (iv:41); ir-ta-qi2-ma (L15); li-ša-am-qi2-it (li:9); ma-aš-qi2-tim (iii:40); mi-qi2-it-ti (L266); mu-še-eš-qi2 (iv:4); pa-qi2id (ii:66); pu-uš-qi2 (xlvii:19); pu-uš-qi2-im (iv:39); qi2iš-ti (L34; 165); qi2-iš-ti-šu (L228; 234); qi2-ip-tim (L111); ši-qi2-tim (L55); wa-ar-qi2-im (ii:27) USAN3 qinnaz (L202) ¨al-qu2 (L9; 126; 240); i-¨al-li-qu2 (l:50); i-le-qu2-u2 (L174); i-le-qu2-ma (L167; 178); il-qu2-u2 (L47; 49; 51; 101; 106; 107; 113; 120); il-qu2-u2-šu (L186); ilqu2-šu-ma (L190; 191); im-qu2-tu (L232); im-qu2-utma (L229); im-ta-qu2-ut (L278); iš-qu2-lu (L9; 119; 278; 281) :: iš-lu!-lu (L281); iš-ri-qu2 (L265); iz-qu2-up (L60; 62); li-dam-mi-qu2 (xlviii:58); qu2-ra-di-im (iii:60); ri-qu2-su2 (L191); šu-qu2-ra-tim (xlvii:74; xlviii:13); u2-¨al-li-qu2 (L53; 125; 232; 237) SILA3 qa (L270) i-qul2-ma (xlix:5; 22); li-qul2-ma (xlviii:79) em-qum (iv:7); ¨u-ul-qum (L9); mu-uš-te-mi-qum (ii:19; iv:65)

A.RA2 adi; GU4.A2.UR3.RA alpim warkim (> alpu); KA2.DINGIR.RAKI BƗbilu SIPA rƝûm (L57; xlvii:43); rƝi (iv:45) AGA.U¼ rƝdûm (L26) i-pa-am-ma-ri!-šu (L32, line 34, for i-pa-am-ma-ar-šu) da-ri2-iš (iv:21); da-ri2-tam (i:21); da-ri2-um (v:1); šar3ri2 (ii:55; iii:16; 70; xlvii:79); ¼u-me-ri2-im (xlvii:50) KI¼IB.LA2-šu rittašu (L195; 218; 253) NA.RU narû NUN rubûm (xlix: 98) SA.SAL šašallašu; KA¼.U2.SA.KA.GAG pƯ¨u

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS sa3

586 = za

sa6 SAG

356 115

sƗbƯtu SAL saparru SAR sassinu si si2

112 84

SI3 si20

164 147 = zi2

SIG2 SIG4 SILA3 SIMUG SIN2 sinništu

539 567 62 338 79

SIPA su su2

295m 7 6

554 152

107

a-na-sa3-a¨ (L168); ap-lu-sa3 (L178); er-re-sa3 (L178); i-na-sa3-a¨ (L168; 169); i-na-sa3-¨u (L193); in-na-assa3-a¨ (L158); i-na-sa3-aq-ma (L60; 170); i-sa3-ak-ki-il (L141); mu-sa3 (L163; 171b; 172+; 176a; 176b); pe2sa3-tam (L267); pu-ru-sa3-am (L5); sa3-ar (L11; 13); sa2-ar-ra-tim (L3); sa3-ar-ru-tim (L109); sa3-ar-ru-tum (L109); u2-sa3-a¨-¨a-mu-ši (L172); u2-sa3-ap-pa-a¨ (L141; 143); wa-ar-ka-sa3 (171b; 172; 178; 179+; 180; 181; 182) sa6-ap-¨a-tim (vi:50) SAG.GI6 ‰almat qaqqadim > ‰almatu; GU4.AB2.MURU2.SAG alpim qablim > alpu; UR.SAG qarrƗdu; E2-sag-ila2 (xlvii:93; xlviii:50) MI 2 KURUN.NA sƗbƯtum (L108); sƗbƯtam (L108) SA.SAL šašallašu KISAL (= sa+par4) sapar (ii:68) SAR mušaru [ZA].DIM? sassinim? (L274) SI qarnu i-i¨-¨a-as-si2 (L172); si2-ki-il-tam (L141); si2-im-maam (L206; 215; 218; 225; li:57) :: si2-ma-am (L219) :: si20-im-ma-am (L224; si20-im-mi-im L221); si2-ma-at (iii:24); si2-ma-tim (iii:63) DUMU GIR3.SI3.GA mƗr girsiqêm > mƗru si20-im-ma-am (L224 :: si2-im-ma-am); si20-im-mi-im (L221) šƯpƗtim; SIG2.BA lubnjšu; NU.SIG2 eknjtu libittu qu nappƗ¨u AB.SIN2 šerum MI2 sinništam (L167); sinništim (L163); sinništum (L128; 130; 133B; 134; 135; 162; 163; 167; 172+; 173+) rƝû NU.MU.SU almattu; A.SU! (li:59, for A.ZU) GEME2-su2 amassu (L169; 281); aš-ša-su2 (L161); E2su2 bissu (L2; 26; 32; L191: E2-ba!); i-ka-su2-šu-ma (L155+); i-ka-su2-šu-nu-ti-ma (L129); ik-ta-ša-su2 (L2); im-¨a-su2-ma (L249); i-na-ak-ki-su2 (L226) :: ina-ak-ki-su (L192; 194; 205); note: ir-ku-su (L194) for expected ir-ku-su2; DUMU.MI2-su2 mƗrassu (L210); mu-du-su2-nu (L9); mu-ra-bi-su2 (L193); ni-iz-ma-su2

108

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

sugullu

SUÑU¼ suluppnj sum2 snjtu

201

‰a ‰Ɨbnj ‰almnj ‰almƗtu ‰Ɲnnj

586

‰i ‰i2

147 84

‰u ‰u2

555 6

‰ululu ‰ur

437

ša ¼A3 ¼AÑ ša ¨ammƗtim ša¨û ¼AM2

555

(iii:1); pi2-¨a-su2 (L256); ri-qu2-su2 (L191); su2-un (L157; 158); su2-ni-ša (L155; 156); su2-qa2-am (L250, =? su-qa2-am); ‰i-ba-su2 (L49; 50); uk-tar-ri-su2 (L161); u2-ra-ak-ki-su2 (L253); uš-ta-¨i-su2 (L188; 189); IR3-su2 warassu (L280; 281; 282); wa-ar-ka-su2 (L18; 168); KUN-su2 zibbasu (L248) AB2.GU4.ÑA2 sugullam (L253; 254; 255; 256; 261; 264; 265; 267; 271); sugullum (L264; 265); to be read liƗtim and liƗtum (> littu) išdnj ZU2.LUM suluppƯ (L237) la-ma-sum2 (xlviii:48) BAN2 snjt (L269); BAN2.MIN 2 sâ (L268); BAN2.LIMMU 4 sâ (L272); BAN2.IA 5 sa (L111)

ERIM ‰Ɨb (L33); ERIM-šu ‰ƗbƗšu (li:79) ALAM-ia ‰almƯya (xlvii:76; xlviii:6) SAG.GI6 ‰almƗt qaqqadim (i:41; xlvii:11) USDUÑA (=U8.UDU.ÑA2) ‰ƝnƯ (L35; 57; 261; 265); ‰Ɲnu (L264; 265)

353 384 53

187

mu-še-‰i2 (v:6); šu-‰i2-im (L172); u‰-‰i2 (L172); u2-‰i2a-am (L4); u2-‰i2-a-am-ma (L3); u2-še-‰i2-ši-na-ši-im (xlvii:21); uš-te-‰i2 (L15); uš-te-‰i2-a-am (L16); wa-‰i2a-at (L143); wa-‰i2-ma (L142); ma-¨a-‰i2-im (L116; 211; 245); ma-¨a-‰i2-šu (L207); u2-ša-am-‰i2-ši (L178); uš-tam-‰i2-ši (L179); li-iš-¨e-el-‰i2 (l:25); pa-ar-‰i2 (ii:64); ‰i2-im-di (li:61) am-¨a-‰u2 (L206); i-‰u2-tim (xlix:65); re-‰u2-u2-a (l:67); u2-‰u2-ra-ti-ia (xlviii:73; xlix:9; 31); u2-‰u2-ratim (iii:31); u2-‰u2-ra-tu-u2-a (xlvii:91); u2-še-e‰-‰u2-u2šu (L154) AN.DUL3 ‰ulnjl (ii:48) i‰-‰ur-ma (L133b); li-‰ur (xlviii:67)

¼A3.GAL ukullû; ¼A3.GU4 kullizu; A.¼A3 eqlu ša¨û > wakil ¨ammim (PA.PA) ¼AÑ ša¨âm (L8) šimu

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS šamallû ¼AMAN2 428 šamaššammnj šamê šamnu šar 152

šar3

151

šarru šašallašu šattu ¼E

367

¼EN šƝpšu šerum šeu

8

ši ši3 šikaru šim

449 592

šimu šƯpƗtim šiqlu šƯram

215

109

¼AMAN2.LA2 šamallâm (L106); šamallêm (L102); šamallûm (L101); ¼AMAN2.LA2-šu: šamallâšu (L107) ¼AMAN2.LA2 šamallû ¼E.GI¼.I3 šamaššammƯ (L49) AN šamê (xlvii:86) I3.GI¼ šamnam (L104; 237) a-šar (L101; 102; 112; 123; 125; 173; xlix:87; l:86; li:2); šar-ra-aq (L7; 9+; 10); šar-ra-qa2-nu-um (L8); šar-ra-qa2-ni-šu (L125); šar-ru-um (L34; 35; 129; xlvii:4); šar-ri-im (L26; 27; 28; 32; 33; xlix:96); šar-rusu2 (xlix:75; l:20; 103); šar-ru-tim (ii:13; v:2); šar-rutam (i:21); šar-ru-ti-šu (iv:20; xlix:48; l:29); šar-ru-ti-ia (xlix:58); u2-ta-aš-šar (L20; 103; 130); mu-šar-bi2 (ii:5); mu-šar-bu-u2 (iv:19); u2-šar-bi2-u2-šu (i:15); mušar-bu-u3 (xlix:57); u2-šar-bi2-i‰ (xlvii:37); u2-šar-ši (li:18); u2-šar-ši-šu (li:46); u2-šar-ši-ši-na-ti (xlvii:39); u2-šar-šu-šu (L137); mu-šar-ši-du (iv:14); mu-šar-ši-id (ii:58) ¼AR3 šar (i:2; ii:22; xlvii:77; xlviii:7; 96; xlix:13); šar3-ri2 (ii:55; iii:16; 70; xlvii:79) LUGAL šarrum (i:63; iii:65; xlvii:79; xlviii:62; xlix:40) SA.SAL-šu šašallašu (L248) MU šattim; cf. MU.3.KAM (L30; 44; 117); MU.4 KAM (L60) ¼E šeu, ummetu; ¼E.GUR šeu; ¼E.GI¼.I3 šamaššammnj; ¼E.NUMUN zƝru ¼EN.¼EN qablu GIR3-šu šƝpšu (L246) AB.SIN2 šerum (L62) ¼E šeam (L104; 111; 113; 237); šeim (L4; 108; 113); ¼E.GUR šeam (L44; 56; 63; 57; 58; 60; 255) ni-ši3 (i:12; 4:45) KA¼ šikarim (L108; 110) eš-te-i-ši-na-ši[m] (xlvii:18) :: eš-te-i-ši-na-ši-im (xlvii:21; cf. id-di-nu-ši-im L171b); iš-ru-uk-šim (L150); u2-[š]a-lam-šim-ma (L149) ¼A[M]2 šim (L108); ¼AM2-šu šƯmƯšu (L199; 220); ¼AM2-ša šƯmƯša (L238) SIG2 šƯpƗtim (L104; 237) GIN2 šiqil (L17; 204; 228) UZU šƯram (l:27)

110

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

¼ITIM šu šum

440 354 69

¼U¼AN

571

ta tab

139 124

tƗ¨Ɨzu tam

381

tam2 tamkƗru

7

557

itinnu ¼U.I gallƗbu; ¼U.NIGIN2 nap¨aru; ¼U.ÑA bƗiru šum-ma (passim); šum-šu (i:17; iii:5; L113; 116; xlix:35; 76; 102); aš-šum (L47; 107; 132; xlix:36); erre-šum (L46; 47; 49; 50; xlix:36!: for er-re-tim); ib-baab-lu-šum (L159; 160); id-di-nu-šum (L9; 10; 107); iddi-nu-šum-ma (L125); in-na-ad-di-iš-šum (L17; 30; 31); in-na-ad-di-iš-šum-ma (L28); in-na-ad-nu-šum (L62; 112); iq-bi-šum (L49); i-ri-a-ab-bu-šum (L23); iša-ak-ka-nu-šum-ma (L13); i-ša-ka-nu-šum (L61); i-šimu-šum (i:13); iš-ru-ku-šum (xlviii:98); li-ša-AB-BI¨a-aš-šum (xlix:63); li-ša-‰i-a-aš-šum-ma (li:65); li-šiim-šum (xlix:72; l:63); li-iš-ku-un-šum (l:30; li:7; li-teer-šum-ma (l:89); ul-du-šum (L119; 137; 138); u2-kiin-nu-šum (i:26); u2-ta-ar-ru-šum-ma (L27) ̃ (L114; 116; 140)

i-tab-ba-al (L2; 26; 41; 159); at-tab-ba-al-ši-na-ti (xlvii:56); mu-tab-bi-lum (iv:8); it-tab-ši (L48; 120; 152); uš-tab-ši (L42; 49; 52; 144) ME6! tƗ¨Ɨzim (l:93; li:2; normally ME3) ab-bu-ut-tam (L146); a2-ni-tam (xlviii:39); aš-ša-tam (L128; 148); a-wa-tam (xlviii:4; 15); a-wi-il-tam (L110); bi-il-tam (L65); bi-tam (L21); bi-ti-iq-tam (L102); da-ri2-tam (i:21); er-‰e-tam (li:11); er-re-tam (li:82); ¨i-mi-tam (L142); ¨u-ub-tam (L22); i-ši-tam (li:5); kab-tam (l:47; li:55); ki-it-tam (v:20); ma-ru-uštam (li:83); ma-tam (xlvii:6; xlviii:37); mu-gal-li-tam (xlvii:38); na-ap-ša-tam (iv:2); ne-er-tam (L1); ni-ditam (L61); ra-bi-tam (l:48); sa3-a¨-ma-aš-tam (li:6); si2-ki-il-tam (L141); ‰i-ib-tam (L48); ša-at-tam (L30); ša-lu-uš-tam (L64); ša-ni-tam (L141); šar-ru-tam (i:21); še-ri-ik-tam (L138); ta-ši-im-tam (xlviii:76); ter¨a-tam (L159; 160); zi2-it-tam (L137); i‰-‰a-ab-tam-ma (L109); mu-tam-me-e¨ (iii:47); uš-ta-tam-¨i-ir (L146; cf. uš-ta-ma-a¨-¨a-ar L1457) :: tam2-¨a-ri-im (l:86) tam2-¨a-ri-im (l:86) DAM.GAR3 tamkƗr (L106); tamkƗram (L107); tamkƗrim (L101); tamkƗrum (L32; 104; 118; 119); DAM.GAR3-šu tamkƗršu (L116)

The syllabification makes tam inappropriate here.

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS tap tar tarba‰u ter

124 12

ti tƯlu2 tim

73 94

tu TUG2

58 536

TUKUL

536

375

111

a-tap-pa-šu (L55); uš-tap-zi2-ir-ši-na-ti (xlvii:58) i-tar-ka-su2?-ma (L109) TUR3 tarba‰im (L266) ter-¨a-tum (L139); ter-¨a-tam (L159; 160); ter-¨a-ti-ša (L138) DU6 til2 (l:79) DA!-ni-a-tim, for a2-ni-a-tim (li:85); aš-ša-tim (L129); a-wa-a-tim (xlviii:78); a-wi-lu-tim (li:48); ba-al-mu2-tim (l:35); bi-il-tim (L36); bi-tim (ii:30; li:75); bu-bu-tim (l:74); da-mi-iq-tim (iv:57; xlvii:94); di-im-ma-tim (l:55); el-lu-tim (iii:34; iv:22; 36); ep-še-tim (L49; 56); er-‰e-tim (i:5; 23; xlvii:69; l:38; 66; li:72); er-be2-tim (ii:4); er-re-tim (li:84); ez-ze-tim (li:32); ga-ma-ar-tim (L58); ¨a-mu-uš-tim (L60); i-‰u2-tim (xlix:65); i-ša-tim (L25; li:31); kab-tim (xlix:79); kib-ra-tim (i:18); ki-išša-a-tim (L117); :: ki-iš-ša-tim (L118); ki-na-tim (iv:53; xlviii:97); le-em-ne-tim (l:105); le-u2-tim (xlvii:28); ma¨-ri-tim (L47); ma-‰a-ru-tim (L7; 122; 123; 124; 125+); ma-aš-qi2-tim (iii:40); ma-ta-tim (li:42); ma-tim (i:33; ii:48; v:22 :: KALAM v:17; xlvii:33; 70; 71; xlviii:68; xlix:77); me-re-eš-tim (iii:19); mi-ši-tim (l:5); mi-ri-tim (iii:39); mu-na-ab-tim (L136); mu-tim (l:60; li:63); na-aš-pa-ku-tim (L120); na-ba-al-ka-at-tim (L125); na-pi2-iš-tim (iii:66; L3); niip-la-tim (L41); ni-pu-tim (L114); qa2-ab-la-tim (xlvii:32); qa2-ri-tim (L120); qi2-ip-tim (L111); ra-bi2a-tim (l:102); ra-bu-tim (iii:45); ra-bu-u2-tim (ii:64); rebi-tim (iv:52); re-bu-tim (L44; 117); ri-ik-sa-tim (L7; 122; 123); sa2-ar-ra-tim (L3); sa6-ap-¨a-tim (ii:50); si2ma-tim (iii:63); ša-at-tim (L44; 47; 48+; 60; 63; 117); ša-na-tim (L62); ša-ni-tim (L148; 159); šar-ru-tim (v:2; xlix:48; l:45; 57); ši-bu-ul-tim (L112+); ši-im-tim (L12; xlix:71; l:62; ši-ma-tim (xlix:54); ši-qi2-tim (L55); MIšu-gi4-tim (L137); šu-qu2-ra-tim (xlvii:74; xlviii:13); ta-ši-im-tim (ii:22) ta-ad-mi-iq-tim (L102); ta-na-da-tim (xlix:1); te-ep-ti-tim (L44); te-li-tim (iii:49); te-re-tim (iii:51); u2-‰u2-ra-tim (iii:31); wa-ašmu2-tim (xlvii:19) LU 2[TUG]2.DU8.A GI¼

TUKUL kakku

kƗmidu; GI¼APIN.TUG2.KIN ¨arbu

112

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

tulû tum

207

TUR3

87a

ma mam mar2

= da 557 114

me4

376

mi mi3

= di 73

mu mu2

595 58

mup mur

138 108

u u2

411 318

u3

455

UBUR-ša tulâša (L194) a-wa-tum (l:31); a-wi-lu-tum (xlix:43); bi-ti-iq-tum (L45); da-mi-iq-tum (l:97); e-¨i-il-tum (L117; 119); eri-iš-tum (iii:28); ¨a-ab-ba-tum (L23); ¨a-ab-tum (L23); ¨u-ub-tum (L23); i-ša-tum (L25); i3-tum (iv:27); ma-ru-uš-tum (l:31); na-pi2-iš-tum (L24); ni-pu-tum (L115; 116); pi2-tum (L53); ra-bi2-tum (xlix:82); sa3ar-ru-tum (L109); ‰i-ir-tum (li:41); ter-¨a-tum (L139) tarba‰u

ba-la-mam (l:59) iš-ta-mar2 (L39; xlix:35); i-pa-ma[r]2 (L119); ip-pa-am-mar2 (L32) ip-me4-ri-šu (L32); me4-bi-a-at (L240); li-me4-er-šu (xlix:49; l:46; 71); li-me4-er-šu-ma (l:4; li:44) :: li-te-eršum-ma (l:89); um-me4-bi (L236) :: um-me-eb-bi (L237; 238; 240); um-te4-eb-bu-u2 (L237; 240) bu-ul-mi3-šu (L170; 171a); ša-mi3-ip (iv:38); mu-mi3-ib (ii:7); u2-mi3-ib (xlvii:34; xlviii:33) aš-mu2-ru (xlviii:67; 49:4 etc.); ba-al-mu2-tim (l:35); ipmu2-ra-aš-šu-ma (L32); iš-mu2-ru-ši-im (L171b; 178+; 179); mu2-ub-bi-im (i:48); mu2-u¨2-di-im (i:56); wa-ašmu2-tim (xlvii:19) mup-pa-šu (L37; 48); mup-pa-am (L151) aš-mur-ma (xlvii:75) U 10-šu (L8); U+2 = 12 (L5)) u2-ul (L105 etc.); u2-ka-an-šu-ma (L112); u2-lisum2 (L167; 170+); u2-li-sum2-ma (L162); u2-ra-ab-buu2 (L177); u2-ra-ab-bu-u2-šu (L191); u2-ša-ab-šu-u2 (L267); u2-ša-bil2 (L161); u2-ša-a¨-¨a-zu-šu (L166); u2-šar-ši-šu (L163); u2-šu-pi2-u3 (iv:62); u2-ta-ar (L161; 164); i-du-u2 (L206; 227); i-le-qu2-u2 (L174); il-qu2-u2šu (L186); i-na-ad-du-u2 (L200); ir-šu-u2 (L166; 176a+; 176b); ra-bu-u2 (L202); DUMU.ME¼-u2-a (L170, > mƗru); na-ak-k[a]pu-u2 (L251); u2-si-im (v:17); u2-‰u2-ra-tim (iii:31); KA¼.U2.SA.KA. GAG pƯ¨u u, “and” (passim); u2-šu-pi2-u3 (iv:62, for expected u2šu-pi2-u2)

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS u4

381

U8 ub UBUR ud UDU ug ugƗru

494 = lu 306 291 381 537 130

u¨ u¨2

398 392

uk ukullû ul um ummƗnu

130

113

u4-um (l:1); u4-ma-am (l:88); u4-mi (xlviii:61; xlix:65; l:52); u4-mi-ša-am (xlviii:53); u4-mi-šu (ii:10) USDUÑA (= U8.UDU.ÑA2) ‰Ɲnnj tulû UD umu; > BURANUN (= UD.KIB.NUN) immeru; U8.UDU.ÑA2 ‰Ɲnnj A.GAR3 ugƗrim (L53; 259); DUMU.A.GAR3.ME¼ mƗrnj ugƗrim (L54) as-su2-u¨2 (xlvii:31); li-is-su2-u¨2-šu (l:36); li-su2-u¨2 (xlviii:92); na-as2-pu-u¨2 (xlix:74); nu-u¨2-ši-im (i:55; ii:40; 53; iv:5; 16!); pu-u¨2-šu (L26); pu-u¨2-ri-im (L5; 202); mu2-u¨2-di-im (i:56); u¨2-ta-al-li-iq (L232; 236; 237; 263); u¨2-tap-pi2-id (L196; 198; 247); u2-ru-u¨2šu (l:23) ¼A3.GAL ukullâm (L253)

441 134

ummu umu un up uq ur ur2

312 = ub = ug 575 203

UR3

255

urƯ‰am URU us us2 USAN3 USDUHA

372 211 394c 494

UM.MI.A ummânu ERIM-šu-ma ummƗnsuma (li:17); UM.MI.A ummânim (L274); cf. DUMU UM.MI.A mƗr ummânim (L188) AMA ummum (xlix:82; li:43) UD umu (L272)

UR.MAÑ nƝšu; UR.SAG qarrƗdu a-bu-ur2-ri (xlvii:36) li-mu-ur2 (xlviii:17); mu-ur2-te-diša (L271); nu-ku-ur2-tim (L280); nu-ku-ur2-ti-šu (li:22); šu-ur2-qa2-am (L6); šu-ur2-šu-da (i:25); tu-ur2ri-im (L51); tu-ur2-ru (L27; 28; 32); ur2-ši-im (iv:10); ur2-ta-ab-bi-šu (L185); ur2-ta-ab-bu-u2 (L137); ur2-taak-ki-is (L151) GI¼ GAN2.UR3 maškakƗtu; GU4.A2.UR3.RA alpim warkim > alpu MA¼2 urƯ‰am (L270) alu ip-ru-us2 (L5); li-ip-ru-us2 (xlviii:90); qinnazu (= U8.UDU.ÑA2) ‰Ɲnnj

114

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

u‰ uš U¼U3 U¼UM ušumgallu ut UTU um ummetu uz UZU

= us = us2 472 11 = ud 381 = ud

D

AMAR.UTU Marduk

¼E ummet (L273) = us 171

wa/i/u 383 wakil ¨ammim war¨Ư

ya za ZABAR ZAG ze2

AGA U¼ rƝdû 30 (L8) GAL.U¼UM ušumgallu GAL.U¼UM ušumgal (ii:55)

šƯru

PA.PA wakil ¨ammim (L33, or ša ¨ammƗtim) ITU war¨Ư (L13: ITU.6.KAM); ITU.ITU war¨Ư (l:52); ITU-im war¨im (L273; 273) (= i+a)

= ‰a 29 332 147 = zi2

zƝru zi zi2

84 147 = ze2

zibbu zittu zi zu ZU2

84 6 15

[ZA].DIM(?) sassinu (L274); GI¼GU.ZA kussû GIR2.GAG ZABAR karzil siparrim (> siparru) A2.ZAG2 asakku e-ze2-bi-im (L137); e-ze2-eb-ša (L141+); i-ze2-er-ma (L193); NUMUN zƝr (ii:13; li:48); zƝrum (v:1); NUMUN-šu zƝrƗšu (li:78); ¼E.NUMUN zƝram (L253; 255) uš-tap-zi2-ir-ši-na-ti (xlvii:58); zi2-it-tam (L137; 172; 180) KUN-su2 zibbasu (L248) ÑA.LA-šu zittašu (L60); zittƯšu (L61) A.ZU asû (A.SU! li:59) ZU2.LUM suluppnj

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SIGNS

115

Conventional Enumeration 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 29 32 38 50 52 53 55 56 57 58 59 61 62 68 69 70 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 84 85

aš ¨al ba su2; ‰u2; zu su ¼EN BALA GIR2 U¼UM tar an; DINGIR ka; ZU2 ZABAR EME ri2 IR3 ITI ¼AÑ la APIN; ENGAR ma¨ tu; mu2 li mu qa; SILA3 ru bat; šum4 na NUMUN ti; mi3 BAR; MA¼ nu MA¼2 KUN ¨u nam; SIN2 gal2; ig si2; ‰i2; zi gi

86 87 87a 88 90 94 97 98 99

ri NUN TUR3 kab GAD DIM; tim ag; ME6 ME3 en; EN+LIL2+KI = NIBRU 104 A¼GAB; sa 105 GAN2; IKU 106 gu2 108 dur; mur 108* GUN 111 gur 112 si 114 dar; mar2 115 SAG 122 MA2 124 tab map 126 šum 128 ab 130 ug uk 131 as 133 KA2 134 um 138 mup 139 ta 142 i 143 gan 144 BANDA3; DUMU; IBILA 145 ad 147 ‰i; ze2 148 in 151 šar3; LUGAL 152 sar; šar

164 166 167 170 171 172 173 187 191 201 203 206 207 208 211 212 214 215 229 230 231 232 233 237 249 255 291 295

296 297 298 306 307 308 312 313 314

si3 KASKAL DU8 am UZU bi2; LAM2 bil2 ¼AM2 kum; qu; qum SUÑU¼ ur2 du; RA2 dum; tum AN¼E us2 iš be2; pe2; pi2 KA¼; KURUN ¼IM NA4 DU3; GAG i3; li2; ni ir ba4; GA2 AMA par4; KISAL UR3 UBUR ENSI2; PA 295m SIPA is; GI¼ GU4 al ub mar e un; KALAM kid; LIL2 KI¼IB

116 318 319 321 322 324 326 328 329 330 332 333 334 335 337 338 339 342 343 346 347 349 353 354 356 358 367 371 372 375 376 381

383 384 392 393

1 1 1

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE u2 ga; qa2 lu¨ dan E2 gi4 ra DUL3 LU2 ZAG gar3; qar id; A2 da MURU2 SIMUG as2; aš2 ma gal; kal2; qal kir; qer; piš AGA BUR ša šu sa6 ALAM še bu; GID2 us ter me4 tam; u4; ud; BABBAR; UTU pi; wa/e/i ¼A3 u¨2 ERIM

394c 396 398 401 404 406 411 420 425 427 428 429 433 435 437 439 440 441 444 446 449 455 457 459 461

465 468 469 472 480 481 483

USAN3 ¨i; ÑE a/i/u¨ ¨ar; mur ÑA2 kam u; U; BUR3 AB2 KI¼ mi; GI6 ¼AMAN2 kul2; qul2; GUL nim lam ur; AMAR BAN ¼ITIM ul GIR3 GIG lem; lim; ši; IGI u3 di; sa3 DU6 ki; qe2; qi2; GANBA; KISLAÑ din GU¼KIN; KU3 PAD U¼U3 DI¼ LA2 NIGIN2

U8; USDUÑA me; mi3 ME¼ ib ku; qu2 ÑUN; TUG2; TUKUL 537 lu; UDU 538 qi; KIN 539 SIG2 542 GUR7 554 LUKUR; MI2; SAL 555 ‰u; SUM2 556 nin 557 dam; tam2; mam 558 GEME2 559 gu 560 NAGAR 564 el 565 lum; num2 567 GAR4; SIG4 570 MIN 571 ¼U¼ANA 575 ur 577 GIDIM4 579 a; ID2 585c NIE¼ 586 ‰a 589 ¨a 592 ši3 593 E¼5 595 mu; GIN2 597 LIMMU; NIG2 598a IA2 598b A¼3 494 532 533 535 536

OVERVIEW OF GRAMMAR The elements of the grammar of CH, covering phonetics, morphology and syntax, will here first be presented in outline, based on a phonemic transcription of the cuneiform inscription. This will provide a steppingstone to the more detailed grammatical description which follows, where more information will be interspersed with a comprehensive set of illustrative citations. These grammatical notes will be formulated essentially from a descriptive point of view. Rather than classifying Akkadian words according to the grammatical function they fulfil in a corresponding English sentence, those words which adopt a nominal pattern of inflection will be grouped together and contrasted with those adopting a verbal pattern. Many of the other words, which are not inflected either like nouns or like verbs (they are here referred to as non-declining words) according to the rules of English grammar, fulfil different grammatical functions in different sentences. This accords with the lexicographic principles of AHw. It does not suppose that the different usages imply homonyms, which is the presumption of the editors of CAD. Cross-references are provided to GrAkk. and to GAG.

SCRIPT Ideograms and phonograms The script used for Akkadian cuneiform was borrowed from its earlier use for Sumerian, but otherwise the two languages are unrelated. One difference is that for most words Sumerian uses cuneiform signs which primarily indicate the meaning rather than the sound of the expressed word. As such they correspond to signs such as £, $ or % in English, and by convention such signs are defined as ideograms. But most Akkadian words in CH are written in cuneiform with phonetic signs which individually indicate the syllables of the expressed word. These signs are referred to as phonograms or syllabograms.

118

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Transliteration When cuneiform signs for ideograms are transliterated into Roman script it is convenient to use capital letters for the equivalent Sumerian word, even though the ideogram would have been pronounced as an Akkadian word: in Akkadian the ideogram for “god” would have been pronounced something like ilu but by convention it is transliterated as the Sumerian word DINGIR. Similarly the name “Babylon” sounded something like BƗbilu in Akkadian but it is often written with a series of ideograms, transliterated KA2.DINGIR.RAKI.1 In CH most words are written only with phonograms: the syllabic writing of the name “Hammurabi” is transliterated as ¨a-am-mu-ra-bi; a frequently recurring word for “man” is awƯlum which is transliterated awi-lum. Phonograms are subdivided according to the type of syllable they indicate, which may consist simply of a vowel (V), or begin with a vowel (VC), or begin with a consonant (CV), or begin and end with a consonant (CVC). In principle, no syllable begins with a vowel except at the beginning of a word or within a word in which different vowels are juxtaposed.2 Transcription The conventional scheme for transliterating cuneiform is excellent for conveniently representing in Roman script exactly what was written in

1 When transliterating words that are written as composite ideograms (with two or more cuneiform signs used for the one word) a stop is used to link each element of the word. Subscript numbers are used for ideograms which are homonyms. KA2 is used to transliterate the sign meaning “gate”, but KA for a different sign meaning “mouth”; in Sumerian both words probably sounded similar but were written differently. Akkadian BƗbilu, as well as Sumerian KA2.DINGIR.RAKI, can be interpreted as meaning “the gate of the god”. Superscript is used for a series of common signs that are written before or after certain types of word as determinatives; after the names of places KI is often written, but it was probably not pronounced. It is conventional to use lower case letters to distinguish Akkadian from Sumerian. 2 Juxtaposed dissimilar vowels can sometimes be clearly seen to have arisen from the fact that a glottal stop has not been written: the word iš-li-a-am indicates the verb išliam, which may also be transcribed as išliam since it is derived from the root š-l-.

OVERVIEW OF GRAMMAR

119

cuneiform.3 But many phonological, morphological and syntactical features which are important for the correct understanding of Akkadian grammar are not immediately apparent from a transliteration. Furthermore, the cuneiform script was adapted for Akkadian, a Semitic language, from its use for non-Semitic Sumerian, and in some ways it probably inadequately represents what was actually spoken. There is no specific cuneiform sign for some common Semitic phonemes. For the purposes of a grammatical analysis, it is necessary to proceed to a phonetic transcription of the text, which involves drawing many analogies from other Semitic languages, in particular from Classical Hebrew and Classical Arabic. Important phonological features such as consonantal gemination (as in Ñammurabi) and vowel length (as in awƯlum) can then be clearly marked.4 So, the process of converting a cuneiform inscription into a text from which grammatical rules can be extrapolated is a three-stage development: a hand-copy is made of the inscription in pen and ink from which a transliteration is made, encoded to show precisely which cuneiform sign is used and whether a word is written ideographically or syllabically; then, from the transliteration a transcription5 is made in which grammatically significant phonetic features are marked, often by analogy with Semitic languages which are written alphabetically.

PHONOLOGY The decipherment of cuneiform showed that most of the phonemes characteristic of alphabetically written Semitic languages occurred also in Akkadian. They are transliterated into Roman script (usually italicised) following the conventions adopted from Semitic philology. Vowels and Semi-vowels The four distinguishable vowels may be long or short in articulation: a as in “cat”; Ɨ as in “calm”; e as in “bet”; Ɲ as in “reign”; i as in “bit”; Ư as in “beet”; u as in “cut”; nj as in “coot”. There are two semivowels: w as in “wasp”, and y as in “yacht” (the transliteration j is preferred by many 3

For an authoritative transliteration, see BAL, more up-to-date than Driver and Miles (1955). 4 Recent phonemic transcriptions have been prepared by Roth (1995) and Richardson (2000). 5 The term “normalization” is sometimes used for “phonetic (or phonemic) transcription”.

120

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

scholars, as in German “ja”).6 The syllabary does not distinguish between e and i as clearly as it does between the other vowels, and vowel length is ignored in any alphabetic arrangement. All phonetic transcriptions must be regarded as approximate. Consonants Two labial consonants have approximate equivalents in English: b as in “bat” and p as in “pat”. Similarly, the nasal and liquid consonants correspond to m as in “moose”, n as in “noose”, l as in “loose” and r as in “ruse”. Most of the palatals, dentals and sibilants also have equivalents in English: g as in “gale”, k as in “kale”, d as in “den”, t as in “ten”, z as in “zip”, s as in “sip” and š as in “ship”. Some correspond to sounds which are not usual in standard English but are found regularly in other Semitic languages: the sibilant ‰ can be pronounced like ts in “bits”, and the guttural ¨ is more or less the same as the sound heard at the end of the word “loch” (in Scottish or Irish speech) or the German interjection “ach!”. q (not to be pronounced like qu as in queen) and m result from articulating k and t back in the glottis. The approximate scheme of articulation for the consonants can be represented thus: labial dental palatal sibilant nasal liquid

unvoiced p t k s m, n l, r

voiced b d g z

emphatic

fricative

m  q ‰ 

¨ š

The following alphabetic sequence is used for compiling lists of words in transcription: a b d e g ¨ i (j) k l m n p q r s ‰ š t m u w y z

Glottal Stop The glottal stop is recognised as a consonant in alphabetically written Semitic languages and is transliterated as , but in the syllabically written Akkadian of CH it is not generally indicated by a specific sign. 6

The vowel following y always seems to be a. This syllable is written in cuneiform with the ligature {i + a}, which sometimes appears in transcription as ia.

OVERVIEW OF GRAMMAR

121

When listing words alphabetically in transcription, it is ignored. Because the script was adapted from its use for Sumerian, there may well have been phonemes pronounced in Akkadian which are not explicitly indicated by the syllabic script. Indeed the glottal stop can be linked to four implicit phonemes which correspond to letters in the Hebrew and Arabic alphabets: h, Ü, ! and g . Some consonants are perceived as weaker than others (the glottal stop is particularly weak) and they are prone to being assimilated to a contiguous vowel or stronger consonant. To show the pattern of any assimilation, a hypothetical form, marked with an asterisk, can be constructed on the pattern of a similar word with strong consonants. In an Akkadian word etymologically related to one written with a glottal stop (or with one of the associated phonemes mentioned above) in another Semitic language, it is assumed that assimilation has occurred and all that is left is a vowel. If the etymology involves a cognate word with Ü or !, the vowel is e: elû “to go up” (cognate with Hebrew !-l-h); ileqqe “he shall take” (< *ilaqqe < *ilaqqa), from leqû “to take” (cognate with the Hebrew root l-q-Ü). The sign {¨a} appears to indicate an intervocalic  in the word i-¨a-al-la-lušu, which may therefore be better transliterated as i-a-al-la-lu-šu and transcribed as iallalnjšu “they hang him”. After the Old Babylonian period the glottal stop was indicated more specifically. In transcriptions of Akkadian the glottal stop is usually marked with  between dissimilar vowels, but it is not always marked after i: ilei “he is able”; rƝûm “shepherd”; rƝdiam (acc.) “soldier”. More often than not,  is assimilated and is not explicitly marked in transcriptions. Between identical vowels an inherent glottal stop is assimilated and this results in a long vowel, which by convention is marked with a circumflex: rƝdûm (nom.) “soldier”; rubûm rabium “the mighty prince”. A long vowel resulting from the assimilation of an inherent glottal stop between a vowel before a consonant or between a consonant before a vowel is by convention marked with a macron: *dƗritam > dƗrƯtam “everlasting”; *i¨uz > Ư¨uz “he grasped”. The glottal stop may also be assimilated regressively by the consonant following, and then that consonant is geminated: *italak > ittalak “he has gone”. Other Assimilated Consonants The assimilation of any weaker consonant by a stronger one usually results in gemination. Most frequently the weaker consonant precedes the stonger one and is assimilated regressively:

122

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE *nd > dd *ns > ss *bm > mm *mš > šš

*indin > iddin “he gave”; *ansu¨ > assu¨ “I uprooted”; *uššabma > uššamma “she shall dwell”; *uštƝliamši > uštƝliašši “he brought it up”

Sometimes the stronger consonant precedes the weaker one and assimilates it progressively. This often happens in verbal forms with an infixed -t- when the first root consonant is d, Ñ or Ó: *dt > dd *‰t > ‰‰ *mt > mm

*udtappir > uddapir “he has been absent”; *i‰tabat > i‰‰abat “he has seized”; *umtebbi > ummebbi “he has let it sink”

It can happen that only one phoneme mutates and then the assimilation is described as partial: *gt > gd

*ugtallib > ugdallib “he has shaved”

Total progressive assimilation regularly occurs with a 3rd person suffix when the third root consonant is s: *sš > ss

*urakkisšu > urakkissu “he made him make a contract”

With some other consonantal clusters both consonants mutate; they seem to have had a reciprocal influence on each other: *dš > ss

*njlidšum > *njlisšum > njlissum “she gave birth for him”

Morphemic Gemination Some consonants are geminated in certain nouns and certain forms of the verb for semantic rather than phonetic reasons. The second root consonant of some nouns, usually indicating someone habitually involved in an activity associated with a G-theme verb, is geminated: ¨abbƗtu “robber”. Occasionally the doubled middle radical seems to intensify the basic meaning: Ñe¨¨eru “very young”. With verbs the second root consonant of durative forms is always geminated: iraggum “he will complain”; išaqqal “he will weigh out”; similarly for all forms of D-theme verbs and any associated participle or noun: u¨alliqu “which he lost”; murabbƯtu “foster-mother”; ¨ulluqûm “loss”. Gemination is also evident when a root consonant of a verb is juxtaposed with a morpheme which has the same distinguishing consonant. When the first root consonant is t and the form involves an

OVERVIEW OF GRAMMAR

123

infixed –t–, the t is geminated: ittnjram. In N-theme forms of verbs with n as the first root consonant, n is geminated: innaddin “it will be given”. The m is geminated in verbs with m as the third root consonant before the enclitic particle –ma: išƗmma “he purchased”; ušallamma “he shall reinstate”; similarly where the enclitic particle occurs with verbs marked with ventive –am: ittnjramma “he has come back”.

MORPHOLOGY: NOUNS Nouns can be seen to consist of a stem (or base) which is inflected to specify the case, number and gender.7 A nominal stem may be inflected as one of three cases (nom.; acc.; gen.) or as a bound form; the bound form of the masc. sg. noun is often indistinguishable from the stem itself. The three masc. sg. forms awƯlum, awƯlam and awƯlim show that a nominal stem (awƯl) may be inflected with –um when it functions as the subject of the sentence (nom.), with –am when it is the object (acc.); when it functions as the possessor of a preceding noun and when it follows a preposition it is inflected with –im (gen.): ana awƯlim “for the man”. Frequently two nouns are bound very closely together, which results in the first losing all trace of inflection (bound form), and the following noun being inflected as a genitive: bƝl wardim “the master of the slave”; bƝl bƯtim “a property owner”; bƝl ¨egallim “the lord of plenty”. Such expressions are in some ways similar to hyphenated expressions in English. Masculine Plural Only two cases are distinguishable for plural nouns, the nominative and the oblique (a term used to cover the identical accusative and genitive forms). The inflections for masc. pl. are –nj for nominative and –Ư for oblique: mƗrnj illaknj “the sons shall go”; mƗrƯ ittalad “she has given birth to sons”. The bound form of the masc. pl. is indistinguishable from the corresponding free form: mƗrnj mƗtim “sons of the land”.

7

The essential meaning of some nouns can be identified with the essential meaning of a verb, the root consonants of which can be seen in the nominal base. In those circumstances it is normal to regard the noun as derived from that verb; see GrAkk. §3.1.

124

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Feminine Singular and Plural The stem of most feminine nouns is augmented with –t after the root consonants; if a stem ends with a consonantal cluster it is augmented with –at. The case endings are the same as those for masc. nouns: aššatam la Ư¨uz “he did not take a wife”; bƝl aššatim “the husband of the woman”; aššat awƯlim “the wife of the man”. In the pl., the stem is augmented with –Ɨt– and the case endings are similar to those for the sg. In the free forms, the final –m is maintained, but it is not in the bound forms, so that –Ɨtum (bound form –Ɨtu) marks the nominative case, and –Ɨtim (bound form –Ɨti) marks the oblique case: ÑƗb nis¨Ɨtim “a soldier from the deserters”. Adjectives A word which is best translated in English as an adjective is in Akkadian very often identical with a noun in form. An adjective can be seen as qualifying the noun it follows and is inflected in a similar way to that noun. For a masc. sg. noun the inflection of the adjective is identical with that of the noun: šarrum dannum “the strong king”; awƯlum ¨abtum “the robbed man”; simmam kabtam “a deep incision”;8 itti zikarim šanîm “with another man”. With masc. pl. nouns an adjective takes the endings –njtum (nom.), –njtim (oblique): suluppƯ watrnjtim ileqqe “he will take the surplus dates”; mƗrnj ma¨rûtum u warkûtum izuzznj “the first sons and the last sons shall share”. The stem of a fem. sg. adjective is augmented with –t or –at after the root consonants: ana sinništim šanƯtim “for another woman”; ummum rabƯtum “the great mother”; eleppam dannatam inaddin “he shall give the repaired boat”.9 In the pl. the endings are –Ɨtum (nom.) or –Ɨtim (oblique). Pronominal Suffixes with Nouns A possessive pronoun is indicated by a suffix attached to a noun. The most common pronominal suffixes are –šu (fem. –ša) for the 3rd sg. and –šunu (fem. –šina) for the 3rd pl.; forms for the 1st person (–Ư; –iya) and 8

The masc. forms of words with t as the final root consonant, such as ¨abtum (root ¨-b-t) and kabtam (root k-b-t), at first sight may be mistaken for fem. forms. 9 The vowel i before the fem. marker –t– in rabƯtum (from rabû, root r-b-) and šanƯtim (from šanû, root š-n-) arises from the influence of the final root consonant .

OVERVIEW OF GRAMMAR

125

2nd person masc. (–ka) are also found. In principle, the suffix is attached directly to the bound form of the noun: šumƯ lizzakir “may my name be uttered”; nidƯtka Ɲpuš “work on your fallow-land”. When the suffix is linked to the bound form with a vowel, that vowel sometimes (but not always) corresponds to the appropriate case-marking vowel: mƗrušu ilkam alƗkam ilei “his son is able to perform the duty”; mƗrašu iddin “he gave his son”; ana mƗrišu “to his son”; mƗrnjša se¨¨ernj “her sons are small”; mƗrƯša urabba “she shall raise her sons”; ana mƗrƯša “to her sons”; itti mƗrƯšu “with his sons”; bƯtum ana bƝlišu itâr “the house shall return to its owner”; ina awat Marduk bƝliya “by the word of Marduk, my lord”. Apposition Similarly inflected nominal forms are juxtaposed when one noun is qualified by a following adjective. When two similarly inflected nouns referrring to one and the same item are juxtaposed, they are described as being in apposition.10 Additional or alternative nouns may also be juxtaposed. It is most common to find two closely related nouns referring to the same item in apposition when one is a proper noun; the noun in apposition becomes a definition or an amplification of the other. The common noun is inflected according to the case appropriate to the uninflected proper noun and may itself be qualified by an adjective or descriptive phrase: Ea rubûm rabium “Ea, the great prince” (xlix:98); Ninlil ummum rabƯtum … ina pƯ Ellil šarrim lišaškin “may Ninlil, the great mother … make it established in the mouth of Enlil, the king” (xlix:81-97); ina BƗbilim Ɨlim ša Anum u Ellil “in Babylon, the city of Anum and Enlil” (xlvii:63-64). The proper noun may follow the common noun: pƗqid bƯtim Ñursagkalamma “the guardian of the temple, Hursagkalamma” (ii:66-67).11 When two common nouns are placed in apposition it sometimes seems appropriate to translate with a relative expression: aplum mƗr ¨Ưrtim ina zittim inassaqma “the heir, the son of the first wife, shall 10

A bound form juxtaposed to a following genitive, though differently inflected, is similar in meaning. 11 This transcription is based on the reading of the stele: bi-tim. In ms. B the word is written ideographically and so there it could also be read as a bound form: pƗqid bƯt Ñursagkalamma. In ms. A, bi-ti may also represent a variant of a bound form.

126

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

choose a share” (L170); šinni awƯlim me¨rišu “the tooth of man who is his equal” (L200); ana mƗrtišu šugƯtim “to his daughter who is a šugƯtu” (L183); ana mƗrtišu nadƯt gagîm u lu sekretim “to his daughter who is a cloistered nadƯtu or a sekretu” (L180);12 bƝlum tukultƯ “the lord who is my trust” (l:19). In numerical expressions, where the measured item is expressed, it is most natural in translation to link both the numeral and the unit of measurement as well as any noun in apposition with “of”: ̃ mana kaspam inaddiššim “he shall give her ѿ of a mana of silver” (L140). In some numerical expressions more than two words occur in apposition: ana 1 kur 1 pƗn 4 snjt šeam ‰ibtam ileqqe “for 1 kur he shall take 1 pƗn 4 snjt of barley as interest” (§5.9).13 Juxtaposed nouns may also refer to different (additional or alternative) items within similar semantic fields.14 Because there is often no explicit indication about whether the additional nouns are to be regarded cumulatively or alternatively, the choice in translation between “and” or “or” is not always obvious: nadƯtum ugbabtum ša ina gagîm la wašbat bƯt sƯbim iptete “a nadƯtum or an ugbabtum who is not resident in the cloister has opened a house for drinking” (L110);15 alpam imƝram Ưgurma “he hired an ox or a donkey” (L244); agâm kussiam “the crown and the throne” (l:45); išƯtam sa¨maštam “revolts and insurrections” (li:5-6); nƯšƯ dadmî aburrƯ ušarbiÑ “I made the people rest in settlements and meadowland” (xlvii:35-37).16 One qualifying expression may apply to both members of a pair of juxtaposed nouns: wardam amtam ša awƯlim ištƗm “he has bought a man’s slave or (a man’s) slave-girl” (L280).

12

So Roth. Compare ana 1 šiqil 1⁄6 u 6 ummet Ñibtam ileqqe “for 1 shekel he shall take 1⁄6 and 6 ummet, which is the interest” (§5.9), where the measured item is not expressed (GrAkk. §5.9). 14 There are occasions when more than two nouns are linked asyndetically, and a copula links only the last pair. 15 An alternative translation could perhaps be “the nadƯtum — the ugbabtum…”, which would presume that the term nadƯtum was given further definition by the expression ugbabtum ša ina gagîm la wašbat. 16 Because nƯšƯ can be explained as an oblique case pl. or as a bound form pl., an alternative translation is “I made the people of the settlements rest in meadowland”. In this poetic passage the expression with two nouns could also be explained as hendiadys, and translated “well-watered settlements”. 13

OVERVIEW OF GRAMMAR

127

Nominal Forms which Function as Verbs Infinitive The infinitive, which is traditionally categorised as a part of the verb and is used as the standard citation form for verbs in dictionaries, is in fact inflected like a noun. The nominal function can be seen when it functions as the grammatical object of a finite verb: wašƗbam la imtagar “she has not agreed to stay” (L149). It has more of a verbal force when it is associated with its own object: ilkam alƗkam ilei “he is able to perform the duty” (L28). Participle The participle, like the infinitive, is traditionally regarded as part of the verbal system, but also takes nominal inflections. Sometimes it is best translated into English as a noun: aššat munnabtim “the wife of the fugitive” i.e. “the one who is fleeing” (L136). But at other times it is as easy or even easier to translate it as the form of the verb ending in –ing. The participle occurs as a bound form before an independent object: pƗqid bƯtim “caring for (or, the one who cares for) the temple” (ii:66); mukammer ¨iÑbim “heaping up (or, the one who heaps up) luxury” (ii:44-45). A participle may take a pronominal suffix: ana abim murabbƯšu “to the father his guardian (or, the one who has been bringing him up)” (L192).

MORPHOLOGY: VERBS Finite Verbs Whereas nouns can be seen to consist of a stem followed by the inflection (both of which are continuous morphemes), the inflection of verbs is superimposed upon a root (where both root, which in principle consists of three root consonants, and inflection are discontinuous morphemes). The inflectional morphemes for a verb consist for the most part of a pattern of vowels, but some involve consonantal elements.17 For finite verbs in the indicative mood, the inflections distinguish what will here be referred to as the subject, the tense and the theme. The subject (1st, 2nd or 3rd person; sg. or pl.; masc. or fem.) corresponds to the subject of an English verb (I, we, you, he, she, it, they). The tense 17

GrAkk. §3.1.

128

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

may be “preterite” or “durative”.18 In general, the preterite indicates actions which are considered to have been completed, which means for the most part actions that have been performed in the past. The durative indicates actions which are in the process of being completed, which means for the most part actions which will not be completed until some time in the future. It also includes actions which would be expressed in the English present tense. There are four different primary themes19 (Gtheme, or basic; D-theme, or doubled; ¼-theme, or causative; N-theme, or reflexive).20 All four primary themes have the possibility of associated secondary (Gt, Dt, ¼t and Nt) and tertiary (Gtn, Dtn, ¼tn and Ntn) themes, which modify in one way or another the meaning of the corresponding primary theme. No verbal root will be attested in all these themes, and some are not even attested in the basic G-theme. In addition to these forms there is another, which occurs very frequently in CH, in which the syllable –ta– is inserted after the first root consonant. The form is known as the “perfect tense”, but “tense” and “perfect” are perhaps not the best words with which to describe its function. Some uncertainty is raised about the position of the stative form within the verbal system, which in its structure resembles the Hebrew and Arabic “perfect tense”, but it certainly does not function as a perfect tense. It describes a state of being rather than an action. It has also been referred to as a predicative adjective or predicative noun. Some supplementary morphemes may be associated with most of the verbal forms to denote a particular semantic nuance (such as the ventive and precative markers) or a particular syntactic function (such as the subjunctive, for subordinate verbs). Although it is sparsely attested in CH, there is also a form for the imperative, which is not marked for tense and is restricted to the 2nd person. 18

The term “tense” is used for convenience, but in fact verbal inflections can also be seen to determine the “aspect” of a verbal form; that is why the term “durative” is used, for verbs in the present tense are inflected in the same way as those in the future tense. 19 The four different themes are sometimes described as four different conjugations. 20 Instead of letters, sometimes the four themes are distinguished by the Roman numerals I, II, III, IV, reminiscent of the conventional sigla for the different “forms” of the verb in Arabic.

OVERVIEW OF GRAMMAR

129

In general, verbal forms are more complex than those of nouns, since a nominal stem hardly changes when inflected. But establishing the meaning of a verb form involves extracting the discontinuous and notionally triconsonantal root morpheme and then amalgamating with it the discontinuous pattern of phonemes comprising the inflection which has been superimposed on to it. Verbal Roots: Weak and Strong When tracing the patterns of verbal inflections, the three root consonants will for convenience here be represented as 1-2-3. The inflections for subject, tense and theme can be illustrated by a verbal form such as iškun “he set”. It can be derived from the discontinuous consonantal root š-k-n, on which has been superimposed a vocalic pattern i12u3. The resulting form is defined as a 3rd sg. masc. preterite tense of the Gtheme. Similarly with išakkan “he will set”, the pattern i1a22a3 has been superimposed on the root (and the second root consonant has been doubled), which results in a 3rd sg. masc. form durative tense of the Gtheme. Roots in which all the consonants are articulated in all verbal forms are said to be strong. But weak roots are also common: those in which one (or more) of the root consonants is weak and is not articulated (most often because it is assimilated) in certain phonetic contexts. Both the initial and the final consonant of the root n-d-n, “to give”, can be assimilated in this way. In the 3rd sg. durative (G-theme) inaddin “he will give”, there is no assimilation; but there is assimilation before a 3rd sg. pronominal suffix: inaddiššum “he will give to him” (< *inaddinšum, where /nš/ > /šš/). In the 3rd sg. preterite (G-theme) it appears as iddin “he gave” (< *indin, where /nd/ > /dd/). Assimilation is particularly frequent with verbs with  as a root consonant. The verb ubbirma “he accused” can be derived from the root -b-r; it is inflected as the 3rd sg. masc. form of the preterite tense (D-theme), meaning “he accused”.21 Pronominal Suffixes with Verbs When the object of the verb is a pronoun it is expressed by a suffix. Verbal pronominal suffixes are very similar in form to the possessive pronominal suffixes found on nouns. Different suffixes are used for 21

The suffix –ma marks the end of a clause, but not the end of the sentence, so a more accurate translation would be “he accused and …”

130

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

direct and indirect pronominal objects: i¨allalnjšu “they shall hang him” (L21); iqbƯšum “he said to him” (L49); ana mutim iddišši “he gave her to a husband” (L183); mussa nudunnâm la iddiššim “her husband did not give a wedding-gift to her” (L172). Secondary and Tertiary Themes The secondary themes are marked with an infixed –t– following the first root consonant; they are conventionally denoted as Gt, Dt, ¼t and Nt. With some verbs it is possible to understand that this –t– gives the verb a sense of permanent separation: ana šƯmtim ittalak “he went away to fate” (L12). The verb can be compared to the one in the expression ana ¨arrƗn šarrim … la illik “he did not go on a journey for the king” (L26). The tertiary themes are marked with an infixed –tan– (conventionally denoted as Gtn, Dtn, ¼tn and Ntn), and often indicate a repeated action: mimmašu ¨alqam išteneƯma “he shall continue to search for whatever was lost” (L125). Perfect Forms Some verbs marked with infixed –ta– do not seem to have modified the meaning of corresponding verbal form without –ta–, but they can be seen to focus specific attention on an action that has been previously stated. For the most part these verbs are indistinguishable in form from a corresponding verb in one of the secondary themes (Gt, Dt, ¼t; Nt), forms where normally some change of meaning would be discernible. These forms are therefore categorised separately from the secondary themes, and they are explained as examples of the perfect tense. An action expressed in the perfect tense can usually be regarded as occurring subsequent to some other previously mentioned or implied action. In CH, almost without exception, the last verb or verbs of a protasis are inflected as perfect tenses, and this focuses attention on the situation which has given rise to the action proposed in the apodosis. In an English translation it is often possible to indicate an original perfect tense by using an English perfect tense (with the augment “to have”) instead of a simple past tense: šumma awƯlum awƯlam ubbirma nƝrtam elišu iddƯma la uktinšu mubbiršu iddâk “if a man made an allegation against a man and accused him of killing but has not substantiated the evidence against him, the one making the allegations shall be put to death” (L1); the use of the perfect tense for uktinšu seems to emphasise

OVERVIEW OF GRAMMAR

131

that the principal reason for invoking the penalty of death is the attempt of a witness to adduce unsubstantiated evidence in the course of a trial. Subjunctive Forms An indicative verb in a subordinate clause is usually marked with a final –u, a form which is described as subjunctive. The most common type of subordinate clause is a relative clause introduced by the particle ša: kaspim ša ana tamkƗrim inaddinu “the silver which he shall give to the merchant”. The final –u can be seen clearly with a 3rd sg. verb, but when a 3rd pl. verb, which is inflected with –nj (long u), occurs in a subordinate clause, syllabic writing often shows no formal difference between the subjunctive and the non-subjunctive forms: niplƗtim ša innadnnjšum “the compensation payments that were given to him” (L41). The –u (short u) marking the subjunctive is masked by the –nj (long u) marking the 3rd pl.22 Injunctive Forms (Precative and Asseverative) There is no example in CH of the free morpheme lu, which functions in Akkadian as a precative particle. However, it has traditionally been associated with the verbal prefix l–: liqbi “let him speak” (< *luiqbi). This assumes that the juxtaposition of u and i has resulted (unexpectedly) in i. When a preterite verb is prefixed with l–, the form is known as precative, since it indicates a wish that a third person should perform the action. In CH it is used much more commonly than the imperative, a 2nd person form, which expresses a similar idea more curtly in direct speech. The preterite and not the durative tense is used with this particle, which implies, from the point of view of the aspect of the verb, that once a wish for an action to be performed has been expressed that action is regarded as complete. Precative forms are particularly common in the Epilogue section of CH, where invocations are made to a series of different deities: ¼amaš ¨aÓÓašu lirrik nišƯšu ina mƯšarim lirƝ “may Shamash lengthen his sceptre, let him pasture his people with righteousness” (xlix:14-17). In some sentences the prefix l– is better interpreted as having an asseverative rather than a precative meaning, so an equally justifiable alternative translation for these lines would be: “Shamash will certainly lengthen his sceptre, he will certainly let him pasture his people with righteousness”. 22

3rd pl. fem. –Ɨ would have been the expected inflexion here.

132

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

The prefix l– is found only once in the Laws, with a 1st. person verb. There it seems have asseverative meaning, indicating a particularly strong resolve on the part of the speaker: u bƝl ¨ulqim šƯbƯ mudƝ ¨ulqiyami lublam iqtabi “and the owner of the lost property has said, ‘But I will certainly bring along witnesses who know the lost property is mine’” (L9).23 Imperative Forms The imperative expresses a direct command, and as such is restricted to the 2nd person. There is very little direct speech in CH, so examples of the imperative are sparse: eqlam erišma šeam … esip tabal “cultivate the field and harvest the barley, remove it” (L49). Ventive Forms The suffix –am is not only the mark of the 1st sg. pronominal suffix (iddinam “he gave to me”), but is used also to give a verb of motion (which does not take an object) the more general significance of an action being conducted towards rather than away from the focus of attention. It is then said to be given ventive or allative significance. Some verbs are attested in both ventive and non-ventive forms, where the contrast can be expressed as “come” and “go”: ana dƯnim … njÑiamma “he came out into the court”; ina bƯt mutiša ul uÑÑi “she shall not go out from her husband’s house” (L172); similarly, wardam … ana šisƯt nƗgirim la uštƝÑiam “at the appeal of the cryer he has not produced the slave here” (L16); warad ekallim … abullam uštƝÑi “he took a palace slave away through the city gate” (L15). Stative Forms The verbal form known as the stative is not inflected according to the basic pattern of the indicative. It occurs when a noun or adjective functions as the predicate of a pronominal subject, and the stem of the noun or adjective is inflected to specify that pronominal subject. In form it resembles the suffixed conjugation of the verb in Hebrew and Arabic. When the noun or adjective is the predicate of a nominal subject or a 3rd sg. masc. pronoun, no inflectional element is obvious; the 3rd sg. masc. stative is sometimes described as a form inflected with “zero”. In 23

Supposing that *lu-uqbi > luqbi does not raise the same difficulties as supposing that *lu-iqbi > liqbi.

OVERVIEW OF GRAMMAR

133

practice this means that the form of the 3rd sg. masc. stative is identical with the bound form of the related noun or adjective: mƗrušu Ñe¨er “his son his small” (L29). Stative forms do not describe an action but indicate a general state of being, and accordingly they have been described not as verbal forms but as nouns or adjectives in the predicative state.24 However, they do accept the subjunctive marker –u and so they should not be regarded as completely separated from the verbal system.

MORPHOLOGY: NON-DECLINING WORDS Apart from verbs and nouns, there are a number of words in Akkadian which are not inflected, and which hardly change at all in form. They include words of different classes: adi “until” (an unchangeable preposition); eli “to” (a preposition which accepts pronominal suffixes: elišu “to him”); la and ul (negating particles). Some of them adopt more than one grammatical function. Because of this, some lexicographers have inferred that they are to be considered as homonyms. An alternative view is to regard the different grammatical functions as variant usages of one lexeme.25 As well as words in their own right, some bound morphemes, which never occur as independent words, should also be considered here. The proclitic particle l– (or lu–), mentioned previously, gives a precative or asseverative nuance to a preterite verb. And almost every sentence will include the enclitic particle –ma, which coordinates clauses within that sentence. There is also the particle –ma, which occurs not after a verb at the end of a clause but after a noun which is an important element within a clause, apparently to add emphasis to the word to which it is attached: anƗkuma rƝûm “it is I, the shepherd” (xlvii:42-43). There are a few other words which can also be described as “nondeclining”. Some of them are clearly derived from adjectives or nouns, 24

The term “predicative state” is also used: Buccellati (1996) §25.3; Buccelati (1997) 81; Huehnergard uses “predicative construction” (GrAkk. §22.1). 25 CAD and AHw often differ in their presentation of non-declining words. CAD implies that ištu is a homonym: ištu conjunction, “since, after, as soon as …” (CAD, I, 284b-86a); ištu preposition, “from, out of, since …” (286a-88a). But AHw implies that it is not a homonym: ištu preposition and subordinating conjunction (sections B and C of the lemma; AHw 401b-402b).

134

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

such as certain adverbs: mit¨ariš “in the same way”; umišam “daily”. Others, though formally non-declining, function as nouns, such as the personal pronouns: anƗku “I”. It is more practical to treat such words together with the noun.

SYNTAX The normal word order for a simple sentence is for the subject to precede the object and for the verb to be placed in the final position: mƗrum arnam la ublam “the son has not committed an offence” (L168). Because a pronominal subject is not usually expressed as a separate word, it is not uncommon for a clause to consist of just one word: iddâk “he shall be killed”. Usually any adverb or prepositional expression will precede the verb, and any adjective will follow its associated noun: arnam kabtam ana šinƯšu itbalam “he has committed a serious offence for the second time” (L169). Some Akkadian sentences, in particular those expressing equivalence between subject and predicate, do not contain a finite verb and are often referred to as nominal sentences: Ñammurabi šarrum gitmƗlum anƗku “I am Hammurabi, the accomplished king” (xlvii:9-10); anƗkuma rƝûm mušallimum “I am the shepherd who brings peace” (xlvii:42-43). Most sentences can be described as compound, inasmuch as they will consist of more than one clause. The constituent clauses may be simply juxtaposed or linked with the conjunctive particle –ma: awƯlum nadƯtam i¨uzma nadƯtum šî amtam ana mutiša iddinma mƗrƯ uštabši awƯlum šû ana šugƯtim a¨Ɨzim panƯšu ištakan “a man has married a temple-woman, and that temple-woman has given a maidservant to her husband, and she has produced sons, (but) that man has then made a plan to marry a priestess” (L144). There are occasions when what appears to be the last verb of a sentence has –ma; the particle probably then has emphatic rather than conjunctive significance: ana Id illak Id išalliamma “he shall go to the river, he shall actually sink into the river” (L2). Some formally co-ordinate clauses are often better translated into English as subordinate: mimma mala inaddinu šƯbƯ ukallam riksƗtim išakkanma ana ma‰‰arnjtim inaddin “absolutely everything that he is going to give he shall show to witnesses; after he has set the conditions, he shall put into safe-keeping (lit. he shall set the conditions and he shall put …)” (L122). When a sentence includes a subordinate clause it is described as complex. Subordinate clauses expressing time or circumstance usually precede the main clause. Others, such as relative clauses or sentences

OVERVIEW OF GRAMMAR

135

including direct speech, are usually embedded in the main sentence. Whether a clause is main or subordinate the verb comes at the end: eqlam erišma šeam ulu šamaššammƯ ša ibbaššû esip tabal iqƯšum “He said to him, ‘Plough the field and gather (and) take away the barley or the sesame which is produced’” (L49). Various other syntactic features can be used to determine the style of the language used. Many features distinctive of rhetorical style are found in the Prologue and the Epilogue. The use of language in these sections echoes that used in other Akkadian traditional literature, and collectively it is known as the “hymno-epic dialect”. Variant manuscripts of CH often show alternative ways of expressing the same idea, so these are of particular interest both from the point of view of grammar and literary style.

CONJECTURAL ERRORS AND VARIANT READINGS Occasionally the reading of the stela appears to be wrong, and a suggestion has been made to correct it. For šƗyyimƗnumma “the purchaser” (L281), it would be more usual to expect šƗyyimƗnum; that is the reading adopted by Roth following BAL. For awƯlum ana šattim ištiat Ưgur (L242-243), it would be clearer to read awƯlum alpam ana šattim ištiat Ưgur “the man hired an ox for one year”; the correction was suggested in BAL but not accepted by Roth. For Ưnšu u¨tapda (u¨-tap-da, L220), the expected verbal phrase is Ưnšu u¨tappid (*u¨-tap-pi-id) “he has destroyed his sight”; the correction was suggested in BAL and accepted by Roth. On one occasion an enclictic particle –ma links the protasis with the apodosis, which is exceptional; if this is the correct interpretation, it would be anomalous: šumma tamkƗrum … šeam kaspam […] ilteqƝma […] … tuppi rikistišu [i¨eppe] “if a merchant … has taken barley or silver, and… the tablet for that contract shall be broken” (§5.11). However, the text depends on an ancillary manuscript, from which a broken part of the stele has been restored, and the tablet is in fact very fragmentary, so too much should not be made of this reading. Several examples of variant readings in parallel manuscripts have phonological, morphological or lexical significance. For nizmassu “his ambition” (iii:1), ms. B reads nizmasšu, which may indicate only a partial assimilation of *nizmatšu; it could also indicate a grammatical writing, in which the pronominal suffix is deliberately written –šu. For uštašannƗma “he shall double the amount” (L120), ms. P reads uš-ta-ašna-ma, and this is less clearly able to be interpreted as a durative form.

136

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

For the first verb in the expression ukannnjšima ana mê inaddûši “they shall prove her guilty and throw her into the water” (L108), ms. S reads ikassušima “they shall bind her”. Such cases of lexical variation are not common. For sapar nakirƯ “a net for the enemy” (ii:68), ms. B reads sapar nakidu; the sign {ri} seems to have been copied wrongly, as {du}.

DETAILED GRAMMATICAL NOTES These notes follow the scheme of the previous chapter, where an overall view was presented, but now a more complete description will be made with full citations to illustrate different nuances of meaning of similar grammatical structures.

PHONOLOGY Akkadian texts are written in cuneiform on three-dimensional objects. There are three stages in the process of converting them to be read on paper in romanised script so that the length of vowels and consonants can be clearly marked. The cuneiform can be reproduced in an appropriate standardised font (some are available in digital format) or, what is of course better, copied by hand on to paper, so that the cuneiform signs on paper resemble as closely as possible the original inscribed signs. The stele of CH does not show as much variation for individual signs as would be apparent on a clay tablet, and this is reflected in the general consistency in the reproduction of the signs in the hand-copy of Bergmann (1953). The decipherment of cuneiform has provided a reasonably complete inventory of vowels and consonants, so that each cuneiform sign can be transliterated into roman script. Because most signs can represent more than one syllable, transliteration is not an automatic process, but it does enable someone not familiar with the cuneiform script to have some idea of how the words were pronounced. In what follows, transliterated texts are written in lower case roman or italic script, with the syllables comprising an individual word hyphenated together; ideograms are written in upper case; the phonetic value of an individual cuneiform sign will be given in decorative brackets. But to undertake a formal analysis of grammar depends rather more on phonemic transcription than phonetic transliteration, and this introduces more detailed questions of phonology. Decisions have to be made about the length of vowels and the gemination of consonants which often depend more on general rules for Semitic

138

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

phonology than on patterns of orthography. Citations in transcription are always given in italic font. Ideographic and Syllabic Writing1 Akkadian words may be written ideographically or syllabically. When a word is written ideographically it is its meaning rather than its sound that is indicated; sometimes, to indicate the correct pronunciation more precisely, one or more syllabic signs are added to the ideogram. In CH most words are written syllabically. In principle no single syllabic sign indicates two contiguous consonants or more than one vowel.2 A few signs indicate a vowel without any consonant, conventionally referred to as V-signs. But most of the syllabic signs indicate a consonant with a following vowel, the CV-signs. Others indicate a vowel followed by a consonant, the VC-signs, which have to be used in words which begin with a vowel and in those where two vowels are juxtaposed; these are the only situations in which a syllable may begin with a vowel. At the end of a word it is not uncommon to find a CVCsign, one indicating two consonants with an intermediary vowel. Vowels3 There is a fundamental distinction in Akkadian between the three vowels a, i and u, and on occasions the distinction between i and e is also significant and is explicitly marked in the cuneiform script. The script has no explicit marking for the vowel o. A CV-sign followed by a V-sign is suggestive that the syllable has a long vowel, but in general vowel length is imprecisely indicated. In a transcription of the cuneiform signs long vowels need to be distinguished from short vowels, since the difference may be phonemic. Non-phonemic vowel length is usually the result of an assimilation of the glottal stop. Most long vowels are marked with a macron: a is to be distinguished from Ɨ, e from Ɲ, i from Ư and u from nj. Where a long vowel is the result of the assimilation of the glottal stop, and consequently the coalescence of two juxtaposed dissimilar vowels, length is marked by a circumflex (â, ê, î, û). For the purposes of alphabetic sequence vowel length is disregarded. 1

GrAkk. §1.2. The only exception would be the ligature {i + a}, sometimes transliterated as {ia} but also as {ya} or {ja}; it was probably articulated as the consonant y followed by a. 3 GrAkk. §1.1(a). 2

DETAILED NOTES: PHONOLOGY

139

For the most part the syllabary uses one sign to indicate both e and i with an adjacent consonant;4 for more precise details see Labat 1988, and von Soden 1991. But occasionally a phonogram indicating a consonant followed by i {Ci} can be distiguished from one indicating the same consonant followed by e {Ce}. The sign {te} (376)5 very rarely indicates {ti7}, and {ti} (73) very rarely indicates {te6}: i-te-šu (L43: xiii:8) is transcribed as itƝšu. But of the VC-signs none distinguishes between {iC} and {eC}: {im} (399) may also be transliterated as {em}; ap-ši-teem/im (L46 = xiii:56) is naturally transcribed apšƯtêm because of the preceding {te}. Where a sign is ambivalent, the choice between e and i may also rest on philological grounds and any marking of vowel length will also be a philological judgment. Words which include a root consonant  which reflects Semitic  or ! habitually prefer e: mu-de/di (xlix:102), even though the sign {de} (457) also signifies {di}, is transcribed mudƝ (cf. Hebrew y-d-!); similarly {Ñe} (147) could signify {‰i} in wa-Ñe/Ñi-em (L141 = xxx:36) but it is transcribed wa‰êm (cf. Hebrew y-Ñ-).6 Several words are habitually transcribed with e: girseqîm “attendant”; sekretim “cloistered woman”, but sometimes transcriptions of a word are inconsistent: Ñe¨ru and also Ñi¨ru “small”.7 Distinguishing e from i is phonetic rather than phonemic. In CH it is not always the primary sign, as understood by convention, for a particular syllable in Akkadian as a whole that is in fact used for that syllable: it is the secondary sign {qi2/qe2} (461) not the primary sign {qi/qe} (538) which is used for ileqqe (i-le-qe2, L12 = viii:13; cf. ileqqƝma = i-le-qe2-ma, L142 = xxxi:3); similarly, ezƝbša (eze2-eb-ša, L141 = xxx:45) uses {zi2/ze2} (147) not {zi/ze} (84), and uzubbêm (u2-zu-ub-be-em, L139: xxx:28) uses {be/bi4} (69) not {bi/ be2} (214).8

4

GrAkk. §7.1. Underlined numbers are those used in the conventional sign lists. 6 There are also philological arguments for preferring e in words where the root consonant  reflects Semitic ­ (­et). 7 Transcribed with e by Borger in BAL (and also in AHw) but with i in Roth 1995 and in CAD. 8 This in turn influences the transcription of {im/em} (399). The root of ezƝbu (-z-b) is cognate with Hebrew !-z-b. 5

140

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Semivowels9 The semivowel y (or j) occurs only before the vowel a.10 It is most commonly attested in nouns with the 1st sg. pronominal suffix: ina maÆar Marduk bƝliya “before Marduk, my lord”. It occurs at the beginning of a word in CH only in iƗti “me”. The semivowel w occurs in word initial position before the vowel a in words like wardum “slave”.11 The sign {wa} is transliterated {we} in words such as uweddƯma (u2-we-ed-di-ma) “he made known” (L193 = xl:13).12 Glottal Stop Several consonants typical of Semitic languages are not indicated in Akkadian because the cuneiform script was adapted from its use for nonSemitic Sumerian. In fact, it was only after the Old Babylonian period that a specific sign was used to indicate the glottal stop itself. In Old Babylonian, signs for syllables involving the consonant ¨ may be used:13 i-¨a-al-la-lu-šu may also be transliterated as i-a-al-la-lu-šu and transcribed as iallalnjšu “they hang him”. On etymological grounds the  in Akkadian roots can be seen to reflect four other phonemes which are distinguished in other Semitic languages: h, Ü, ! and ƥ. Words that appear with a glottal stop in an alphabetically written Semitic language normally appear in Akkadian transliteration simply with a vowel. The nature of that vowel may be a clue to which of the seven missing Semitic consonants is inherent in the word, as suggested by etymological parallels. In theory, therefore, there are five different glottal stops: 1 for ; 2 for h; 3 for Ü; 4 for !; 5 for ƥ.14

9

GrAkk. §1.1(b). In cuneiform the syllable is written as the ligature {i + a}, see above, n. 2. 11 After the Old Babylonian period the normal writing of such words was without w. The word is listed as wardum (AHw.) or ardum (CAD). 12 This writing pattern is seen also in the analagous form in an Old Babylonian letter: u2-we-di-ki-im uweddikim “I let you know” (VAS 16: 188:35: see CAD s.v. idû 4b (I, p. 30b, line –14f.)). An alternative pattern is seen in a literary text: u2-e-dak-ka uweddakka “I will tell you” (Gilgamesh XI: 24: see CAD s.v. idû 4 (I, p. 30b, line 4f.)), which suggests that the same syllable could be expressed without using any specific sign for w. 13 GrAkk. §21.4. 14 GrAkk. §6.1. 10

DETAILED NOTES: PHONOLOGY

141

When transcriptions are made, the supposed glottal stop is not always consistently written in Roth. For words written syllabically diaeresis between two vowels may be marked with : eiltišu; ilei; išteneƯma; rƗimat; rƝûm; SumulƗil; šƗim; šeašu; ušnjpiu; also for words written ideographically: SIPA rƝûm (L57 = xv:56; L58 = xv:75; cf. rƝî iv:45); ¼E šeam (L120 = xxvii:12; cf. šeim L120 = xxvii:17).15 Elsewhere no glottal stop is transcribed for words with similar diaereses: biniƗtišu; dƗrium; eliƗt; ištiat; ibbinj; ibniušu; iriab; iriabbnjšum; Ưtelianim; liƗtim; lišƗ‰iaššumm; Ninua; qƗbiat; rabium; rƝdiam; šaniam; ušarbinjšu; nor for words written ideographically: DI¼ ištiat (L242 = xliv: 86); AB2.BI! ÑA2 liƗtim (L35 = xi:66; L253 = xliv:75); AGA.U¼ rƝdiam (L34 = xi:55). Sometimes contiguous dissimilar vowels are elided: KIRI6 *kiriam > kiriam (L60 = xvi:14), > kirâm (L65 = xvi:72).16 Elision normally occurs where similar vowels are separated by an etymologically inherent glottal stop: *rƝduum > rƝdûm (L26 = ix:66); *rƝdiim > rƝdîm (L34 = xi:53); *kiriim > kirîm (L60 = xvi:19). When a word is written phonetically, the separation of dissimilar vowels may be indicated by interposing a V-sign between a CV and a VC-sign: bi-ni-a-ti-šu biniƗtišu (li:64); ib-ni-u3-šu ibniušu (ii:15; vnt. ms. A: ib-na-šu); i-te-li-a-nim Ưtelianim (L58 = xv:67); i-ri-a-ab-bu-šum iriabbnjšum (L23: ix:45); li-ša-‰i-a-aš-šum-ma lišƗ‰iaššumma (li: 65); rai-ma-at rƗimat (l:98); ša-i-im šƗim (i:6); ša-ni-a-am šaniam (L178 = xxxviii:16); u2-šar-bi2-u3-šu ušarbinjšu (i:15). But there are several occasions when no V-sign is interposed: da-ri2-um dƗrium (v:1); qa-bi-at qƗbiat (li:52); ra-bi-um rabium (xlix:98; l:44; l:82); su-mu-la-il2 Sumulail (iv:67). Occasionally a sign normally used for a syllable containing ¨ is used to indicate an intervocalic glottal stop: e-¨i-il-ti-šu eiltišu (L39 = xii:37; cf. i-il-ti-šu L38 = xii:29). Such a sign is also used when the glottal stop follows a consonant: la-a¨-bu-um labum (L148 = xxxi:76); še-er-¨a-nam šerƗnam (L221 = xlii:3). The separation of dissimilar vowels at the end of a word is indicated by a final V-sign: ibbi-u3 ibbinj (i:17); ni-nu-a Ninua (iv: 60); u2-šu-pi2-u3 ušnjpiu (iv:62). The distinction between e and i is usually blurred: i-li-i ilei (L28 = x:36). Some of the words involving diaerisis are found with variant spelling patterns on the stele (and even more variant spellings are found in 15

The Sumerian equivalent of a word written ideographically is here transliterated in capital letters, and the appropriate Akkadian equivalent in italics. 16 According to the transcription of Roth; BAL transliterates as kiriam in L60 and L65.

142

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

parallel texts): eiltišu (i-il-ti-šu L38 = xii:29; e-¨i-il-ti-šu L39 = xii:37); iriab (i-ri-a-ab L125 = xxviii:2; i-ri-ab L219 = xli:88; L232 = xlii:86). When the glottal stop is assimilated it usually results in a long vowel: dƗrƯtam < *daritam; kirƯ < *kiri; cf. kirîm, kirƗšu, kirƗša; rƝî (< *rƝi); šamê (< *šame). But with some nouns an assimilated glottal stop does not result in a long vowel: mubbib (< *muabbib; the short vowel precedes a geminated consonant); zƝrum (< *zƝrum, the noun associated with the root z-r-; cf. zƝram and zƝrašu). Some forms of verbs with the glottal stop as a root consonant which is assimilated include a long vowel. Such words adopt the same spelling pattern in the cuneiform script as forms where no glottal stop is involved; there is usually no explicit marking to suggest vowel length: i-¨u-uz Ư¨uz < *i¨uz (L162 = xxxiii:80); i-ri-iš-ma Ưrišma < *irišma (L43 = xiii:6); ir-šu-u2 iršû < *iršuu (L176a = xxxvi:82); li-re lirƝ < *lirei (xlix:17); u2-li-sum2-ma njlissumma < *ulidšumma (L162: xxxiii:81); uš-ta-¨i-su2 uštƗ¨issu < *ušta¨izšu (L188 = xxxix:58). In the Prologue we find alternative writings for the final vowel of the verb ibbnj (< *inbinj; 3rd pl. pret. nabû) “they named”, where length is both inflectional (3rd pl. –nj) as well as the result of an assimilated : ib-bi-u3 (i:17), with {u3}; ib-bu-u2 (i:49), with {u2}. Consonants17 The approximate scheme of articulation for the consonants can be represented thus: labial dental palatal sibilant nasal liquid

unvoiced p t k s m, n l, r

voiced b d g z

emphatic

fricative

m  q ‰ 

¨ š

Consonantal Gemination Marking consonantal gemination in transcription depends on morphological analysis, whether on grammatical or on phonological grounds, and also on references to etymology, observing principles from comparable Semitic philology. Gemination is not consistently marked in the cuneiform script. A VC-sign followed by a CV-sign (where C indicates 17

GrAkk. §1.1(b).

DETAILED NOTES: PHONOLOGY

143

the same consonant) suggests that the consonant is geminated, but the pattern of writing cannot be regarded as definitive when it comes to making a phonemic transcription. Several verbal forms are regularly transcribed with a geminated consonant on grammatical grounds: 1. Durative forms: iraggum (i-ra-ag-gu-um) “he will complain” (L162; 163; 175); išaqqal (i-ša-qal) “he will weigh out” (L59 etc.); išaqqalnj (i-ša-qa2-lu) “they will weigh out” (L24). 2. D-theme forms and associated words: ¨ulluqim (¨u-ul-lu-qi2im) “loss” (i:36); li¨alliq (li-¨al-li-iq) “may he destroy” (l:75); u¨alliqu (u2-¨al-li-qu2) “which he lost” (L53; 125; 232; 237); u¨talliq (u¨2-ta-al-li-iq) “he has lost” (L232; 236; 237; 263). 3. N-theme forms with n as the first root consonant: innaddin (in-na-ad-di-in) “it will be given” (L32).18 4. Verbs where m is the third root consonant, and verbs marked with –am (ventive), before the enclitic particle –ma:19 išƗmma (i-ša-am-ma) “he bought” (L278; 279); ittnjramma (it-tu-ra-amma) “he has come back” (L27; 135; 136). 5. Verbs with infixed –t– where t is the first root consonant: ittnjram (it-tu-ra-am) “he has come back” (L27); cf. ittnjramma.20 Phonological gemination21 arises as the result of the assimilation of different contiguous phonemes; it is explicitly marked in transcription but is not always suggested in the script. When it is not marked, the verb 18 In L36 innaddin is written i-na-ad-di-in, which is the normal writing for the much more frequently occurring G-theme form inaddin “he will give”. But since the N-theme innaddin is more likely to have been intended here, an emendation is suggested: for stele {i} read {in}, which is supported by ms. r (cf. BAL). The stele appears to have adopted the spelling of the more frequently occurring active verb inaddin (G-theme) or the less frequently occurring but presumably very similarly pronounced passive innaddin (N-theme). 19 For convenience the suffix –ma is usually left untranslated in citations of verbal forms. 20 The verb itnjramma “he returned” (L30), a less frequently occurring form and one without infixed –t–, is also written it-tu-ra-am-ma, suggesting geminated t. As with inaddin for innaddin (see n. 18), the usual spelling of the more frequently occurring and similarly pronounced word is used for the rarer word; cf. Roth p. 141 n. 8. 21 The term coarticulation is sometimes used.

144

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

is said to have been written defectively. The phoneme n is usually assimilated to the following consonant in any cluster.22 Examples of the assimilation of n to a following labial, dental, sibilant or palatal include: *np > pp: ipparrasma (ip-pa-ar-ra-as2-ma) “it will be decided” (L18; 142). *nb > bb: ibbaššû (ib-ba-aš-šu-u2) “which will be produced” (L46 etc.).23 *nd > dd: iddin (id-di-in) “he gave” (L41 etc.; cf. also iddƯma; iddâk). *ns > ss: assu¨ (as-su2-u¨2) “I uprooted” (xlvii:31); lissu¨šu (li-issu2-u¨2-šu) “may he root him out” (l:36); also written defectively: lissu¨ (li-su2-u¨2) “may he tear out” (xlviii:92). *n‰ > ‰‰: i‰‰urma (i‰-‰ur-ma) “she kept” (L133b); also written defectively li‰‰ur (li-‰ur) “may he keep” (xlviii:67). *nš > šš: ištiššu (iš-ti-iš-šu) “for his first time” (L169); iddišši (id-diiš-ši) “he gave her” (L183; 184; cf. iddiššim; inaddišši). *nk > kk: anaddikkum (a-na-ad-di-ik-kum) “I shall give you” (L160). *nm > mm: imma¨¨a‰ (im-ma¨-¨a-a‰) “he shall be beaten” (L202).

The phoneme m is assimilated when the ventive ending –am precedes a 3rd person pronominal suffix with š: *mš > šš: ipmuraššuma (ip-mu2-ra-aššu-ma) “he ransomed him” (L32); cf. njtebbibaššuma; uštƝliašši. The phoneme b is assimilated before the conjunctive enclitic particle –ma: *bm > mm: uššamma (uš-ša-am-ma) “she shall dwell” (L148); ubbamma (u2-ub-ba-am-ma) “he shall purify” (L266; vnt. ms. c: u2-ub-ba-ab-ma24). Similar gemination is also apparent in the Gtn-theme with verbs with n as the first root consonsonant: littaddi (< *lintandi) “let him go on 22

GrAkk. §5.1. Before enclitic –ma there is no indication that n is assimilated: iddinma (id-di-in-ma) he gave; cf. inaddinma; innaddinma. But in N-theme verbs with m as the first root consonant *nm > mm: imma¨¨aÑ (see below). 23 It would be natural to expect that forms of the G-theme of bašû “to exist” would be written without any explicit suggestion of gemination of b, as in i-baaš-šu-u2 for ibaššû “he who exists” (xlviii:24). The same verbal form may well have been intended by the different writing ib-ba-aš-šu-u2 (L5 = vi:20); if so, it is an example of scribal inconsistency. At face value this writing should represent the N-theme (ibbaššû), the meaning of which is often hardly distinguishable from that of the G-theme. 24 It is possible that writings like this, as well as those like iddinma he gave (see n. 22), represent a conservative, etymological spelling. In the spoken language there may well have been total assimilation of these two phonemes.

DETAILED NOTES: PHONOLOGY

145

throwing down” (li:16); ittanaššƯši (< *intananšiši) “he will always support her” (L178; cf. aran dƯnim ittanašši “he will always bear the punishment for the case” (L4; 13)). It is also apparent with such verbs in the perfect tense, where the n is assimilated by the following infixed –t–: ittadi (< *intadi) “he has abandoned” (L43); uttakkir (< *untakkir) “he has altered” (L265; xlix:32; cf. uttakkaru (xlix:56)). An infixed –t– in the N-theme also exhibits the same gemination: itta‰bat (< *inta‰bat: it-taa‰-ba-at) “he has been caught” (L19; 22; 23; 158; cf. L129;25 132; 253). The same happens with verbs with  as the first root consonant; the glottal stop is assimilated to the following –t– of the Gt-theme of alƗku “to go”: ittalak (< *itallak: it-ta-la-ak (L162 = xxxiv:1)) “he will go away”. Other verbs exhibit progressive rather than regressive assimilation; that is to say that it is not the infixed –t– but the first root consonant that is assimilatory26. Examples are found when the first root consonant is d, ‰ and m: iddnjkšu (< *idtukšu) “he has killed it” (L244; cf. iddnjk L266); uddappir (< *udtappir) “he has absented himself” (L30; cf. L31); liddammam (< *lidtammam) “let him grieve” (li:69: for stele: li-da!-damma-am read li-id-dam-ma-am); i‰‰abat (< *i‰tbat) “he has seized” (L9; 136; cf. i‰‰abtuma (L30); i‰‰abassi (L148); i‰‰abtnjšu (L130; 155); i‰‰abtamma (L109)); ummibbnj (< *umtibbnj) “they have made glad” (L178); ummebbi (< *umtebbi) “he has let it sink” (L236; 237). Verbs which have  as the first root consonant in the preterite tense find that the  is assimilated to the preformative vowel, which is thereby lengthened: Ưrišma (< *irišma: i-ri-iš-ma) “he cultivated” (L43 = xiii:6). This similarly exemplifies progressive assimilation, but a vowel is the assimilatory phoneme. In the durative tense the writing pattern suggests that here also the preformative vowel is lengthened; so that i-ir-ri-iš-ma (L47 = xiii:67), which has been traditionally transcribed as irrišma (< *irrišma) should in fact be transcribed as Ưrrišma.27 25

Here written it-ta-aÑ-bat. Cf. GrAkk. §5.4. When the first of the pair of phonemes is assimilatory, the assimilation is said to be progressive. In the examples mentioned previously it was the second phoneme that was assimilatory (iddin ss: amassu; aplnjssa; aššassu; bƝlessa; bƯssu; i‰‰abassi; mƗrassu; mudnjssunu; mussa; muttassu; nipûssu; pƯ¨assu; qibƯssu; warkassu. *dš > ss: ilmassi; ipqissum; imrussu; likšussu; njlissum; warassu. *sš > ss: urakkissu. *‰š > ss: im¨assuma; uktarrissu. *zš > ss: i¨¨assi; uštƗ¨issu “he has made him understand”. *šš > ss: errƝssa “her cultivator”.30

Sometimes assimilation is only partial, for the two phonemes remain distinct but one of them is subject to mutation: ugdallib (< *ugtallib)31 “he has shaved”.

Morphographemes32 The syllables u2-zu-un-šu for uzunšu “his ear” (L205) suggest that n in the cluster nš has not been assimilated. This would be an exception to the usual patterns of assimilation, where *nš > šš. Probably it represents a style of writing in which the scribe is primarily concerned to write the correct bound form of the morpheme for “ear” before the possessive clearly inflected as preterite or perfect, there are some examples of the durative. As such, it could be translated “he is intending to cultivate”. Another example in CH of the durative expressing intention is šumma awƯlum ¨Ưrtašu … izzib “if a man intends to abandon his wife” (L138). It may perhaps be relevant to note that the first verb of the supplementary protasis appears to be a perfect, ittnjramma (it-tu-ra-am-ma) “he has returned” (x:65). However, this appears to have been interpreted by Roth not as a perfect but as a preterite itnjramma “he returned” (see Roth 141 n. 8). 28 Such assimilation is said to be reciprocal, inasmuch as both the first and the second phoneme influence one another to the extent that a new phoneme is produced which shares a characteristic of them both. 29 See GAG §30. 30 The mutation of one geminated consonant to another, as *erešša > errƝssa (and similarly errƝssuma), can be described as dissimilation. 31 The infixed unvoiced dental –t– of the perfect has mutated to the voiced dental -d- under the influence of the voiced palatal g. 32 GrAkk. §15.4.

DETAILED NOTES: PHONOLOGY

147

suffix (uzun + šu), rather than to represent more accurately the pronunciation of the word (uzuššu). Haplography The expression anadƗnim (§5.2), only in a supplementary ms., is best understood as ana nadƗnim. This could be an example of phonetic haplography, where one of two contiguous identical syllables is lost in speech. But because the phrase is a common one and no other example of the feature is found, it is better to explain it as graphemic haplography; the scribe has mistakenly omitted to repeat his writing of the sign {na}. Stress The syllable on which stress is placed can usually be determined by the position in the word adopted by a long vowel, but it is important in this regard to distinguish vowels that in transcription are marked long with a macron (where vowel length is usually phonemic) and those marked with a circumflex (where vowel length is usually phonetic, the result of an assimilated glottal stop).33 The following three rules for stress have been formulated: 1. A word which ends with a syllable consisting of a “macronlong vowel” followed by a consonant, or with a “circumflexlong vowel” with or without a following consonant, takes stress on that final syllable: ibnû “he built”; idnjk “he killed”. Such a syllable may be described as “ultra-heavy”. 2. Other words will not be stressed on the final syllable, but on the syllable closest to it which contains another long vowel (such as a “macron-long vowel” not followed by a consonant), or a consonant which is geminated or forms a consonantal cluster. Such a syllable may be described as “heavy”. Words stressed on the penultimate syllable include: idnjknj “they killed”; unakkir “he altered”; napištim “of life”. Words stressed on the antepenultimate syllable include: idukknjšuma “they shall kill him”; uttakkaru “which is not to be altered”; napšatam “life”. 3. In a word which does not have a final “ultra-heavy” syllable or a non-final “heavy syllable”, the stress is on the first syllable: ilnj “the gods”; šunu “them”; zikarim “of a man”.

33

GrAkk. §1.3.

148

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

NOUNS34 Nominal inflections determine gender (masc. or fem.), number (sg., pl. or occasionally dual) and case (nom., acc. or gen.). They are applied to some proper nouns and all common nouns, including those with a meaning closely related to the action or effect of a verb: epištu “achievement”; errƝšu “cultivator”; tarkibtu “pollination”; wašbu and waššƗbu “occupant”. The inflection of infinitives and participles, which are traditionally understood as parts of the verb, also follows the nominal pattern. Adjectives adopt similar inflections to nouns, including those perceived to be “verbal adjectives”.35 Gender Only a few words are attested in both masc. and fem. forms: bƝlu “master”; bƝltu “mistress”; mƗru “son”; mƗrtu “daughter”. These show that the essential distinction made between masc. and fem. sg. nouns is that in most feminine nouns –t– is found before the case inflection, although there are some obviously feminine nouns which are not marked with –t–: ummu “mother”. In nouns where the stem ends in a geminated consonant or a consonantal cluster the –t– is linked to the stem with a vowel: piššatu “oil”. Some feminine nouns are attested in CH only in their fem. form: nipûtum “distress”.36 Others have no obvious masculine counterpart in Akkadian: aššatu “wife”; almattu “widow”. Number Masculine sg. nouns are marked with –m, and masc. pl. nouns end with a long vowel: dayyƗnum “judge”; dayyƗnnj “judges”. A few nouns are always inflected as a plural though their meaning in English is singular: 34

GrAkk. §2.1. GrAkk. §4.3; the hybrid relationship of some words which take nominal inflections but may function syntactically like verbs is discussed by Buccellati 1996, §12.1. 36 The masc. noun nipû is a rare word which does not occur in CH. It is not translated in AHw. (nipûm, 792b) or in CAD (nipû, N/2, 249a), and the meaning remains uncertain. But the context of the two instances cited, both found in Old Babylonian letters, suggests that a meaning similar to nipûtum would not be inappropriate there. But it should be remembered that it is not always straightforward to deduce the meaning of what could be reasonably regarded as a masc. word directly from a corresponding fem. form. 35

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

149

idnj “fee”; pannj “face”. Others which are most naturally translated into English as sg. happen to occur in CH only in the pl., even though a sg. form is attested elsewhere in Akkadian: melammnj (pl.) “radiance” (cf. sg. melammum).37 A few nouns form plurals differently: a¨um “brother”; a¨¨nj “brothers” (L165; 166).38 Feminine pl. nouns are most frequently marked with –Ɨt– before the case inflection. Some occur only in the pl.: kiššƗtu “pledge”.39 For others the sg. form, which is used for citation purposes, does not happen to be attested in CH: eliƗtu (pl.) < elƯtu (sg.) “additional portion”; cf. mƗna¨Ɨtu (pl.) < mƗna¨tu (sg.) “cost”; niplƗtu (pl.) < nipiltu (sg.) “compensation”. Sometimes a fem. pl. noun can be closely associated semantically with a masc. sg. noun: nis¨Ɨtu “deserters”, cf. nis¨u (masc. sg.), nisi¨tu (fem. sg.)40; riksƗtu “contracts”, cf. riksu (masc. sg.), rikistu (fem. sg).41 Occasionally a word is marked with –Ɲt– instead of –Ɨt–: epšƝtu “labour” (sg. epištu). In CH only a few words are attested in both fem. sg. and fem. pl. forms: šattu “year” (< *šantu), šanƗtu “years”; ‰ibtu “interest”, ‰ibƗtu “interest.”42 Some Akkadian words take the dual inflection –Ɨn indicating a pair, but the only dual noun in CH is kilallƗn “both”. It occurs as subject: 37

Although the sg. is attested, the word mostly occurs as pl. (see AHw., s.v. melemmu(m); cf. CAD s.v. melammu). 38 GrAkk. §20.3; the other irregular plural forms mentioned there do not occur in CH. 39 This word occurs only with fem. pl. inflection (see CAD 459b-60b; AHw. 492b). 40 nis¨Ɨtu in the meaning “deserters” is attested only in CH (Law 33; see CAD, s.v. nisi¨tu 3); but the sg. occurs as a variant in ms. r: ana nisi¨tim. AHw. derives the word from nis¨u (see p. 794b, s.v. 3b) and the verb nasƗ¨u “to tear away”, and explains it as literally meaning “aus ihrer Arbeit herausgerissene Leute”, i.e. “people torn away from their work”; the fem. form nisi¨tu is restricted elsewhere in Akkadian to its most common meaning, “tax” (see AHw. 795a; cf. CAD N/2, 269-71, s.v. 4). 41 In Old Babylonian the apparently fem. pl. form riksƗtu is derived from the apparently masc. sg. riksu (see AHw., s.v. C, 985a-b); the fem. noun rikistu (see AHw., s.v. 984a) is not attested in the OB period (see also CAD: R, 345-46 (rikistu) and 347-55 (riksu), esp. 353a, s.v. 7b´, where the fem. pl. noun is translated by a sg. noun). 42 Attested as Ñi-ba-a-at (bound form, pl., L100); also as Ñi-ba-a-tim (§5.12, from ms. s, a later text). Apparently there is little if any difference in meaning between the sg. and the pl. forms.

150

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

kilallƗšunu tamkƗram ippalnj “both of them shall pay the merchant” (L152; vnt. ms. S: kilallnjšunu); and also as object: kilallƯšunu iqallûšunnjti “they shall burn both of them” (L157). It is probably by analogy with the pl. that the final –n is lost before the pronominal suffix –šunu. Case Nouns are inflected differently according to whether they function as the subject or the object of a verb, or whether they are used to qualify another noun in the clause.43 The subject of a verb is usually marked with a nominative inflection (sg. –um; pl. –nj), and the object with an accusative inflection (sg. –am; pl. –Ư): awƯlum šnjgitam i¨¨az “the man shall marry the priestess” (L145); mƗrum arnam la ublam “the son has not committed an offence” (L168); abam … ummam … izƝrma “he hated his father and mother” (L193); wardam amtam … ištƗm “he purchased a male and female slave” (L280); baqrƯ ippal “he shall pay the claims” (L279); mƗrƯ njlissumma “she bore him sons” (L162; cf. L170); cf. mƗrƯ ittalad (L175) and mƗrƯ la njlid (L147); niplƗtim iddin “he gave compensation” (L41). The subject of a passive verb is sometimes marked as nominative: awƯlum iddâk “the man shall be killed” (L130). When a pronominal suffix is linked to an acc. with –a– the inflection is not necessarily to be understood as accusative: muppašu i¨¨eppe u ina kaspišu Ưtelli “his tablet shall be broken and he shall forfeit the silver” (L37).44 The subject of a precative verb is inflected as nominative: Zababa qarrƗdum rabium … kakkašu lišbir “may the mighty hero Zababa shatter his weapon” (l:81-82 and 87). Double Accusative45 Sometimes more than two separate nouns are inflected as acc., particularly in sentences where the verb is in theme III and means to cause a subsequent action: epšƝtim … mê uštƗbil “he has let the water destroy the

43

But many proper nouns are never inflected. The verb in the N-theme is best interpreted as passive (as in CAD, Ñ, p. 172 s.v, 2b; also in Roth). But the connecting vowel –a– in muppašu does not necessarily indicate that the noun is inflected as acc., for –a– occurs also with the nom.: ¨Ưrtašu mƗrƯ njlissum “his first wife bore him sons” (L170). 45 GrAkk. §5.5. 44

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

151

work” (L56);46 ina er‰etim ememmƯšu mê liša‰mi “let him make his ghost thirst for water in the netherworld” (l:38-40). The second accusative is often best translated as adverbial, in that it specifies the place, time or some other adverbial aspect of the occurrence:47 alpum snjqam awƯlam ikkip “the ox tossed the man in the street” (L250); eqlam šipram ippeš “he shall do the work on the field” (L62); awƯlam simmam Ưpušma “he performed an operation on the man” (L215);48 kaspam šamallâm iqƯp “he entrusted the silver to an agent” (L107);49 lu warad ekallim lu amat ekallim abullam uštƝ‰i “he has removed a slave or servant of the palace through the city-gate” (L15); šeam idƯ našpakim inaddin “he shall give grain for the storage charge” (L121); kaspam idƯšu inaddin “he shall give silver for his charges” (L224); ¨arrƗnam ina alƗkišu nakrum mimma ša našû uštaddƯšu “the enemy made him drop what he was carrying when he was going on his journey” (L103); errƝtim… Ellil … lƯruršuma “may Enlil curse him with curses” (li :84 and 86 and 89); in IgigƯ ušarbinjšu, BƗbilam šumšu ‰Ưram ibbinj “they exalted him among the Igigi, they named Bablyon with its illustrious name” (i:14-17); ašar tam¨Ɨrim kakkašu lišbir let him shatter his weapon on the battlefield (l:86-87); mutu libbiša i¨¨assi “a husband may take her with her consent” (L137);50 eqlam … mayyƗrƯ ima¨¨a‰ “he shall break up the field with mattocks” (L43; 44). A noun inflected as acc. after an intransitive or reflexive verb is also to be interpreted as adverbial: šattam ištiatma uddappir “he has absented himself for one year” (L31); rƝqnjssu ul ittallak “he shall not then go away empty” (L191).51 In the expression Ɨliku imniya “walking on my right” (l:85), imniya is inflected as gen., not acc.; the expression has apparently been shortened from Ɨliku ina imniya. Sometimes it appears that a pair of verbs at the end of a clause are to be individually linked with two different objects mentioned earlier in the same clause: tamkƗrum ‰ibat ¨ubulli … 1⁄6 u 6 ummet … uwatterma ilqe 46

epšƝtum (nom.), epšƝtim (obl.) is the pl. of epšetum (sg.), a variant of epištum (see CAD s.v. epištu; also AHw.). 47 GrAkk. §18.3. 48 Similarly L224. 49 The order of the two acc. nouns is changed in ms. S: šamallâm kaspam iqƯp “he entrusted the merchant with silver”. 50 Literally: “he may take her, her heart”; translations like “a husband after her heart” (Driver and Miles 1952) and “of her choice” (Roth) imply that mutu has been interpreted as a bound form. 51 rƝqnjssu < rƯqnjtu + –šu “his emptiness”; see CAD, s.v. rƯqnjtu “emptiness”.

152

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

“the merchant increased the interest on the loan and took one-sixth (of a shekel) and six grains” (§5.10). An alternative translation is also possible, which would imply that the first of these verbs has in effect an adverbial force: “the merchant took the interest on the loan, increasing (it) by one-sixth (of a shekel) and six grains”. Most proper names are indeclinable, but when a proper noun occurs in apposition to a declining noun it can be assumed to have been construed in the same case as that noun: Ñammurabi rubâm nadam pƗli¨ ilƯ iâti … šumƯ ibbû “they named me Hammurabi, the devout prince, fearing the gods” (i:28-49). Genitive A noun inflected as a genitive sg. ends with –im (sg.); gen. pl. nouns have the same inflection as acc. pl. nouns (the oblique case): masc. –Ư; fem. –Ɨtim, –Ɲtim.52 The genitive is used after a preposition:53 kišpƯ eli awilim iddƯma “he made a witchcraft-accusation against the man” (L2); ana mƗrƯ “for the sons” (L166); balum šƯbƯ u riksƗtim “without witnesses or contracts” (L7); marašu u mƗrassu … ana kiššƗtim ittandin “he has given his son or daughter as pledges” (L117); ‰ibƗtim ana qaqqadim umme¨i “he has amalgamated the interest with the principal” (§5.12). A noun in the genitive usually qualifies more precisely any other noun with which it is associated. It may be linked to the noun it qualifies with the particle ša, and then the qualified noun retains its normal case inflection: bƯtum ša rƝdîm ana kaspim ul innadin “the house of a soldier shall not be given for silver” (L36); bƯtam ša rƝdîm upƯ¨ “he has taken in exchange the house of a soldier” (L41); amtam ša awƯlim ištƗm “he has purchased a man’s maidservant” (L280). The particle ša may introduce a noun which qualifies more than one antecedent: šeam šipƗtim šamnam suluppƯ u mimma šumšu ša ‰ênim “the barley, wool, oil, dates or anything else for loading” (L237).54

52

An inflection of plural nouns for the acc. or gen. case is sometimes referred to as the oblique case. 53 GrAkk. §2.2. 54 Cf. GrAkk. §2.3, where ša is categorised not as a relative particle but as a “determinative pronoun”, so that amtam ša awƯlim means literally “the maidservant, the one of the man”.

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

153

When the noun in the genitive is linked directly to the noun it qualifies, the qualified noun is marked as a bound form.55 The bound form of a sg. noun loses any explicit case marker it would have had if linked to the following gen. with ša, and it becomes inseparable from the following genitive: aššat awƯlim “the wife of a man” (L153); bƝl wardim “the owner of a slave” (L20). A directly linked genitive (after a bound form) and an indirectly linked genitive (following ša) may both be found together: epšƝtim ša eqel itƝšu mê uštƗbil “he has let the water destroy the works on a neighbour’s field” (L56). A noun in the genitive may sometimes be interpreted as possessive: mƗr awƯlim “the son of a free man” (L14); mƗr ummƗnim “the son of an artisan” (L188); numƗt rƝdîm “movable property of a soldier” (L34); qƗt ‰ƗbitƗnišu “the hand of his captor” (L20). More often “possessive” is too precise a term to describe the nature of the relationship of the genitive: ina qibƯt ¼amaš dayyƗnim rabîm “at the command of Shamash, the great judge” (xlvii:84-85); ellilnjt kiššat nišƯ “the leadership of the mass of the population” (i:11-12); ušumgal šarrƯ “the most fearsome of kings” (ii:55); mušƝpƯ kƯnƗtim mušnjšer ammi “the embodiment of justice, the director of the peoples” (iv:53-54); dannat šarrim “force of the king” (L28); dƯn napištim “a penalty of death” (L3); ¨arrƗn šarrim “an expedition for the king” (L26; 32); ¨imƯt pissatim “damage from the animal disease” (L267); kasap ramanišu “silver of his own” (L233); makknjr ramanišu “goods of his own” (L235); nƯš ilim “an oath by the god” (L20); pƯ muppišu “the terms of his document” (L66); ‰Ɨb nis¨Ɨtim “a group of deserters” (L33); šƯm šikarim “the price for the beer” (L108); zƝr šarrnjtim “descendant of royalty” (ii:13). But in some expressions the noun in the genitive is the possessed noun: bƝl bƯtim “the owner of the house” (L16 etc.); bƝl ¨ulqim “the owner of the lost property” (L10; 11); bƝl šƝbultim “the owner of a package” (L112); bƯt nƗdinƗnim “the house of the seller” (L9; 12). Occasionally it is more idiomatic to translate expressions with bound forms by one word in English: bƝl ¨ubulli “creditor”.56

55

For this terminology see GrAkk. §8.2, where reference is also made to the traditional term “construct form”. 56 GrAkk. §12.4.

154

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Bound Forms57 The bound form of the sg. noun is not always identical to the stem of the noun, for final consonantal clusters are resolved by an interposed vowel: alap awƯlim “the ox of a man” (L251); elep awƯlim “the boat of a man” (L238); eqel epšƝtim “a field to be worked” (L49); lipit ilim “an affliction from a god” (L266); ‰alam middim “a model of clay” (li:38); šipir qƗtišu “the job for his hand” (L188); warad awƯlim “the slave of a man” (L209; 217); warad ekallim “the slave of the palace” (L15 etc.); warad muškƝnim “the slave of the worker” (L15). Similarly with feminine nouns: amat ekallim “the servant of the palace” (L15 etc.); amat muškƝnim “the servant of the worker” (L15); bƝlet tƗ¨azim “mistress of the conflict” (l:92-93); mƗrat awƯlim “the daughter of the man” (L175). The stem of some nouns is augmented with a final vowel –i: abbutti wardim “a slave’s tonsure” (L226); abi mƗrtim “the father of the girl” (L159); asî alpim “an animal doctor” (L224); e‰emti awƯlim “the man’s bone” (L197; 221); karzilli siparrim “the blade of bronze” (L215); miqitti tarba‰im “the disaster in the sheepfold” (L266); nakkapti awƯlim “a man’s eye-socket “(L215); napišti nišƯ “the sustenance of the people” (l:12); qƗti awƯlim “the possession of the man” (L9); qƗti rƝdîm “the possession of the soldier” (L35); ritti gallƗbim “the barber’s wrist” (L226); šalušti eqlim “a third of the field” (L29); šerikti sinništim “the dowry for the woman” (L163); šerikti ummƗtišunu “the dowry of their mothers” (L167);58 šinni awƯlim “a man’s tooth” (L200). Triconsonantal stems ending in a doubled consonant become biconsonantal: šar tašƯmtim “the king in authority” (ii:22). Nominative masc. pl. forms as bound forms end in –nj, and are indistinguishable from the corresponding unbound forms: mƗrnj mƗtim šanƯtim “people from a different country” (L281); mƗrnj ¨Ưrtim u mƗrnj amtim “the sons of the principal wife and the sons of the maidservant” (L170); mƗrnj ugƗrim … izuzznj “the men in the cultivable area shall share” (L54). Oblique forms end in –Ư or occasionally –Ɲ: idƯ alpim “the charges for an ox” (L242/3); išdƯ ummƗnišu “the foundations of his army” (l:24); melimmƯ šarrnjtim “the splendour of the kingdom” (xlix:48); melimmƯ Emeteursag “the splendour of Emeteursag” (ii:6162); rugummƝ dƯnim “the damages in the case” (L12); itti mƗrƯ ¨Ưrtim imtanûšunnjti “they then reckon them with the first wife’s sons” (L170); 57

GrAkk. §8.3. The sg. bound form with the pl. gen. may be described as a distributive sg., for every mother has only one dowry. 58

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

155

itti mƗrƯ ¨Ưrtim ul izuzznj “they shall not share with the principal wife’s sons” (L171a). Feminine pl. forms end in –Ɨt: mƗna¨Ɨt erƝšim “the costs of cultivation” (L49). Some phrases show that a bound form can be associated with a second bound form as well as the subsequent genitive: šƗim šƯmƗt mƗtim “the decider of the destinies of the land” (i:6-7); mnjt nimil Ưnim “death at the flash of an eye” (xlix:70); gurun šalmƗt ummƗnƗtišu “a heap of bodies of his soldiers” (li:12-14); ašnƗn napišti nišƯ “grain for the sustenance of the people” (l:11-12); numƗt bƝl bƯtim “the possessions of the owner of the house” (L25); bƯt il Ɨlišu “the shrine of the god of his town” (L32); qƗt mƗr awƯlim “the possession of a man’s son” (L7); makknjr bƯt abim “property from the father’s house” (L170); ana mƗrƯ mƗrat awƯlim “concerning the sons of the daughter of the man” (L175). Other phrases show both direct linking (with a bound form) and indirect linking (with ša): bƝl ¨ubullim ša mutiša “the owner of the debt of her husband” (i.e. her husband’s creditor, L151); bilat eqlim ša šanƗtim ša innadû “the rent for the field for the years in which it was abandoned” (L62). One bound form can be associated with more than one genitive noun: bƝl šamê u er‰etim “the lord of heaven and earth” (i:4-5); simat ¨ammim u agêm “the symbol of the sceptre and the crown” (iii:24-25); ašar šipmim u purussêm “the place for judgment and decision” (xlix:8788); bƝlet tƗ¨azim u qablim “mistress of conflict and battle” (l:92-93); ašar tƗ¨azim u qablim kakkašu lišbir “let him shatter his weapon in the place of conflict and battle” (li:2-4); šƯbnjt šeim u kaspim “testimony about grain or silver” (L4); makknjr ilim u ekallim “property of a god or a temple” (L6); šalušti eqlim u kirîm “a third of the field or the orchards” (L29); ilik eqlim kirîm u bƯtim “responsibility for the field and the orchard and the house” (L40); asî alpim u lu imƝrim “a doctor for an ox or a donkey” (L224); bƝl alpim u lu imƝrim “the owner of the ox or the donkey” (L225); nadƯt gagîm u lu sekretim “a priestess in a convent or a cloistered woman” (L180). The inseparability of the bound form from its following genitive is shown by the fact that an adjective will not normally interrupt the sequence but will be placed after the genitive noun and inflected according to the implicit case of the bound form: e‰emti awƯlim šebirtam “the man’s broken bone” (L221). Similarly, a demonstrative does not separate the bound form from the genitive: aran dƯnim šuƗti “the penalty in that case” (L4; 13); rugummƝ dƯnim šuƗti “damages in that case” (L12). However, a negating particle does occasionally disrupt this

156

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

sequence: iklet la nawƗrim “darkness without any brightening” (xlix:6869); kasap la kanƯkim “silver without a sealed document” (L105). It is not always quite clear whether an adjective is to be associated with the bound form or the genitive: ana šerikti sinništim šuƗti “concerning the dowry for that woman”, or “concerning that dowry for the woman” (L163). Proper names that decline are inflected as gen. after a bound form: šar AnunnakƯ “king of the Anunnaku” (i:2); muna¨¨iš Urim “enriching Ur” (ii:16-17). But most do not decline: šulu¨ Eabzu “the lustrations of Eabzu” (ii:1); mutƝr Eridu “restoring Eridu” (i:64); talƯm Zababa “the follower of Zababa” (ii:56-57); melemmƝ Emeteursag “the brightness of Emeteursag” (ii:61-62); šubat Kiš “residence of Kish” (ii:59); nadƯt Marduk “a priestess of Marduk” (L182). On the stele itself appropriate case endings are in the main applied consistently, but in variant manuscripts they are sometimes applied more loosely: for ana diƗnim, ms. f: ana diƗnu “to judge” (xlvii:70); for ana parƗsim, ms. f: ana parƗsu “to decide” (xlvii:72). But occasionally irregularities occur also on the stele. The expression mut libbiša i¨¨assi “the husband of her choice shall take her” (L172), occurs also as mutu libbiša i¨¨assi (L137; also L156; but cf. ms. V: mut libbiša), in which the bound form is inflected with an appropriate (nom.) case ending. In the sentence kasap tamkƗrum išqulu…išaqqal “he shall weigh out the silver which the merchant had weighed out” (L119), tamkƗrum is inflected as nom. (the subject of the verb in the relative clause) rather than gen. after the bound form kasap. The phrase kasap tamkƗrum seems to have arisen because of interference from the fuller phraseology kaspam ša tamkƗrum išqulu, with kasap substituted for kaspam ša without changing the case-inflection to gen. Absolute State59 A noun which looks like a bound form but which is not followed by a genitive is explained as a noun used in the absolute state. Such a noun has a somewhat discrete relationship with the other elements of the phrase in which it occurs. In CH it is found most often in expressions of measure: 5 šiqil kaspam inaddin “he shall pay silver”—five shekels (L221; 222; 223).

59

GrAkk. §23.1.

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

157

Possessive Pronominal Suffixes Possessive pronouns may be attached to nouns as suffixes.60 Suffixes attached to sg. nouns usually mask any case inflection, although the context usually prevents this fact from obscuring the function of the noun within a sentence. Pronominal suffixes, apart from that for the 1st sg., “my”, begin with a consonant. Nouns with a stem ending with a final consonant often introduce a connecting vowel between the stem and the pronominal suffix; plural nouns with a possessive suffix are subject to less change. 1st Person The pronominal suffix for the 1st sg. is essentially vocalic. With sg. nouns the suffix –i is attached to the base: lƝûti šƗninam ul išu “my power has no rival” (xlvii:82-83). The suffix –i is lengthened to –Ư when the base ends in a vowel or when the structure of the word allows case inflections with a long vowel (such as with Sumerian loanwords): lamassƯ damiqtum “O my protecting spirit” (l:96); šumƯ … lizzakir “may my name be uttered” (xlvii:94); šumƯ ibbû “they named my name” (i:49); šumƯ … ipšimma “he removed my name” (xlix:33); With sg. nouns in the gen. sg. the suffix is –iya (written with {ia}): njm balƗmiya “the day of my life” (l:1); qƗbiat dumqiya “she is speaking in my favour” (li:52-53); ina awat Marduk bƝliya “according to the word of my lord Marduk” (xlvii:89-90). With some words vowel lengthening occurs and the suffixes are –îya or –êya: ina narîya “on my stele” (xlvii:75; cf. xlix:4); mudammiqat igirrƝya “she makes my reputation good” (xlix:85-86); rƗimat palêya “she is pleased with my rule” (l:98). With some masc. pl. nouns, inflected with a long vowel –nj in the nom., the 1st sg. pronominal suffix has a long vowel –Ư– into which the –nj– has been assimilated regressively: mƯšarƯ ina mƗtim lištƝpi “may my justice be promulgated in the land” (xlvii:87-88).61 But with others assimilation has not occurred and the suffix is written with –a (= uya):62 Adad … rƝ‰nja “O Adad … my helper” (l:67); mƗrnja iqtabi “he has said, 60

GrAkk. §11.1. mƯšarƯ could be taken as inflected as nom. since it is the grammatical subject of the passive verb (cf. CAD s.v. apû 7, ¼t passive). Alternatively, the inflection could be taken as acc., since it is the semantic object of the verb, and may therefore be inflected ad sensum. Grammatically, the noun is pl., but is better described as pluralis tantum, and translated in English as sg. 62 GrAkk. p. 89. 61

158

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

‘My sons’” (L170). Similarly there is no assimilation after fem. pl. –Ɨtu: awâtnja nasqƗ “my words are precious” (xlvii:81; xlviii:99); u‰urƗtnja mušassikam ay iršia “may my carved figures not have any vandaliser” (xlvii:91-92). After the obl. fem. pl. –Ɨti the suffix is –ya: awâtiya uštepƝl “he has changed my words” (xlix:7-8; cf. xlix:29; see also xlvii:74; xlviii:12; xlix:3); u‰urƗtiya ay ušassik “may he not remove my inscription” (xlviii:73-74). Elsewhere in Akkadian the suffix –ni is used for the 1st pl. suffix,63 but it is not actually attested in CH. 2nd and 3rd Persons The pronominal suffixes for the 2nd and 3rd persons are consonantal. Those attested in CH are: 2nd sg. masc. –ka; 3rd sg. masc. –šu; sg. fem. –ša; pl. masc. –šunu; fem. –šina or –šin.64 Others are not attested in CH but are known from elsewhere in Akkadian: 2nd sg. fem. –ki; 2nd pl. masc. –kunu, fem. –kina. When the noun is nom. or acc. suffixes may be connected directly to the nominal base. Examples of the nom. include: alƗkšu “his going” (L26); ¨arrƗnša “her journey” (L141); munaggiršu “his maligner” (L26); ramanšu “his self” (L32); rnjšu “his friend” (ii:69). Examples of the acc. include a¨šu “his side” (L44; 53; 55); Ɨlšu “his city” (L27; 32; 135; 136); dƯnšu “his judgment” (L5; 23; xlviii:17), dƯnšina “their judgment” (xlviii:88); eqelšu “his field” (L27; 30; 31; 32; 40; 45; 47; 57), eqelša “her field” (L178); ezƝbša “her leaving” (L141); ¨uluqšu “his lost property” (L9; 10); ilikšu “his duty” (L27; 30); kƗršu “his dyke” (L53); nidƯtka “his abandoned land” (L68+b); pagarša “her body” (L133b); šipiršu “his work” (L229); tamkƗršu “his merchant” (L106). With nouns with fem. inflection and other stems ending in –t the cluster tš is resolved by reciprocal assimilation, where tš > ss (probably to be pronounced ‰‰): aššassu “his wife” (nom. L134, < *aššatšu); bƯssu “his house” (acc. L2, < *bƯtšu); mussa “her husband” (acc. L141, < *mutša). Alternatively a vowel is introduced to connect the last radical with the suffix; this vowel does not always correspond to the vowel of the appropriate case inflection, as can be seen with libbu “heart”, which in CH always has a linking vowel –a– whether it is nom. or acc.: libbašu mƗb “his heart is glad” (L264, nom.); libbašu linappišma “may he set his 63

As in the phrase kƯma Ñimdat bƝlini “according to the decision of our master” (see CAD s.v. bƝlu 1b, 1´). 64 A suffix not actually attested in CH, but assumed or attested elsewhere for Old Babylonian, is placed in brackets.

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

159

mind at ease” (xlviii:18-19, acc.);65 libbaša umabbnj “they shall make her heart glad” (L178); also libbaša la ummibbnj “they have not made her heart glad (L178). With the gen. the connecting vowel is –i–: mut libbiša “the husband of her choice” (L172); ina libbišu “in the midst of it” (i:20); ina libbišu gamrim “with his whole heart” (xlviii:45-46); ina libbiša aggim “with her angry heart” (l:99-100); mimma ša ina libbiša “her cargo” (L237; cf. L209; 211; 213 “her foetus”). A sg. noun in the nom. may have –u– as the linking vowel: abuša ul iraggum “her father shall not claim” (L162); mimma ša abuša iddinušim “whatever her father gave her” (L178); emušu … iqtabi “his father-inlaw has said” (L161); mƗrušu ilkam alƗkam ilei “his son is able to perform the duty” (L28); mƗrušu ilmassi “his son got to know her” (L155; cf. L156; for mƗrašu see below); mimmûšu la ¨aliqma “nothing of his is lost” (L126; cf. mimmûšu la ¨alqu (L126); mimmûšu ¨alqu (L9); for mimmâšu see below); perhaps also mƝ¨ušu his neighbour (L67, text broken). For nom. pl. nouns the linking element is –nj– (masc.) or –Ɨtu(fem.): a¨¨njša … šeriktam išarraknjšimma “her brothers shall present her with a dowry” (L184); a¨¨njša … lubušam la ittadnnjšimma “her brothers have not given her clothing” (L178); mƗrnjša Ñe¨¨ernj “her sons are minors” (L177); šƯbnjšu la qerbu “his witnesses are not nearby” (L13); ša šƯmƗtušu ina ma¨ra illakƗ “whose decisions come to the fore” (xlviii:99100). The subject of a passive verb is not always construed as nom., for it does not have the sense of being the performer of an action but rather the item to which an action is addressed; often the subject of a passive verb has a form which may be parsed as nom. or acc.: ¨arranša uzubbnjša mimma la innaddiššim “as for her journey and her divorce settlement, nothing shall be given to her” (L141). All the examples of –u– and –nj– as connecting vowels in CH occur with nouns construed as nom., but –a– is also found with some nouns in the nom. sg.:66 eleppašu mebiat “his vessel is sunk” (L240);67 šeriktaša ša 65

For this translation see CAD s.v. napƗšu 4a. The connecting vowel –a– before a 3rd sg. suffix for nouns in the nominative has been explained as a feature of nouns with a bound form ending in –i–, in which the –i– has been replaced by an unaccented short –a– (see GrAkk. p. 87, bottom). The same form occurs with nouns in the accusative, examples of which are given below. 67 It seems easiest to explain eleppašu as a nom.; it is the subject of the verb mebiat, a stative of the G-theme. The clause appears to indicate that the boat is in this state because it had sunk (from an intransitive verb). It is just possible that the meaning of the G-theme stative has merged with the meaning of the D66

160

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

mƗrƯšama “her dowry is for her sons” (L162; cf. L163; šeriktaša occurs also as acc., L164); awƯlum ¨Ưrtašu mƗrƯ njlissum “a man whose first wife bore him sons” (L170);68 babtašu ina ma¨ar ilim ubâršuma “his community made him declare in the presence of the god” (L126); bƗbtašu ušƝdƯšumma “his community informed him” (L251). For sg. nouns in the acc. the linking vowel can be –a–: abašu (L186); bƯšašu (L54); kirâšu (L27; 66; L27); mƗrašu (L194; 169); mimmâšu (L9; 23; 125); nabalkattaka (L68 + b); nakkaptašu (L220); purussašina (xlviii:89); rittašu (L253); šamallâšu (L107); šeriktaša (L137; 142; 149; 173; 176a); muppašu (L37); ummašu (L29; 186); zittašu (L60). Some of the words attested with –a– as as the linking vowel in the nom. occur in the acc. also with –a–: babtašu njtebbir “he has deceived his community” (L126); eleppašu … iddinma “he gave his boat” (L236); awƯlum ¨Ưrtašu … izzib “the man abandons his wife” (L138).69 With masc. and fem pl. nouns in the acc., the suffix is attached directly to the inflected form70; for the masc. pl. this form ends in –Ư: damƯšunu er‰etam lišqi “may she feed his blood to the earth” (li:10-11); kilallƯšunu iqallûšunnjti “they shall burn them both” (L157); panƯšu ištakan “he has set his face” (L148; cf. L169); qarnƯšu la ušarrim “he did not cover its horns” (L251); qarrƗdƯšu lišamqit “may he make his heroes fall” (li:8-9); njmƯšu imannnjma “they shall count the days for it” (L100). The inflection for the fem. pl. acc.. ends ends in –i: awâtišunu immarnjma “they shall investigate their statements” (L9); riksƗtišu ul inni “he shall not change the contract” (L52); mušaršidu šubƗtišin “providing for their homes” (iv:14-15, variant B: šubƗtišina). Nouns occurring after prepositions, after bound forms and after ša are inflected as gen. For sg. nouns in the gen. with suffixes, the linking vowel is usually –i– (or –e–), but with stems requiring case inflections theme stative, and it could then indicate that the boat is in this state because some external force had made it sink (from a transitive verb). If that were so, it would perhaps be possible to take eleppašu as the grammatical subject but semantic object of this passive idea, and then the residue of an acc. inflection would not be altogether out-of-place. 68 The word awƯlum may be understood as suspended in the nom. case (nomen pendens), or the phrase awƯlum ¨Ưrtašu as shortened from awƯlum ša ¨Ưrtašu; in either case ¨Ưrtašu is most obviously explained as nominative. 69 An acc. sg. occurs with –i– as the connecting vowel in a variant manuscript: kunukkišu la išmuršum (§5.3a, ms. t). 70 The same would be true also for the much more rarely attested noun in the dual.

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

161

with long vowels it may be –Ư– (or –Ɲ–). Examples after a preposition include abišu (L157), abišunu (L135); a¨¨išunu (L166); aplišu (L165); aššatišu (L38; 150); bƗbišu (L227); bƝlišu (L18; §5.8); bƝltiša (L146); bƯrišu (l:26); bƯtika (L68+b), bƯtišu (L133a; 135; 145), bƯtiša (L131); bƗbišu (L227); bƗbtiša (L126; 142); bulmišu (L170); eiltišu (L38); er‰etišu (l:10), er‰etišunu (L23); ¨amšƯšu (L12); ¨Ɨwiriša (L135); itƝšu (L55); kƗrišu (L53); kaspika (L66), kaspišu (L35; 177); libbišu (i:20); mƗrnjtišu (L190); mƗrišu (L155), mƗriša (L150; 172); mƗrtišu (L38; 180); ma¨rišunu (L9); mutiša (L132; 136; 144; 146); nƗdinƗnišu (L278); nap¨arišunu (li:74); nidƯtika (L68+b); nišƯšu (L24); pammišunu (L23); qƗtišu (L6; 9); qƯštišu (L234); ramaniša (L272); snjniša (L130; 155); šarrƗqƗnišu (L125); šeriktiša (L162; 164); tamkƗrišu (§5.15; L107); ummišu (L29). With masc. pl. nouns the –Ư– before the suffix is long: a¨¨Ưša (L182, pl.); mƗrƯša (L137); panƯšu (L135); šinƯšu (L169); with fem. pl. nouns the –i– is short: riksƗtišu (L47, pl.). Examples of suffixes with gen. sg. after a bound form or after ša include abišu (L28), abiša (L130; 138; 142); aplnjtiša (L182); emišu (L159; 161); eqlišu (L45; 46; 53; 253); ¨Ɨwirišama (L174); ilkišu (L38); kƗšišišunu (L117); ki‰rišu (L69+c); mƗtišu (l:30); mutiša (L141; 149; 171b; 172); qaqqadišu (xlviii:86) rabƯtišu (L158); ramanišu (L232; 233; 235); šarrnjtišu (l:29); šƗyyimƗnišunu (L117); ummišu (L157); zittišu (L61; 166), zittiša (L178); when the nominal stem requires a case inflection with a long vowel, the connecting vowel before the suffix is also long: itƝšu (L55; 67+a)71. Examples with pl. nouns include ¨ubullƯšu (L48; 151), ¨ubullƯša (L151); panƯša (L141; 172). Pronouns Free forms of the 1st, 2nd and 3rd person pronouns are attested as the subject and the object as well as after a preposition.72 As subject, the forms attested for the 1st person are anƗku and anƗkuma (the suffix –ma adds emphasis): Ñammurabi … anƗku “I am Hammurabi” (i:50-53; cf. xlvii:9 and 10; xlviii:95 and 98); šarrum anƗku “I am the king” (xlvii:79 and 80); migir Ištar anƗku “I am the favourite of Ishtar” (v:13); anƗkuma rƝum mušallimum “I am the shepherd bringing peace” (xlvii:42-43). The corresponding form for the pronoun as object and also after a preposition is iâti: Ñammurabi … iâti … ibbû “they named me, Hammurabi” (i:31); kƯma Ưâti šar mƯšarim “like me, the king of justice” (xlix:12-13). 71 72

In CAD, itû B, “neighbour”, is explained as a nisbeh form of itû A, “side”. GrAkk. §§2.4; 25.2.

162

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

The 2nd person pronoun occurs only as subject, in the forms atta (masc.) and atti (fem.): ul abƯ attƗ “you are not my father” (L192); ul bƝlƯ attƗ “you are not my master” (L282); ul ummƯ atti “you are not my mother” (L192). The forms attested for the 3rd person masc. pronoun sg. as subject are šû and šûma: šû ileqqe “he shall take” (L64); šû warkƗnumma ina snjniša ittatƯl “later he has had intercourse with her” (L155; cf. 156); šûma ilikšu illak “it is he that shall perform the duty” (L27; 31, vnt. ms. J šumma!; cf. L30). Variant readings show that the relative pronoun ša may be substituted for šû when it is used as the independently expressed subject of a subjunctive verb: šû iqƯšu napšatam “the one who granted life” (iv:1-2, vnt. B: ša); šû ikšudu nagab uršim “the one who reached the source of wisdom” (iv:9-10, vnt. A and B: ša); šû igmilu “the one who cares for” (iv:29, vnt. B: ša). The corresponding form as object or after a preposition is šuƗti: šuƗti idukknjšu “they shall put him to death” (§5.3a); šuƗti ana qƗt nakrƯšu limallƯšuma “let him hand him over into the hand of his enemy” (li:19-21); šuƗti … lƯrurnj “let them curse him” (li:77 and 83); mƗr awƯlim ša kƯma šuƗti “a person who is like him” (L203). The only form of the 3rd pl. pronoun attested in CH is šunu “they”; in form it appears to be masc. but in fact the word refers to both masc. and fem. antecedents: wardum u amtum šunu mƗrnj mƗtim “they, the slave and the slave-girl, are children of the land” (L280). The form šî is attested for the 3rd fem. sg. (subject): mimma ša mussa u šî … iršû “whatever she and her husband acquired” (L176a; 176b). Occasionally a free form of a possessive pronoun is used, which may be explained as an adjective used predicatively. In Akkadian examples are found of such pronouns for all persons in sg. and pl., but in CH the only example is of the 3rd sg. masc. šû: abbutti wardim la šêm the mark of a slave which is not his own (L226).73 Indefinite Pronouns The indefinite pronoun mimma meaning “something” never changes in form.74 It occurs as the grammatical subject (but the semantic object) of a passive verb: mimma ul innaddiššim “nothing at all shall be given to her” (L141). In the Prologue and Epilogue it functions as the object of a participle of a transitive verb: mušaklil mimma šumšu “completing 73

This word šûm is described as an “independent possessive adjective” in GrAkk. §25.3. 74 GrAkk. §14.3(b).

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

163

everything” (i:57-58); murappiš mimma šumšu “completing everything” (iii:4-5); mudƝ mimma šumšu “knowing everything” (xlix:102). It occurs also followed by a noun in apposition. The phrase u mimma šumšu, with šumšu in apposition, often marks the conclusion of a list of objects:75 šeam šipƗtim šamnam suluppƯ u mimma šumšu “barley, wool, oil, dates or anything else” (L237; see also L122; 124; in L7 it is introduced, as are all the items in the list, with lu). Any other noun occurring in apposition to mimma is given a more general significance: mimma bƯšam … iddin “whatever goods he gave” (L104); mimma may also be qualified by a gen. expression after ša: mimma ša nadƗnim “something for paying” (L66). Most frequently mimma functions as the antecedent of a relative clause introduced with ša: mimma ša tamkƗrum iddinušum … uttƝr “he has returned whatever the merchant gave him” (L107); mimma ša šamallûm iddinušum … ittakiršu “he has disagreed with him about what the agent gave him” (L107); mimma ša ilqû … inaddin “he shall give back whatever he took” (L107); mimma ša ina qƗtišu ibaššû … inaddin “he shall give whatever he has in his possession” (§5.15); mimma ša ikkiru uštašannƗma inaddin “he shall double whatever he denied and give” (L124); mimma ša irgumu uštašannƗma … inaddin “he shall double whatever he claimed and give” (L126); mimma ša … iršû … izuzznjma “they shall divide whatever they acquired” (L176a; 176b); mimma ša abuša iddinušim adi balmat ikkal “she shall consume whatever her father gave her as long as she lives” (L178); mimma ša u¨alliqu iriab “he shall restore whatever he lost” (L232; 237). Sometimes the verb of the relative clause is in the passive mood, or is a stative: mimma ša ibbablušum itabbal “he shall take away whatever had been brought to him” (L159); mimma ša našû uštaddƯšu “he made him drop whatever was being carried” (L103); mimma ša šnjbulu … la iddinma “he did not deliver whatever was being brought” (L112); adi 5-šu mimma ša innadnušum … inaddin “he shall give five times as much as was given to him” (L112); mimma ša ina eleppišu ¨alqu … ubârma “he shall declare whatever was lost from his boat” (L240). Both mimma and mimma šumšu may be governed by a preposition: ina mimma ša iddinu Ưtelli “he shall forfeit anything he paid” (L67+a; §5.14; [§5.10; 5.13]); ina mimma šumšu mala iddinu Ưtelli “he shall forfeit all of what he paid” (L113); ina mimma ša ana mƗrƯša innadnu zittam kƯma aplim ištƝn inaddinnjšimma

75

The u in the phrase may be translated as “and” or as “or”.

164

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

“they shall give her a share equal to one son from whatever was given to her sons” (L137).76 Demonstratives Pronouns for the 3rd person are often used as demonstrative adjectives.77 They agree in gender, number and case with the qualified noun; they may be translated either as “this” or “that” according to the context. The pronouns most commonly used in this way are the masc. sg. šû (nom. sg.) and šuƗti (acc. and gen. sg.): awƯlum šû “that man” (L3; 6; 7; 13; 19; 20; 25; 112+; 130; 136; 144; 145; 151; 158; 163; 206; xlviii:75; xlix:2; 11; 18; 39; cf. awƯlam šuƗti, L2; 110; 112; 113; 124; 127; 144; 154; 155; 227);78 bƝl bƯtim šû “that house-owner” (L16); bƯtum šû “that house” (L67 + a); ana bƯtim šuƗti “for that house” (L67 + a); dayyƗnam šuƗti “that judge” (L5); dƯnum šû “that case” (L3; 115; 123; cf. dƯnim šuƗti, L4; 5; 12; 13); ritti gallƗbim šuƗti “the wrist of that barber” (L226); igƗram šuƗti “that wall” (L233); itinnum šû “that builder” (L229; 233); mƗr itinnum šuƗti “that builder’s son” (L230); laputtûm šû “that officer” (L33; 34); malƗ¨um šû “that boatman” (L237); narûm šû “this stele” (xlviii:84); ‰e¨rum šû “that youngster” (L191; 194); šamallûm šû “that salesman” (L107); tamkƗrum šû “that merchant” (L66; §5.12; 106); wardum šû “that slave” (L18; §5.3b; cf. wardam šuƗti, L19). The demonstrative is not necessarily repeated after every word it qualifies: lu rƝdûm u lu bƗirum šû iddâk “either that soldier or that trapper shall be killed” (L26; cf. L33; 34).79 The plural forms attested are šunnjti (masc. acc.) and šinƗti (fem. gen.): sarrnjtim šunnjti la i‰‰abtamma “she has not caught those villains” (L109); aššum errƝšum!80 šinƗti “because of these curses” (xlix:36). With fem. sg. nouns šî is used for the nom., but for acc. and gen. the form is šuƗti, which in itself is indistinguishable from the masc. form: 76

Since mimma always functions as an object in CH, it can be confused with the substantive mimmû “everything”, which, unlike the pronoun, accepts nominal inflections and pronominal suffixes. 77 They are referred to as “demonstrative pronouns” in GrAkk. §6.3. 78 There is incongruence in the phrase awƯlum šuƗti (§5.7, variant ms. t). 79 An alternative analysis explains šû as in independent pronoun, referring to the previous nouns as alternative subjects of the verb: “whether a soldier or a trapper, he shall be killed”. 80 For stele er-re-šum read er-re-tim; this reading is accepted in BAL and Roth, and is suggested by mss. c and o, both of which read ]ti.

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

165

amtum šî “that maidservant” (L146); awƯltam šuƗti “that lady” (L146); eleppam šuƗti “that ship” (L235); ana išƗtim šuƗti “into that fire” (L25); nadƯtum šî “that priestess” (L144); ina pani pilšim šuƗti “in front of that breach” (L21); sƗbƯtum šî “that brewer” (L109); sinništum šî “that woman” (L128; 130; 133b; 134; 135; 141; 142; 149; cf. sinništam šuƗti, L133b; 143; 153); ana sinništim šuƗti “to that woman” (L137; cf. L163; 177); ‰ibtam ša šattim šuƗti “the interest for that year” (L48); ina šattim šuƗti “in that year” (L48; cf. ina šattimma šuƗti, L235); šugƯtum šî “that priestess” (L145). The apparently more logically formed word šiƗti is attested as a variant in ms. S: sƗbƯtam šuƗti (L108, ms. S: šiƗti); sinništam šuƗti (L151, ms. S: šiƗti). Adjective An adjective follows the noun it qualifies and is inflected with the same case, number and gender as that noun.81 The inflections for adjectives in the sg. are the same as those for nouns. Sometimes a noun is qualified by more than one adjective. Masculine sg. adjectives attested in the nom. include: rubûm nadum “the devout prince” (iv:32-33); rubûm ellum “the sacred prince” (iii:55); awƯlum ¨abtum “the robbed man” (L23); šarrum dannum “the mighty king” (v:3). Those in the acc. include: arnam kabtam “a serious offence” (L168; 169); simmam kabtam “a deep incision” (L215); narî šamram “my inscribed stele” (xlviii:9-10); mimmâšu ¨alqam “his lost property” (L23; 125; 240). Those in the gen. include: ana Uraš gašrim “for mighty Urash” (iii:22-23); itti zikarim šanîm “with another man” (L132; cf. L153); ana a¨¨išunu ‰e¨rim “for their little brother” (L166); ana mutiša warkîm “for her later husband” (L173); bƯt mutiša panîm “the house of her former husband” (L177); ana mƗrišu ‰e¨rim “for his small son” (L166). An adjective with a masc. pl. noun takes –njtum (nom.) or –njtim (obl.), and with a fem. pl. noun –Ɨtim (nom. and obl.). Examples of masc. pl. adjectives are attested in nom. and acc.: mƗrnj ma¨rûtum u warkûtum “the earlier sons and the later sons” (L173, nom.); suluppƯ watrnjtim “surplus dates” (L66, acc.); pušqƯ wašmnjtim “difficult situations” (xlvii:19, acc.). Examples of adjectives with fem. sg. nouns in the nom. include: ummum rabƯtum “the great mother” (xlix:82); in the acc.: šarrnjtam dƗrƯtam “an enduring kingship” (i:21); eleppam dannatam “the strengthened boat” (L235); in the gen.: ana sinništim šanƯtim “for another 81

GrAkk. §4.2.

166

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

woman” (L159); mƗrnj mƗtim šanƯtim “people from another country” (L281); ina abnim mamƯtim “with a small weight” (§5.13); ina snjtim mamƯtim “with a small measure” (§5.13). Feminine pl. adjectives are attested as acc.: awâtiya šnjqurƗtim lišmƝma “may he listen to my precious words” (xlviii:12-14; cf. xlix:74); idƯšu gamrƗtim “his full wages” (L264).82 An adjectival phrase may itself be qualified by being linked with ša to a following genitive: ana Marduk mƗrim rƝštîm ša Ea “for Marduk, the first-born son of Ea” (i:8-10); mƗrum rƝštûm ša Ekur “the first-born son in Ekur” (l:83-84); zƗninum nadum ša Ekur “the devoted provider for Ekur” (i:60-62). Sometimes more than one noun is qualified by the same adjective: lu wardam lu amtam ¨alqam ša ekallim “a slave or maidservant missing from the palace” (L16). Nouns in Apposition and Substantivised Adjectives Sometimes a noun is qualified by another noun in apposition: agram pnj¨am im¨ur “he has hired a mercenary, a substitute” (L33). It is not always clear whether some expressions are really adjectival or whether a noun is qualified by a substantivised adjective in apposition: Nergal dannum ina ilƯ “strong Nergal (or Nergal, the strong one) among the gods” (li:24-25). A substantivised adjective can be followed by a noun in apposition:83 wašrum muštƝmiqum “the humble one, the suppliant” (ii:1819). On rare occasions what is apparently an adjective precedes its noun: erištum Mama “wise Mama” (iii:28-29). It may be that the adj. is deliberately placed in front of the name for stylistic effect or that it should be considered as substantivised and with the name in apposition: “the wise one, Mama”.84 Numerals Most of the expressions involving numbers in CH involve cardinal numbers, which may be written phonetically or ideographically. They usually, but not always, occur after a verb of giving, such as nadƗnu or râbu, or of measuring, such as madƗdu or šaqƗlu. The noun given or 82

Some of these examples show that the feminine gender of a noun not explicitly marked as fem. may be determined when it is qualified by an adjective which is explicitly marked as fem. 83 GrAkk. §4.4. 84 The phrase is preceded by ana Uraš gašrim “for mighty Urash” (iii:2223), where the adj. follows its noun.

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

167

measured is inflected as an accusative. The numeral in the expression usually precedes the noun and is inflected with no specific case, as if it were a bound form. In this usage the numeral is said to be in the absolute form.85 Examples of numerical expressions written phonetically include šalaš šanƗtim ilikšu ittalak “he has assumed his duty for three years” (L30); kankallam ana šalaš šanƗtim ana teptƯtim ušƝ‰Ưma “he leased an abandoned field for development for three years” (L44); šalaš šanƗtim … ippešnj “they shall work for three years” (L117). When the numeral is written ideographically the order is the same: 1 mana kaspam išaqqalnj “he shall pay 1 mana of silver” (L24); 2 šiqil kaspam inaddiššum “he shall give him 2 shekels of silver” (L17); 4 šanƗtim kiriam urabba “he shall propagate the orchards for four years” (L60); ana 1 burum 10 kur šeam imaddad “he shall measure 10 kur of barley per 1 bur” (L44). To express a multiplier the numeral is linked with the suffix –šu: adi 10-šu iriab “he shall repay 10 times as much” (L8; literally “10 of it”); adi 12šu inaddin “he shall give 12 times as much” (L5); adi 30-šu inaddin “he shall give 30 times as much” (L8). The numeral “one” may be placed after its noun: kƯma aplim ištƝn “like one heir” (L137); šattam ištiatma uddappirma “he was absent for one year” (L31). An ordinal number is also attested written phonetically before its noun: ina rebûtim šattim “in the fourth year” (L44; 117). An adverb derived from šina “two” is also found: tašna šeam … iriab “he shall repay double the grain” (L254). The word kilallƗn “both”, is numerical in meaning but not in form, for it is defined as a noun inflected with the dual ending –Ɨn.86

VERBAL FORMS WITH NOMINAL INFLECTION87 Participles88 The form of the verb generally referred to as the participle is inflected like a noun but it is intimately connected with the verb in meaning. Essentially, it signifies the person who performs an action, and the theme of the verb associated with that action affects the way the participle is formed: wƗlidum “acting as a parent” (cf. alƗdu “to give birth”, 85

GrAkk. §23.1-2. GrAkk. §2(f). 87 These words have a hybrid relationship, for they take nominal inflections but function syntactically as verbs; see Buccellati 1996, §12.1. 88 GAG §85c, d; GrAkk. §20.1. 86

168

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

G-theme); mugallitum “someone causing trouble” (cf. gullutu “to cause trouble”, D-theme of galƗtu); mušalbišu “decorating” (cf. šulbušu “to decorate”, ¼-theme of labƗšu); munnabtu “fleeing” (cf. nƗbutu “to flee”, N-theme of abƗtu B). From these examples it can be seen that the vowel following the first root consonant of a participle from a verb in the Gtheme is long, and that participles from verbs in other themes begin with the prefix mu–. A participle may be inflected like any other noun according to gender, number and case. Lexicographers tend to distinguish between participles which are primarily verbal (such as nƗdinu “one who is giving, a giver”; normally listed as a form of the verb nadƗnu) and those which are primarily nominal (such as nƗgiru “herald, one who is announcing”; normally listed as a separate noun). This distinction is based on meaning rather than form, though sometimes the context can determine whether a nominal or a verbal function is the more appropriate description. A participle may be negated with the particle la: la mupparkûm ana Ezida “not neglecting Ezida” (iii:14-15). The normal citation form is with masc. sg. nom. inflection but in CH some participles occur only with another inflection (fem.; boundform; with –u). They may be derived from verbs in various themes. Participial forms from the G-theme include: Ɨliku; bƗbil; bƗnî, bƗnƯtƯ; gƗmil; mudƝ;89 nƗbi¨Ư; nƗqidam; pƗqid; pƗtiat; qƗbiat; rƗimat; šƗim; šƗkin; šƝmû; wƗlidim; from the D-theme: muballim; mubbib; mubbiršu; mudammiqat; muddiš; mudeššƯ; mugallitum; mugarrin; mukammer; mukanniš (vnt. mukannišu); mukƯn, mukinni, mukinnu; mullî; munaggiršu; muna¨¨iš; munakkip; munawwer; mupa¨¨ir; murƯš; murabbƯšu, murabbƯtišu; murappiš; mutêr; muma¨¨id; from the ¼–theme: mušaddil; mušakšidu; mušalbišu; mušarbû; mušƗriku; mušaršid, mušaršidu; mušƗter; mušƝniqtim; mušƝpƯ; mušešqi; mušeppi (vnt. mušeb!); mušƯm; mušpazzir; muštƝšer; mušnjšer (vnts. mušƝšer; mušƯšer); note also from the ¼t-theme: muštƝmiqum; muštƗlum; mušte‰bî. Others include munnabtum “fugitive” (from nƗbutu “to flee”, N-theme of abƗtu B); mupparkûm “neglecting” (from the verb naparkû, from a quinquiliteral root n-p-r-k-); muttabbilum “organizer” (apparently from a Dttheme of wabƗlu “to bring”). 89

The participle mudƝ (a bound form) is derived from the G-theme verb edû (AHw: wedû, root w-d-) “to know”. As such it is exceptional since the preformative mu– normally marks a participle from a verb in one of the derived themes (GAG §56d; §106q).

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

169

Participles Marked with –um When marked with –um a participle can be seen to function essentially as a noun or nominalised adjective, though the verbal associations are readily apparent. It sometimes seems to function adjectivally when it follows a noun: emqum muttabilum “the wise organiser” (iv:7-8); kƯma abim wƗlidim ana nišƯ “like a natural father to the people” (xlviii:21-23). But sometimes it can be regarded as a noun in apposition: wašrum muštƝmiqum “the humble one, the clever one” (ii:18-19); also with a pronominal suffix: ilum bƗnî “the god, my creator” (l:42). It may be inflected as fem.: ummum bƗnƯtƯ “the mother, my creator” (li:43); ana abim murabbƯšu u ummim murabbƯtišu … iqtabi “he has said to his adoptive father or to his adoptive mother” (L192; cf. L191). Rarely the participle may be regarded as the first of two nominalised adjectives: muštƗlum gitmƗlum “the judicious and perfect one” (iii:36-37). As the object of a finite verb it is inflected as acc.: mugallitam ul ušaršƯšinƗti “I let no troublemaker take possession of them” (xlvii:3839); nƗqidam … Ưgur “he hired a herdsman” (L261); the same applies when it is inflected as gen. after a bound form or preposition: aššat munnabtim “the wife of the fugitive” (L136); mƗrašu ana mušƝniqtim iddinma “he gave his son to a wet-nurse” (L194). One participle, which is linked to its associated noun with a preposition so that the noun functions as an indirect object, is also inflected with –um: la mupparkûm ana Ezida “the one who does not neglect Ezida” (iii:14-15). Participles Inflected as Bound Forms The participle most often occurs as a bound form, with the following genitive functioning as a direct object. No tense is inherent in the participle itself, but tense may be determined by the wider context of the sentence: bƗbil ¨egallim “bringing plenty” (ii:20); mukammer ¨i‰bim “the one who heaped up luxury” (ii:44-45); muna¨¨iš Urim “the one who made Ur prosper” (ii:16-17); mušaddil mƝreštim “the one who developed the arable land” (iii:18-19); pƗqid bƯtim “the one who cares for the temple” (ii:66). Bound forms from roots with  as the final consonant end in a vowel: mudƝ ¨ulqim “the one who knows the lost property” (L9); mudƝ igigallim “the one who knows great wisdom” (iii:17); mušešqi

170

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

nu¨šim “the one who provides abundant water” (iv:4-6); mušeppi nƗbi¨Ư “the one who silences the rebels90 against me” (iv:59; vnt. mušeb!). Often the gen. inflection of the object is masked because it is a bound form or is a non-declining word:91 mubbib šulu¨ Eabzu “purifying the worship of Eabzu” (i:66-ii:1); mušaršid šubat Kiš muštas¨ir melimmƯ Emeteursag “establishing the residence of Kish, surrounding the brightness of Emeteursag” (ii:58-62); šƗim šƯmƗt mƗtim “determining the destiny of the land” (i:6-7); muštƝšer šaknat napištim “the one who directs that which has been granted life” (l:17-18); mukƯn išdƯ Sippar “the one who established the foundations of Sippar” (ii:24-25); munawwer pani Tišpak “the one who brightens the face of Tishpak” (iv:34-35); mušpazzir nišƯ MalgƯm in karašîm “protecting the people of Malgium from catastrophe” (iv:11-13); mutêr lamassišu damiqtim ana Ɨlim Aššur “the one who brings back his protective statues to Asshur” (iv:55-58); murƯš Barsippa “the one who makes Borsippa rejoice” (iii:11-12); gƗmil Larsa “the one who shows favour to Larsa” (ii:32-33); muballim Uruk92 “the one who gives life to Uruk” (ii:37-38); mukinni Ištar “the one who established Ishtar” (iv:48).93 Examples with a pl. noun as the object include mušte‰bî par‰Ư rabûtim ša Ištar “the one who arranges the great rituals for Ishtar” (ii:63-65; ms. B: muštƝšir “the one who keeps in order”); mukƯn u‰urƗtim ša Keš “the one who established the designs of Kesh” (iii:30-32); mudeššƯ mƗkalƯ ellnjtim “the one who makes the pure food abundant” (iii:33-34); mušƝpƯ kƯnƗtim “the one who demonstrates justice” (iv:53); mušƯm šƯmƗtim “the one who decides destinies” (xlix:54); mušnjšer ammƯ “who guides the peoples aright” (iv:54); 90 The object of the participle is a noun which itself has the form of a participle. In literature, this word is attested only here, though it is cited in a lexical list; see CAD s.v. nƗbi¨u; AHw. s.v. nƗbiu. 91 Case endings are sometimes masked by pronominal suffixes, but such masking is hardly attested with the objects of particples in CH. 92 Stele: UNUG.KI; ms. E: adds u2-ru-uk (gloss). 93 Elsewhere, when this participle is inflected as a bound form, it appears as mukƯn, from root k--n (cf. mukƯn uÑurƗtim (iii:30-31); mukƯn išdƯ (ii:24-25)). Just a few words before this occurrence it is also associated with an object and inflected as a nominative: mukinnu išdƯšin (iv:40-41; but ms. B: mukƯn), with the long vowel shortened and the following consonant doubled in compensation. The form mukinni as a variant of the bound form, with a doubled consonant and a final euphonic vowel –i, exemplifies a somewhat free choice of forms within a relatively short sequence of narrative. The bound form here could be transcribed mukƯn if the writing mu-ki-in-ni Iš8-tar2 is explained as Sandhi-orthography.

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

171

mugarrin karê “the one who filled the granaries” (iii:21); mukanniš dadmê nƗr Purattim “controlling the settlements on the Euphrates” (iv:24-26: ms. A: mukannišu). A participle may also be inflected as a fem. bound form: mudammiqat igirrƝya “she who makes good my reputation” (xlix:85-86); pƗtiat kakkiya “she who draws out my weapon” (l:94-95); qƗbiat dumqiya “she who speaks what is good for me” (li:52-53); rƗimat palêya “she who loves my rule” (l:98). The object of the participle may be expressed as a pronominal suffix: mubbiršu iddâk “his accuser shall be executed” (L1); munaggiršu “the one who informed about him” (L26). A single participle in the bound form may be associated with more than one object: mukammer nu¨šim u mu¨dim “heaping up plenty and abundance” (i:55-56); šƗim mirƯtim u mašqƯtim “the one who decides about the feeding and watering” (iii:38-42; mss. A and D: šƗkin “the one who controls”). Participles in Rhetorical Style There are several instances where the participle before a direct object is inflected with –u, without mimation:94 Ɨliku imniya “walking on my right” (l:85); mušakšidu irnittiya “granting me victory” (li:27-28); mušarbû šarrnjtiya “making my sovereignty great” (xlix:57-58); mušƗriku njm balƗmiya “lengthening the period of my life” (xlix:103-l:1); mušarbû šarrnjtišu “making his kingship great” (iv:19-20); mušaršidu šubƗtišin “making their habitations secure” (iv:14-15); mukinnu išdƯšin “the one who fixed their foundations” (iv:40-41); šƝmû ¼amaš “the one who listens to Shamash” (ii:23). It is clearly a feature of rhetorical style, since all instances are found in the Prologue and the Epilogue.95 In the rhetorical style of the Prologue, substantives are often glossed with a series of participial expressions. This highlights both the assonance of the participles and also a semantic congruence of contiguous grammatical constructions: qarrƗdum gƗmil Larsa, muddiš Ebabbar ana ¼amaš rƝ‰išu, bƝlum muballim Uruk, šƗkin mê nu¨šim ana nišƯšu, mullî 94

Any difference in the relationship between the noun after a participle in –u and one after the commoner bound form is not immediately apparent. Most of the examples can be seen as phrases descriptive of a preceding noun, and so the –u may be an echo of the subjunctive marker –u used with finite verbs which qualify an antecedent noun. 95 It is a feature of the dialect used in hymnns and epics.

172

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

rƝš Eanna, mukammer ¨i‰bim ana Anim u Ištar, ‰ulnjl mƗtim, mupa¨¨ir nišƯ sap¨Ɨtim ša Isin, muma¨¨id nu¨šim bƯt Egalma¨ “(I am) a hero, showing favour to Larsa, renewing Ebabbar for Shamash his helper, a master, bringing life to Uruk, providing water in plenty for his people, lifting the head of Eanna, heaping up luxury for Anu and Ishtar, a shade for the land, gathering the scattered people of Isin, spreading plenty in the temple of Egalmah” (ii:32-54); mušƗter Kutî, murappiš mimma šumšu ana Meslam, rƯmum kadrum munakkip zƗirƯ, narƗm Tutu murƯš Barsippa, nadum la mupparkûm ana Ezida, ilu! šarrƯ mudƝ igigallim, mušaddil mƝreštim ša Dilbat, mugarrin karê ana Uraš gašrim “(I am) the one who extended Kuta, the one who enlarged Meslam in all kinds of ways, a raging ox, tossing his opponents, beloved of Tutu, making Barsippa rejoice, the devoted one, never neglecting Ezida, the god of the kings, possessing deep wisdom, developing the fields in Dilbat, filling the granaries for mighty Urash” (iii:2-23); rubûm nadum munawwer pani Tišpak, šƗkin mƗkalƯ ellnjtim ana Ninazu “the devout prince, brightening the face of Tishpak, providing pure food for Ninazu” (iv:32-37). Infinitives The infinitive, like the participle, although inseparably linked in meaning to the verb, is inflected like a noun (normally as a masc. sg. noun).96 Sometimes it functions as a noun within a sentence, but more often it functions as the verb of a subordinate clause; it is placed at the end of a clause and is associated with its own object or adverbial phrase. Lexicographers adopt the infinitive as the citation form of the Akkadian verb.97 The four basic themes of the verb all show distinctive phonetic patterns superimposed on the root for the respective infinitives: a¨Ɨzu “to seize” (G-theme), šnj¨uzu “to allow to seize” (¼-theme, root -¨-z); akƗlu “to eat”, šnjkulu “to allow to eat” (root -k-l); a‰û “to go out”, šnj‰û “to bring out” (root w-‰-). The forms of the infinitive attested in CH include examples from all four basic themes; from the G-theme: a¨Ɨzim; akƗlim; alƗkam, alƗkišu; apƗlam; diƗnim; diƗšim; erƝšim; ezƝbim, ezƝbša; ¨abƗlim; ¨alƗq, ¨alƗqišu; ma¨Ɨ‰im, ma¨Ɨ‰išu; nadƗnam, nadƗnim; nasƗ¨, nasƗ¨im; nawƗrim; parƗsim; reîm; riƗbam; ‰abƗtiša; šâmim; tabƗk; wa‰âm, wa‰êm, wa‰êmma; wašƗbam; note also Gt-theme: šitannu; from the D-theme: dunnunim; ¨ulluqim (vnt. ¨ulluqiam); 96

GrAkk. §3.3. For other Semitic languages the preferred citation form is the 3rd sg. masc. of the perfect (suffixed) conjugation. 97

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

173

nuwwurim; turrim; mubbim; uzuzzim; from the ¼-theme: šubbîm; šubšâm; šnj¨uzim (vnt. šnj¨uzu); šnjkulim; šulput; šnjpîm; šupƝlam; šnj‰îm, šnj‰û; šutƝšur, šutƝšuram, šutƝšurim; from the N-theme: naspu¨. In meaning the infinitive indicates the activity of its associated verb. In this sense it is comparable to other nouns which similarly describe an activity and which can occur as a parallel to an infinitive: mƝgûtu “negligence” (cf. egû “to be negligent”): ina mƝgûtim u lu ina ma¨Ɨ‰im “he has caused it to die by negligence or by striking” (L245).98 The meaning of the infinitive is negated with the particle la: ana la ¨abƗlim (i:39; xlvii:60; aššum la ‰abƗtiša (xxii:31 = L151); tƝšî la šubbim (xlix:59). Infinitives Inflected as Accusative The infinitive occurs most frequently as the object of another verb and is inflected as an acc.: šeam riƗbam la ilei “he was not able to repay grain” (L54); nadƗnam la išmuršimma “he has not given written permission for her to give” (L178; cf. L179). It functions as a verb by being associated with its own object, which is placed before the infinitive or expressed with a pronominal suffix. This allows the infinitive to come at the end of its clause, the normal position for a finite verb: ilkam alƗkam ilei “he was able to perform the duty” (L28; cf. L29); pƯ¨assu apƗlam la ilei “he was not able to respond to his obligations” (L256); massu šutƝšuram ilei “he was able to direct his land” (xlviii:77); šarrnjssu šupƝlam … liqbi “may he command … the overthrowing of his kingdom” (xlix:75-80). Sometimes, especially when the infinitive is construed as the object of a verb of speech, the clause with the infinitive is most conveniently translated as a dependent clause with a finite verb: mussa la ezƝbša iqtabi “her husband has said that he will not leave her” (L141). The infinitive may be associated with an adverbial phrase: ina bƯt mutiša wašƗbam la imtagar “she has not agreed to stay in her husband’s 98

Other such nouns include epištu (pl. epšƝtu; cf. epƝšu “to work”), “achievement”: eqel epšƝtim ša šeim u lu šamaššammƯ “a field for the production of barley or sesame” (L49); errƝšnjtu “cultivation” (cf. erƝšu B “to cultivate”): eqlam ana errƝšnjtim ušƝÑƯma “he has let out his field for cultivation” (L42); also errƝšu cultivator: errƝssuma eqelšu irrišma “his cultivator shall cultivate his field” (L47); waššƗbu “occupant” (normally cited as aššƗbu, as in CAD, and in later manuscripts of CH also written as ašbu; cf. ašƗbu “to remain”): ana waššƗbim ina njmƯšu la malûtim waÑâm iqtabi “he has told the the occupant to leave before his time is due” (L69+c).

174

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

house” (L149); ana waššƗbim ina njmƯšu la malûtim wa‰âm iqtabi “he has said to the tenant that he should leave before his time has expired” (L69+c); šarrnjssu šupƝlam šumšu u zikiršu ina mƗtim la šubšâm ina pƯšu kabtim liqbi “may he command with his serious speech the overthrowing of his kingdom, the extinction of his name and his memory in the land” (xlix:75-80). Infinitives Inflected as Bound Forms It may also be expressed as a bound form followed by an associated object in the genitive (usually with a pronominal suffix): ¨alƗq Ɨlišu naspu¨ nišƯšu … liqbi “may he command the destroying of his city, the scattering of his people” (xlix:73-80); šulput mƗtišu ¨alƗq nišƯšu tabƗk napištišu kƯma mê … lišaškin “may she cause to occur an affliction of his land, the loss of his people, the outpouring of his soul like water” (xlix:91-97). Infinitives Inflected as Genitive After the indefinite expression mimma ša, which is sometimes shortened simply to ša, the infinitive is inflected as gen.: mimma ša nadƗnim la ibaššƯšum “he has nothing with which to pay” (L66); ša akƗlim ibaššƯ “something to eat exists” (L133a; 134; 135). When it is preceded by a noun inflected as a bound form the infinitive is also inflected as gen.: gabara¨ ¨alƗqišu “an upheaval for destroying him” (xlix:60-61); tƝšî la šubbîm … iklet la nawƗrim “a turmoil with no suppressing … darkness with no brightening” (xlix:59-69).99 The infinitive inflected as gen. occurs most frequently after a preposition and examples can be found after ana, aššum and ina, as well as several examples after ša:100 ana: With ana the general sense of a clause of purpose or result is suggested. If what is technically a prepositional phrase is analysed as a clause, it can be said to be embeddded within the main clause: alpam ana diƗšim Ưgur “he hired an ox for the threshing” (L268); sinništum šî ana wa‰êm panƯša ištakan “that woman has made her decision to leave” 99

That the negative particle la is interposed between the bound form and the genitive is an exception to the general rule that the bound form is inseparable from its following genitive. The various citations from the invocation to Enlil in the Epilogue (xlix:53-80) show that several usages of the infinitive may occur altogether in one passage. 100 GrAkk. §30.1.

DETAILED NOTES: NOUNS

175

(L172); ana reîm innadnnjšum “they were given to him for pasturing” (L265); kaspam ana turrim la išu “he does not have silver for repaying” (§5.10).101 In such purpose expressions the object of the expression is interposed between ana and the infinitive and is itself inflected as gen.: ana šugƯtim a¨Ɨzim panƯšu ištakan “he has made his decision to marry the priestess” (L144); ana tarbƯtim nasƗ¨im panam ištakan “he has set his mind to expel the foster-child” (L191); [ana] eqlim erƝšim urakkissu “he made him agree to cultivate the field” (L253). More than one object may be associated with an infinitive: rƝûm ana šammƯ ‰Ɲnim šnjkulim itti bƝl eqlim la imtagarma “the shepherd has not agreed with the owner of the field to allow the flock to feed on the grass” (L57). This may happen not just with an infinitive in the ¼-theme, but also with one in the Gtheme: ana šugƯtim … ulu nadƯtim ezƝbim panƯšu ištakan “he has decided to leave the priestess or the temple woman” (L137); nƗqidam ana liƗtim u ‰Ɲnim reîm Ưgur “he hired a herdsman to pasture the herd and the flock” (L261). Sometimes the gen. marker is masked: ana kƗr eqlišu dunnunim a¨šu iddƯma “he was careless about maintaining the dyke at his field” (L53); ana šammƯ ‰Ɲnim šnjkulim itti bƝl eqlim la imtagarma “he has not agreed with the owner of the field to allow the flock to feed on the plants” (L57); [ana] bƯt muškƝnim šâmim “to buy the house of the commoner” (§4.12); awƯlam ana panƯ eqlišu uzuzzim Ưgurma “he hired a man to stand in front of the field” (L253).102 It is not only in the prosaic style of the Laws but also in rhetorical style that the object of the infinitive is interposed after ana: ana šƯr nišƯ mubbim šumƯ ibbû “they named my name to benefit the health of my people” (i:47-49). But the object may also precede ana: dƯn mƗtim ana diƗnim purussê mƗtim ana parƗsim ¨ablim šutƝšurim … ašmurma “I wrote … for the purpose of judging the cases in the land, for making decisions in the land, for treating properly the oppressed” (xlvii:70-75).103 It can happen that both constructions feature side-by-side: ana šutƝšur

101

Probably also ana šamallêm kaspam ana [nadƗnim u ma¨Ɨrim] iddinma “he gave silver to the agent to give and receive” (L100), but the text is broken. 102 Here ana probably functions both as the preposition expressing purpose before the infinitive and the element in the compound preposition ana panƯ. 103 The preposition is expressed only in the first two of the three expressions with infinitives; its force is sustained for the third expression.

176

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

nišƯ mƗtim njsim šnj¨uzim “to direct the people of the land to adopt good behaviour” (v:16-18; ms. B: šnj¨uzu).104 When the subject of the infinitive is not the same as the subject of the main verb of the sentence, both that subject and any object of the infinitive are placed before the preposition: dannum enšam ana la ¨abƗlim … šumƯ ibbû “they named my name … so that the strong should not exploit the weak” (i:37-49); dannum enšam ana la ¨abƗlim eknjtam almattam šutƝšurim … ašmurma “I have written … so that the strong do not oppress the weak, so that proper treatment is given to the orphan and the widow” (xlvii:59-75).105 It is a feature of rhetorical style for a series of purpose expressions to precede the main verb: mƯšaram ina mƗtim ana šnjpîm raggam u ‰Ɲnam ana ¨ulluqim (vnt. ¨ulluqiam) dannum enšam ana la ¨abƗlim kƯma ¼amaš ana ‰almƗt qaqqadim wa‰êmma mƗtim nuwwurim Anum u Enlil ana šƯr nišƯ mubbim šumƯ ibbû “to make justice appear in the land, to destroy evil and wickedness, so that someone powerful does not oppress someone weak, to rise like Shamash over human beings and shed light over the land, to benefit the health of my people Anum and Enlil have given me my name” (i:32-49).106

104

The force of the one preposition ana is here sustained so that it governs both infinitives; the first is inflected as a bound form before its object (ana šutƝšur nišƯ mƗtim “to direct the people of the land”), and the second is inflected as a genitive preceded by its object (ana … njsim šnj¨uzim “to encourage the adoption of good behaviour”). This somewhat chiastic arrangement, with the sequence infinitive + object followed by object + infinitive, may well be a rhetorical feature. 105 Here again the force of the preposition is sustained before a subsequent expression with an infinitive. The subject of the second infinitive is not explicit. It could be understood as indefinite, and then the literal translation would be “in order for someone to treat properly”. Or the infinitive of the ¼-theme could be assumed to have passive significance, and then the literal translation would be “in order for the orphan and widow to be treated properly”, with the grammatical subject of a passive inflected, according to sense, as an acc. 106 The meaning of the final infinitival expression, which is embedded between the subject and object of the main clause, seems to summarise the meanings of the series of infinitival expressions with which the sentence begins.

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

177

aššum: The reason for the event of the main clause may be expressed by an infinitive with aššum:107 aššum ina bƯtim šnj‰îm usa¨¨amnjši “they are pestering her about having to get out of the house” (L172); aššum bƝl ¨ubullim ša mutiša la ‰abƗtiša mussa urtakkis “her husband has made an agreement about a creditor of her husband not taking her” (L151). ina: The time or circumstance pertaining to the main clause of a sentence may be expressed by an infinitive with ina: ina ma¨Ɨ‰išu imtnjt “he died through fighting with him” (L207); ina ma¨Ɨ‰im uštamƯt “he caused it to die by mistreatment” (L245); ¨arrƗnam ina alƗkišu nakrum mimma ša našû uštaddƯšu “the enemy made him drop what he was carrying when he was going on his journey” (L103); alpum snjqam ina alƗkišu awƯlam ikkipma “the ox tossed the man as it walked in the street” (L250).108 ša: The purpose or result of the main clause of a sentence may be expressed by an infinitive with ša: ina bƯrišu šƯram lemnam ša nasƗ¨ išdƯ šarrnjtišu u ¨alƗq mƗtišu liškunšum “in his divination may he place bad flesh for him, for the tearing out of the foundations of his kingdom and the loss of his land” (l:26-30).109

VERBS Vowels are interwoven with root consonants in a particularly intricate way to express specific forms of the verbs. This is best understood by distinguishing the roots, which consist for the most part (at least notionally) of three consonants, from the pattern of interwoven vowels (and occasionally one or two consonants) to superimpose on the essential meaning the person, tense, voice and mood of the verb.110 In what follows, the distinctive pattern of a verbal form is written schematically, with the interwoven vowels as in conventional transliteration (V 107

The citations could also be interpreted as purpose clauses, in which case any distinction in meaning from an infinitive introduced with ana would be a subtle nuance. 108 The citations from L103 and L250 show that a noun inflected as an adverbial acc. could be understood as qualifying the finite verb or the infinitive. Insofar as it qualifies the infinitive, it is to be noted that it is not interposed between the preposition and the infinitive, whereas the object of a purpose clause introduced with ana was so interposed (see above). 109 As already mentioned, infinitives may also follow mimma ša. 110 GrAkk. §3.1.

178

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

represents a variable vowel) and the root consonants as numbers: so, the pattern for the 3rd sg. masc. preterite is i12V3, corresponding to iprus, išbir and i‰bat. G-Theme (Preterite)111 Strong Verbs The different patterns of inflection for verbs can be distinguished most clearly in “strong verbs”, verbs where all the root consonants are all strong. In “weak verbs”, where one or more of the root consonants is weak, the pattern of inflection is often less clear. The infinitive is traditionally used as the citation form of all verbs, and all verbal forms attested in the text are listed below according to their infinitive. For several verbs the infinitive is not actually attested in CH (and for some not elsewhere in Akkadian either). In the preterite of the G-theme the pattern is for an i vowel to be prefixed before the first two root consonants; these are followed by a “thematic” vowel before the third root consonant. The most common attested pattern is for infinitives on the pattern 1a2Ɨ3u to have a thematic vowel u in the preterite: šarƗku “to grant”; išruk “he granted”. Other verbs have i as the thematic vowel: išriq “he stole” (from šarƗqu “to steal”); išbir “he broke” (from šebƝru “to break”). And others have a: i‰bat “he seized” (from ‰abƗtu “to seize”). The 3rd sg. masc. is the most frequently occurring preterite form in CH; the 3rd pl. masc. (i12V3nj) is also well attested, though on occasions it appears that this form is used for an unspecified subject and is best translated as passive.112 Inflections to the basic form of the verb indicate some other subject than a 3rd sg. masc., and all forms may be augmented with the enclitic particle –ma, the ventive suffix –am (or –a), the subjunctive suffix –u or the precative prefix l–. None of these affixes affects the essential pattern of the 3rd sg. masc. preterite. But some minor phonetic mutation may be noticed if a pronominal suffix is attached. Verbs with Thematic Vowel u The verbal forms attested with a thematic vowel u are: from gamƗru (root g-m-r) “to complete”: igmurma; from ¨abƗšu (root ¨-b-š) “to shatter”: li¨buš; from ¨abƗtu (root ¨-b-t) “to rob”: i¨butma; from karƗbu 111 112

GrAkk. §3.5. GrAkk. §15.3.

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

179

(root k-r-b) “to pray”: likrubam; from kašƗdu (root k-š-d) “to achieve”: ikšud; ikšudu; likšudašu; likšussu; from lamƗdu (root l-m-d) “to learn”: ilmassi; ilmassima; from ma¨Ɨru (root m-¨-r) “to be comparable”: im¨ur; im¨uru; im¨urma; from maqƗtu (root m-q-t) “to fall”: imqutma; imqutu; from palƗšu (root p-l-š) “to break into”: ipluš; from parƗsu (root p-r-s) “to decide”: iprus; liprus; from pamƗru (root p-m-r) “to redeem”: ipmuraššuma; from ragƗmu (root r-g-m) “to claim”: irgumu; from rakƗsu (root r-k-s) “to agree”: irkusu; from šakƗnu (root š-k-n) “to set”: iškun; liškunšum; from šapƗku (root š-p-k) “to store”: išpuk; išpukma; from šaqƗlu (root š-q-l) “to pay”: išqulu; from šarƗku (root š-r-k) “to grant”: išruk; išrukam; išrukšim;113 išrukušu; išrukušim; from šamƗru (root š-m-r) “to inscribe”: išmur; išmuršim; išmuršimma; išmuršum; išturušim; from marƗdu (root m-r-d) “to send”: imrussu; from zaqƗpu (root z-q-p) “to plant”: izqup. A few 1st sg. preterite forms are attested with u as the thematic vowel: from šakƗnu (root š-k-n) “to set”: aškun; from šamƗru (root š-m-r) “to inscribe”: ašmurma; ašturu. Verbs with Thematic Vowel i The verbal forms attested with a thematic vowel i are: from gamƗlu (root g-m-l ) “to care for”: igmilu; from paqƗdu (root p-q-d) “to entrust”: ipqissum; from sakƗpu (root s-k-p) “to overturn”: liskip; from šarƗqu (root š-r-q) “to steal”: išriq; išriqma; išriqu; the verb šebƝru (root š-b-r) “to break”, also has i as the thematic vowel: išbir; lišbir; similarly sekƝru (root s-k-r) “to close up”: liskir. Verbs with Thematic Vowel a The verbal forms attested with a thematic vowel a are: from ma¨Ɨ‰u (root m-¨-‰) “to fight”: im¨a‰ma; im¨assuma; from ‰abƗtu (root ‰-b-t) “to seize”: i‰batma; i‰batu; i‰bassuma; from tabƗlu (root t-b-l) “to remove”: itbal. A few 1st sg. preterite forms are attested with a as the thematic vowel: from ma¨Ɨ‰u (root m-¨-‰) “to fight”: am¨a‰u; from parƗsu (root p-r-s) “to decide”: aprusu.

113

For išukšim! (L180); read išrukšim.

180

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Weak Verbs Weak verbs are usually categorised according to the position of the weak consonant within the root. A weak root consonant is likely to be assimilated to a juxtaposed stronger consonant. 1-n Verbs In the preterite an n which is the first root consonant is assimilated by the second root consonant.114 There are several 1-n verbs in CH where such assimilation is evident: nasƗ¨u (root n-s-¨) “to tear out”: lissu¨; lissu¨šu; assu¨; na‰Ɨru (root n-‰-r) “to watch”: li‰‰ur; i‰‰urma; nadƗnu (root n-dn) “to give”: iddin; iddinu; iddinnjma; iddinam; iddinuši; iddinušim; iddinušum; iddinušumma; iddišši; iddiššim;115 na¨Ɨšu (root n-¨-š) “to prosper”: i¨¨iša; nakƗpu (root n-k-p) “to toss”: ikkipma; nakƗru (root nk-r) “to argue”: ikkiru; nakƗsu (root n-k-s) “to cut”: ikkis. 1- Verbs When  is the first root consonant it is assimilated to the preformative vowel, which is thereby lengthened.116 There are several 1- verbs in CH where such assimilation is evident: adƗru (root -d-r) “to fear”: Ưdurma; agƗru (root -g-r) “to hire”: Ưgur; Ưgurma; Ưguru; a¨Ɨzu (root -¨-z) “to seize”: Ư¨uz, Ư¨uzma; Ư¨uzuši; amƗru (root -m-r) “to see”: lƯmur; arƗru (root -r-r) “to curse”: lƯrur; lƯrurnj; lƯruršuma; emƝdu (root -m-d) “to impose”: lƯmussuma; epƝšu (root -p-š) “to do”: Ưpuš; Ưpušma; Ưpušnj; Ưpušu; erƝbu (root -r-b) “to enter”: Ưrubma; Ưrubu; erƝšu B (root -r-š) “to plough”: Ưrišma; esƝru (root -s-r) “to press to pay”: Ưsiršuma; emƝru (root -m-r) “to remove”: lƯmeršu; lƯmeršuma; ezƝbu (root -z-b) “to leave”: Ưzib; Ưzibšim. Sometimes the  can be shown through evidence from comparative philology to have emanated from the semivowel w;117 when such an  is assimilated the preformative vowel is nj: alƗdu (root w-l-d) “to give birth”: njlid; njlissum; njlissumma. With the verb alƗku (root -l-k) “to go”, the weak initial root consonant  is assimilated regressively by the stronger second root consonant l: *ilik > illik; cf. illiku; lillikma.

114

GrAkk. §5.3. Before the enclitic particle –ma assimilation is not apparent: iddinma. 116 GrAkk. §8.1. 117 GrAkk. §10.1. 115

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

181

2- Verbs When  occurs as the second root consonant it is assimilated to the following thematic vowel, which may be a, i or u.118 The thematic vowel is consequently lengthened: šâmu A (root š--m) “to purchase”: išƗmma; išƗmu; ašâm (1st sg.);119 dânu (root d--n) “to judge”: idƯn; idƯnu; lidƯn; adƯnu (1st sg.); ¨âru (root ¨--r) “to choose”: i¨Ưrma; qâpu A (root q--p) “to entrust”: iqƯpma; iqƯpšu;120 qâšu (root q--š) “to give”: iqƯšu; šâmu B (root š--m) “to assign”: išƯm; išƯmam; išƯmnjšum; išƯmu; lišƯmšum; qâlu A (root q--l ) “to heed”: iqnjlma; liqnjlma; târu (root t--r) “to return”: itnjramma; mêšu (root m--š) “to disdain”: imƝšma; ‰ênu (root ‰--n) “to load”: i‰Ɲnši. 3- Verbs The following 3- forms are attested:121 malû (root m-l-) “to be full”: imlƗma; dekû (root d-k-) “to arrange”: idke (L11, but conjecturally emended to iddi, see nadû; vnt. iqbi); leqû (root l-q-) “to take”: ilqe; ilqƝma; ilqû; ilqûšu; ilqûšuma; leû (root l--) “to be capable”: ilei; pe¨û (root p-¨-) “to caulk”: ip¨e; ip¨Ɲma; petû (root p-t- ) “to open”: ipte; iptƝma; iptete (L44; vnt. ipti); redû (root r-d-) “to pursue”: irdeam; reû (root r-- ) “to tend”: lirƝ; šasû (root š-s- ) “to shout”: lissƯma; šemû (root š-m- ) “to hear”: lišmƝma; banû (root b-n-) “to beget”: ibni; ibniušu; qabû (root q-b- ) “to speak”: iqbi; liqbi; iqbû; liqbƯma; iqbƯšum; qamû (root q-m-) “to set on fire”: liqmi; rašû (root r-š-) “to possess”: iršû;122 iršia; šalû (root š-l-) “to leap”: išliam; šaqû (root š-q-) “to be high”: lišqi. When  occurs as the third root consonant it is usually assimilated to the preceding thematic vowel. However, the vowel resulting from this 118

GrAkk. §9.1. To be contrasted with šâmu B “to crumble”, which has i as the thematic vowel, see below. 120 To be contrasted with qâpu B “to crumble”, which has u as the thematic vowel and is attested in the form iqtnjp “it crumbled” (L233), see below. 121 GrAkk. §7.3. 122 It has been suggested by Roth that the reading of the stele (ana marƯ ša iršu-u2 “for the sons he has acquired”) should be emended to ana marƯ ša ir-bu-u2 “for the sons who have grown up” (Roth: “for his eligible sons”). The subjunctive marker masks the expected vowel î with the 3rd sg. indicative with irbû (a form with i is attested elsewhere in Old Babylonian, cf. AHw. 939, s.v. rabû III, 4dB, referring to BIN 7, 41:28) as it does with iršû. 119

182

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

assimilation is is not marked as long when the verb has no suffix: ilqe “he took”. But when the verb has a suffix the vowel is marked as long; before the enclitic particle -ma: ilqƝma; before consonantal pronominal suffixes: ilqûšu “he took him” (L186); iqbƯšum (L49) “he spoke to him”; lƯrnjšu “may she lead him away” (li:23). In the subjunctive, the thematic vowel and root consonant  are both assimilated to the subjunctive marker –u, which is thereby lengthened.123 There are occasions where the  is apparently not assimilated to the thematic vowel, since the verbal form has dissimilar contiguous vowels: zƝr šarrnjtim ša Sin ibniušu “a royal descendant whom Sin created” (ii:13-15).124 Similarly, before the ventive suffix the  is apparently not assimilated: u‰iam “he came out”; irdeam “he pursued”; išliam “he sank”; ay iršia “may it not have”. The  also seems to have survived in the verb ilei “he was capable” (L28; 29; 54; 256; xlviii:77).125 Doubly Weak Roots Verbs with more than one weak root consonant usually show phonetic mutations arising from both these aspects of weakness. The doubly weak roots attested in preterite forms include the following: 1-n + 3-: nadû (root n-d-) “to knock down”: iddƯma; iddû; addi; našû (root n-š- ) “to carry”: iššƯma; nabû (root n-b-) “to name”: ibbinj; ibbû; ibbûninnima; nepû (root n-p-) “to seize”: ippƝma; 1- + 3-: arû (root -r-) “to lead”: lƯrûšu; a‰û (root -‰-) “to go out”: nj‰iam; nj‰iamma; ešû (root -š-) “to confuse”: lƯši; idû (root w-d- ) “to know”: Ưdi; idû; idûma; egû126 (root -g-) “to be negligent”: ƯgƯma; Ưgûma; Ɲgu. 123 The lengthened û is by convention denoted in transcription with a circumflex instead of a macron, to show that it is the result of an assimilation of different short vowels: ilqû (< *ilqiu) “which he took”. 124 There is no explicit cuneiform sign to show that  is not assimilated in this form, but it can be inferred from the fact that signs are used indicating the juxtaposition of dissimilar vowels. Assimilated and non-assimlated forms may occur in the same segment of narrative: ibbinj “they named” (i:17: ib-bi-u3); ibbû “they named” (i:49: ib-bu-u2). 125 It is transliterated as i-le-i, but here the writing does not clearly indicate the juxtaposition of different vowels, since the sign for {le} also has the value {li}; GAG §106t; GrAkk. §21.h. 126 egû is an example of a verb that is sometimes inflected as though the final root consonant  emanated from y (ƯgƯma) and sometimes as though from u (Ɲgu); GAG §106p; cf. ul Ɲgu a¨i ul addi “I have not been negligent, I have not been lazy” (xlvii:15-16).

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

183

Geminate Roots Verbs in which the two last radicals are identical may be described as geminate.127 In some of those verbs a weak consonant is involved and assimilation occurs. Forms of weak geminate verbs attested in the Gtheme include: ilei “he has accomplished, he is able” (3rd sg. masc. prt.) from lƝû (l--); reîm “to pasture” (inf.) and lirƝ “may he feed” (3rd sg. masc. precative) from rƝû (r--). The consonants in other geminate verbs are strong, and no sign of weakness appears in G-theme forms: lƯrur “let him curse” (3rd sg. precative) from arƗru (-r-r). Other geminate forms are attested in CH in the durative. izuzzu The forms of izuzzu are irregular.128 In CH two forms are attested: izzazzu, 3rd sg. masc. durative subjunctive, “he stands” (ii:11, which could be taken as suggesting root n-z-z), and uzuzzim, infinitive, “to stand” (L253, which could be taken as suggesting root z-y-z). It is not attested in the preterite in the G-theme, but in the ¼-theme there is found the form lišzƯz, 3rd sg. masc. precative “let him allow to stand”. G-theme (durative)129 Strong Verbs In the G-theme of the durative of the 3rd sg. masc. the second root consonant is doubled, and it is separated from the first root consonant with a vowel a and from the third root consonant with some other vowel, which is for most verbs a. The preformative vowel is i, as in the preterite. This pattern may be represented schematically as i1a22a3: izakkar “he will speak”. Such verbs usually have a thematic vowel u or a in the preterite. Several durative forms of strong verbs in the pattern i1a22a3 are attested in CH.130 Many of these verbs have u, not a, as a thematic vowel in the preterite, and such verbs belong to what has traditionally been called the “Ablaut Klasse” (Hoffner 1992 §63b; GrAkk. p. 97). They are emboldened in the following list: ¨arƗ‰u (root ¨-r-‰) “to deduct”: i¨arra‰ma; lamƗdu (root l-m-d) “to learn”: ilammadu; magƗru (root 127

GrAkk. §38.2. GrAkk. §37.2; GAG §107d. 129 GrAkk. §12.1(a). 130 Ventive, subjunctive and precative forms are included in these lists, as well as those forms with the enclitic particle –ma. 128

184

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

m-g-r) “to agree”: imaggarnjšu; ma¨Ɨru (root m-¨-r) “to be comparable”: ima¨¨ar; ima¨¨aršu; ma¨Ɨ‰u (root m-¨-‰) “to fight”: ima¨¨a‰; palƗšu (root p-l-š) “to break into”: ipallašnjnim; parƗsu (root p-r-s) “to decide”: iparrasnjma; paqƗru (root p-q-r) “to claim”: ipaqqarnjši; pamƗru (root p-m-r) “to redeem”: ipammar; ipammarišu! (L32; emend to ipammaršu; vnt.: ipammaršum); ragƗmu (root r-g-m) “to claim”: iraggum; iraggumnj; sadƗru (root s-d-r) “to arrange”: isadddarma; ‰abƗtu (root ‰-b-t) “to seize”: i‰abbatu; šakƗnu (root š-k-n) “to set”: išakkanu; išakkanma; išakkanšu; išakkanšimma; išakkannjši; išakkannjšum; išakkannjšumma; šaqƗlu (root š-q-l) “to pay”: išaqqal; išaqqalnj; išaqqalma; išaqqalšimma; šarƗku (root š-r-k) “to grant”: išarraknjšimma; šamƗru (root š-m-r) “to inscribe”: išammar; tabƗlu (root t-b-l) “to remove”: itabbal; tarƗku (root t-r-k) “to beat”: itarrakaššu; zakƗru (root z-k-r) “to utter”: izakkar; izakkarma. A few verbs follow the pattern i1a22i3 or i1a22e3, and the thematic vowel of the preterite of such verbs is usually i: ¨alƗqu (root ¨-l-q) “to disappear”: i¨alliqu; paqƗdu (root p-q-d) “to entrust”: ipaqqidnjma; sakƗlu (root s-k-l) “to appropriate”: isakkil; šebƝru (root š-b-r) “to break”: išebbirnj; pašƗ¨u (root p-š-¨) “to calm down”: ipašše¨u; see also nakƗsu below. Weak Verbs Some types of verb that exhibit weakness in other conjugations remain strong in durative forms, such as 1-n verbs: naqƗru (root n-q-r) “to pull apart”: inaqqarma; nasƗ¨u (root n-s-¨) “to tear out”: inassa¨; inassa¨nj; anassa¨; nasƗqu (root n-s-q) “to choose”: inassaqma; na‰Ɨru (root n-‰-r) to watch: ina‰‰ar; ina‰‰arnj; ina‰‰arma; nakƗsu (root n-k-s) “to cut”: inakkis; inakkisnj; the verb nadƗnu (root n-d-n), to give, similarly shows no weakness with regard to its first root consonant, but it frequently occurs with a pronominal suffix with which the final root consonant is assimilated: inaddin; inaddinma; inaddinu; inaddinnj; inaddinnjma; inaddinnjši; inaddinnjšimma; anaddikkum; inaddišši; inaddiššim; inaddiššum; inaddiššumma. Geminate verbs also do not exhibit any weakness in the durative of the G-theme: madƗdu (root m-d-d) “to measure”: imaddad; marƗru (root m-r-r) “to hoe”: imarrar; šakƗku (root š-k-k) “to harrow”: išakkakma. Similarly, the form i¨allalnjšu, “they shall hang him”, to be derived from the verb alƗlu (root -l-l) “to hang”, written as if it were from the root ¨-l-l,131 shows no sign of weakness. 131

The sign {¨a} may well be intended to represent the syllable {a}, so a more exact transcription would be iallalnjšu.

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

185

1- roots Verbal forms where  is the initial root consonant do exhibit weakness in the durative;132 the  is assimilated to the preformative i together with the vowel preceding the second root consonant.133 With both these phonemes assimilated, it is often only the doubled middle root consonant that distinguishes a durative from a preterite of a 1- verb. Several verbs are attested with a vowel a before the final root consonant: agƗru (root -g-r) “to hire”: iggar “he will hire” (< *iaggar; compare Ưgur “he hired”); a¨Ɨzu (root -¨-z) “to seize, marry”: i¨¨az; i¨¨azu; i¨¨assi; cf. also 1st and 2nd sg. forms: a¨¨az; ta¨¨az; ta¨¨azanni; akƗlu (root -k-l) “to eat”: ikkal; amƗru (root -m-r) “to see”: immarnjma; apƗlu (root -p-l) “to pay in full”: ippal; ippalma; ippalnj. Others are attested with the vowel e or i: ezƝbu (root -z-b) “to leave”: izzib “he will leave” (< *iazzib; compare Ưzib “he left”); izzibši; alƗku (root -l-k) “to go”: illak; illaknj; illakƗ;134 epƝšu (root -p-š) “to do”: ippeš; ippešma; ippešnj;135 emƝdu (root -m-d) “to impose”: immidnj; erƝšu B (root -r-š) “to plough”: irrišma; e‰Ɲdu (root -‰-d) “to harvest”: i‰‰id. The verb erƝbu (root -r-b) “to enter” has the vowel u: irrub; irrubu. When the  as the first root consonant is a reflection of Semitic w,136 the preformative vowel is u–, ultimately an assimilation from *iwa–: abƗlu (root w-b-l) “to bring”: ubbalnj; ubbalu; ašƗbu (root w-š-b) “to dwell”: uššab; ušamma.

132

GrAkk. §13.1. The preformative vowel before a doubled consonant has usually been supposed to be short. However, because these forms are almost always written with the vowel expressed both by an initial V-sign followed by a VC-sign, it has been suggested that it may in fact have been long; length could be expected as a consequence of the assimilation, even though the vowel is followed by a doubled consonant. 134 In the preterite the middle root consonant of the verb alƗku is unusually doubled. This means that the durative is distinguishable from the preterite only by the final vowel. 135 The form ippušu, a durative in the subjunctive, is attested in a later manuscript (fragment h, §4.12). The vowel u before the final root consonant is perhaps influenced by the –u of the subjunctive. 136 GrAkk. §15.1. 133

186

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

2-  Roots Durative forms where  is the middle root consonant show that the  is not doubled but assimilated to the preceding stressed vowel together with the following unstressed vowel.137 In the 3rd sg. masc. durative this results in a form in which the first root consonant is followed by a long vowel before the final root consonant.138 But in forms where the final root consonant is followed by a vowel, the vowel is kept short and the final root consonant is doubled, so that stress remains on the second syllable: šâmu A (root š--m) “to buy”: išâm; išammu; išammuma; dâ‰u (root d--‰) “to thresh”: idƗ‰ma; târu (root t--r) “to return”: itâr; itârma;139 râmu (root r--m) “to love”: arammu; irammu. The verb dâku (root d--k), “to kill”, has u and not a as the thematic vowel: idukknj; idukknjšu; idukknjšuma. In some verbs  is not completely assimilated, which results in a juxtaposition of two short vowels, ia: ¨âmu (root ¨--m) “to discover”: i¨iam; râbu (root r--b) “to recompense”: iriab; iriabšum; iriabbnjšu; iriabbnjšum. 3- Roots When  is the final root consonant, it is assimilated to the preceding vowel, which usually results in i in the 3rd sg. masc. form.140 This vowel is lengthened only before suffixes, a feature of these verbs in the preterite: bašû (root b-š-) “to exist”: ibašši; ibaššƯma; ibaššƯšum; ibaššû; qabû (root q-b-) “to speak”: iqabbƯma; iqabbûma; kasû (root k-s-) “to bind”: ikassûšuma; ikassûšunnjtima; manû (root m-n-) “to count”: imannûma; imannûši; qalû (root q-l-) “to burn”: iqallûšunnjti; iqallnjši; rašû (root r-š-) “to acquire”: iraššû; šalû (root š-l-) “to leap”: išalli; išalliamma. 3rd sg. masc. forms of verbs which prefer the vowel e between the first and second root consonant are usually transcribed with the same vowel between the second and third root consonants, though i is also found: ¨epû (root ¨-p-) “to break”: i¨eppe; leqû (root l-q-) “to take”: ileqqe; ileqqƝma; ileqqnj; ileqqnjma; redû (root r-d- ) “to pursue”: 137

GrAkk. §14.1. The length of this vowel, which is often the result of an assimilation of similar short vowels, may be marked with a circumflex or with a macron. 139 The verb târu seems be used adverbially in parallel with another verb, which amounts to hendiadys: ul itârma … ul uššab “he shall not return … he shall not sit” meaning “he shall not sit again” (L5); see further GrAkk. §14.5. 140 GrAkk. §12.1(c). 138

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

187

ireddƯšu. The colour of the vowel between the second and third root consonants may be masked before a vocalic inflection: balû (root b-l- ) “to come to an end”: ibellû. All forms of the verb tamû (root t-m-), “to swear”, end with the vowel a: itamma; itammƗma. This may be explained on an etymological basis (GAG 104c*) or possibly as a ventive suffix –a used here, as sometimes happens elsewhere, with a verb of speaking. išû The word išû functions as a verb meaning “to have”,141 and takes a direct object inflected as acc.: kaspam la išu he does not have silver (L51; cf. §5.10; §5.15); šarrƗqƗnum ša nadƗnim la išû “the thief does not have anything for paying” (L8); eli awƯlim šeam u kaspam išuma “he has lent a man grain or silver” (L113; 115; cf. L114); šeriktam la išû “she does not have a dowry” (L176b); awƯlum šû tašƯmtam išnjma “that man has authority” (xlviii:75-76); dƯnum šû rugummâm ul išu “that judgment does not have a claim” (L115; 123; 250); bƯtum šnj ilkam la išu “that house has no associated duty” (L67+a); leûtƯ šƗninam ul išu “my power has no rival” (xlvii:82-83); šumma na‰ratma ¨imƯtam la išu u mussa wa‰Ưma magal ušamtƗ‰i sinništum šî arnam ul išu “if she has been looked after (and) has no blame, but her husband has been going out and greatly disparaged her, that woman will have no guilt” (L142; cf. L134).142 It may be described as a partly defective verb: whether the subject is masc. sg. or fem. sg., there is no change of inflection, but with a fem. pl. subject the form išâ is attested: epšƝtnja šƗninam ul išâ “my deeds have no rival” (xlviii:100-102). Gt-Theme Some verbs are attested in a secondary theme of the basic stem, usually denoted as Gt,143 and marked by an infixed –ta– after the preformative vowel of the 3rd sg. masc. With some verbs the nuance of this secondary theme may be described as separative,144 as can be seen clearly from the occurrences of alƗku, “to go”, which in the Gt-theme means “to go 141

GrAkk. §26.1. This sentence suggests that the same form occurs in the apodosis, where the durative tense would be expected, as in the protasis, where the preterite would be expected. 143 Or alternatively I/ii. GrAkk. §33.1. 144 But with others some other nuance seems to have been intended. 142

188

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

away”: ana bƯt abiša ittallak “she shall go away to her father’s house” (L142; cf. L149; 191+); ana bƯt abišu ittalak “he has gone away to his father’s house” (L193). Most commonly the Gt-theme describes death: ana šƯmtim ittalak (or ittalku, subjunctive) “he (or she) went to fate” (L12; 162; 163; 165; 166; 167+; 170; 171a; 176a; 178; 179; 180; 181; 182; 183; 184). A separative nuance may also be found in –t– forms of another verb of motion, elû “to go up”: ištu ‰Ɲnum ina ugƗrim Ưtelianim “after the flock went up from the pasture” (L58). Perhaps a similar nuance is conveyed when the verb occurs in the idiomatic expression ina kaspišu Ưtelli “he shall lose his silver” (L35; 37; cf. L67+a; §4.12; 5.7; 5.14; L113; 116; 177).145 Gtn-Theme The tertiary theme of the basic stem may conveniently be denoted as Gtn.146 It is marked by an infixed –tan– after the preformative vowel of the 3rd sg. masc. The nuance imparted in this tertiary theme may usually be described as one of repetition, but in some contexts the idea of repetition seems to have developed into one of protracted action or an action which has a permanent effect. There are a few verbs attested in the Gtn-theme, and they include: ašrƯ šulmim ešteƯšinƗšim “I have continually looked for peaceful places for them” (xlvii:18); ina šulmim attabbalšinati “I have been controlling them in peace” (xlvii:55-56);147 gurun šalmƗt ummƗnƗtišu in ‰Ɲrim littaddi “let him keep piling the corpses of his soldiers on to a heap in the desert” (li:21-16);148 mimmašu ¨alqam išteneƯma “he shall continue to search for whatever was lost” (L125); narî šamram lištassƯma “let him continue to read out aloud the inscription on my stele” (xlviii:9-11);149 ina eqlim šuƗti ina liƗtim imtanaššarnjšu “they shall keep on dragging him around that field with

A similar semantic association can be seen in the Aramaic verbs selƝq “to ascend” and istallƝq “to vanish”. 146 Or alternatively I/iii. GrAkk. §34.1. 147 In the G-theme, abƗlu means “to bring on one particular occasion”. 148 In the G-theme, nadû denotes one single action, which itself may be punctual (e.g. “to knock out a tooth”; “to make an accusation”; “to leave a field fallow”) but which has an enduring effect. 149 The corresponding G-theme may perhaps have a more punctual nuance: eli Ɨlišu ezziš lissƯma “let him shout in anger against his city” (l:76-80). 145

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

189

the animals” (L256);150 ina mƯšƯtim littarrnjšu “may he gradually lead him into confusion” (l:5-6)151; aššassu mƗrašu u mƗrassu ana kaspim iddin “his wife, his son and his daughter he has sold for silver”; ana kiššƗtim ittandin “he has handed them over into bound service” (L117; L118); aran dƯnim šuƗti ittanašši “he shall always have to bear the penalty for that judgment” (L4; 13); adi balmat ittanaššƯši “he shall continue to support her as long as she lives” (L148; cf. 178);152 Ellil ina pƯšu ša la uttakkaru lƯruršuma (vnt.: lƯrurušuma) “may Enlil, whose word never changes, curse him” (li:86-89).

DERIVED THEMES153 Other verbs categorised as belonging to one of the derived themes can often be seen to have a meaning which can be derived from the same verbal root in the G-theme. The normal practice for dictionaries is to list verbs in the derived themes as a sub-section of the main entry for the Gtheme. For some verbs no corresponding G-theme is attested, and then the infinitive of the derived theme will be used as the main lemma.154 In the following lists the forms of the derived themes will be indexed under the verbal root.

150

Although several examples of mašƗru with and without –tan- are attested in Akkadian, the forms with –tan– almost always occur in the context of corporal punishment or disgrace. 151 The subject of the verb arû to lead away is Ea. The final vowel nj is the result of the assimilation of a vowel immediately preceding the final root consonant , which emanates from Semitic w (see AHw. s.v.; the latent root consonant can be seen in cognate verbs in Ugaritic, Old South Arabian, Arabic and Ethiopic): *iw > nj. The verbal form has been understood as pl. (see CAD, s.v., p. 315a–320), but now more correctly as a sg. (see Roth, ad loc.). 152 In the G-theme našû means “to carry on a particular occasion”; ittanašši < *intanašši. 153 GrAkk. §24.1. 154 Sometimes the infinitive is not actually attested, and so a hypothetical infinitive is used as the lemma for convenience. It is often simpler to refer to the verbal root when discussing the relationship between the various themes.

190

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

D-Theme155 Strong Verbs The basic pattern of the 3rd sg. masc. preterite for the strong verb in the preterite is u1a22i3 (with the precative particle it is li1a22i3) and several D-theme verbal forms are attested: d-m-q “to show kindness”: lidammiqu; d-n-n “to strengthen”: udanninma; udanninuma; g-l-b “to shave”: ugallib; ugallibu; ¨-l-q “to lose, destroy”: li¨alliq; u¨alliqu; k-b-l “to rape”: ukabbilšƯma; k-l-m “to show”: likallimšu; likallimšuma; n-k-r “to alter”: unakkirp; n-p-š “to put at ease”: linappišma; r-k-b “to pollinate”: urakkibma; r-k-s “to demand a contract”: urakkissu. One verb prefers the vowel e: l-m-n “to defame”: lilemmin.156 The basic pattern of the 3rd sg. masc. preterite for the strong verb in the durative is u1a22a3, and several forms are attested: b-l-m “to bring to life”: uballam; d-n-n “to strengthen”: udannan; udannanma; g-l-b “to shave”: ugallabnj; ¨-p-d “to destroy”: u¨appadnj; k-l-m “to show”: ukallam; r-m-b “to moisten”: urammab; š-l-m “to reinstate”: ušallamšimma; ušallamnjšimma. Weak Verbs The weak verbs attested in the D-theme all have  as one of the root consonants.157 1-  Forms When  is the first root consonant it is assimilated in the 3rd sg. masc. by the preformative vowel together with the a preceding the second root consonant; but any consequential lengthening of the assimilatory preformative vowel is masked by the following gemination of the second root consonant, the main characteristic of the D-theme. Several forms are attested in the durative: -b-b “to cleanse”: ubbamma ( < *uabbabma; vnt. ubbabma);158 -p-l “to become answerable”: uppal; -p-s “to make

155

GrAkk. §24.2. The different pattern in lilemmin, “may she denigrate”, is to be linked to the fact that the related G-theme infinitive (lemƝnu to be wicked) also has e vowels. 157 GrAkk. §25.1. 158 The vnt. reading shows that assimlation may not always occur. 156

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

191

difficulty”: uppas; w-t-r “to exceed”: uwatterma.159 The only example of a preterite is the precative form of -r-k “to lengthen”: lirrik. 2-  Forms When  is the second root consonant it is notionally geminated and assimilated together with the preceding vowel by the vowel preceding the third root consonant (i), which in the preterite results in vowel lengthening (Ư):160 k--l “to hold”: ukƯl (< *ukail); k--n “to establish”: ukƯn; ukinnuma; ukinnnjšum;161 p--¨ “to exchange”: upƯ¨; m--b “to benefit”: umƯb. In the durative the assimilation results in â: b--r “to declare”: ubârma (< *ubaarma); ubâršuma; k--n: “to establish”: ukânma; ukannnjšima; ukannnjšuma; ukânšnjma; n--¨ “to soothe”: una¨¨ušu; t--r “to return”: utâr; utarrnjšu; utarrnjšumma. 3-  Forms When  is the third root consonant it is assimilated to the preceding vowel; this final vowel is not lengthened unless a suffix is attached.162 Some verbs have e as the thematic vowel. The final vowel in the prt. is –i, but this is assimilated to the final –nj of pl. forms: b-l- “to terminate”: ubelli; m-l- “to hand over”: limallƯšuma; p-t- “to solve”: upetti; r-b- “to rear”: urabbûšu. In the durative, the final vowel is –a in the sg., which is also assimilated to final –nj in pl. forms: r-b- “to rear”: urabba; urabbƗšu; urabbû. There are two occurrences of D-theme verbs with doubly weak roots; both have  as the first and also as the final root consonant: -l- “to lift”, attested as ullû (3rd pl. prt. subjunctive): ina BƗbilim Ɨlim ša Anum u Ellil rƝšƯšu ullû “in Babylon, the city whose prominence Anu and Enlil raised” (xlvii:63-66); -d- “to identify”, attested as uweddƯma (3rd sg. prt.): bƯt abišu uweddƯma “he discovered the house of his father” (L193).163 159

This verb shows that there was a reticence for  reflecting the semi-vowel w to be assimilated; the semivowel is preserved. GrAkk. §25.1(b). 160 GrAkk. §29.1. 161 In forms with suffixes (ukinnuma; ukinnnjšum) a short vowel followed by a geminated consonant replaces the long vowel followed by the single consonant (ukƯn). 162 Resembling the pattern of 3- verbs in the G-theme. 163 In uweddƯma the initial root consonant w reflects the fact that w has been preserved, as it was in the root w-t-r (cf. uwatterma “he exceeded”; see above).

192

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Dt-Theme164 The Dt-theme form njtaššar “he (she) will be regarded as innocent” is conventionally interpreted as a passive of the D-theme, “to prove innocent”. It is derived from the root -š-r,165 and occurs in two expressions: izakkarma njtaššar “he shall swear and be regarded as innocent” (L20; 103; 249); awƯlum šû iddâk sinništum šî njtaššar “that man shall be killed; that woman shall be regarded as innocent” (L130). ¼-Theme166 Strong Verbs Strong verbs in the ¼-theme follow a pattern uša12i3 for the 3rd sg. prt. The forms attested include k-š-d “to allow” or “to achieve”: ušakšidu (vnt. ušakšidušu); m-q-t “to cause to fall”: lišamqit; n-s-k “to discard”: ušassik; n-m-l “to allow to see”: lišammilšu; r-b-‰ “to allow to pasture”: ušarbi‰; ‰-b-t “to enforce”: uša‰bitu. No strong roots are attested in the durative of the ¼- theme. Weak Verbs The weak verbs attested in the ¼-theme all have  as one of the root consonants.167 1-  Roots When  is the first root consonant it is assimilated to the preceding vowel with consequential lengthening. In the prt., verbal forms both with a and e preceding the  are attested: -b-l “to bring”: ušƗbil; ušƗbilšu; ušƗbilaššu; ušƗbilu; -k-l “to allow to feed”: ušƗkilu; -t-r “to make excellent”: ušƗternjšu;168 -z-b “to allow to deposit”: ušƝzib. In the durative the vowel is not lengthened before the geminated middle root consonant: -¨-z “to allow to marry”: uša¨¨aznjšu; -r-b “to bring in”: ušerrebši (vnt. ušerreb); -t-q “to allow to pass”: ušetteq; -z-b “to allow to deposit”: ušezzebnjšunnjti. 164

GrAkk. §35.1. The Dtn-theme (GrAkk. §35.2) is not attested in CH. See AHw. (p. 1486) s.v. wašƗru, Dt; to be cited in CAD s.v. uššuru; see CAD A/2 422, s.v. ašƗru C. 166 GrAkk. §27.1-2. 167 GrAkk. §28.1. 168 A verb with the thematic vowel e. 165

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

193

2-  Roots When  is the second root consonant it is assimilated to the following vowel with consequential lengthening.169 The only 2- verb attested is d--k “to cause to die”, in the form ušdƯk: mussa ušdƯk “she arranged the death of her husband” (L153). It should be noted that the a which could have been expected before the first root consonant (as in ušarbi‰) is also lost (*ušadik > ušdƯk), and this results in a form with only two syllables. 3- Roots When  is the final root consonant it is assimilated to the preceding vowel, without any consequential lengthening except when the form is augmented with a suffix. No 3- verbs are attested in the durative, but those attested in the prt. include b-š- “to bring into existence”: ušabši; ušabšû; m-‰- “to let dispose”: ušam‰Ưši; m-m- “to denigrate”: ušamma; ušammƗši; n-m- “to cause to be beaten”: lišammƯšuma; q-t- “to bring to an end”: lišaqti; r-b- “to make great”: ušarbinjšu. Doubly Weak Roots The verbs with doubly weak roots attested in the ¼-theme all have  as the first and the final root consonant.170 Those in the prt. include -p- “to display”: ušƝpu (vnt. ušƯpu); ušnjpiu; -‰- “to bring out”: ušƝ‰u; ušƝ‰Ưma; uše‰ƯšinƗšim; -d- “to make known”: ušƝdƯšumma. The only durative form attested is from -‰- “to bring out”: uše‰‰ûšu. izuzzu The verb izuzzu occurs in the expression nakiršu elišu lišzƯz “may he let his enemy stand over him” (l:90-91), which is parsed as the precative of z--z in the ¼-theme. But elsewhere in Akkadian, while some forms of izuzzu, “to stand”, can also be derived from z--z, others are more easily derived from n-z-z. ¼t-Theme There are three roots which are recognised as having produced verbal forms of the ¼t-theme.171 However, the separative nuance found in verbs 169

GrAkk. §29.1. GrAkk. §21.3. 171 GrAkk. §36.1. In Akkadian (but not in CH), a theme denoted as ¼tn is also attested; see GrAkk. §36.2. 170

194

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

in the Gt-theme and the Dt-theme is not obvious. The verbs attested are from š-n-n ¼t, “to double”:172 kasap ilqû uštašannƗma “he shall double the amount of silver he took” (L101); šeam mala ilqû uštašannƗma “he shall double all the grain he received” (§5.12); from -š-r ¼t “to do justice”: mƗtam uštƝšer “he did justice to” (xlviii:37-38); ‰almƗt qaqqadišu lištƝšer “may he do justice to the people” (xlviii:86-87);173 from -p- ¼t “to become visible”: mƯšarƯ ina mƗtim lištƝpi “may my justice shine out in the land” (xlvii:87-88).174 N-Theme175 The distinctive feature of verbal forms in the N-theme is an inherent preformative consonant n, which is assimilated to the first root consonant.176 Most verbs in the N-theme are passive, but a few are intransitive.177 The basic pattern of the 3rd sg. masc. preterite is in1a2i3, with the vowel a 172

See CAD s.v. šanû A, paragraph 5; AHw. s.v. šanû II, paragraph ¼t. See CAD ešƝru s.v. 12c, šutƝšuru “to do justice”. The infinitive is also attested within similar contexts: ana šutƝšur nišƯ mƗtim “to do justice to the population of the land” (v:16-17); (ana) … eknjtam almattam šutƝšurim “to do justice to the orphan” (xlvii:61-62; so Roth; BAL: eknjtim almattim); (ana) … ¨ablim šutƝšurim “to do justice to the destitute” (xlvii:73); massu šutƝšuram ilei “he is able to do justice to his land” (xlviii:77). Elsewhere in Akkadian the verb in the ¼-theme and in the ¼t-theme is associated with motion: šnjšuru “to move straight ahead, sweep, cause to move” (CAD s.v. 4, 5, 6); šnjtƝšuru “to march on, dispatch” (CAD s.v. 8, 11; also perhaps s.v. 10: “to give birth easily”). There it could be that the infix is to be interpreted as introducing a nuance of separation. But if the usage of the two themes in those meanings of the verb that do not involve movement are contrasted (šnjšuru “to prepare”; šnjtƝšuru “to thrive, keep in good order”, see CAD s.v. 9, 12), the nuance adduced by the infix may be an element of permanence. This particular verb incorporates causative as well as non-causative nuances in the ¼-theme. 174 See CAD apû s.v. 7, šutƗpû: “to become visible”. The verb in the ¼theme, šnjpû “to announce, bring forth” (CAD s.v. 4, 5), is transitive; in the ¼ttheme, šutƗpû “to become visible, become famous” (s.v. 6, 7), it is intransitive. It may be that the two themes are contrasted in this way. 175 Just as some verbs can be parsed as secondary and tertiary themes (Gt, Gtn, Dt, Dtn, ¼t, ¼tn) so also there are also a few that can be parsed as belonging to the Nt and Ntn themes; see GrAkk. §38.3(b); 37.1. 176 When the first root consonant is n (as in n-p-¨ and n-d-n), this results in gemination; see GrAkk. §31.1-2. 177 išƗtum innapi¨ma “a fire broke out” (L25). 173

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

195

separating the first and second root consonants and the vowel i separating the second and third root consonants. Strong Roots Strong roots attested in the prt. include ‰-b-t N, “to be seized”: i‰‰abit;178 š-l-l N, “to be captured”: iššalilma. A vocalic suffix (such as –nj of the pl. or –u of the subjunctive) produces a cluster of the second and third root consonants:179 b-b-l N, “to be brought”: ibbablušum;180 ¨-b-t N, “to be robbed”: i¨¨abtu; n-d-n N, “to be given”: innadnu; innadnušum; innadnnjšum.181 The basic pattern of the 3rd sg. masc. durative is in1a22a3, with the second root consonant doubled and the vowel a before the third root consonant. The forms attested in the durative include m-¨-‰ N, “to be beaten”: imma¨¨a‰; n-s-¨ N, “to be disinherited”: innassa¨; innassa¨u; p-q-r N, “to be reclaimed”: ibbaqqar182; p-r-s N, “to be decided”: ipparrasma; p-m-r N, “to be reclaimed”: ippammar; š-k-n N, “to be reclaimed”: iššakkan. Forms from the root n-d-n N, “to be given”, have the vowel i before the final root consonant: innaddin; innaddinma; innadiššum; innaddiššumma.183

178

itti zikarim šanîm ina utnjlim la iÑÑabit “she was caught while copulating with another male” (L131). The almost identical form iÑÑabat (cf. L9; 136) is to be explained as a perfect; in the sentence sarrnjtim šunnjti la iÑÑabtamma “she has not caught those villains”, the verb is also to be explained as a perfect, for the sg. inflection prohibits translating it as a passive with a pl. subject. 179 But in the verb innabitu “he fled” (subjunctive, from the weak root, -b-t, see below) there is a separating vowel. 180 The root b-b-l is attested in the N-theme in the expressions mimma ša ibbablušum “what had been brought to him” (L159), and mimma mala ibbablušum “all that had been brought to him” (L160; 161). It is a by-form of the weak root -b-l (< w-b-l). 181 In the expression niplƗtim ša innadnnjšum “the amounts of compensation that were given to him” (L41), the verb is represented as a pl. form (with the subjunctive marker u masked apparently by the 3rd masc. pl. marker nj, not by the expected 3rd fem. pl. marker –Ɨ); if niplƗtim is taken as a collective noun, it could be marked as sg., innadnušum. 182 nb > bb; in CH, forms from the root p-q-r are written as if derived from the root b-q-r, as normal in OB. 183 In ms. J no assimilation of n before the suffix is apparent: innadinšum; innaddinšumma.

196

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Weak Roots Several verbs from weak roots are attested in the N-theme. The preformative consonant n of the N-theme is assimilatory and so when the weak consonant occurs in first position it is assimilated regressively by that n, resulting in gemination. The 1-n root n-p-¨ gives innapi¨ma “it flared up”.184 All other weak roots involve . 1-  Roots When  is the first root consonant gemination also results (*n > nn).185 The two examples attested are both prt.; one follows the more common pattern with the vowel a before the second root consonant, and the other has e:186 -b-t N, “to flee”: innabitu; -m-d N, “to come together”: innemdnj. 2-  Roots When  is the second root consonant, in the preterite it is assimilated to the preceding a vowel after the first root consonant, which is consequently lengthened:187 š--m N, “to be purchased”: iššƗmu (< * inšamu).188 In the durative, the notionally geminated  is also assimilated to the preceding a vowel after the first root consonant, together with the vowel a before the final root consonant; this results in vowel lengthening: d--k N, “to be killed”: iddâk (< *indaak). 3-  Roots When  is the third root consonant it is assimilated to the preceding i vowel, but the vowel is lengthened only with suffixes.189 The forms attested in the prt. include ¨-p- N, “to be destroyed”: i¨¨epi; n-d- N, “to be abandoned”: innadû;190 p-t- N, “to be opened”: ippetû. The middle

184

GrAkk. §31.1(b). GrAkk. §32.1(a-b). 186 The e reflects Semitic !. 187 GrAkk. §32.1(c). 188 šƯbƯ ša ina ma¨rƯšunu iššƗmu “the witnesses in whose presence it was sold” (L9). 189 GrAkk. §31.1(c). 190 bilat eqlim ša šanƗtim ša innadû “rent for the field for the years when it was abandoned” (L62). 185

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

197

root consonant in durative forms is doubled: b-š- N, “to be produced”: ibbaššû;191 n-d- N, “to be abandoned”: innaddi.192

QUADRILITERAL OR QUINQUILITERAL ROOTS Occasionally a verbal form appears to derive from a root with more than three consonants.193 There are two examples in CH. The verb in the expression išdƯ ummƗnišu liš¨el‰i “may he cause the foundations of his army to crumble” (l:24-25), embodies at least four root consonants, ¨-l-‰; š may also be regarded as part of the root, making it quinquiliteral; alternatively the verb may be described as a quadriliteral verb in the ¼theme. In the expression ištu bƯtika ibbalakkatnjnim “they will climb over from your house” (L68+b),194 the verb embodies the root consonants b-lk-t; it is quinquiliteral if n is regarded as a root consonant, but quadriliteral if it is regarded as a mark of the N-theme.

PERFECT FORMS Several verbal forms occur with an infixed –ta– which cannot easily be interpreted as examples of one of the secondary themes mentioned above (Gt, Dt, or ¼t), for no real difference in meaning is immediately obvious from that of the corresponding form without infixed –ta–. In CH these forms often occur at particular points of a sentence, most often towards the end of a protasis and immediately before the apodosis, with the earlier verbs in the protasis inflected as preterite, without any infixed –ta–. These –ta– forms are denoted as instances of the “perfect tense”.195 They can often be interpreted as focussing the attention on the situation that is described immediately preceding the apodosis, as though the situation described by the –ta– verbs, which itself has resulted from the situation described by the earlier verbs in the preterite, is the primary reason for the solution proposed in the apodosis. Those protases in which 191

šeam ša ina eqlim ibbaššû “grain that shall be produced from the field”

(L46). 192

ana išƗtim šuƗti innaddi “he shall be thrown into that fire” (L25). GrAkk. §38.1. 194 The quotation is from a supplementary manuscript, for at this point the text on the stele is missing. 195 GrAkk. §§17.1-2; 18.1; 19.1. It is questionable whether “perfect” or “tense” are the most apt words to describe these forms. For the most part they are indistinguishable in form from one of the secondary themes (Gt, Dt, or ¼t), though some forms enjoy a measure of morphological identity. 193

198

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

the only verbs are in the –ta– form can sometimes be seen as a continuation or variation of a situation just decribed. Such an interpretation could be taken to mean that the infix has more of a syntactic than a lexical function. But if the focussing is a result of a change in tense, then the explanation is grammatical rather than lexical. The following citations and remarks are concerned only with the occurrences of the perfect tense in CH, and it is necessary to examine a wider body of Akkadian literature to realise how the verbal forms that are classified as examples of the perfect tense function.196 In translation, wherever possible a past tense with “have” is used to demonstrate that it refers to an Akkadian verb in the perfect tense. Very often the subject of the perfect verb is the same as the preceding preterite: iddƯma la uktinšu (L2); i‰batma … irtediaššu (L17); ipmuraššuma … uštakšidaššu (L32); ušƝ‰Ưma … uštabši (L42); Ưrišma ittadi (L43); ušƝ‰Ưma … iptete (L44); iddƯma … uštƗkil (L58); ušatri‰ma … uktƯn (L127); ilqƝma … ittakir (L106); i‰‰urma … Ưterub (L133b); izƝrma … iqtabi (L142); ilqƝma urtabbƯšu (L185); išƗmma … irtaši (L279). Once the transition has been made from preterite to perfect, there will not usually be any resumption of the preterite; if a subsequent preterite is used it can be explained as a repetition of the previous syntactical pattern: Ưpušma … ubtallim ulu iptƝma … ubtallim (L215; 218). A perfect may follow more than one preterite in clauses coordinated with –ma, and the clause with the perfect may itself be coordinated with –ma: ubbirma … iddƯma … uktƯnšu (L1); Ư¨uzma … njšaršƯšuma … ištakan (L145); išƗmma … imlƗma … imtaqut (L278). The preterite clauses may also be coordinated asyndetically: ipte … iddƯma … uštƗbil (L55). A subordinate expression may be embedded in the clause preceding the perfect: awƯlum šû mimma ša šnjbulu ašar šnjbulu la iddinma itbal “but that man did not deliver what had to be transported at the place to which it had to be transported but he has removed it” (L112). There are also instances where there is a change of subject in the preceding preterite verbs, but the subject of the perfect verb is the same as that of the immediately preceding preterite: šipiršu la udanninma bƯt Ưpušu imqutma bƝl bƯtim uštamƯt “he did not make his work strong and the 196

Wider investigations into the significance of perfect forms in Akkadian have shown that there is some variation according to different periods and different regions.

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

199

house he made fell and it caused the death of the owner of the house” (L229); išƗtum innapi¨ma awƯlum ša ana bullîm illiku …Ưnšu iššƯma … ilteqe197 “fire broke out and the man who went to put it out coveted (lit. ‘raised his eye’) … and took” (L25). A preterite may be followed by more than one perfect, with the clauses co-ordinated with –ma, u or ulu: ukabbilšima … ittatƯlma i‰‰abtnjšu “he overpowered her … and then he has lain with her … and then they have seized him” (L130); usarrirma šimtam uttakir u ana kaspim ittadin “he was deceitful and then he has changed the mark and then he has sold for silver” (L265); awƯlum eleppašu ana malƗ¨im ana igrim iddinma malƗ¨um ƯgƯma eleppam ummebbi ulu u¨talliq “a man gave his boat on hire to a boatman but the boatman was careless and then he has let the boat sink or has lost it” (L236). On two occasions the coordination of the clause with the perfect and the preceding preterite is not with –ma but with an adverbial conjunction: awƯlum ‰e¨ram ša ana mƗrnjtišu ilqûšuma urabbûšu bissu Ưpuš warka mƗrƯ irtašƯma ana tarbƯtim nasƗ¨im ištakan “a man, with a child whom he took as a son and brought up, established his house, then afterwards he has had his own children and has taken a decision to expel the adoptee” (L191); dƯnam idƯn purussam iprus kunukkam ušƝzib warkƗnumma dƯnšu Ưtene “he conducted a trial, gave a verdict, issued a sealed document, then afterwards he has changed his judgment” (L5). There are a number of occurrences where the subject of the perfect is different from that of the immediately preceding preterite, though it usually has some reference to a previously mentioned item. Sometimes it is the same as another preceding prt.: ana mƗrišu kallatam i¨Ưrma mƗrušu la ilmassima šû ina snjniša ittatƯl “he chose a bride for his son, and his son did not learn about her, and he himself (i.e. the father) had had intercourse with her” (L156; cf. L155: ina snjniša ittatƯlma i‰‰abtnjšu; the force of the second pf. verb of L155 is apparently sustained also in L156); nadƯtam Ư¨uzma mƗrƯ la ušaršišuma ana šugƯtim a¨Ɨzim panƯšu ištakan “he took a temple woman and she bore him sons but he has decided to take a priestess” (L145). On one occasion, the direct object of the preceding prt. becomes the subject of the subsequent pf.: mimmâšu ina ma‰‰arnjtim iddinma ašar iddinu … mimmûšu i¨taliq “he put his property into custody and his property has disappeared from where he had put it” (L125).

197

The suggested emendation to il-te-qi may be regarded as certain.

200

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Coordinated clauses with verbs in the perfect usually have the same subject: malƗ¨um eleppam ana awƯlim ip¨Ɲma šipiršu la utakkilma ina šattimma šuƗti eleppum šî i‰‰abar ¨imƯtam irtaši “the boatman caulked the boat for the man but he did not do his job carefully and within a year the boat began to leak (for) it had a defect” (L235); Ưgurma … i‰Ɲnši malƗ¨um šû ƯgƯma eleppam ummebbi u … u¨talliq “he gave on hire…he loaded her but the boatman was careless and then he has let the boat sink or has lost it” (L237); ¨ubullum elišu ibaššima eqelšu Adad irta¨i‰ ulu bibbulum itbal ulu … šeum … la ittabši “a debt is over him and Adad has overwhelmed his field, or a flood has eroded (it) or grain has not been produced” (L48); awƯlum eqelšu … iddinma u bilat eqlišu imta¨ar warka eqlam Adad irta¨i‰ u lu bibbulum itbal “a man gave his field and has received the rent for his field; afterwards Adad has overwhelmed his field, or a flood has eroded (it)” (L45). But there are also instances where there is a change of subject: nadƯtam Ư¨uzma amtam ana mutiša iddinma (vnt. inaddinma) mƗrƯ ittalad warkƗnum amtum šî itti bƝltiša uštatam¨ir “he took a temple woman and the temple woman gave (vnt. will give) her husband a maidservant and she has given birth to sons (but) afterwards that maidservant has shown rivalry with her mistress” (L146); awƯlum ¨irtašu mƗrƯ njlissum u amassu mƗrƯ njlissum abum … mƗrnja iqtabi itti mƗrƯ ¨Ưrtim imtanûšunnjti warka abum ana šimtim ittalku “a man, whose first wife bore him sons and whose maidservant bore him sons, the father has said, ‘My sons’, he has reckoned them with the sons of the first wife, afterwards the father went to fate” (L170); aššat awƯlim mussa ubbiršima … ina utnjlim la i‰‰abit “a man’s wife: her husband accused her but she has not been caught while copulating” (L131); nadƯtam Ư¨uzma nadƯtum šî amtam ana mutiša iddinma mƗrƯ uštabši awƯlum šû ana šugƯtim a¨Ɨzim panƯšu ištakan “he married a temple woman and that temple woman gave her husband a maidservant and she has then produced sons (but) that man has decided to marry a priestess” (L144);198 awƯlum mƗrašu ana mušƝniqtim iddinma ‰i¨rum šû … imtnjt mušƝniqtum … ‰i¨ram šaniamma irtakas “a man gave his son to a 198

This law is closely associated with the next (L145), where mƗrƯ la ušaršišuma (prt.) corresponds to mƗrƯ uštabši (pf.); the main difference between the two clauses seems to be that where no children arose from the union, a decision to take another woman would be permitted; but when a union has produced children, the man may not take another partner; it appears that emphasis is being given to the fact that, even though children were produced, the man has decided to take another partner.

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

201

nurse but that child has died (and) the nurse has made an agreement for another child” (L194); ana mƗrišu kallatam i¨Ưrma mƗrušu ilmassi šu warkƗnumma ina snjniša ittatƯlma i‰‰abtnjšu “he chose a bride for his son, and his son learned about her, but he himself has had intercourse with her and they have seized him” (L155).

SUBJUNCTIVE FORMS A verb in a subordinate clause is inflected with –u and usually placed at the end of its clause. Such verbs may be preterite or durative and are traditionally known as subjunctive forms.199 Occasionally a stative form is marked as a subjunctive.200 A subjunctive occurs most frequently in a relative clause introduced with the particle ša: awƯlum ša alpam Ưguru “a man who hired an ox” (L249). A plural antecedent which is the subject of the relative clause naturally results in the pl. inflection –nj; this long vowel masks the short –u of the subjunctive: niplƗtim ša innadnnjšum “the compensation payments that were given to him” (L41). The subjunctive marker is also masked by a ventive marker such as –am or –nim: ištu ‰Ɲnum ina ugƗrim ƯteliƗnim “after the flock had come up from the meadow” (L58). The Relationship of the Antecedent to the Subjunctive Verb When the antecedent is the subject of the subjunctive the verb may be intransitive: awƯlum ša ana bullîm illiku “a man who went to extinguish” (L25); mimma ša ina qƗtišu ibaššû “whatever there is in his possession” (§5.15); šarrum ša ina mƗtim ibbaššû “a king who is in the land” (xlviii:62-63); rugummâm ša ina dƯnim šuƗti ibaššû “the compensation that pertains to that case” (L5); simmam mar‰am ša la ipašše¨u “a weeping sore which will not cool” (li:57-58). It may also be transitive: awƯlum ša alpam Ưguru “a man who hired an ox” (L249); amassu ša mƗrƯ uldušum “his maidservant who bore him sons” (L119); ana šugƯtim ša mƗrƯ uldušum “for the priestess who has born him sons” (L137); ¨Ưrtašu ša mƗrƯ la uldušum “his first wife who has not born him sons” (L138); awƯlum ša ¨ubullam iršû “a man who had contracted (lit. ‘possessed’) a 199

Because the term “subjunctive” is usually considered to indicate a different mood (whereas in Akkadian the –u clearly primarily indicates a syntactic rather than a semantic change) “subordination marker” is to be preferred as a descriptive term; cf. GrAkk. §19.2-3. 200 E.g. mimma ša šnjbulu “whatever was to be transported” (L112).

202

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

debt” (§5.10); awƯlum ¨ablum ša awatam iraššû “a destitute man who has a statement” (xlviii:3-5); ša mƗ¨irtim ša elep ša muqqelpƯtim umebbû “the person in the boat going upstream who sank the boat of the person in the one going downstream” (L240). The antecedent may also be the object of the subjunctive verb: ter¨atam ša awƯlum šû ana bƯt emišu ublu emušu uttƝršum “the wedding gift, which that man brought to the house of his father-in-law, his fatherin-law has returned to him” (L163);201 mimma ša ibbablušum “whatever had been brought to him” (L159); ana mƗrƯ ša amtum uldušum “for the sons whom the maidservant bore to him” (L170); ¨imƯt pissatim ša ina tarba‰im ušabšû “the damage from the disease which he has allowed to occur in the pen” (L267); mimma ša u¨alliqu whatever he lost (L232); mimma ša ina libbiša u¨alliqu “whatever he lost from her cargo” (L237); mimma ša ilqû “whatever he took” (L107); šeam ša im¨uru “the grain which he received” (L254); eqlam ša iddû “the field which he abandoned” (L43); mimma ša tamkƗrum iddinušum “whatever the merchant gave to him” (L107); mimma ša abuša iddinušim “whatever her father gave to her” (L178); nudunnâm ša mussa iddinušim “the gift her husband gave her” (L172); ina kaspim ša iddinu “from the silver which he gave” (§5.7); ina kaspim ša waššƗbum [iddinušum] “from the silver which the tenant gave him” (L69+c); kanik kaspim ša ana tamkƗrim inaddinu “the sealed document for the silver silver which he will give to the merchant” (L104; cf. L105); mimma ša ikkiru “whatever was disputed” (L124); ana mƗriša ša irammu “to her son whom she loves” (L150); ina Esagil ša arammu “in Esagil which I love” (xlvii:9494); ana mƗrƯ ša iršû “for the sons he has raised” (L166); aššassu ša labu i‰bamu “his wife whom a disease has seized” (L148); adi 10-šu ša išriqu “ten times as much as he stole” (L265); ina muppim ša išmurušim “on the tablet which he wrote for her” (L178; 179); eleppam ša umebbû “the boat which he sank” (L237). The antecedent, whether subject or object of the subjunctive, sometimes has a genitive relationship with a noun in the relative clause. In those circumstances a resumptive pronominal suffix on that noun refers back to the antecedent: awƯlum ša ana bƯt emišu biblam ušƗbilu “a man who has brought a gift to the house of his father-in-law” (L159); rubûm ellum ša nƯš qƗtišu Adad idû “the pure prince whose raised hand 201

Here the subject of the main verb has been displaced from its expected initial position in the sentence; it is the object of the main clause—the antecedent of the embedded relative clause—which is placed first.

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

203

Adad acknowledged” (iii:55-57); šƯbƯ ša ina ma¨rišunu išƗmu “the witnesses in whose presence he bought it” (L9; 10). Similarly, an antecedent corresponding to an indirect object within the relative clause is referred to by a resumptive pronominal suffix on the verb: ugbabtum nadƯtum ulu sekretum ša abuša šeriktam išrukušim kunukkam išmurušim “a priestess, temple-woman or devotee whose father has granted her a dowry and written out the sealed document for her” (L179). Multiple Relative Clauses A sentence may embody more than one relative clause, because more than one grammatical constituent is qualified: awƯlum ša ina kƗrišu pƯtum ippetû šeam ša u¨alliqu iriab “the man, in whose dyke the breach was made, shall repay the grain, which he destroyed” (L53). In poetic style coordinated noun phrases may all have an individual relative clause: awƗt mƯšarim ša ina narîya ašmuru li‰‰ur dƯn mƗtim ša adƯnu purussƝ mƗtim ša aprusu ay unakkir “may he observe the word of justice, which I wrote on my stele; may he not change the law for the land which I practised, the decisions for the land which I made” (xlviii:64-72). One relative clause may be embedded within another: bƝl bƯtim ša Ưgnjma mimma ša ana ma‰‰arnjtim iddinušumma u¨alliqu “the owner of the house who has been careless and lost whatever was given to him for custody” (L125). Unexpressed ša Sometimes the relative particle ša is implied and not expressed, and then the antecedent is inflected as a bound form before (but not always immediately before) the verb, particularly when the antecedent is the object of the subjunctive:202 awat iqbû “the word he spoke” (L3); bƯt Ưpušu “the house he constructed” (L148; 229; 232); dƯn idƯnu “the case he judged” (L5); kasap išqulu “the silver he weighed” (L9; 278; 281); kasap ilqû “the silver he took” (L101); qƯšti šarrum ana rƝdîm iddinu “the gift the king gave to the soldier” (L34); kasap tamkƗrum išqulu “the silver the merchant weighed” (L119); bƯt imqutu “the house that collapsed” (L232). ša may be implied also when the antecedent is the subject of the subjunctive: nƗdin iddinušum “the donor who gave it to him” (L9; 10). The text of variant manuscripts shows that the omission of ša appears to 202

The same happens in English.

204

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

have little if any consequence in meaning: mimma ša irgumu “whatever he claimed” (L126; cf. ms. t: mimma irgumu); mimma ša šnjbulu “whatever was to be transported” (L112; ms. S: mimma šnjbulu). The particle ša may refer to more than one antecedent: [alpam] ulu [immeram] ša innadnušum “the ox and the sheep which was given to him” (L263); liƗtim u ‰ƝnƯ ša šarrum ana rƝdîm iddinu “the cattle and the flock which the king gave to the soldier” (L35); nƝmelam u butuqqâm ša ibbaššû “the profit or loss which occurs” (L77+f); šeam u šamaššammƯ ša ina eqlim ibbaššû “the grain or sesame which exists in the field” (L49; cf. L50); šeam ša kaspišu u ‰ibassu ša itti tamkƗrim ilqû “the grain for his silver together with interest on it which he received from the merchant” (L49).203 Similarly with an asyndetic relative clause: ilik eqlim kirîm u bƯtim ša išammu “the duty of the field, orchard or house which he is buying” (L40). When subordinate clauses are coordinated, the relative particle is not repeated: ‰e¨ram ša ana mƗrnjtišu ilqûšuma urabbûšu “the juvenile whom he has taken and brought up as a son” (L190; 191); šeriktaša u nudunnâm ša mussa iddinušim ina muppim išmurušim ileqqƝma “she shall take the dowry and the wedding gift which her husband gave her and bequeathed to her in writing” (L171b); ugbabtum nadƯtum ulu sekretum ša abuša šeriktam išrukušim kunukkam išmurušim “a priestess, templewoman or devotee whose father has granted her a dowry and written out the sealed document for her” (L179); mur‰am kabtam asakkam lemnam simmam mar‰am ša la ipašše¨u asûm qerebšu la ilammadu in ‰imdi la una¨¨ušu kƯma nišik mnjtim la inassa¨u ina biniƗtišu lišƗ‰iaššumma “let him summon for his body a serious illness, wicked pain, a weeping sore which will not cool, the nature of which a physician does not understand, which he cannot soothe with a bandage, which like the sting of death cannot be eradicated” (li:55-65). It can happen that ša functions at one and the same time as the subject of a main clause (an indefinite pronoun) and the introduction to a subordinate clause (the relative particle, but with no explicit antecedent): u ša šurqam ina qƗtišu im¨uru iddâk “and then the person who received the stolen property from his possession shall be killed” (L6).204 Another 203

Here, technically, ša refers to kaspišu but not to Ñibassu, since the first but not the second noun is an appropriate object for the verb ilqû. 204 This appears to be a similar construction to the nominalised use of ša as the predicate of a non-verbal sentence: bitiqtum ša errƝšimma “the loss is for the cultivator alone” (L45).

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

205

sentence shows that an independent pronoun (emphasised with –ma) may refer back to ša used in this way, thus making a clearer distinction between the subordinate and the main clause: ša i‰‰abtuma ilikšu ittalku šûma illak “the one who has taken possession and has performed the duty shall continue to do it himself” (L30). Other Subordinate Clauses Not only ša but also other non-declining words normally introduce subjunctive verbs. Like ša, they may introduce more than one subjunctive or an embedded subjunctive clause. Such words include adi; ašar; aššum; innjma; ištu; kƯma; lƗma; mala and mimma mala; warka: adi napištašu ibellû “until his life is exhausted” (li:66-67); ašar Ưrubu “where she entered” (L173); ašar illiku “where he went to” (L100; 101; 102); ašar iddinu where he gave (L123; 125);205 aššum bƯt Ưpušu la udanninuma imqutu “because he did not strengthen the house he had constructed and it collapsed” (L232);206 aššum balum abišu u ummišu ‰e¨ram šaniam irkusu “because she contracted for a second child without informing his father or his mother” (L194); aššum ina šattim ma¨rƯtim mƗna¨Ɨtišu la ilqû “because he did not regain his investment in the earlier year” (L47); aššum šamallâšu ikkiru “because he disputed with his agent” (L107); aššum mƗrƯ uldu “because she bore sons” (L146); aššum Ɨlšu izƝruma innabitu (L136); innjma Ư¨uzuši “when he married her” (L176a); innjma ana ¨ubullim iddinu “when he made the loan” (§5.13); innjma im¨uru “when he received” (§5.13); innjma ilqûšu “when he took him” (L186); innjma a¨¨nj izuzznj “when the brothers make the share” (L165); ištu sinništum šî ana bƯt awƯlim Ưrubu “after that woman entered the man’s house” (L152); ištu mƗrƯša urtabbû “after she raised her sons” (L137); ištu ‰Ɲnum ina ugƗrim ƯteliƗnim (L58, see above); ištu innemdnj bƯtam Ưpušnj bƯšam iršû “after they came together, made a house and acquired property” (L176a); mimma ša mussa u šî ištu innemdnj iršû ana šinƯšu izuzznjma “they shall divide into two whatever she and her husband acquired after they came together” (L176a); kƯma ubbalu “according to what it is worth” (§5.15); lƗma sinništam šuƗti i¨¨azu “before he takes that woman” (L151); lƗma ana bƯt awƯlim irrubu “before she enters the 205

Alternatively ašar may be explained as the bound form of the noun ašru “place”, before the verb with an implied subordinating particle ša (see above). 206 Here we have three subjunctive verbs. The particle aššum subordinates the two verbs (each with a different subject) udanninuma and imqutu; the subordinating particle ša is implied in the expression bƯt Ưpušu (see above).

206

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

man’s house” (L151); mala ilqû “as much as he took” (§5.12; L100; 106; 113); mala iddinu “as much as he gave” (L113; 116); mimma mala ibbablušum “however much he brought to him” (L160, but cf. ms. S: mimma ša ibbablušum; L161, but cf. ms. V: mimma mala ibbablu); mimma mala inaddinu “however much he will give” (L122); warka abum ana šƯmtim ittalku “after his father went to fate” (L165; 166; 178; 179; 180; 181). On one occasion subjunctive forms occur after a verb of speaking, introduced by ina: ina idû la am¨a‰u itamma u asâm ippal “he shall state, ‘I did not strike knowingly’, but he shall be answerable to the physician” (L206).

INJUNCTIVE FORMS207 Actions which are desired to be undertaken by someone else are usually expressed with the particle lu prefixed to a preterite form of the verb, resulting in a form referred to as the precative. The particle is prefixed as a bound morpheme, usually to a 3rd person verb form, and there is consequential assimilation of contiguous vowels: *lu + idammiqnj > lidammiqnj “may they look kindly”. The corresponding negative particle ay, always written as an independent word, denotes something that it is hoped will not occur.208 Almost all the examples of such prohibitive expressions occur in the later sections of the Epilogue. A more curt way to express a wish is to use the imperative form of the verb, which naturally occurs only in direct speech. Precative The precative occurs most often when deities are invoked: igirrê umišam … lidammiqnj “may they make the daily petitions pleasing” (xlviii:58); ilnj rabûtum … šuƗti … lƯrurnj “may the great gods curse him” (li:83). Several verbs in a series may all be inflected as precatives, apparently adding rhetorical emphasis: Ellil … ina šubtišu lišappi¨aššum palê tƗnƝ¨im … ana šƯmtim lišƯmšum ¨alƗq Ɨlišu … liqbi “may Enlil cause a revolution for him in his dwelling place, fix a reign of moaning as his destiny, and decree the loss of his city” (xlix:53-80); Ninlil … ina ma¨ar Ellil awassu lilemmin šulput mƗtišu … in pƯ Ellil šarrim lišaškin “may Ninlil make his words stink in the presence of Ellil, may she cause a plague to occur in his land at the command of king Enlil” (xlix:81-97); 207

GrAkk. §16.4. The prohibitive particle ay may be written simply as a, or as a-a, or as a-ya; GrAkk. §16.3(b). 208

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

207

Sîn … agâm kussiam ša šarrnjtim lƯmeršu arnam kabtam … lƯmussuma njmƯ … lišaqti kammƗl šarrnjtim lišammilšu balƗmam ša itti mnjtim šitannu ana šƯmtim lišƯmšum “may Sin remove the royal crown and throne from him, impose a harsh penalty on him and bring an end to his days; may he let him see an adversary for the kingdom; may he fix as his destiny a life struggling with death” (l:41-63); Adad … zunnƯ ina šamê … lƯmeršu, mƗssu … li¨alliq eli Ɨlišu ezziš lissima mƗssu ana til abnjbim litƝr “may Adad deprive him of the rain from heaven, destroy his land, may he thunder angrily over his city and turn his land into a ruin from the Deluge” (l:64-80); Zababa … kakkašu lišbir njmam ana mnjšim litƝršumma nakiršu elišu lišziz “may Zababa shatter his weapon, turn his day into night and place his enemy above him” (l:81-91); Ištar … šarrussu lƯrur damqƗtišu ana lemnƝtim litƝr … kakkašu lišbir išƯtam sa¨maštam liškunšum “may Ishtar curse his kingship, turn his blessings into troubles, shatter his weapon, set up a revolt and an insurrection for him” (l:92-li:7); Nergal … nišƯšu liqmi … lišammƯšuma biniƗtišu … li¨buš “may Nergal burn up his people, beat him and crush his limbs” (li:2439); Ninkarrak … mar‰am kabtam … ina biniƗtišu lišƗ‰iaššumma … ana emlnjtišu liddammam “may Ninkarrak cause a serious disease in his limbs to get out at him and may he wail for his masculinity” (li:50-69); Anum rabûm … melimmƯ šarrnjtim lƯmeršu ¨ammašu lišbir šƯmƗtišu lƯrur “may almighty Anu remove the splendour of sovereignty from him, smash his staff of authority, and curse his destiny” (xlix:45-52); awatum maruštum ša ¼amaš ar¨iš likšussu eliš ina balmnjtim lissu¨šu, šapliš ina er‰etim ememmašu mê liša‰mi “may the bitter word of Shamash very quickly overpower him, cut him right of from life here above, make his spirit thirst for water in the netherworld below” (l:31-40); errƝtim anniƗtim Ellil … lƯruršuma ar¨iš likšudƗšu “with these curses Ellil will surely curse him and they will quickly overpower him” (li:84-91).209 A string of precatives may include a negative expression. Sometimes the prohibitive particle lƗ is used,210 but more often the vetitive particle ay: mƯšarƯ ina mƗtim lištƝpi…u‰urƗtnja mušassikam ay iršia…šumƯ ina damiqtim ana dƗr lizzakir “my justice shall shine in the land, there shall be no-one intent on removing my inscription, my name shall be uttered as a blessing for evermore” (xlvii:87-xlviii:2); šarrum … 209

The reading of the stele, DA-ni-a-tim, is meaningless, and is generally emended to a2-ni-a-tim. For errƝtim and lƯruršuma ms. e: errƝtum and lƯrurušuma. 210 GrAkk. §16.3(a).

208

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

awât mƯšarim … li‰‰ur dƯn mƗtim … ay unakkir u‰urƗtiya ay ušassik “the king should pay heed to the statement of justice; he should not change the law of the land, he should not remove my inscription” (xlviii:62-74); uznam u nƝmeqam lƯmeršuma ina mƯšƯtim littarrušu nƗrƗtišu ina nagbim liskir ina er‰etišu ašnan napišti nišƯ ay ušabši “may he deprive him of wisdom and understanding and turn him into someone confused; may he stop up his rivers at the source, let there be no grain in his land to feed the people” (l:2-13); ¼amaš … šarrnjssu liskip, dƯnšu ay idƯn uru¨šu lƯši, išdƯ ummƗnišu liš¨el‰i ina bƯrišu šƯram lemnam … liškunšum “may Shamash overthrow his kingdom, not judge his complaint, confuse his course of action, cause the foundations of his army to crumble, make an inauspicious omen occur in his divination” (l:14-30); Ištar … qarrƗdišu lišamqit, damƯšunu er‰etam lišqi gurun šalmƗt ummƗnƗtišu ina ‰Ɲrim littadi ummƗnšuma rƝmam ay ušarši šuƗti ana qƗt nakrƯšu limallƯšuma “may Ishtar make his heroes collapse, spill their blood on the earth, keep on throwing down a pile of bodies of his soldiers in the battlefield, have no mercy on that army of his, let her hand over the man himself into the hand of his enemies” (l:92 and li:8-21); Nintu … aplam lƯmeršuma šumam ay ušaršƯšu ina qerbƯt nišƯšu zƝr awƯlnjtim ay ibni “may Nintu remove any heir for him and let him not establish a name. In no way will he build up human descendants among his people” (li:40-49). Examples of precatives addressed to human subjects include: liqbƯma, likrubam “let him speak, let him bless” (xlviii:40; 47); lillikma … lištassƯma … lišmƝma … likallimšu … lƯmur … libbašu linappišma “he should come, he should read out, he should listen; may it show him, may he understand, may he ease his heart” (xlviii:8; 11; 14; 16; 17; 18-19); ana awƗtim … liqnjlma … purussƝ mƗtim ša aprusu narûm šû likallimšuma ‰almƗt qaqqadišu lištƝšer, dƯnšina lidƯn purussƗšina liprus ina mƗtišu raggam u ‰Ɲnam lissu¨ šƯr nišƯšu limƯb “may he heed the words, and this stele will certainly make clear to him the decisions for the land which I have taken, and he will certainly be able to direct the people properly, judge their cases, take decisions for them, root out evil and wickedness from his land; may he improve the welfare of his people” (xlviii:78-94). Asseverative Sometimes the particle lu seems to impart an asseverative nuance,211 but it is the context that decides whether a precative or an asseverative 211

GrAkk. §16.2.

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

209

nuance is more applicable, and one interpretation does not necessarily exclude the other: šumma awƯlum šû ana awâtiya … iqnjlma … ¼amaš ¨ammašu lirrik nišƯšu ina mƯšarim lirƝ “if that man heeds my words let Shamash (or Shamash will certainly) lengthen the staff of his authority, and let him (or he will certainly) feed his flock in pastures of righteousness” (xlix:2-17). Once in the Laws lu occurs with a 1st sg. verb form, and a degree of emphasis is certainly not out of place there: u bƝl ¨ulqim šƯbƯ mudƝ ¨ulqiyami lublam iqtabi “and then the owner of the lost property has said, ‘But I will bring along witnesses who know the lost property is mine’”(L9). From the examples cited above it can be seen that the precative form occurs in all four primary themes. But in CH it does not seem to be attested with a perfect verb; it is attested with some infixed –t– forms of verbs, but they are best explained as secondary themes: lištƝpi “may it be promulgated” (xlvii:88); cf. CAD apû s.v. 7 (¼t), šutƗpû; lištƝšer “may he do justice” (xlviii:87); cf. CAD ešƝru s.v. 12c (¼t), šutƝšuru. The precative is also attested with tertiary themes with infixed –tan–:212 lištassƯma “let him have read” (xlviii:11); cf. CAD šasû s.v. 10b (¼tn), šitassû; littarrûšu “may he take him away” (l:6); cf. CAD (A/2: 315a) s.v. arû A, 2b, itarrû “to guide”);213 littaddi “let her throw down” (li:16); cf. CAD (N/1 73b) s.v. nadû 1.3’ “may she scatter”; liddammam “may he moan” (li:69); cf. CAD damƗmu 1a. Imperative214 The imperative is attested in only one passage on the stele itself, and in a second passage it can be restored from parallel manuscripts. Together these instances show the masc. sg. imperative forms for four verbs: epƝšu “to work”; erƝšu “to cultivate”; esƝpu “to harvest”; dunnunu (danƗnu D-theme) “to strengthen”. The two passages are: eqlam erišma šeam … esip tabal “cultivate the field and gather the grain; take (it) away” (L49); nabalkattaka dunnin … nidƯtka epuš “strengthen your wall … work on your neglected land” (L68+b).

212

CAD places the verbs lištassƯma and littarrûšu in discrete paragraphs assigned to Gtn forms; the verbs littaddi and liddammam, both with infixed –tan–, are treated together with forms without the infix. 213 In CAD, this passage is translated “may they take him away (into captivity) unnoticed”; Roth prefers to take the verb as sg. 214 GrAkk. §16.1.

210

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

OBJECT PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES Pronominal suffixes may be attached to verbal forms to express the object of that verb.215 There are two series of suffixes, one to indicate a direct object (corresponding to a noun in the accusative and conveniently described as an acc. suffix) and another to indicate an indirect object (corresponding to a noun with a preposition and conveniently described as an indirect suffix). When translating into English it may be necessary to translate an acc. suffix as indirect, and vice-versa: ima¨¨aršu “he shall receive from him”. In CH the most frequently occurring verbal suffixes are for the 3rd person masc. acc.: sg. –šu; pl. –šunu. There are no examples of any 2nd person suffix, or of the 1st pl. suffix. The indirect suffixes for the 1st sg. (–am and –nim) are identical in form to the ventive marker; and the final –m characteristic of all the other indirect suffixes may also be interpreted as linked to the ventive marker. It is not always certain whether a 1st person suffix is intended to be acc. or indirect. Certain verbs always take the acc. suffix: idukknjšu “they shall kill him”. Others take an indirect suffix: inaddiššum “he shall give to him”. There are also verbs that take both: ukannnjšuma “they shall convict him” (L113); ukinnnjšum “they established for him” (i:26). Verbs occurring in CH taking direct pronominal suffixes include: a¨Ɨzu, arû, dâku, ezƝbu, ¨alƗlu, kassu, kubbulu, ma¨Ɨru, nabû, nadû, qalû, redû, šuršû, šnjrubu, šnjturu, tarƗku, ubburu. Verbs preferring indirect pronominal suffixes include: alƗdu, bƗšû, nadƗnu, palƗšu, qabû, riƗbu, šakƗnu, šâmu, šarƗku, šatƗru, šeu, šullumu, šuppu¨u, šnj‰û, šutlimu, turru. Those attested with both direct and indirect suffixes include: kunnu, pamƗru. The acc. suffix for the 1st sg. is -anni (< –am (ventive) + –ni) or –ninni (< –nim (ventive) + –ni): ta¨¨azanni “you shall take me” (L142); ibbûninnima “they have nominated me” (xlvii:41). The indirect suffix for the 1st sg. is indistinguishable from the ventive suffix: –am, or after a verbal form with a vocalic ending (such as –nj for the 3rd pl.) –nim: išƯmam (vnt. išƯma) “he assigned to me” (xlvii:27); iddinam “he gave to me” (xlvii:29; vnt. išrukam “he presented to me”); ušatlimnjnim “they bestowed on me” (xlvii:25); ipallašnjnim “they will break into my property (lit. ‘into me’)” (L68+b). For the 3rd person, the sg. acc. suffixes are –šu (masc.) and –ši (fem.): ubbiršima “he accused her” (L131); ušerrebši “he shall let her 215

GrAkk. §18.2.

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

211

enter” (L145); littarrušu “may he lead him away” (l:6); ušƗternjšu “they have caused him to be great” (i:19); izzibši “he shall leave her” (138); idukknjšu “they shall kill him” (§5.3a; cf. idukknjšuma L21); i¨allalnjšu “they shall hang him” (L21); ukabbilšima “he overpowered her” (L130); ukannnjšuma “they shall convict him” (L113); ukannnjšima “they shall convict her” (L108; 133b; 141); inaddiši “he shall throw her” (L146; pl. inaddûši, L108; 133b; 143); ipammarišu “it (the temple) shall ransom him” (L32; vnt. ms. r, ms. J: ipammaršum “it shall pay the ransom for him” (+ indirect suffix); BAL emends ipammaršu without helping vowel); iqallûši “they shall burn her” (L110); ireddƯšu “he shall drive him” (L18); ima¨¨aršu “he shall receive from him” (L266); ušaršûšu “she caused him to possess” (L137, subjunctive). The direct suffix attested for the 3rd pl. masc. is –šunnjti: ikassûšunnjtima “they shall tie them up” (L129); inaddûšunnjti “they shall throw them” (L129). The corresponding indirect suffixes for the 3rd sg. are: –šum (masc.) and –šim (fem.): uldušum “she bore for him” (L119; 137); ibaššƯšum “there is for him” (L66); ukinnnjšum “they established for him” (i:26; vnt. ms. B: ukinnnjšu); iddinušum “he who gave it to him” (L9; 10; 107; 107); inaddiššum “he shall give it to him” (L17; 67+a); inaddiššim “he will give to her” (L138; 139); inaddinnjšimma “they shall give to her” (L137); innadnušum “that which was given to him” (L62); iqbƯšum “he said to him” (L49; 66); iriabbnjšum “they shall repay to him” (L23); išƯmnjšum “they determined for him” (i:13); lišƯmšum “may he set for him” (xlix:72; l:63); liškunšum “may he establish for him” (l:30; li:7); išakkannjšumma “he shall set for him” (L13); išakkanšimma “she shall place on her” (L146); ušallamšimma “he shall pay back to her” (L138; 149); lišappi¨aššum “may he arouse for him” (xlix:63); išrukušum “he who has entrusted to him” (xlviii:98); išmuršum “he wrote it for him” (§5.3a); utarrnjšumma “they shall restore to him” (L27; cf. §5.8, scribal lapse); utarrnjšim “they shall restore to her” (L137); litƝršumma “may he change for him” (l:89). Another indirect suffix attested for the 3rd pl. fem. is –šinƗšim: nnjram ušƝ‰išinƗšim “I have brought out for them” (xlviii:21); ešteƯšinƗšim “I have searched out for them” (xlvii:18); a vnt. is attested for the latter verb ešteƯšinƗšinim (ms. e), a scribal lapse, attempting to include the longer ventive element –nim.

212

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

VENTIVE FORMS216 The verbal suffixes –am (or –a)217 and -nim (with 3rd pl. verbs) are usually to be interpreted as ventive forms, which primarily add to the meaning of the verb a nuance of motion. These are the same suffixes which may also indicate that the verbal form includes a 1st person pronominal suffix. The citations of those forms which suggest the idea of a pronominal suffix have been given above; those suggesting a ventive nuance are given here, but some citations could have been included under either heading. The ventive marker precedes any conjunctive –ma, which results in gemination of the phoneme m: itnjramma “he returned”. It also precedes any pronominal suffix, and in such forms the m is assimilated to a suffix beginning with a consonant: uštƝlliašši < *uštƝlliamši “he has raised it” (*mš > šš). Ventive forms in –am are often associated with verbs of motion: lublam “let me bring”. With other verbs a supplementary idea of motion is conveyed by the ventive marker; or in more general terms, the ventive marker suggests that the action is directed towards the subject: tamkƗrum ipmuraššuma Ɨlšu uštakšidaššu “a merchant brought a ransom for him and enabled him to reach his city” (L32). The ventive suffix –am can be seen in the following verbs of motion: lublam “let me bring” (L9; cf. ublam “she brought”, L138; 149; 156); ittalkamma “he has travelled” (L280; see further below); iktašdam “he has reached” (L135); irdeam “he (or she) followed” (L13; 109); uštƝlliašši “he has raised it” (L238); itbalam “he brought” (L10+; 11; 169); itnjramma “he returned” (L30; cf. ittnjram L31). The suffix –am is also found with other verbs: likrubam “let him bless” (i.e. “let him come and bless me”, xlviii:47); iddinam “he has given” (i.e. “he has given to me”, L9; xlvii:14); ipmuraššuma “he ransomed him” (L32); i‰‰abtamma “she has caught” (L109); išrukam “he has entrusted” (i.e. “he has entrusted to me”, xlvii:12); lišappi¨aššum218 “let him come and incite rebellion for him” (xlix:63); itarrakaššu “he has been beating him” (§5.8); utebbibaššuma “it has cleansed him” (L2). 216

GrAkk. §15.2. Cf. GrAkk. §24.4. 218 BAL: transcription uncertain; CAD: lišappi¨aššum, s.v. šuppu¨u “to incite rebellion” (tƝšû), but it occurs only once; cf. AHw: šapƗ¨u, with one other occurrence in D-theme. This is a clear example of a verbal suffix indicating the indirect object with a ventive form. 217

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

213

The ventive suffix –a can be seen in the following verbal forms:219 u¨tapda “he has damaged” (L220);220 iktalƗšu “he restrained him” (L19); likšudašu “may he overpower him” (li:91, or likšudaššu); la imlƗma “it is not completed” (L278); ay iršia “may he not remove it” (xlvii:92); urabba “she shall look after” (L60; 137); urabbƗšu “she shall look after him” (L29); ušamma “she disparages” (L143); ušammƗši “he disparages her” (L142); uštašannƗma “he shall then double” (L124; 160; 161); itammƗma “he shall declare” (L207). It may also occur in the expression rubûm rabium ša šƯmƗtušu ina ma¨ra illaka “the great prince, whose decisions go to the front” (xlix:98-100). The ventive suffix –nim is attested with the following plural verbal forms: ibbalakkatnjnim “they will climb over here” (L68+b). Ventive Forms in Subordinate Clauses The ventive marker for a verb in a subordinate clause masks the –u, the expected marker of the subjunctive: ša Id išliam “the one who immersed himself in the River” (L2); šeriktam ša ištu bƯt abiša ublam “the dowry which she brought from her father’s house” (L138; cf. L149); mimma ša ištu bƯt abiša ublam “all she brought from her father’s house” (L156); innjma ina libbnj mƗtim ittalkamma “when he is travelling within the land” (L280); Verbs with Ventive and Non-ventive Forms Some verbs are attested with and without a ventive marker: u‰iam “he came out” (L4) and u‰iamma (L3), but u‰‰i (L172); uštƝ‰iam “he has brought out” (L16), but ušte‰i (L15); išrukam “he presented to me” (xlvii:12), but išruk (L165; 184).

STATIVE FORMS A noun or adjective used predicatively may be inflected as if it were a verb, a form traditionally known as the stative.221 In the masc. sg. the form is the same as the absolute state of the noun or adjective, and the 219

GrAkk. §24.4. Because the cuneiform script does not always clearly indicate a geminated consonant, it is not always certain when there is a question of assimilation whether the suffix is –a or –am. 220 The expression Ưnšu u¨-tap-da “he has destroyed his sight” (L220), which is the reading of the stele, is emended to Ưnšu u¨-tap-pi-id by Roth, following BAL. 221 GrAkk. §22.1: “the predicative construction”.

214

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

suffixes marking fem. and pl. predicates are similar to the suffixes of the perfect tense of other Semitic languages: masc. sg ø; fem. sg. –at; fem. pl. –Ɨ; masc. pl. –nj. A stative form in a subordinate clause may also be inflected with the subjunctive marker –u. The following forms of the stative are attested in CH:222 root -l-d -‰- -š-b b-l-m ¨-l-q k-b-t m-¨-r n-b- n-d- n-s-q n-‰-r n-š- q-b- q-r-b r-b- r-q- s-r-r ‰-b-t ‰-¨-r š-b-l š-p- š-r-š -‰- t-r-‰ t--r m--b m-b-

masc. sg.

subjv.

wa‰i wašib ¨aliq

¨alqu

ma¨ir

ma¨ru

fem sg. waldat wa‰iat wašbat balmat

other

kabtat nabiat nadû nasqƗ (fem. pl.) na‰rat nƗšû qabû qerbu rabû rƝqƗ (fem. pl.) sar ‰abtu ‰e¨er šnjbulu šupât šuršudu šnj‰â (fem. pl.) tari‰ mƗb

turru mƗbu

mƗbƗ (fem. pl.) mebiat

A stative expression may occur in parallel with an adjectival one: awƯlum ša mimmûšu ¨alqu mimmƗšu ¨alqam ina qƗti awƯlim i‰‰abat “a man whose property has been lost has seized his lost property in the possession of a man” (L9). The stative form is also found in equivalence statements, where the subject is identified with the predicate; alternatively in such examples the 222

Conjunctive –ma has been ignored in this table.

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

215

stative form may be explained as a noun inflected as an absolute: awƯlum šû sar “that man is a thief” (L13); mimmûšu la ¨aliqma mimmê ¨aliq iqtabi “something of his was not lost but he has said, ‘Something of mine was lost’” (L126; 126); awƯlum ina ¨arrƗnim wašibma “the man is occupied with a mission” (L112; vnt. ms. P: ašibma; ms. t: ašimma). Such statements are often made in parallel to a clause with išu: awƗtnja nasqƗ lƝûti šƗninam ul išû “my words are precious, my accomplishments are unrivalled” (xlvii:81-83); Ñammurabi … anƗku, awƗtnja nasqƗ, epšƝtnja šƗninam ul išâ, ela ana la ¨assim rƝqƗ, ana emqim ana tanƗdƗtim šnj‰â “I am Hammurabi, my words are precious, my deeds have no rival, only to one who is without sense are they futile, to the one who is wise they are evoked with praise” (xlviii:95-xlix:1). When a stative expression is closely followed by an indicative verb it is sometimes linked with –ma, and at other times it is linked asyndetically; it can be interpreted as parenthetic: la na‰ratma wa‰iat bƯssa usappa¨ mussa ušamma “not exercising care when going out, she dissipates her household and belittles her husband” (L143);223 mƗrušu ‰e¨erma ilik abišu alƗkam la ilei “her son is small and he is not capable of performing his father’s duty” (L29). Transitive Verbs in the Stative A transitive verb inflected as stative usually has passive meaning: ‰illƯ mƗbum ana Ɨliya tari‰ “my beneficial shade is spread over the city” (xlvii:48); [rƝum] ša liƗtum ulu ‰Ɲnum ana reim innadnušum idƯšu gamrƗtim ma¨ir libbašu mƗb liƗtim u‰‰a¨¨ir ‰Ɲnam u‰‰a¨¨ir “a shepherd, to whom has been given cattle or sheep for grazing, with all his wages received and his heart satisfied, has lessened the cattle, has lessened the sheep” (L264). But it is not always possible to interpret transitive roots in the stative form as passive, since the stative verbs may have a direct object: nukaribbum adi kirâm ‰abtu ina bilat kirîm šittƯn ana bƝl kirîm inaddin “the gardener shall give the owner of the orchard two-thirds as rent for the orchard for as long as he is in possession of the orchard” (L64); ana 223

Here the stative form naÑratma, from the transitive verb naÑƗru “to keep”, is not passive; it is obviously intransitive, but is more likely to mean “to be circumspect” (cf. CAD s.v. naÑƗru 6b; the stative forms are not translated in CAD s.v. sapa¨u D 6) rather than “to keep oneself chaste” (cf. Driver and Miles 1952, ad loc.). The expression pagaršu naÑƗru is perhaps to be interpreted as reflexive (Finet in Beek et al. 1973, 137-43).

216

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

a¨išunu ‰e¨rim ša aššatam la a¨zu “for their small brother who is not in possession of a wife” (L166). Stative Forms in a Subordinate Clause Stative forms in subordinate expressions are marked with –u. Clauses with stative forms introduced with the relative particle ša include: ana aplišu ša Ưnšu ma¨ru “to his heir who is accepted in his sight” (L165); rƝdûm … ša ina dannat šarrim turru “a soldier who is kept back in a royal camp” (L28; 27, ms. r: turruma); rƝdûm … ša ina ¨arrƗn šarrim turru “a soldier who is kept back on a royal mission” (L32); rƝdûm … ša ana ¨arrƗn šarrim alƗkšu qabû “a soldier who is asked to go on a royal mission” (L26; vnt. ms. r: qabûma); mimma ša ina eleppišu ¨alqu “whatever was lost from the boat” (L240); mimma ša nƗšû uštaddƯšu “he made him drop whatever was being carried” (L103); mimma ša šnjbulu “whatever was to be transported” (L112; vnt. ms. P: mimma ša šnjbula, apparently with ventive inflection; ms. S: mimma šnjbulu, with ša implicit; also mimma ša šnjbuluma L112); awƯlum ša mimmûšu ¨alqu “the man whose property was lost” (L9); awƯlum ša ¨ulqum ina qƗtišu ‰abtu “the man in whose possession the lost property was found” (L9); ana errƝšim ša eliša mƗbu “to the cultivator who is acceptable to her” (L178); lƝt awƯlim ša elišu rabû “the cheek of a man who is greater than him” (L202); šarrum ša in šarrƯ šnjturu anƗku “I am the king who is outstanding among kings” (xlvii:79-80); balƗmam ša itti mnjtim šitannu “a life that is vying with death” (l:59-63). The nominalised relative pronoun ša, may also introduce stative forms marked as subjunctives: ša elišu kišpnj nadû “the one who was being accused of sorcery” (L2). The particles Ɲma and kƯma also introduce clauses with statives in the subjunctive: Ɲma eliša mƗbu “according to what is acceptable to her” (L178; cf 179+; 182); kƯma mimmûšu la ¨alqu babtašu … ubâršuma “his community shall charge him that hir property was not lost” (L126); similarly (but restored) in an expression of time introduced with adi: [adi mussa ‰abtu] “while her husband was in captivity” [133a].224 ašar also occurs as a subordinating particle with a stative verb: mimma ša šnjbulu ašar šnjbulu la iddinma “he did not deliver whatever had to be transported at the place to which it had to be transported” (L112); the phrase ašar šnjbulu could also be explained as a noun in the construct before a verbal form instead of a fuller construction like ašram ša šnjbulu. 224

Restored thus in BAL but not in Roth.

DETAILED NOTES: VERBS

217

When the subject of the stative is different from that of the main verb, but reference is made to the main subject by a resumptive suffix, the stative expression functions as a relative clause with the relative particle ša implicit. Perhaps it is because no relative particle is actually expressed that the expected subjunctive marker is omitted: awƯlum mimmûšu la ¨aliqma mimmê ¨aliq iqtabi “a man whose property is not lost has said, ‘My property is lost’” (L126). In another passage the subjunctive marker may have been masked by the –nj marking the plural: awƯlum šû šƯbnjšu la qerbnj “that man whose witnesses are not available” (L13). Feminine Stative Forms in a Subordinate Clause Feminine sg. and fem. pl. stative forms occurring in a subordinate expression are not inflected with –u. Forms in the fem. sg. include: Sîn … ša têressu ina ilƯ šupât “Sin … whose oracular decision is shining among the gods” (l:41-44); awƯlnjtum ša šumam nabiat “some person who has been given a name” (xlix:43-44); Ninlil … ša qibƯssa ina Ekur kabtat “Ninlil … whose word is honoured in Ekur” (xlix:81-84); bƝl eleppim ša eleppašu mebiat “the owner of the boat whose boat was sunk” (L240); ugbabtum ša ina gagîm la wašbat “a priestess who is not resident in the cloister” (L110); aššat awƯlim ša ina bƯt awƯlim wašbat “the wife of a man who is not resident in the man’s house” (L141); sinništum ša ina bƯt awƯlim wašbat “a woman who is resident in a man’s house” (L151); ina snjn rabƯtišu ša mƗrƯ waldat “in the bosom of his principal wife who has born sons” (L158); adi balmat “as long as she lives” (L148; 171b; 178; 180; 181); awƯlum aššat awƯlim ša zikaram la idûma ina bƯt abiša wašbat ukabbilšima “a man raped a man’s wife who was living in her father’s house (and) who had known no male” (L130).225 Feminine pl. forms include: rƝî nišƯ ša epšƝtušu eli Ištar mƗbƗ “the shepherd of the people whose deeds are acceptable to Ishtar” (iv:45-47); bƯtim ša kƯma šamê u er‰etim išdƗšu kƯnƗ “a house whose foundations are as secure as heaven and earth” (xlvii:68-69); BƗbilam … ša kƯma šamê u er‰etim išdƗša šuršudƗ “Babylon … whose foundations are as firm as heaven and earth” (i:16-25).

225

The translation assumes that the force of the subordinating particle ša is sustained for two clauses: ša zikaram la idûma and ina bƯt abiša wašbat.

218

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Statives Marked as Ventive Stative forms in subordinate expressions are not usually inflected as ventive. However, šnjbulu “it was transported” is written šubnjla in a variant ms., although the reading is uncertain: mimma ša šnjbula ašar šubula “something which was transported whither it was transported” (L112 ms. P). Similarly, for the words warka and qabla in the expressions alpim ša warka “the ox coming at the rear” and alpim ša qabla “the ox coming at the front” (L242/3) a ventive inflection is not inappropriate, though these words could also perhaps be interpreted as archaic, as fossilised adverbial formations.

NON-DECLINING WORDS There are a number of words in Akkadian, as in the other Semitic languages, which are not inflected either as nouns or as verbs. The form of some of them never changes: adi; ana; ina. But others do change, such as prepositions, which may accept pronominal suffixes: eli awilim “against the man”; elišu “against him”. Most are lexemes in their own right and are treated as free morphemes, but lu may be bound as a prefix to a verb, and the enclitic –ma occurs only as a bound morpheme.226 The meaning and grammatical classification of non-declining words, more than any other class of word, is hard to define intrinsically, and is determined by its context in a sentence. Some words that from a strictly formal perspective would be described as non-declining have for convenience been treated earlier. The personal pronouns were linked with nouns, for they both have the same function in a sentence. They mutate according to whether they are construed as nom., acc. or gen. in a different way from the mutations of the noun.227 The relative particle and relative pronoun ša has also been discussed previously, in connection with its influence on the inflection of a noun (genitive) and a verb (subjunctive). All these words may be described as “non-declining”.228 226

The enclitic -ma is cited in AHw but not in CAD, perhaps because it never occurs as a free morpheme; in CAD, lu is cited both as a free and as a bound morpheme. 227 The dictionaries list the different forms of a given personal pronoun as separate lemmata. 228 The term is adapted from the CAD siglum “indecl.”, used, for example, to define šumma.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

219

There follows a list of non-declining words with a description of their grammatical functions. adi (subordinating conjunction; preposition)229 As a subordinating conjunction adi has temporal significance. Once it is followed by a durative marked as subjunctive: adi napištašu ibellû “until his life expires” (li:66-67). It occurs in an embedded clause before a 3rd sg. masc. verb in the stative, which is marked as subjunctive with –u: nukaribbum adi kirâm ‰abtu … inaddin “the gardener shall pay … as long as the orchard is occupied” (L64). It occurs also in a recurring phrase adi balmat “as long she is alive” (L148; 171b; 178; 180; 181), where the verb is a 3rd sg. fem. stative, a form in which the subjunctive marker –u is masked by the feminine marker –at. As a preposition in CH it has temporal significance,230 meaning “until”, in contrast to ištu meaning “from”: ištu rƝš šattim adi ¨amšim war¨im “from the beginning of the year until the fifth month”; ištu šeššim war¨im adi taqtƯt šattim “from the sixth month until the end of the year” (L273+). It also occurs before numerical expressions (a number with a pronominal suffix) stipulating the amount of a payment when compensation is to be made in proportion to the amount of the initial outlay: adi 12-šu inaddin “he shall give twelve times as much” (L5; see also L8+; 12; 107; 112; 106; 265). adi B (preposition; see CAD A/1: 121b-25a) see below, qadum. ana (preposition) ana occurs so frequently and in so many different contexts that the meaning of the word itself is often hard to identify. Only specimen citations will be presented here. Sometimes another preposition is substituted for ana in a parallel or a variant text. Most frequently it can be be translated with local significance as “to”, for it regularly indicates direction with a verb of motion: alƗku “to go” (L2; 12; 26; 142; 162; 163; 165; 166; 167+; 170; 171a; 176a; 178; 179; 180; 181; 182; 183; 184; 193); arû “to lead away” (li:22-23: lƯrûšu; 229

The two usages may be treated as distinct lexemes (e.g. CAD A/1 115: adi A, preposition; to be distinguished from CAD A/1 112ff: adi, conjunction. Alternatively, the single lemma adi may be considered to function both as a preposition and a subjunction (e.g. AHw. 12a-13a). 230 Elsewhere in Akkadian it may also have local significance.

220

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

but ina is used in l:5-6: littarrušu); a‰û “to come out” (i:41-42); erƝbu “to enter” (L110; 133a; 133b; 134; 135; 136; 151; 152; 176a; 177); ezƝbu “to leave” (L172); izuzzu “to stand” (ii:11-12); redû “to pursue” (L17; 18); nadû “to throw” (L58; 108); târu “to return” (L41; 67+a; 131; 135; 136; 177; 186; 189; 190). It has dative significance when introducing the indirect object of verbs of giving; most frequently the verb is nadƗnu to give, but it occurs also with other verbs such as mullû “to hand over”, and turru “to give back”: šuƗti ana qƗt nakrƯšu limallƯšuma “may he hand that man over into the power of his enemies” (li:19-21; vnt. adi in ms. e); eqlam šipram ippešma ana bƝl elim utâr “he shall do the work on the field and return it to the owner of the field” (L62; 63; cf. L102). When it indicates the person addressed with verbs of speaking, like qabû “to speak” (L68+b; 69+c; 159; 161; 168; 170; 171a; 192; 282), and zakƗru “to utter” (L20), it has similar dative significance. When it occurs before an infinitive it expresses the purpose of an action, and “for” is an appropriate translation: kaspam ana turrim la išu “he has no silver for repaying” (L51; §5.15); it occurs before several nouns with the meaning: wardam ulu amtam ana kiššƗtim ittandin “the slave or slave-girl has been given for bound-service” (L118); atappašu ana šiqƯtim ipte “he opened the channel for irrigation” (L55); ana šƯbnjt sarrƗtim nj‰iamma “he came out with lying evidence” (L3). Before nouns for persons it has the meaning “for the advantage of”: itinnum bƯtam ana awƯlim Ưpušma “the builder constructed a house for the man” (L228); muddiš Ebabbar ana ¼amaš rƝ‰išu “the one who made Ebabbar new for Shamash” (ii:34-36); ana mutiša Id išalli “she shall sink into the river for the sake of her husband” (L132). It occurs in several contexts (which could all be described as commercial in the widest sense of that term) where items are to be equated with one another; here again “for” (meaning “in return for”) is an appropriate translation: šuƗti u bƯšašu ana kaspim inaddinnjma “they shall sell that man and his property for silver” (L54); šeam u kaspam ana ¨ubullim iddinma innjma ana ¨ubullim iddinu “he gave barley and silver for the loan, and when he gave (it) for the loan” (§5.13); 10 šiqil kaspam ana ša libbiša išaqqal “he shall pay ten shekels of silver for the foetus” (L209). The item introduced by ana may precede the other item in the equation: ana 1 burum 10 kur šeam imaddad “for 1 bur he shall measure out 10 kur of barley” (L56). Some phrases with ana seem to add greater precision or emphasis to the action: ana šƝbultim ušƗbilšu “he made him transport (it) as a

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

221

consignment” (L112); ana šƯmtim lišƯmšum “let him ordain for him as a destiny” (xlix:71-72; l:62-63). The meaning of ana is often sustained from one word to another without repetition of the preposition: ana šugƯtim … u lu nadƯtim “to a priestess or a temple woman” (L137); ana mutiša warkîm u sinništim šuƗti “to her later husband and that woman” (L177); ana eqlišu kirîšu u bƯtišu “to his field, orchard or house” (L41). Sustaining and repetition may occur in the same passage: dannum enšam ana la ¨abƗlim eknjtam almattam šutƝšurim …dƯn mƗtim ana diƗnim purussê mƗtim ana parƗsim ¨ablim šutƝšurim “so that the strong should not exploit the weak, (to) treat the orphan and widow fairly, to judge the cases in the land, to take decisions for the land, (to) treat the oppressed fairly” (xlvii:59-73). It is not unusual to find ana representing two different meanings in the same clause: eqlam ana kirîm zaqƗpim ana nukaribbim iddin “he gave the field to a gardener for planting out an orchard” (L60); ana 1 burum 60 kur šeam ana bƝl eqlim imaddad “he shall measure out 60 kur of barley for 1 bur to the owner of the field” (L58; cf. L57; 228); ana awƯlim kaspam … ana ma‰‰arnjtim inaddin “he shall give silver to the man for safe-keeping” (L122; cf. L236); kirƗšu ana nukaribbim ana rukkubim iddin “he gave his orchard to the gardener to pollinate” (L64; cf. L104). ana occurs as an augmenting element in the phrase ana panƯ (cf. panu face)231 with local or temporal meaning: awƯlam ana panƯ eqlišu uzuzzim Ưgurma “he has hired the man to stand in front of his field” (L253);232 ana panƯšu aššassu ana bƯt šanîm Ưterubma “his wife has entered the house of another until his return” (L135).233 arka; warka; warkišu234 (subordinating conjunction; adverb) Some clauses introduced with warka are explicitly marked as subordinate with a subjunctive verb: warka abum ana šƯmtim ittalku “after the father has gone to destiny” (L165; 166; 170; 171a; 178; 179; 180; 181; 182; 183; 184; cf. warkƗnum abum ana šƯmtim ittalku, L167). In other 231

The preposition ina also occurs as an augmenting element with pƗnu. Here ana seems to have a dual function: 1. it augments panƯ; 2. it expresses purpose before uzzuzim, an infinitive. 233 ana occurs also as an augmenting element with ma¨ar. 234 Embodying the adverbial suffix –a; cf. arkû adj., “subsequent”; arkƯtu, noun, “the future”; see CAD arka, s.v. 1a: i.e. arka adv.; see also CAD arki, s.v. a (A/2 278a), i.e. arki conj. 232

222

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

clauses the verb is not explicitly marked as subjunctive; then it could be explained as an adverb: warka wardum ina qƗtišu itta‰bat “subsequently the slave has been found in his possession” (L19); warka eqlam Adad irta¨i‰ “subsequently Adad inundated the field” (L45); warka sinništum šî imtut “subsequently that woman died” (L173); warka mƗrƯ irtašƯma “subsequently he had children” (L191). It may be augmented with ina: ina warka mussa itturamma “afterwards her husband came back” (L135). The word warkišu in warkišu eqelšu kirƗšu u bƯssu i‰batma “he seized his field, orchard and house afterwards” (L30) may be interpreted as an adverb, though literally it could be explained as a preposition with a pronominal suffix with temporal significance, meaning “after him”. arkƗnum (subordinating conjunction; adverb); arkƗnumma235 Like warka, the conjunction warkƗnum has temporal significance. It may be considered as a synonym for warka, inasmuch as it occurs once in an expression which on every other occasion in CH has warka followed by a subjunctive: warkƗnum abum ana šƯmtim ittalku “after the father went to his fate” (L167).236 It may be explained as an adverb when it is followed by an indicative verb: warkƗnum amtum šî itti bƝltiša uštatam¨ir “later that slave-girl has shown rivalry with her mistress” (L146). The word may be augmented with the suffix –ma:237 warkƗnumma dƯnšu Ưtene “but later he changed his decision” (L5); warkƗnumma … ana šƯmtim ittalak “and afterwards…he went to his destiny” (L176a; cf. ms. V: warkƗnum). arki (preposition) Usually, arki has temporal significance, but the basic meaning “after” must sometimes be expanded in translation to “after the departure” or “after the death”: warkišu “after his departure” (L27; cf. L30; 136); warki abišu “after the death of his father” (L157; 158); warki mutiša “after the death of her husband” (L150); warkiša “after her death”

235

arkƗnum and arkƗnumma have the suffixes –Ɨnum and –Ɨnumma (cf. adj. arkû subsequent; noun arkƯtu “the future”; see CAD arkƗnu (A/2 273a), i.e. arkƗnu adv. 236 However, it has been suggested that the reading of the stele should here be emended to warka, 237 On the analogy of elƝnumma, the –ma is best interpreted as an emphasising morpheme.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

223

(L167). Once it has local significance: warki abišunu illaknj “they shall go behind their father” (L135). ašar (noun (bound form); subordinating conjunction (?); preposition) In CH the noun ašrum, “place”, refers to sacred locations: mutƝr Eridu ana ašrišu “converting Eridu into his sacred location” (i:64-65); ašrƯ šulmim ešteƯšinƗšim “I have searched for peaceful locations for them” (xlvii:17-18); ašar šipmim u purussêm ina ma¨ar Ellil “the place of judgment and decision in the presence of Enlil” (xlix:87). A clause introduced with ašar, the bound form of the noun, describes the location of an action; the verb is marked as subjunctive. It is followed by different verbs: ašar illiku “the place to which he went” (L100; 101; 102); ašar Ưrubu “the place into which she entered” (L173); ašar šnjbulu “the place to which it is to be transported” (L112); ašar iddinu “the place at which he gave” (L123; 125). Inasmuch as it introduces a subordinate clause, it could be described as a subordinating conjunction. But it is probably better explained as the antecedent to a relative clause in which the relative particle ša is not expressed but implied.238 The bound form also seems to function as a preposition.239 As such, it may be interpreted as having local or temporal significance: ašar tam¨Ɨrim kakkašu lišbir “may he break his weapon on the battlefield” (l:86-87, or, “during the battle”); ašar tƗ¨azim u qablim kakkašu lišbir “may he break his weapon at the (place of) conflict and strife” (li:2-4, or, “in the conflict and strife”). aššum (subordinating conjunction; preposition) A clause introduced with aššum describes the reason for an action and the verb is marked as subjunctive: aššum Ɨlšu izƝruma innabitu aššat munnabtim ana mutiša ul itâr “because he has despised his city and fled the wife of the fugitive shall not return to her husband” (L136); itti 238

The word is treated differently in CAD and AHw. Lemmata are found in CAD for ašar conj. and ašar prep., distinct from ašru A “place”. In AHw., these words are both listed under the main lemma ašru(m) III, Ort; 2. bound form as preposition; 3. as a subjunction before the subjunctive. 239 See AHw. 83b, s.v. ašru III B 2: “im St. c. als Prp.”. Alternatively, these instances may be interpreted as nouns “describing the activity typical of a locality”; see CAD: A/2 457a, s.v. ašru A (substantive), where a cross-reference is given to kakku and tam¨Ɨru.

224

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

bƝltiša uštatam¨ir aššum mƗrƯ uldu “she has taken over the position of her mistress because she bore sons” (L146). It sometimes introduces a clause which is embedded, separating the main verb and its subject: tamkƗrum aššum šamallâšu ikkiru … inaddin “the merchant, because he disputed with his agent, shall give …” (L107); other examples of aššum introducing an embedded subordinate clause are found in L47; 69+c (where the verb is restored). Similarly, a clause introduced by aššum may interrupt consecutive actions parenthetically: ukannnjšuma aššum balum abišu u ummišu ‰e¨ram šaniam irkusu tulƗša inakkisnj “they shall convict her and (because she made a second contract independently of the father and the mother) they shall cut off her breast” (L194); u aššum bƯt Ưpušu … imqutu ina makknjr ramanišu bƯt imqutu ippeš “and, because the house he constructed … collapsed, he shall reconstruct the house that collapsed from his own resources” (L232). A statement introduced with aššum may have its verb expressed as an infinitive rather than a subjunctive. Formally speaking, since the infinitive is inflected like a noun, the word could be described as a preposition, but it would be a preposition separated from its associated noun: aššum bƝl ¨ubullim ša mutiša la ‰abƗtiša mussa urtakkis “she has made her husband agree about no creditor of her husband seizing her” (L151). Such a statement may be embedded: mƗrnjša aššum ina bƯtim šnj‰îm usa¨¨amšnjši “her sons are pestering her making (her) leave from the house” (L172). It functions regularly as a preposition to express the cause of a situation: aššum zikarim šanîm ubƗnum eliša ittari‰ma “the finger has been pointed at her because of another man” (L132); aššum zikarim šanîm mussa ušdƯk “she let her husband be killed because of another man” (L153); aššum errƝšum!240 šinƗti šaniamma uštƗ¨iz “he has involved someone else because of these curses” (xlix:36-38). ay (negating particle); see also la and ul. The particle ay is almost always written with only the one sign {a}. It occurs in the Epilogue always before preterite verbs, and always expresses an unwanted consequence: ay iršia “may he not come into possession” (xlvii:92); ay unakkir “may he not alter” (xlviii:72); ay ušassik “may he not have it removed” (xlviii:74); ay ušabši “may there

240

For er-re-šum read er-re-tim, partly corroborated by mss. c and o.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

225

not exist” (l:13); ay idƯn “may he not judge” (l:22); šumam ay ušaršƯšu “may he not provide him with a name” (li:46); ay ibni “may he not build” (li:49). On one occasion it is written on the stele with the two signs {a-i}: rƝmam ay ušarši “may he not show mercy” (li:18); but it is written simply with {a} in ms. e. balum (preposition) To show that there was a factor which was not involved in the action of the main verb, balum is used: balum kaspimma andurƗršunu iššakkan “their emancipation shall be arranged without any silver” (L7; 123); balum bƝl wardim abbutti wardim la šêm ugallib “he shaved the tonsure of a slave that was not his own without involving the owner of the slave” (L226); balum dayyƗnƯ ul irrub “she shall not enter without involving the judges” (L177). The meaning of the preposition may be sustained before a subsequent noun: balum šƯbƯ u riksƗtim ištƗm “he has made the purchase without involving witnesses or contracts” (L7; cf. L123); aššum balum abišu u ummišu ‰e¨ram šaniam irkusu “because she made a contract for another child without involving his father or his mother” (L194). It may be compounded with ina: ina balum bƝl šeim … šeam ilteqe “he has taken barley without involving the owner of the barley” (L113+). But apparently there is no change in meaning, for both balum and ina balum occur in the same Law in the same context: rƝûm … balum bƝl eqlim eqlam ‰Ɲnam uštƗkil … rƝûm ša ina balum bƝl eqlim eqlam ‰Ɲnam ušƗkilu “the shepherd allowed the flock to feed on the field without the owner of the field knowing … the shepherd who allowed the flock to feed on the field without the owner of the field knowing” (L57). elƝnumma (adverb) This augmented form of the adverb elƝnu (see CAD, E, 84ff.), which is well attested elsewhere in Akkadian,241 occurs twice in CH. It functions once as the second element in a main clause (it is the first element after an embedded relative clause): rƝûm ša … ‰Ɲnam ušƗkilu elƝnumma … ana bƝl eqlim inaddin “the shepherd who let the flock feed … shall in addition give … to the owner of the field” (L57). It is also attested as introducing the concluding clause of an apodosis: qƯšti abum iddinušum ileqqƝma elƝnumma ina makkur bƯt abim mit¨Ɨriš izuzznj “he shall keep

241

This adverb exhibits a suffix –Ɲnum, being derived from an adjective (cf. CAD: elû A “high”; elû B “upper”) augmented with –ma.

226

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

the gift his father gave him and in addition they shall make equal shares of the property from the father’s house” (L165).242 eli (preposition) Sometimes eli is inflected with a pronominal suffix, which in CH is most frequently a 3rd person form: elišu; eliša; elišunu. The meaning of the preposition is very variable, being suggested by the verb of the clause in which it occurs. Most frequently it has local force: eli ugbabtum … ubƗnam ušatri‰ma “he has pointed the finger towards the priestess” (L127; cf. L132); nakiršu elišu lišziz “may he make his enemy stand over him” (l:90-91). But with some verbs the idea of locality seems more figurative than literal, such as when it introduces an item of comparison: ša elišu rabû “who is greater than him” (L202). But several other figurative meanings occur: benni elišu imtaqut “epilepsy has overtaken him” (L278); nƝrtam elišu iddƯma “he accused him of killing” (L1; cf. L2++); eli Ɨlišu … lissƯma “may he shout against his city” (l:76-78); eli Ištar mƗba “pleasing to Ishtar” (iv:47; cf. 178+; 179+; 182); ¨ubullum elišu ibaššƯma “a debt exists on his account” (L48; cf. L151+; 152); eli awƯlim šeam … išnjma “he has a claim for barley against a man” (L113; 114; 115). Ɲma (subordinating conjuction) In its only occurrence in CH, Ɲma introduces an embedded clause; the verb of the clause is stative and is marked as subjunctive: warkassa Ɲma eliša mƗbu nadƗnam la išturšimma “he did not write down for her to give away her property wherever it seemed good to her” (L178).243 As such, its meaning and function is similar to the subordinating conjunction kƯma. 242

The verb of this clause is inflected with –nj (3rd pl.), which masks any possible subjunctive marker –u. Since it is not possible to explain with certainty the verb as a subjunctive, it is unsafe to interpret introductory elƝnumma here as a subordinating conjunction. The interpretation of the verb as a plural is generally agreed, except for the citation in CAD, s.v. elƝnu (adv.) 3a (p. 86a line 3) where the translation (“but he shares in addition”) suggests that it has been taken as a 3rd sg. subjunctive. This may be regarded as a mistake, since the verb is taken as pl. in volumes of CAD published both earlier and later than the Evolume; cf. CAD, Z, s.v. zâzu (verb) 3 (p. 81a, line -6); CAD, M/2, s.v. mit¨ariš (adv.) 1 (p. 132b, line 3). 243 CAD distinguishes between Ɲma as a conjunction and Ɲma as a preposition but does not quote this passage in either section. AHw. also distinguishes between the usage as a preposition and as a “Subjunction”; the citation from CH is to be found in the latter section.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

227

in; ina (preposition) in occurs less frequently than ina, but is identical in meaning. There are so many occurrences of ina that only a selection of typical examples need be cited here. It occurs as a simple preposition, and also as the initial augmenting element in some compound prepositions, the second element of which can be explained as a noun (usually in the bound form) or as an adverb: ina balum; ina libbi; ina ma¨ar; ina pani; ina qƗti; ina qerbit; perhaps also ina la; ina warka. Before nouns which clearly specify time, such as umu “day”, war¨u “month” and šattu “year” ina has temporal significance. Other nouns may assume a temporal nuance when used with ina: ebnjru “harvest time”; bulmu “lifetime”; dƯnu “trial”; ¨arrƗnu “journey”. It is usually to be translated “during”. Before an infinitive it denotes an activity concomitant with the main verb: nukaribbum eqlam ina zaqƗpim la igmurma nidƯtam Ưzib “he did not complete the field during the planting” (L61); ina ma¨Ɨ‰im ulu ina uššušim imtnjt “it has died by beating or by maltreatment” (L116); ina ma¨Ɨ‰im uštamƯt “he let it die by beating” (L245). It may also have local significance, indicating the place where an event happens. In this meaning it occurs most frequently before place names: e.g. qurƗdim ina Karkara “the fighter in Karkara” (iii:60-61);244 also before several common nouns such as bƯtu “house” and eqlu “field”; the expression ina qƗti “in the possession of” (cf. qƗtu “hand”) could be described as a compound preposition (see above). It also occurs before other nouns: abullu “gateway”; bƗbu “doorway”; bƗbtu “community”; binâtu “limbs”; er‰etu “land”; gagû “cloister”; kƗru “quay”; kirû “orchard”;245 mƗtu “land”; nagbu “spring”; qarƯtu “granary”; snjnu “lap”; ‰Ɲru “open country”; šamû “sky”; šubtu “dwelling”; tarba‰u “pen”.246 With gašišu “stake”, muppu “writing tablet” and narû “stele”, it is best translated “on”. With some verbs of motion it is necessary to translate the preposition as “from”: ištu ‰Ɲnum ina ugƗrim ƯteliƗnim “after the flock has come 244

BAL transliterates i-na, but Roth prefers to read in. In suluppƯ mala ina kirîm ibbaššû ana kaspika tabal “take for your silver as many dates as were produced in the orchard” (L66), the prepositional phrase with ina separates the adverb mala from the verb. 246 To this list should probably be added dannatu in the phrase ina dannat šarrim “into the camp of the king” (L27; 28). Also probably to be included is the expression Ñe¨rum ina mêšu “a youngster in his fluid” (i.e. a new-born babe). 245

228

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

up from the arable land” (L58); epinnam ina ugƗrim išriq “he stole a plough from the arable land” (L259); u ina pu¨rim ina kussî dayyƗnnjtišu ušetbûšuma “they shall have him removed from the assembly, from the seat of judgment” (L5); ša ina zumrišu la i¨alliqu “which shall not disappear from his body” (l:49-50). The translation “from” is also sometimes used to show that the preposition indicates the source of an action: ina bilat kirîm šittƯn ana bƝl kirîm inaddin “he shall give twothirds from the produce of the orchard to the owner of the orchard” (L64). But in such cases it may equally well adopt a partitive sense, so that “from” really means “some of”: ina mimma ša ana mƗrƯša innadnu … inaddinnjšimma “they shall give to her from what was given for her sons” (L137); ina eqlim kirîm u bƯtim ul inaddiššum “he shall not give him any of the field, orchards or house” (L191); ina makknjr bƯt abim … izâzma “she shall share from the wealth of the father’s house” (L180). The manner in which an action occurred may be introduced with ina, in which case “with” is the best translation to show this modal significance: ina qinnaz alpim imma¨¨a‰ “he shall be beaten with an ox tail” (L202); ina liƗtim imtanaššarnjšu “they shall drag him with the cattle” (L256). There are several occurrences of ina as an augmenting preposition before a noun in the bound form. With libbu “heart” the meaning is “within, inside”, rather more precise than simply “in”: ina libbnj mƗtim ittalkamma “he has come in the land” (L280);247 the noun may take a pronominal suffix: ina libbišu “within it” (i:20, with reference to BƗbilam);248 mimma ša ina libbiša u¨alliqu iriab “he shall make a repayment for whatever was in it that was lost” (L237, with reference to the cargo of a boat).249 An expression with a similar meaning involves the noun qerbƯtu middle: ina qerbƯt nišƯšu “in the middle of his people” (li:47). With panƯ (cf. pƗnu “face”)250 the phrase may be interpreted as having local or causal significance: ina panƯ pilšim šuƗti idukknjšuma “they shall kill him because of the burglary” (L21; or “in front of the

247

Alternatively, it could be translated: he has come back from the land (cf. AHw. p. 32 s.v. II). 248 A similar meaning is expressed by the adverb qerbum, see below. 249 ša ina libbiša appears to mean almost the same as ša libbiša, which occurs earier in the same Law where the expression is nominalised as the subject of the verb u¨taliq. 250 For instances of the augmented prepositional phrase ana panƯ, see ana.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

229

(site of the) burglary”); bissu ina pani ilkim iddƯma uddappir “he neglected his house because of the duty and he absented himself” (L30). in is most frequently attested with local significance. It is found both in the Prologue and the Epilogue, and occurs before a place name (?), before a divine name, and before a few common nouns: qurƗdim in Karkara “the fighter in Karkara” (iii:60-61);251 in IgigƯ ušarbinjšu “they exalted him among the Igigi” (i:14-15); in kibrƗtim ušƗternjšu “they made it pre-eminent in the world” (i:18-19); šarrum ša in šarrƯ šnjturu anƗku “a king who is most excellent among kings” (xlvii:79-80). Like ina, it is sometimes best translated “from”: šƗmip nišƯšu in pušqim “delivering his people from affliction” (iv:38-39). In one sentence in the Prologue it occurs twice, once with local significance and then with modal significance: mušpazzir … in karƗšim mušaršidu … in nu¨šim “giving protection from catastrophe, making provision in abundance” (iv:11-16). Ưnu (subordinating conjunction) As the first word in CH, Ưnu introduces a series of verbs which are easily all taken as subordinate clauses of time, but they cannot certainly be described as subjunctive, since any subjunctive marker is always masked by the 3rd pl. suffix –nj. The main clause with which they all culminate is introduced by a recapitulating conjunction innjmišu: Ưnu … išƯmnjšum … ušarbinjšu … ibbinj … ušƗternjšu,… ukinnnjšum … innjmišu Ñammurabi … šumƯ ibbû “when they determined for him … made him magnificent… named … made him pre-eminent … established for him, at that same time they gave me the name Hammurabi” (i:1-49). Later in the Prologue innjmišu similarly recapitulates the conjunction innjma. innjma (subordinating conjunction)252 The word may occur at the beginning of a sentence to introduce a subordinate clause expressing the time or circumstances of an event: innjma ana bƯt šanîm irrubu “before she enters the house of another man” (L177). But more often it occurs as a parenthetic statement within a sentence: innjma … iddinnj … innjma … im¨urnj “when he gave … when he received” (§5.13+); innjma Ư¨uzuši “when he married her” (L176a); 251

Following Roth; but probably to be read i-na (see BAL). The word is defined as a conjunction in CAD, I, p. 162, s.v. It can be taken to mean “at that time”, and by tradition is derived from ina and njmu. This means that the final syllable –ma is not an augmenting element, as it is taken to be in arkƗnuma and elƝnuma. 252

230

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

innjma ilqûšu “when he took him” (L186). The clause introduced by innjma may interrupt consecutive actions which are linked with conjunctive –ma or with nj: iddinma innjma ana ¨ubullim idinnu kaspam … iddin nj innjma im¨uru kaspam … im¨ur “he gave and, when he gave the loan, he gave silver, or when he received, he received silver …” (§5.13); mƗrat awƯlim Ư¨uzma innjma Ư¨uzuši “he took the daughter of a man and when he had taken her” (L176a). The subjunctive marker –u is masked by another bound morpheme, such as –nj (3rd pl.): innjma a¨¨nj izuzznj “when the brothers made the division” (L165; 166; 170; 171a; 178; 179; 180; 181; 182; 183; 184);253 or by –am (ventive): innjma … ittalkamma “when he has come back” (L280); or by a pronominal suffix: innjma …uwaerranni “when he directed me” (v:14-19).254 innjmišu (conjunction) The word innjmišu occurs twice in the Prologue (i:27; v:25). On both occasions in ms. A it is written as a prepositional phrase ina njmišu. So, the word innjmišu is a contraction of two words and acquires adverbial significance, meaning “at that time” (lit. “on its day”).255 It occurs towards the beginning of the Prologue: Ưnu … BƗbilam … ukinnnjšum innjmišu Ñammurabi …ibbû “when they had established Babylon, on that day they named Hammurabi” (i:1-28); it seems to refer back to the conjunction Ưnu, the first word on the stele, which introduces a series of effectively subordinate verbs. When it occurs again at the end of the Prologue there is also an apparent recapitulation to the word innjma: innjma Marduk … uwaeranni … šƯr nišƯ umƯb innjmišu … “when Marduk commanded me … I improved the condition of the people; it was at that time …” (v:14-25). But it also functions as the word which introduces the whole series of laws. As such, it formally links the preceding narrative of Hammurabi’s accession to kingship with the time when the laws became operational. In this function, it could be described as a conjunction, used like an introductory

253

It is not always absolutely clear whether the word introduces the first clause of the apodosis or describes circumstances relating to the protasis (cf. L165; 166; 186). 254 Here it anticipates and is recapitulated by innjmišu (q.v.). 255 Such a reduction, when the first word ends and the second word begins with a vowel, is known as crasis.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

231

prepositional phrase with adverbial significance.256 Even though any syntactical link between innjmišu as the last word of the Prologue (v:25) and the first words of the Epilogue would be remote, if it is intentional, then the intention of the writer could be for the whole body of individual laws to be linked to the events mentioned in the Prologue, where the excellence of the law-giver is portrayed, and also collectively to anticipate the narrative in the Epilogue, where the dire consequences awaiting a law-breaker are enunciated. ištu (subordinating conjunction; preposition) As a conjunction, ištu always has temporal significance: ištu sinništum šî ana bƯt awƯlim Ưrubu “after that woman had entered the house of the man” (L152); ištu mƗrƯša urtabbû “after she had brought up her children” (L137). Sometimes the subjunctive marker is masked by other verbal morphemes: ištu innemdnj “after they had come together” (L176a+; 176b); ištu ‰Ɲnum ina ugƗrim Ưtelianim “after the flocks have come away from the arable land” (L58). As a preposition, it may also have temporal significance, denoting the time after which an event occurred: kirâšu ištu tarkibtim ana tamkƗrim iddinma “he gave his orchard to the merchant after the pollination” (L66). A phrase introduced with ištu paired with one introduced with adi indicates a time frame within which an event occurred: ištu rƝš šattim adi ¨amšim war¨im “from the beginning of the year until the fifth month” (L273); ištu šeššim war¨im adi taqtƯt šattim “from the sixth month until the end of the year” (L273). The preposition may also have local significance, denoting the place from which an action originates: šeriktam ša ištu bƯt abiša ublam “the dowry she brought from her father’s house” (L138); ištu bƯtika ibballakatnjnim “they will climb over here from your house” (L68+b). itti (preposition) itti can be translated in general as “with”, but the meaning changes slightly according to the semantic relationship between the verb and the indirect object. With personal objects it means essentially “together with”: aššat awƯlim itti zikarim šanîm ina itnjlim itta‰bat “a man’s wife was caught while lying down together with another male” (L129; cf. L131; 132); itti dayyƗnƯ … ul uššab “he shall not sit with the judges” (L5); itti bƝl eqlim la imtagarma “he has not made an agreement with the 256

See CAD, I/J, p. 162, s.v., where it is defined as a conjunction.

232

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

owner of the field” (L57); šugƯtum šî itti nadƯtim ul uštama¨¨ar “that priestess shall not show rivalry with the lay-sister” (L145; cf. L146); itti amƗtim imannnjši “he shall count her together with the slave-girls” (L146; cf. 170; 171a; 190); itti a¨¨Ưšama izâzma “she shall share with her brothers” (L182). A similar meaning can be seen when the noun following the preposition is not personal: balƗmam ša itti mnjtim šitannu “a life which is continually striving with death” (l:59-61); mimmûšu itti mimmê bƝl bƯtim i¨taliq “his property together with the property of the owner of the house has been lost” (L125). With the verb leqû it is better to translate it as “from”: kaspam itti tamkƗrim ilqƝma “he received silver from a merchant” (L49; see also L51; 66; §5.15; L106; 125). kƯma (subordinating conjunction; preposition) As a conjunction, kƯma introduces the subject matter of a dependent statement after a verb of speaking. One such occurrence in CH clearly involves a dependent clause with a stative verb marked as a subjunctive: kƯma mimmûšu la ¨alqu babtašu ina ma¨ar ilim ubâršuma “his community shall make him declare in the presence of the god that his property was not lost” (L126). There is more uncertainty about the correct grammatical explanation of the two other clauses: kƯma nakkƗpu babtašu ušƝdƯšumma “he has informed his community that it is a gorer” (L251); kƯma warassu ukânšuma “he proves that he was his slave” (L282).257 As a preposition, kƯma introduces an object for comparison (a noun inflected as a genitive), which may be inanimate, or a god, or a human being, or even a personal pronoun: kƯma šamê “like the sky” (xlvii:68); kƯma mê “like water” (xlix:94); kƯma ‰alam middim “like a clay figurine” (li:38); kƯma nišik mnjtim “like the sting of death” (li:63); kƯma ¼amaš “like Shamash” (i:40); kƯma amtim “like a slave-girl” (L141); kƯma wardim “like a slave” (L219; 231); kƯma abim “like a father” (xlviii:21); kƯma šuƗti “like him” (L203); kƯma iâti “like me” (xlix:12). It frequently introduces an item by which comparable compensation is to be fixed:

257

It is just possible that these two clauses involve statives (i.e. nouns which are verbalised and marked as subjunctive; nakkƗpu is easier to explain in this way than warassu). But it is probably easier to assume that kƯma introduces a nominal sentence with an implicit pronominal subject; then, nakkƗpu and warassu would each function as the predicate of that nominal sentence.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

233

šeam kƯma itƝšu … inaddin “he shall give barley like his neighbour” (L42; 43; cf. L55; 62; see also L47; §5.10; L137; 172; 180; 245; 246; 263+). la (negating particle); see also ay and ul. There are some 77 examples of protases where the negating particle la occurs before the verb, which is usually preterite.258 There is also a negated protasis in the Epilogue where la occurs with preterite verbs: šumma … dƯnƯ la ušassik, awâtiya la uštepƝl, u‰urƗtiya la unakkir “if he does not dispense with my judgments, change my words, deface my inscription” (xlix:6-10). It is also attested before stative verbs in the protasis: šumma mimmûšu la ¨aliqma “if his property has not been lost” (L126); šumma la na‰ratma “if she has not been careful” (L143); šumma … šƯbnjšu la qerbnj “if his witnesses are not nearby” (L13). Other examples with statives are in clauses introduced with a subordinating conjunction: kƯma mimmûšu la ¨alqu “that his property has not been lost” (L126); ša ina gagîm la wašbat “who is not residing in the cloister” (L110). In one apparently similar subordinate clause, the stative form (masc. sg.) is not explicitly marked as subjunctive: qabal la ma¨ar “not rivalled in conflict” (li:26).259 When the deponent verb išû, “to have”, occurs in a protasis it is also negated with la (in an apodosis ul is used); see L51; 67+a; §5.10; 5.15; L114; 142; 176b; similarly in a relative clause within a protasis: ša nadƗnim la išû “who does not have anything to give” (L8). The particle la also negates infinitives: ina eqlim šiprim la epƝšim “of not performing the work in the field” (L42); mussa la ezƝbša iqtabi “her husband has said he would not leave her” (L141); aššum bƝl ¨ubullim ša mutiša la ‰abƗtiša “about her husband’s creditor not seizing 258

For a list of citations see Richardson 2000: 207, s.v. la. The one exception, with ul (see below) is found not in the text of the stele itself but in a supplementary manuscript written at a different time, which provides the text for §4.12, and which happens to be one of the few examples of a protasis with a durative verb. 259 In this eulogy of the might of Nergal, qabal la ma¨ar may have been abbreviated from *qabalšu ša la ma¨ar, where a noun (and suffix) + ša is substituted for the bound form of the noun, with the stative left without any subjunctive marker. The grammar of the variant reading (ms. e), ša qabalšu la imma¨aru, is clearer; the relative clause with an indicative subjunctive verb may be translated “whose attack cannot be faced” (see CAD M/1 71a; s.v. ma¨Ɨru 13c, lines 4-6).

234

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

her” (L151); dannum enšam ana la ¨abƗlim “so that the strong do not despoil the weak” (i:37-39; xlvii:59-60); šumšu u zikiršu ina mƗtim la šubšâm ina pƯšu kabtim liqbi “may he command with his serious speech that his name and reputation cease to exist in the land” (xlix:76-80). A participle may also be negated by la: la mupparkûm ana Ezida “the one who does not neglect Ezida” (iii:14-15). Similarly it negates a noun or adjective: ana la ¨assim “to the unwise” (xlviii:103-104). la may separate words which are normally contiguous, such as a bound form from its following genitive: kasap la kanƯkim “unsealed silver” (lit. silver without a sealed document; L105); qabal la ma¨Ɨrim “unrivalled in battle” (iii:71-72, lit. a conflict without confrontation; cf. qabal la ma¨ar li:26; vnt. ša qabalšu la imma¨¨aru);260 tƝšî la šubbîm “uproar with no silencing” (xlix:59); iklet la nawƗrim “darkness with no brightening” (xlix:68-69). Similarly la may separate a noun from its adjective: ina njmƯšu la malûtim “during the period not yet used by him” (L69+c+); wardim la šêm “of a slave that is not his” (L226; 227). It may even separate a preposition from its noun: ina la mê “because of an absence of water” (L48). lu, see njlu ma¨ar; ina ma¨ar; ana ma¨ar (preposition) ma¨ar is identical in form with the bound form of ma¨ru “front”.261 It functions as a preposition meaning “in front of”, and it can accept a pronominal suffix. The nouns with which it is associated may be divine or human: ma¨ar ilim “before a god” (L9; 23; 120; 266!; 77+f! ); ma¨ar šƯbƯ “before witnesses” (§5.5; L124; cf. L9); ma¨ar dayyƗnƯ “before the judges” (L127); ma¨aršuma “before him” (§5.3a?, fragmentary). 260

The expression in the Epilogue (li.26, with vnt.) has already been discussed in the previous note, and it seems to mean the same as the one in the Prologue (iii:71-71; ms. e; see CAD s.v. ma¨Ɨru, p. 62b, line 1); even so, it is not immediately obvious how “a conflict without confrontation” (the apparent literal meaning) comes to signify “the warrior without a rival” (the meaning most suited to the context). In the Prologue (qabal la ma¨Ɨrim, cf. CAD s.v. ma¨Ɨru, p. 62b, line 1), a bound form with following genitive is interrupted by la, but in the Epilogue (qabal la ma¨ar) a bound form followed by a stative is interrupted by la (qabal ša la ma¨ru “would have been more usual”). 261 The substantive ma¨ru “front” does not happen to be attested in CH, but the related adjective ma¨rû “former” occurs twice: ina šattim ma¨rƯtim “in the earlier year” (L47); mƗrnj ma¨rûtum “the earlier sons” (L173).

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

235

It is frequently augmented with ina: ina ma¨ar Ellil (xlix:89); ina ma¨ar Marduk (xlviii:41-42; 54-55); ina ma¨ar ilim (L126; 240; 281); ina ma¨ar ilim (L240); ina ma¨ar ilim u šƯbƯ (L106; 107; ms. t omits ina in both these sentences); ina ma¨ar ‰almiya (xlvii:76); ina ma¨rišunu (L9; 10). The compound preposition appears to mean the same as ma¨ar since the expression šƯbnj ša ina ma¨rišunu šƯmum iššamu “the witnesses before whom the purchase was made”, is reformulated in one and the same Law as šƯbnj ša ma¨rišunu šƯmum iššamu (L9). Similarly, ma¨ar occurs in different variant manuscripts for ina ma¨ar on the stele (cf. L106; 107; 126). On one occasion, before a verb of motion, it is augmented with ana: ana ma¨ar ‰almiya … lillikma “let him come before my statue” (xlviii:6). mala (subordinating conjunction; preposition) The clauses introduced with mala in CH are all embedded and quantify the object of the verb. The verb introduced by mala is marked as subordinate: šeam mala ilqû uštašannƗma “he shall double the amount of barley he took” (§5.12; cf. L100; 106; 113); u ina mimma šumšu mala iddinu Ưtelli “and he shall forfeit anything at all as much as he gave” (L113; 116); suluppƯ mala in kirîm ibbaššû ana kaspika tabal “take away as many dates as have been produced in the orchard for your silver” (L66); mala [im¨uru] “as much he received” (§5.12).262 It frequently occurs compounded with the indefinite pronoun mimma: mimma mala inaddinu šƯbƯ ukallam “he shall show to witnesses however much he is going to give” (L122); mimma mala ibbablušum uštašannƗma “he shall double whatever was brought to him” (L161; also L160, where for mala ms. S has the relative particle ša, which introduces an embedded clause more frequently). It is also well attested as a preposition which quantifies the associated noun: mala libbiša uštam‰Ưši “he has given her full discretion (lit. ‘he has allowed her to find her heart completely’)” (L179; cf. L178); kaspam mala ter¨atiša inaddiššim “he shall give her silver, enough for her bridal gift” (L138); ina šeriktiša mala ter¨atiša i¨arra‰ma “he shall deduct from her dowry as much as the marriage gift was” (L164); ‰ibtam mala [qaqqadišu] “as much interest as the principal sum” (§5.11).263

262 263

Reading based on editorial restoration. Reading based on editorial restoration.

236

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

panƯ, ina panƯ, see above, ina qadum (preposition) In Old Babylonian documents, usually (but not always) this preposition meaning “with” takes the form qadum (cf. AHw. 892a; for the form adi cf. CAD A/1: 121b-25a, adi B, preposition). It appears once in CH: qadum šeriktim ša bƯt abiša … Ưrubma “she entered with a dowry from her father’s house” (L176a). qerbum, vnt. qereb (preposition) In form, the word qerbum could be described as an adverb, derived from the noun qerbu interior, with the adverbial suffix –um. But in CH it clearly functions as a preposition,264 before a noun inflected as genitive: mukinnu išdƯšin qerbum BƗbilim “establishing foundations for them within Babylon” (iv:40-44; ms. B reads qereb). Once it seems to govern two nouns; the second one is appositional: mukinni Ištar ina Eulmaš qerbum Akkadim ribƯtim “establishing Ishtar in the E-ulmash in the wide street in Akkad” (iv:48-52). ša ša is the most frequently occurring non-declining word in CH, and so only a selection of examples of its usages in CH will be mentioned here. In general, it is used to introduce a descriptive expression, comprising a clause introduced with ša and a verb inflected as subjunctive, referring to a preceding noun or a noun phrase. Such instances have been described earlier. Alternatively, the description may be a noun or noun phrase, with the noun following ša inflected as a genitive. When noun phrases are linked with ša, the particle itself can often be translated “of”, but sometimes another preposition is more appropriate: mƗrum rƝštûm ša Ekur “the first son of Ekur” (l:83-84); mimma ša nadƗnim “something to give” (L66); šeam ša kaspišu “barley for his silver” (L49); ‰ibtam ša šattim šuƗti “the interest for that year” (L48).265

264

Another adverb that functions also as a preposition is elƝnum (the suffix –Ɲnum may be regarded as adverbial); cf. CAD, s.v. elƝnu adv.; the citations in paragraph c show that the word may take suffixes; the citations in paragraph d are “followed by genitive”. Both these features are characteristics of the preposition. 265 The variant reading (ms. L) is without ša.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

237

More than one noun phrase may be linked to the descriptive expression with ša, and the descriptive expression may be linked to more than one noun phrase: ina eqlim kirîm u bƯtim ša ilkišu “about the field, orchard or house concerned with his duty” (L38); lu wardam lu amtam ¨alqam ša ekallim ulu muškƝnim “a lost male or female slave of the temple or of a commoner” (L16); šeam šipƗtim šamnam suluppƯ u mimma šumšu ša ‰ênim “barley, wool, oil, dates, or anything at all for loading” (L237); agâm kussiam ša šarrnjtim lƯmeršu “may he remove from him the crown and the throne of his kingship” (l:45-46); šeam ša šattim ištiat “barley for one year” (L63); ilnj rabûtum ša šamê u er‰etim “the great gods of heaven and earth” (li:70-72). A phrase with a bound form may be linked with such a descriptive expression: nadƯt Marduk ša BƗbilim “a priestess of Marduk from Babylon” (L182); eqel epšƝtim ša šeim u lu šamaššammƯ “a field cultivable for barley or sesame” (L49). The descriptive expression may also follow a prepositional phrase šamaššammƯ ana ma¨ƯrƗtišunu ša kaspišu … inaddin “he shall pay sesame at its current price for the silver” (L51). A noun introduced by ša may itself be qualified with an intervening prepositional phrase: arnam kabtam ša ina aplnjtim nasƗ¨im “an offence serious enough for removing him from the sonship” (L168; 169); bƯtim ša kƯma šamê u er‰etim išdƗšu “a house whose foundations are like heaven and earth” (xlvii:68-69). Occasionally the descriptive expression is itself a prepositional phrase or an adverb: awƯlim ša kƯma šuƗti “a man who is like him” (L203); mu‰Ưr bƯt Ebabbar ša kî šubat šamƗi “raising the height of the temple of Ebabbar which is like a heavenly residence” (ii:29-31); it may also be an adverb alpim ša warka “an ox which is at the rear” (L242/3). There are occasions when there is no nominal antecedent for ša. Sometimes the noun may be regarded as implicit: alpam … išriq šumma ša ilim šumma ša ekallim … šumma ša muškƝnim “he stole an ox; if it was from a god or if it was from the palace … if it was from a commoner” (L8). Elsewhere ša has in effect been nominalised and has become a noun of general significance. This happens most frequently before an infinitive: ša nadƗnim “something to give” (L8; 66); ša akƗlim “something to eat” (L133a; 134; 135); ina bƯtišu ša pamƗrišu la ibašši “there is nothing for ransoming him in his house” (L32); ina bƯtišu ša pamƗrim ibašši “there is something for ransoming in his house” (L32). Such an expression, when it constitutes the predicate of a non-verbal sentence, often attracts a suffix –ma, emphatically terminating the sentence: bitiqtum ša errƝšimma “the loss is for the cultivator alone”

238

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

(L45); šeriktaša ša bƯt abišama “her dowry is for her father” (L163); warkassa ša mƗrƯšama “her estate is for her sons” (L171b); aplnjssa ša a¨¨Ưšama “her inheritance is for her brothers” (L178); warkassa ša a¨¨Ưšama “her estate is for her brothers” (L180; 181). A few collocations with ša are best interpreted as nouns in their own right: ša ¨ammƗtim “captain” (“the person involved with sceptres”); ša libbiša “foetus” (“the thing belonging to her inside”); ša ma¨irtim “rower” (“the one confronting (the current)”); ša muqqelpƯtim “sailor” (“the one drifting (with the stream)”). šumma Almost all the sentences constituting the various legal provisions of CH are expressed as conditionals. The protases of these conditional sentences are always introduced with šumma. Normally šumma introduces only the first clause of the protasis, and it is not repeated before any subsequent protasis, but occasionally it is repeated when the protasis is very complex. In the Epilogue (xlviii:75; xlix:2; xlix:18), šumma has the same grammatical function. Normally the verbs in the protases are preterite.266 But there are some occasions when a verb after šumma is in the durative.267 Sometimes the need for the change of tense is obvious, as when the situation described seems to be persistent: šumma awƯlum iššalilma ina bƯtišu ša akƗlim ibašši “if a man has been taken away but there is something for eating in his house” (L133a; cf. L134). On other occasions the durative may suggest an action that was (or was liable to be) repeated: šumma … usa¨¨amnjši “if they keep on pestering her” (L172);268 šumma … itarrakaššu “if he has been beating him” (§5.8). Sometimes a hypothetical situation seems to be envisaged: šumma bƝl aššatim aššassu uballam “if the master of the wife were to allow his wife to live” (L129); šumma 266

The generally consistent use of the preterite has been taken to suggest that what is recorded is an action which has already been completed. According to this view, CH is regarded not as a body of prospective legisation but as a collection of verdicts already made in particular cases. 267 Huehnergard has shown that the durative in a protasis expresses either habitual activity, or an intent, wish or obligation, citing from CH L67+a and L274; all the other citations from CH are included here; GrAkk. §17.3 last paragraph (pp. 159-60); see also §12.2. 268 Perhaps the durative may have an ingressive nuance, and is to be translated “they began to pester her”. The corresponding preterite tense of this verb would sound almost the same as the durative usa¨¨imnjši.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

239

ul išƗmma “if he were not to buy” (§4.12); šumma … inaddin “if he were to give” (L67+a); šumma … iggar “if he intends to hire” (L274).269 The negating particle in a protasis is normally la:270 šumma … la urakkibma “if he does not pollinate” (L65); šumma … ilkam la išû “if it has no obligation” (L67+a). Once, however, the negating particle ul occurs, the normal negating particle in a main clause: šumma ul išƗmma “if he does not make the purchase” (§4.12) But the passage in which it occurs is known only from a manuscript written at a different time from the stele itself.271 If more than one verb is dependent on šumma, the particle is not normally repeated: šumma awƯlum ¨ubtam i¨butma itta‰bat “if a man has committed robbery and is caught” (L22); šumma alap awƯlim nakkƗpƯma kƯma nakkƗpu bƗbtašu ušƝdƯšumma qarnƯšu la ušarrim alapšu la usanniqma alpum šû mƗr awƯlim ikkipma uštamƯt “if a man’s ox is prone to toss and his community informed him that it is prone to toss and he does not cover its horns and does not tie up his ox and that ox tossed a man’s son and caused death…” (L251). There are occasions when a protasis is left suspended, and is not followed immediately by the expected apodosis but by a supplementary protasis introduced with šumma. These suspended protases often express general conditions forming the background to some specific conditions; and it is these specific conditions which seem to constitute the principal protasis which is linked with the apodosis to form the conditional sentence. The subject of the first, suspended protasis does not usually function also as the subject of the supplementary protasis: šumma awƯlum ina dƯnim ana šƯbnjt sarrƗtim nj‰iamma awat iqbû la uktƯn šumma dƯnum šû dƯn napištim awƯlum šû iddâk “if a man came out in a trial with fraudulent evidence and did not substantiate the words he had spoken, if that case is a trial for a life, that man shall be killed” (L3). A suspended protasis may introduce a series of conditional sentences: cf. L8; 27-29;

269

The statements in this section of the Laws are formulated very differently from the rest. 270 In Akkadian, in general, la is the normal negating particle in a subordinate clause, whereas ul is used in a main clause. 271 It may be relevant to note that this is one of those examples where šumma is followed not by a preterite but by a present tense. Huehnergard does not mention §4.12 when referring to the fact that la is used in protases (Gr.Akk. §§17.3b; 20.4a).

240

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

32; 62-63; 253-256; 280-282.272 The suspended protasis in L151 (with sinništum as the subject) forms the background information for a pair of conditional sentences which are coordinated with the conjunctive particle u. The first of them has awƯlum, the second sinništum, as the subject. The second šumma may elsewhere be interpreted as a recapitulation of the first šumma. This happens in a sentence where the protasis involves a number of different clauses, especially when they do not all have the same subject, and it appears that a need was felt to repeat the original force of this particle: cf. L30; 49; 136; 163; 168. šumma may be repeated to express mutually exclusive circumstances: šumma ša ilim šumma ša ekalllim “whether from a god or from a temple” (L8). When the word occurs in a broken context (sometimes it must even be restored) it is not always clear exactly which function it performs (L67+a; 68b; §4.12; §5.2; §5.7; L100). njlu273 The cuneiform sign for u “and” may also be read as nj “or”. The meaning “or” is more explicitly expressed by the conjunction njlu (sometimes transcribed as two words, nj lu). It occurs as the link between alternative words or phrases and also between alternative clauses: bƝl wardim njlu amtim “the owner of the slave or of the slave-girl” (L280; 281); ina tarba‰im lipit ilim ittabši njlu nƝšum iddnjk “in the sheepfold an act of god has occurred or a lion has made a kill” (L266). Occasionally both alternatives are introduced with njlu: njlu ana mišlƗni njlu ana šaluš “either for half of the produce or for a third of the produce” (L46); njlu ina pilšim njlu ina nabalkattim “either by an intrusion or a break-in” (L125). lu introduces the first of a pair of alternative words, or the first member (or members) of a series of alternative words or phrases; the last member is introduced with njlu: lu rƝdûm njlu bƗirum “a soldier or a trapper” (L26+; 27; 28; 30; 32); lu ša ¨ammƗtim njlu laputtûm “a captain or an inspector” (L33+; 34+).274 Examples with more than two alternatives are L16 (a series of three); xlix:40-43 (a series of four); L8 (a series of five); L7 (a series of eight). There are also occasions when njlu introduces

272

It can be seen that, according to the traditional editing of the Laws, these supplementary sentences do not always have separate numbers assigned to them. 273 GrAkk. §29.3. 274 Variant manuscripts often substitute a different way of linking the terms.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

241

the last member of a series without any preceding lu: ugbabtum nadƯtum njlu sekretum (L178; 179); nadƯtam qadištam njlu kulmašƯtam (L181). The same pair of words may occur without and also with introductory lu in the same or an adjacent clause. In L176a the phrase lu warad ekallim njlu warad muškƝnim was previously written twice without introductory lu; in L224-225, as well as asî alpim njlu imƝrim, alpam njlu imƝram and bƝl alpim njlu imƝrim, we have lu alpam njlu imƝram; in L280-281 we have lu warassu njlu amassu and lu warassu lu amassu as well as bƝl wardim njlu amtim and even wardam amtam, with the terms linked asyndetically. Words that are introduced and linked with lu, without using njlu at all, can usually be regarded as natural pairs: lu warassu lu amassu (L281); lu warad ekallim lu amat ekallim lu warad muškƝnim lu amat muškƝnim (L15).275 When more than two clauses are linked, njlu may occur before them all (L48) or only before the last clause (L248). Such linked clauses may describe particular situations pertaining to a general condition: ina qarƯtim ibbûm ittabši njlu bƝl bƯtim našpakam iptƝma šeam ilqe njlu šeam ša ina bƯtišu iššapku ana gamrim ittakir “some damage has occurred in the granary; either the owner has opened the storehouse and taken the barley, or he disagrees about the total amount of barley that was stored at his property” (L120). u and nj Very often words belonging to similar semantic fields, as well as similar phrases and clauses, are simply juxtaposed; they are said to be linked asyndetecially: wardam amtam “a slave and a slave-girl” (L280); markas šamê er‰etim “the link between heaven and earth” (i:59, written DUR.AN.KI). Alternatively they may be linked with the conjunction u “and” or the conjunction nj “or”.276 Much less frequently clauses are linked with u, or nj. The following citations are selected from the many examples that occur in CH. Words that are linked include proper nouns: mƗt ¼umerim u Akkadim “Sumer and Akkad” (xlvii:50-51); Anum u Ellil “Anum and 275

These four terms may be understood as a series of two pairs of expres-

sions. 276

In cuneiform, u is not distinguishable from nj; in transcription, they are distinguished by vowel length. Often it is hard to be certain which of the two homographs is intended and the decision on how to translate will depend on the context.

242

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Enlil” (xlvii:64); common nouns: šamê u er‰etim “heaven and earth” (i:4-5); abašu u ummašu “his father and his mother” (L186); liƗtim u ‰Ɲnam “cattle and sheep” (L:35); a pronoun: mimma ša mussa u šî … iršû “whatever she and her husband had acquired” (L176a; 176b); šuƗti u bƯšašu “him and his property” (L54). One or both of the linked terms may be made more precise by the use of an adjective, a defining genitive or a prepositional phrase: eleppašu u mimmašu ¨alqam “his boat or whatever of his was lost” (L240); nasa¨ išdƯ šarrnjtišu u ¨alaq mƗtišu “the tearing up of the foundations of his kingdom and the destruction of his land” (l:28-30); ugbabtim u aššat awƯlim “the priestess and the man’s wife” (L127). When more than two expressions are linked it is normal to find u (or nj) only before the last term: eqlim kirîm u bƯtim “the field, the orchard and the house” (L40). But sometimes it is found before all the linked terms: šeam u kaspam kƯma ‰imdat šarrim u ‰ibassu “barley and silver, according to the king’s rate, and the interest on it” (§5.10); šeam ša kaspišu u ‰ibassu ša itti tamkƗrim ilqû u mƗna¨Ɨt erƝšim “barley for his silver and the interest on it which he received from the merchant and the costs of cultivation” (L49). The conjunction may also link two clauses, but because almost all clauses introduced with u add supplementary information to the apodosis, it may be alternatively explained not as a conjunction but as a sentence-initial co-ordinating particle, corresponding to a word like “furthermore” or “moreover”. Sometimes the linked clauses have the same subjects: šeam … inaddin u eqlam … ima¨¨a‰ … “he shall pay the barley and he shall break up the field …” (L43). They may also have different subjects: awƯlum šû iddâk u ša šurqam ina qƗtišu im¨uru iddâk “that man shall be killed; furthermore, the one who received the stolen item from his hands shall be killed” (L6). On one ocasion the preceding clause ends in –ma, which could then be explained as a mark of emphasis rather than conjunctive: itamma u asâm ippal “he shall certainly make an oath; furthermore he shall pay the physician” (L206).277 Sometimes “but” rather than “and” seems a more appropriate translation: innjma ana ¨ubullim iddinu … u innjma im¨uru “when he made the loan … but when he received” (§5.13). Once a subordinate clause precedes the main clause and is introduced by u: iriab u aššum bƯt Ưpušu la udanninuma imqutu ina makknjr ramanišu bƯt imqutu ippeš “he 277

If the –ma is conjunctive, the translation would be “he shall make a declaration and also pay the physician”.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

243

shall make recompense; moreover, because he had not strengthened the house he constructed and it collapsed, he shall reconstruct the house that collapsed from his own resources” (L232). More than two clauses are linked, with the conjunction occurring before all the linked clauses, in a passage in the Epilogue: libbi Marduk bƝlišu umƯb u šƯram mƗbam ana nišƯ ana dƗr išƯm u mƗtam … uštƝšer “he pleased the heart of his lord Marduk, and established good health for the people for evermore, and kept order in the land” (xlviii:32-38). This may be compared with the apparently more prosaic style of the Laws: eqlam mayyƗrƯ ima¨¨a‰ imarrar u išakkakma “he shall break up the field with mattocks, scuffle and harrow” (L44). It is sometimes the subjects rather than the verbs that are the focus of the link between clauses: ¨Ưrtašu mƗrƯ njlissum u amassu mƗrƯ njlissum “his first wife bore him sons and his slave-girl bore him sons” (L170); similarly in relative clauses it may be the antecedents that are linked: nƗdinƗn iddinušum u šƯbƯ ša ina ma¨rišunu išƗmu “the person who gave it to him and the witnesses in whose presence he made the purchase” (L10); eleppam ša umebbû u mimma ša ina libbiša u¨alliqu “the boat which he sank and whatever he allowed to be lost from its cargo” (L237). Very rarely a protasis is introduced with u šumma … “and if …” (L:151; 171a; 176a). Here u can be interpreted as resumptive, referring back to subject matter which has been previously mentioned. On one occasion u is used to introduce the apodosis: šumma bƝl aššatim aššassu uballam u šarrum warassu uballam “if the wife’s husband allows his wife to live, then the king shall allow his slave to live” (L129). This is unusual and may have been occasioned by the fact that the verb in the apodosis is identical with that in the protasis. ul (negating particle); see also ay and la. Generally in Akkadian a main clause is negated with ul; ul is also used in a negated nominal sentence. This contrasts with the negation of a subordinate clause and the negation of infinitives, where la is used.278 To express an unwanted consequence, sometimes described as the negation of a wish, ay is used. In the Laws the apododoses normally have a durative verb, and ul is used as the negating particle; this contrasts with the protases, where a preterite verb and the negating particle la are usual, implying that the protasis is construed as subordinate to the apodosis.

278

Examples include la epƝšim (L42); la ezƝbša (L141); la epƝšim (L42).

244

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Most of the clauses in which a stative verb occurs can be interpreted as implicitly subordinate to the indicative verb.279 Stative verbs are normally negated with la, although ul is used in negated nominal sentences. Once ul is used to negate a noun used predicatively and inflected as absolute: sinnišitum šî ul aššat “that woman is not a wife” (L128). The negating particle ul is attested in the Epilogue before preterite verbs in a main clause: ul Ɲgu a¨Ư ul addi “I have not been negligent, I have not been lazy” (xlvii:15-16); mugallitam ul ušaršinƗti “I have not allowed anyone to disturb them” (xlvii:38-39). Examples of ul in a negated nominal sentence include: ul bƝlƯ atta “you are not my master” (L282); ul abƯ atta ul ummƯ attƯ “you are not my father, you are not my mother” (L192).280 Once ul occurs in a protasis: šumma ul išƗmma “if he does not make the purchase” (§4.12). This usage is exceptional, because šumma is not normally followed by a present tense and the normal negating particle in a protasis is la (see above).281 It should be remembered that the passage in question is not actually preserved on the stele itself; the text has been restored from a manuscript written at a different time. warka, warkƗnum, warki; see above arka, arkƗnum, arki.

ENCLITIC PARTICLES The various ways in which the elements of a sentence are arranged sometimes allow a measure of interpretation concerning the emphasis that was originally intended to be given to each of those elements. Usually this interpretation is based on the ordering of the words of a sentence, but sometimes an enclitic particle draws more immediate attention to a feature of syntax. –mi The enclitic particle –mi is sometimes placed at the end of words or phrases which occur in direct speech: nƗdinƗnummi iddinam ma¨ar šƯbƯmi ašƗm iqtabi he has said, “A seller gave to me. I bought in the presence of witnesses” (L9); šƯbƯ mudƝ ¨ulqiyami lublam iqtabi “he has 279

The stative verb is sometimes explicitly marked as subjunctive; on other occasions the subjunctive marker is masked by some other morpheme. 280 In CH, such examples happen to occur in direct speech. 281 Huehnergard does not mention this exception when stating that the negating particle in a protasis is la not ul; see GrAkk. §17.3b and §20.4, lƗ a.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

245

said ‘Let me bring witnesses, those who know it is my lost property’” (L9). However, in most of the passages where direct speech occurs in CH none of the words are marked with –mi. –ma (emphatic) The enclitic particle –ma, when it has emphatic significance, usually occurs within a clause. It appears to focus attention on the word to which it is affixed. When enclitic –ma occurs at the end of a clause, it almost always functions as a conjunction (see below). A pronoun placed in initial position may be emphasised with –ma: anƗkuma rƝûm mušallimum “I indeed am the shepherd who brings peace” (xlvii:42-43); ša i‰‰abtuma ilikšu ittalku šûma illak “the one who has taken over and who has been performing his duty, he shall certainly do (the duty)” (L30); cf. also šu ma[ (§5.3a, fragmentary). Similarly the adverbs (or adverbial conjunctions) elƝnum and warkƗnum may be augmented with –ma at the head of a clause: elƝnumma (L57; 165); warkƗnumma (L5; 176a). The augmented form warkƗnumma occurs also in the second position in a clause: šû warkƗnumma ina snjniša ittatƯlma “and he subsequently has been copulating with her” (L155). –ma is sometimes found with the second word of a clause, where the first two words are very closely linked: balum kaspimma andurƗršunu iššakkan “without any silver their emancipation shall be arranged” (L280); šattam ištiatma uddappirma “for one year he has been absent” (L31). Frequently the emphasised element is a noun phrase which may have been alluded to earlier in the narrative: bƝl ¨ulqimma šƯbƯ itbalam “but the previously mentioned owner of the lost property has produced witnesses” (L10); ina šattimma šuƗti “in that very same year” (L235). Sometimes the particle emphasises a later phrase in the clause: šumma awƯlum ereqqamma ana ramaniša Ưgur “if a man hired just a cart by itself” (L272); šeam u kaspam ana turrim la išû bƯšamma išû “he has no barley or silver for repaying but possessions he does have” (§5.15). When –ma occurs in a clause the usual order of grammatical elements (subject + object + verb) may be disturbed: šeriktaša mƗrnj ¨Ɨwirišama ileqqû “it is her first husband’s sons who shall take her dowry” (L174); šeam …bƝl eqlimma ileqqƝma “it is the owner of the field who shall collect the grain” (L49; 50). The element placed in clause-final position is usually the logical predicate of the sentence, and as such has some emphasis focused on it. In some nominal sentences the required focus is further emphasised with

246

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

–ma, and then the predicate is often introduced with ša: warkassa ša mƗrƯšama “her property certainly belongs to her sons” (L171b); warkassa ša a¨¨Ưšama “her estate is for her brothers” (L180; 181); šeriktaša ša bƯt abišama “her dowry is for her father” (L163); bitiqtum ša errƝšimma “the loss is for the cultivator alone” (L45); aplnjssa ša a¨¨Ưšama “her inheritance is for her brothers” (L178). Other examples include mƗrušu ‰e¨erma ilik abišu alƗkam la ilei “his son is really small: he is unable to perform the obligation of his father” (L29); ana bƝlišuma “it is for the owner” (L244).282 A noun in apposition may be marked with –ma: awƯlum ašbumma kasap ki‰rišu gamram … iddinma “the man, as the resident, paid the silver for his agreement in full” (L69+c). There are occasions where –ma is affixed to the final verb of the sentence; it is then obvious to interpret it as emphatic rather than conjunctive: ana Id illak Id išalliamma “he shall go to the river and actually leap into the river” (L2); šumma ina ma¨Ɨ‰išu imtnjt itammƗma “if he has died in a brawl he shall make an oath” (L207).283 An emphatic interpretation may be appropriate to a verb occurring before the last verb of a sentence: dayyƗnnj awâtišunu immarnjma šƯbnj … mudnjssunu iqabbûma “the judges shall certainly examine their statements; the witnesses shall certainly speak their evidence” (L9). Towards the end of the Epilogue there is one occurrence of –ma which, if the text is reliable, appears to be emphatic: ummƗnšuma rƝmam ay ušarši “as for his army, let him not show mercy” (li:17-18). This reading of the stele is questioned by Borger, and Roth emends to read ummƗnšu; it is somewhat unusual to find emphatic –ma following a pronominal suffix.284

282

Here the subject of the nominal sentence is implicit. Note also suluppƯ … bƝl kirîmma ileqqe “it is the owner of the orchard who shall take the dates” (L66; ms. Q reads ileqqƝma for ileqqe). The variant ms. adds –ma to the final verb of the sentence, but this variant is probably an error, arising from aural confusion with ileqqƝma which occurs earlier in the sentence. 284 Another example of –ma after a suffix is njmam ana mnjšim litƝršumma nakiršu elišu lišziz “may he turn the day into the night for him and allow his enemy to stand over him” (l:88-91). But here it is as easy to explain –ma as copulative as to explain it as emphatic. 283

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

247

–ma (conjunctive) The enclitic particle –ma, when it has conjunctive significance, is affixed to the last word of a clause, which is normally the main verb of that clause. Two or more clauses linked explicitly with –ma occur far more frequently in the Laws than in the Prologue or the Epilogue, but the choice of whether to link clauses with –ma or whether simply to leave them juxtaposed seems to have been for the most part arbitrary. Whether simply juxtaposed or linked with–ma, contiguous clauses can be seen to exhibit different types of relationship; those that are linked lexically by conjunctions or subjunctions may show the nature of that relationship more clearly. Similar patterns of relationship may be surmised for clauses linked asyndetically or with –ma; this will be discussed further in the notes on syntax and style. Non-declining words are sometimes subdivided according to the function they fulfil in a sentence,285 but it is not uncommon to find some of them adopting more than one function. The word ištu, for example, in šeriktam ša ištu bƯt abiša ublam “the dowry she brought from her father’s house” (L138), functions as a preposition before the phrase bƯt abiša. But in ištu mƗrƯša urtabbû “after she had brought up her children” (L137), ištu is placed at the head of a clause with the verb marked as subjunctive; here it functions as a subordinating conjunction.286 Although conventional terms from English grammar are often used to explain the elements of Akkadian grammar from a descriptive point of view, it is simpler to examine each non-declining word as a whole, listing the different grammatical functions it fulfils. Full citations will point out the differences.287 A distinction may be made between those that qualify a 285

In traditional grammars of Hebrew or Arabic, such words were described as “particles”. In Wilhelm Gesenius, Lehrgebäude der hebräischen Sprache (Friedrich Christian Wilhem Vogel: Leipzig, 1817) 620-38, Chapter 5 is entitled “Von den Partikeln” and includes “Adverbia” (pp. 622-28); “Praepositionen” (pp. 628-33); “Conjunctionen” (pp. 634, 637); and “Interjectionen” (pp. 637-38). In W. Wright, A Grammar of the Arabic Language (Third edition, first published 1896 and 1898; paperback edition 1967: Cambridge University Press) 279-97, “Part Second, III. The Particles” includes “The Prepositions” (pp. 27982); “The Adverbs” (pp. 282-90); “The Conjunctions” (290-94); and “The Interjections” (pp. 294-96). 286 A more concise term “subjunction” may be preferred to “subordinating conjunction”. 287 The fact that a non-declining word may have a range of grammatical usages leads to differences in the dictionaries. For example, AHw., 401b-402b,

248

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

clause as a whole, and those that qualify just one element of a clause, such as a noun or a verb. Of those words that qualify a clause, šumma is used to mark the protases of the conditional sentences in CH, and always occurs as the initial element of a sentence. By implication the protasis is a subordinate clause and the apodosis the main clause of a conditional sentence, even though the verb of the protasis is seldom marked as a subjunctive. Of the other non-declining words found at the head of a non-initial clause in a compound or complex sentence, some are conjunctions, i.e. a coordinating conjunction used to introduce a coordinate clause: u; nj; lu; ulu.288 Conjunctions that introduce a subordinate clause are conveniently called subjunctions. Most often they express adverbially the time or manner of the main action.289 Some are augmented with enclitic –ma (warkƗnumma; elƝnumma), which adds an emphatic (not a conjunctive) nuance. One subjunction is a lexical contraction of an adverbial phrase (inumišu < *ina umišu). Others found in CH include: adi; arka (warka; ina warka; warkƗnum; warkƗnumma); ašar; aššum; elƝnumma; Ɲma; Ưnu (Ưnuma; innjmišu); ištu; kƯma; mala. The clause introduced by some of these words is not always marked as subordinate (i.e. with a subjunctive verb); in those circumstances they could be described more precisely as adverbial conjunctions without explicit subordination. Most non-declining words that qualify an element within a clause qualify a noun or noun phrase. As such, they are placed immediately before the qualified expression, and the qualified noun is inflected as genitive; they are regarded as prepositions. The prepositional phrase may be regarded as qualifying one of the nouns in the sentence, but it may also be more closely associated with the verb: ana warkiƗt njmƯ “in the course of time” (xlviii:59-60); ina la mê šeum ina eqlim la ittabši “barley has not been produced from the field because of a lack of water” (L48); warkišu eqelšu kirƗšu u bƯssu i‰batma “after him someone has

separates the citations of ištu as a preposition (s.v. B, 402a) from those as a subjunction (s.v. C, 402a-b), but all under one lemma. CAD (I/J) by contrast identifies two separate lexemes (cf. ištu conj. p. 284b; ištu prep. p. 286a). 288 Enclitic –ma also functions as a conjunction; it is appended to the last word of the initial or some subsequent clause (usually a verb) to indicate that there is a coordinated clause to follow. 289 Several of them may also be used to qualify an element of a clause rather than the clause as a whole; when used as such they are described as prepositions or adverbs. For single words used as adverbs see below.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

249

taken over his field, orchard and house” (L30); mƗssu ina ¨uša¨¨im u bubnjtim li¨alliq “let him destroy his land by famine and pestilence” (l:72-75); ina libbiša aggim ina uzzƗtiša rabiƗtim “with rage in her heart and massive anger” (l:99-102). Non-declining words which function as prepositions in CH include: adi; ana; ašar; balum; eli; ema; ina; išti; itti; kima; libbu; qadum; qerbum; ma¨ar; mala; panu; warki. Sometimes a preposition is augmented. The bound form of the noun ma¨ru “front” itself functions as a preposition: ma¨ar ilim “before the god”. When augmented with ina in the phrase ina ma¨ar ilim, it appears to mean the same; similarly when augmented with ana in the phrase ana ma¨ar ‰almiya “in front of my statue”. The meaning of the augmented element can be somewhat more general than its base meaning; the base meaning of libbu “heart” in ina libbišu “within it” has become so generalised that it may refer to the interior of a city (i:20) or the interior of a cargo boat (L237).290 Generally all prepositions have a much wider semantic range than nouns or verbs. The meaning of a preposition is determined primarily by the noun with which it is associated and then by the meaning of the sentence as a whole. In particular this is evident with those prepositions exhibiting local, temporal and also instrumental meanings.291 It is not uncommon to find more than one prepositional phrase in a clause: ina dƯnim ana šƯbnjt sarrƗtim nj‰iamma “he has come out into the court with false evidence” (L3); ina bilat kirîm šittƯn ana bƝl kirîm inaddin “he shall give two-thirds to the owner of the field for the rent of the field” (L64); aššat awƯlim itti zikarim šanîm ina itnjlim itta‰bat “a man’s wife has been caught while copulating with another male” (L129). It is also not uncommon to find the force of a preposition sustained from the first noun to a subsequent noun or nouns in apposition or in a series: ina BƗbilim Ɨlim ša Anum u Ellil rƝšišu ullû “in Babylon, (in) the city whose head Anum and Enlil have raised” (xlvii:63-66); balum šƯbƯ u riksƗtim “without witnesses and (without) contracts” (L7); ana eqlišu kirîšu u bƯtišu itâr “he shall return to his field, orchard or house” (L41); 290

Similarly, the meaning of pû “mouth” could perhaps be regarded as widened in the phrases ana pƯ riksƗtišu “according to the terms of his treaty” (L264). ana pƯ Ñimdat šarrim “according to the decision of the king” (L51). However, the noun itself may tolerate such a wide semantic range: Ñibassu ša pƯ tuppišu “interest on it according to the terms of his tablet” (L66). 291 The same is also true of prepositions in English: in the book, in the year; with my friend, with my pen.

250

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

eli ugbabtim u aššat awƯlim ubƗnam ušatri‰ma “he had a finger pointed at a priestess or a man’s wife” (L127). Even with widely separated nouns the force of the preposition can be sustained: ana šugƯtim ša mƗrƯ uldušum u lu nadƯtim ša mƗrƯ ušaršûšu ezƝbim panƯšu ištakan “he has set his mind on leaving a priestess who has borne him sons or (on leaving) a temple woman who provided him with sons” (L137); bƯtam ana mutiša warkîm u sinništim šuƗti ipaqqidnjma “they shall entrust the house to her later husband and (to) that woman” (L177); dannum enšam ana la ¨abƗlim eknjtam almattam šutƝšurim “so that the strong might not oppress the weak, (to) show fair treatment to the orphan and widow” (xlviii:59-62). It can happen that the preposition is first repeated and then implied: dƯn mƗtim ana diƗnim purussê mƗtim ana parƗsim ¨ablim šutƝšurim “to judge the judgments in the land, to decide the decisions in the land, (to) show fair treatment to the oppressed” (xlvii:70-73). While some prepositional phrases may be seen to have an adverbial function, there are also some single words which function as adverbs. Some nouns inflected as accusative fulfil this function. Such “adverbial accusatives” may qualify a transitive verb where the direct object is also inflected as accusative: eqlam šipram ippeš “he shall do the work on the field” (L62); alpum snjqam awƯlam ikkip “the ox tossed the man in the street” (L250); mutu libbiša i¨¨assi “with her consent a husband may marry her” (L137). An intransitive verb may also be qualified adverbially by a noun inflected as accusative: rƝqnjssu ul ittallak “he shall not then go away empty” (L191). Some suffixes give words an explicitly adverbial significance. The suffix –iš is found in ar¨iš (cf. adj. ar¨u “fast”): ar¨iš likšussu “may it overpower him quickly” (l:32-33; cf. li:90); kamiš (cf. adj. kamû B “captured”; noun kamû “fetters”: kamîš lƯrnjšu “may he remove him in bonds” (li:23); mit¨Ɨriš (cf. adj. mit¨Ɨru “of equal size”; noun mit¨artu “a square”): mit¨Ɨriš izuzznj “they shall share equally” (L60; 77+f; cf. L165; 167; 170); šulmƗniš (cf. noun šulmu “peacefulness”): mukinnu išdƯšin … šulmƗniš “he is establishing foundations for them peacefully” (iv:40-44). This suffix may be augmented with –šam,292 as in njmišam (cf. noun njmu “day”): igirrê njmišam ina ma¨ar Marduk bƝliya lidammiqnj

292

It may be relevant to note that this augmentation happens to be identical in form to the marker of the accusative, and accustive nouns may also have adverbial force.

DETAILED NOTES: NON-DECLINING WORDS

251

“daily may they make my reputation good in the presence of Marduk” (xlviii:52-58). The suffix –a is found in ma¨ra (cf. ma¨rû “former”; ma¨ru “front”); the word itself may be augmented with ina:293 ša šƯmƗtušu ina ma¨ra illakƗ “whose decisions always come first” (xlix:99-100). The suffix -um (or more precisely –Ɲnum, from –Ɨnum) is found in elƝnumma (an augmented form of the adverb elƝnum; cf. elû). In CH elƝnumma occurs as a subordinating conjunction: elƝnumma … izuzznj “moreover they shall share …” (L165). It also occurs as an adverb: rƝûm … elƝnumma … ana bƝl eqlim inaddin “the shepherd shall in additon give … to the owner of the field” (L57). Similarly –um (or more precisely –Ɨnum) is found in arkƗnumma (an augmented form of the subordinating conjunction arkƗnum): šû warkƗnumma ina snjniša ittatƯlma “and subsequently he has been copulating with her” (L155). The word qerbum, which could at first sight be taken to be an adverb (inasmuch as it can be derived from the noun qerbu “interior” with an adverbial suffix –um, attested elsewhere in Akkadian) in CH functions as a preposition: mukinnu išdƯšin qerbum BƗbilim “establishing foundations for them within Babylon” (iv:40-44). The suffix –šu, which in form is identical to the 3rd sg. masc. pronominal suffix294 but seems to have demonstrative rather than pronominal significance, can be seen in the adverb requssu ( ay, not. abƗlu, vb. G (perfect forms are sometimes indistinguishable from forms of tabƗlu, to bring away): 1. to bring; 2. to remove; 3. to commit an offence; 4. + panû, to excuse someone of an offence (see CAD A/1, 18f.); [5. to have a value]. —1. šeriktam … ublam, she brought the dowry; ter¨atam … ublu, he brought the marriage price; šƯbƯ … lublam, let me bring witnesses; šƯbƯ … itbalam, he has brought witnesses. —2. šešnjnu mû ublnj, the water removed their barley; bibbulum itbal, the flood has eroded. —3. arnam kabtam ša ina aplnjtim nasƗ¨im ana abišu itbalam, he has committed an offence against his father serious enough for exclusion from the inheritance. —4. panƯšu ubbalnj, they shall excuse him. [—5. to have a value (CAD A/1, p. 20, s.v. 5bc). kƯma ubbalu … inaddin, he shall give according to the value it has]. Gtn: ina šulmim attabbalšinƗti, I have always led them in peace. ¼: to bring, have brought, have transported. ana šƝbultim ušƗbilšu (vnt. ušƗbilaššu; ušƗbil), he made him make arrangements for the transport; mimma ša šnjbulu ašar ša šnjbulu la iddinma, what was to be transported he did not deliver to the place for delivery; ana bƯt emim biblam ušƗbil (vnt. uštƗbil), he brought a wedding-gift to the house of his father-in-law. ¼t: to cause to flow over (cf. tabƗlu ¼). ina kƗrišu pƯtum ittepte u ugƗram mê uštƗbil, a break opens up in the dyke and lets water flow on the land. N: to be brought. mimma ša ibbablušum, whatever had been brought to him. abƗru (AHw. abƗru III), vb. G: to surround. D: (CAD ubburu): 1. to bring disrepute; 2. to accuse. —1. šumma awƯlum mimmûšu la ¨aliqma mimmê ¨aliq iqtabi babtašu njtebbir (vnt. njtabbir), if a man without anything lost says, “Something is lost”, he brings disrepute on his community. —2. awƯlum awƯlam ubbirma nƝrtam elišu iddƯma, a man accused a man and charged him with murder; aššat awƯlim mussa ubbiršima itti zikarim šanîm ina utnjlim la iÑÑabit, as for the wife of a man, her husband accused her of sleeping with another male; she was not caught; cf. mubbiru, ptcp. abƗtu B. G: to flee. N: to flee away. aššum Ɨlšu izƝruma innabitu, because he has hated his city and fled; cf. munnabtu, ptcp. 1

For a full glossary of CH, with exhaustive citations, see Richardson 2000, 136-339. This abridgement of that glossary is intended to be sufficient for the purposes of grammar rather than for lexicography.

274

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

abbuttu, nom. slave’s distinguishing mark. abbutti wardim la šêm ugallib, he shaved off the mark of a slave not his own. abnu, nom. 1. gem-stone; 2. stone weight. —1. kaspam ¨urƗÑam abnam silver, gold or a gem-stone. —2. ina abnim rabƯtim, with the heavy stone weight. absinnu, nom. see šeru, cultivable field. abu, nom. father. abum … mƗrnja iqtabi, the father has said, “My sons”; abuša šeriktam išrukušim, her father provided her with a dowry; abašu u ummašu i¨iaÓ, he pines for his father and mother; ina bƯt abiša wašbat, she is living in her father’s house; kƯma emnjq bƯt abim šeriktam išarraknjšimma, they shall provide a dowry for her according to the wealth of her father’s estate; ina makknjr bƯt abim mit¨Ɨriš izuzznj, they shall share the property of the father’s estate equally; Anum rabûm abu ilƯ, almighty Anum, the father of the gods; kƯma abim wƗlidim, like a natural father. abnjbu, nom. deluge, primaeval flood. mƗssu ana til abnjbim litƝr, let him turn his land into a ruin of the Deluge. abullu, nom. city-gate. ina abullim itta¨lalnj, they have been hung on the city-gate. aburru, nom. meadow. dadmƯ aburrƯ, settlements in the meadows. adannu, nom. appointed time. adannam … išakkannjšumma, they shall set him a time limit. adƗru, vb. to fear. errƝt ilƯ la Ưdurma, he was not afraid of the divine curse. adi, non-decl. A. prep. 1. until (CAD adi A prep.; see A/1, 117b, s.v. 2b); 2. times (with a numerical expression; CAD A/1, 121, s.v. 4; AHw. s.v. A3d); 3. with (CAD A/1, 121b, adi B prep.). —1. ištu rƝš šattim adi ¨amšim war¨im, from the beginning of the year to the fifth month. —2. adi ¨amšƯšu, five times; adi 6-šu, six times. —3; cf. qadu. B. subordinating conj. 1. as long as (with stative; CAD A/1 112, adi conj.; AHw. s.v. B3); 2. until (with durative, see AHw. s.v. B1). —1. adi kirâm Ñabtu, as long as the orchard is held; adi balÓat, as long as she lives. —2. adi napištašu ibellû, until his life expires. agƗru, vb. G: to hire. ana šattim ištiat Ưgur, he hired for one year; agram Ưgurma, he hired a mercenary; malƗ¨am u eleppam Ưgurma, he hired a boatman and a boat; alpam Ưgurma, he hired an ox; liƗtim ereqqam u murteddƯša Ưgur, he hired cattle, a waggon and a driver. aggu, adj. enraged. ina libbiša aggim, with an enraged heart. agru, nom. hired labourer, mercenary. agram Ưgur, he hired a labourer; agram pnj¨am im¨urma, he received a mercenary as a substitute. agû, nom. crown. agâm kussâm ša šarrnjtim liÓeršu, let him remove from him the crown and throne of kingship. a¨Ɨzu, vb. G: 1. to take a wife for onself; 2. to choose a wife for someone else. —1. aššatam Ư¨uz mƗrƯ njlissumma, he took a wife and she bore him sons; mussa sinništam šanƯtam i¨¨az, her husband shall take another woman; aššassu ibiršu ul i¨¨az, his neighbour shall not marry his wife; ana šugƯtim a¨Ɨzim panƯšu ištakan, he has set his mind on taking a priestess. —2. ana mƗrƯ ša iršnj aššƗtim Ư¨uz, he chose a wife for the sons he had obtained; ana mƗrƯšu Ñe¨rim aššatam la Ư¨uz, he did not find a wife for his youngest son. ¼: 1. to arrange a marriage; 2. to make someone do something,

GLOSSARY

275

teach. —1. aššatam uša¨¨aznjšu, they shall make him take a wife. —2. šipir qƗtišu uštƗ¨issu, he has made him take up his manual skill; aššum errƝtim šinƗti šaniamma uštƗ¨iz, because of these curses he has instructed someone else; ana šutƝšur nišƯ mƗtim njsim šnj¨uzim uwaerranni, he commissioned me to show justice and to make the people of the land adopt good practice. a¨u A, nom. brother. warka abum ana šƯmtim ittalku innjma a¨¨nj izuzznj, after the father has gone to his destiny, when the brothers do the sharing; ana a¨išunu Ñe¨rim, for their little brother; aplnjssa ša a¨¨Ưšama, her inheritance is for her brothers; a¨¨njša kƯma emnjq bƯt abim šeriktam išarraknjšimma, her brothers shall provide a dowry for her according to the substance of her father’s estate. a¨u B, nom. arm, side; a¨i ul addƯ, I have not been lazy (lit. I have not dropped my arm). a¨û, adj. (CAD A/1, 210), other. nadƯtum tamkƗrum u ilkum a¨ûm, a priestess, a merchant, or some other duty-bound person; ana a¨îm ul inaddin, she shall not give to another person. akƗlu, vb. G: to eat. adi balÓat ikkal, she shall eat as long as she lives; ina bƯtƯšu ša akƗlim ibašši, there is something to eat in his house. ¼: to allow to feed. eqlam ÑƝnam uštƗkil, he has allowed them to feed on the grass. aklu, nom. overseer, in wakil ¨aÓÓƗtim, overseer of the sceptres (CAD A/1, 280: s.v. aklu A, e), now read as ša ¨aÓÓƗtim, captain. alƗdu, vb. to give birth. mƗrƯ ittalad, she has borne sons; ana mƗrƯ ša amtum uldušum, for the sons which the slave girl bore him; šugƯtim ša mƗrƯ uldušum, the priestess who bore him sons; ¨Ưrtašu ša mƗrƯ la uldušum, the first wife who did not bear him sons; rabƯtišu ša mƗrƯ waldat, his foster mother who could bear sons. alƗku, vb. G: 1. to go; 2. + ilkam, to do a duty. —1. ana Id illak, he shall go to the river; ana bullîm illiku, he went to extinguish a fire; warki abišunu illaknj, they shall go after their father; alƗkšu qabnj la illik, his despatch was ordered, he did not go; ana ma¨ar ÑalmƯya lillikma, let him go before my statue; šƯmƗtušu ina ma¨ra illaka, his decisions go first. —2. ilkam alƗkam ilei, he is able to do the duty; ilikšu ittalak, he has performed his duty. Gt: 1. to go away; 2. + ana šƯmtim to pass away to one’s destiny, die. —1. ana bƯt abiša ittallak, she shall go away to her father’s house; reqnjssu ul ittallak, he shall not go away destitute; ina libbnj mƗtim ittalkamma, he came and went in the land. —2. nƗdinƗnum ana šƯmtim ittalak, the seller died. alƗlu, vb. G: to execute by hanging. i¨allalnjšu, they shall hang him. N: to be suspended. ina abullim itta¨lalnj, they have been suspended on the city-gate. aldû, nom. seed-corn. aldâm iqƯpšu, he lent him seed-corn. Ɨlidu, ptcp. (< alƗdu) progenitor. kƯma abim wƗlidim, like a father, a progenitor. Ɨliku, ptcp. (< alƗku) walking. Ɨliku imniya, the one walking at my right hand. almattu, nom. widow. almattum ša mƗrnjša Ñe¨¨eru, a widow whose sons are small; eknjtam almattam šutƝšurim, to show the orphan and the widow justice. alpu, nom. ox. alpam ana diƗšim Ưgur, he hired an ox to thresh; alpam kƯma alpim ana bƝl alpim iriab, he shall restore an ox for the ox to the owner of the ox; idƯ alpim ša warka 4 kur šeam idƯ alpim ša qabla 3 kur šeam, the fee for the rear-ox: four kur of barley; the fee for the front-ox: three kur of barley; alpum snjqam ina alƗkišu awƯlam

276

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

ikkipma, an ox gored a man as it walked in the street; asî alpim ulu imƝrim lu alpam ulu imƝram simmam kabtam Ưpušma, a surgeon for an ox or a sheep made a dangerous incision on the ox or the sheep; alpam … išriq, he stole … an ox; alpam ana nipûtim ittepe, he has seized an ox as a pledge; ina qinnaz alpim … imma¨¨aÑ, he shall be beaten with an ox-tail. Ɨlu, nom. city. Ɨlum u rabiƗnum, the city and the governor; Ɨlšu iktašdam, he has reached his city; Ɨlšu iddƯma, he has deserted his city; Ɨlam ušeÑÑûšu, they shall make him leave the city; ¨alƗq Ɨlišu, the destruction of his city; eli Ɨlišu ezziš lissƯma, may he shout angrily over his city; ÑillƯ ÓƗbum ana Ɨliya tariÑ, my beneficial shadow is stretched over my city. amƗru, vb. G: 1. to investigate; 2. to see a result. —1. dayyƗnnj awâtišunu immarnjma, the judges shall investigate their evidence. —2. nƝmelam la Ưtamar, he has not seen any profit; bitiqtam Ưtamar, he has seen a loss. ammu, nom. people. mušnjšer ammi, providing justice for the people. amtu, nom. female slave. amat ekallim, a palace slave; amat muškƝnim, a working-man’s slave; itti amƗtim imannnjši, she shall count her among the slaves; sinništum šƯ kƯma amtim ina bƯt mutiša uššab, that woman shall live like a slave in her husband’s house; ana mƗrƯ ša amtum uldušum, for the sons which the slave bore him; mƗrnj ¨Ưrtim u mƗrnj amtim mit¨Ɨriš izuzznj, the wife’s sons and the slave’s sons shall share with one another; mƗrnj ¨Ưrtim ana mƗrƯ amtim ana wardnjtim ul iraggumnj, the wife’s sons shall have no claim for service from the slave’s sons. ana, 1. prep.; 2. ana ma¨ar (compound prep.). —1. nudunnâm ša mussa iddinušim ana mƗrnjša izzib, she shall leave the gift which her husband gave her for her sons; ša ana ¨arrƗn šarrim alƗkšu qabû, who was told to go on an expedition for the king; ana asîm 2 šiqil kaspam inaddin, he will give two shekels of silver to the physician; ana qƯštišu inaddiššum, he shall give him as his fee; ana mutišsa Id išalli, she shall immerse herself in the river for her husband’s sake; ÑillƯ ÓƗbum ana Ɨliya tariÑ, my beneficent shadow is stretched over my city; ana šeššet war¨Ư išakkannjšumma, they shall set for him six months; ana šisƯt nƗgirim, at the shout of the herald; ana šƯm šikarim, for the price of beer; ana šammƯ ÑƝnim šnjkulim … la imtagarma, he has not come to an agreement to allow the flock to eat the plants; dannum enšam ana la ¨abƗlim, so that the strong should not destroy the weak; ana mƗrnjtim ilqƝma, he received into sonship; ana šƝbultim ušƗbilšu, he made him take as a consignment; ana nikkassim ul iššakkan, it shall not be set together with the reckoning; suluppƯ …ina kaspika tabal, take away dates instead of your silver; ana bƝlišuma it is the responsibility of its owner; ana ramƗniša, by itself; ana gamrim, completely. —2. ana ma¨ar, in front of. anƗku, pron. I. Ñammurabi … anƗku, I am Hammurabi; migir Ištar anƗku, I am the favourite of Ishtar; anƗkuma rƝûm mušallimum, I am indeed the shepherd who brings peace. andurƗru, nom. freedom. andurƗršunu iššakkan, their freedom shall be arranged. annû, adj. (demonstrative). this. errƝtim anniƗtim!, these curses; annƯtam liqbƯma, let him say this.

GLOSSARY

277

apƗlu A, vb. G: to be responsible for a debt, pay. tamkƗršu ippal, he shall pay his merchant; baqrƯ ippal, he shall pay the claim. D: to satisfy a demand, pay a debt (CAD); alt. to make someone an heir (AHw. apƗlu II, D-theme, denominative verb). ana kaspim ul inaddin šaniam ul uppal aplussa ša a¨¨Ưšama, she shall not exchange it for silver or pay a debt to someone else (alt. make someone else the heir), her inheritance belongs to her brothers. apkallu, nom. expert. apkal ilƯ, expert of the gods. aplu, nom. heir. aplum mƗr ¨Ưrtim ina zittim inassaqma, the heir, the son of the first wife, shall make a selection from the allocation; aplum dannum ša SinmuballiÓ, the strong heir of Sin-muballit. aplnjtu, nom. inheritance. aplnjssa ša a¨¨Ưšama, her inheritance belongs to her brothers. apšƯtû, nom. agreement. errƝšum u bƝl eqlim ana apšƯtêm izuzznj, the cultivator and the owner of the field shall share according to an agreement. apu, nom. reed bed. kƯma išƗtim ezzetim ša apim, like a raging fire in the reeds. apû, vb. G: to become visible. ¼: to cause to shine. šarrum ša ina Ninua ina Emešmeš ušnjpiu (vnt. ušƝpu; ušƯpu) mê Ištar, the king who made the power of Ishtar shine in Nineveh in Emeshmesh; cf. mušƝpû, ptcp. arƗku, vb. G: to become long. D: to lengthen. ¼amaš ¨aÓÓašu lirrik, may Shamash extend his rule. ¼: to make long; cf. mušƗriku, lengthening. arƗru, vb. G: to curse. šƯmƗtišu lƯrur, let him curse his destiny. arbau, num. four; kibrƗt arbaim, the four regions; cf. kibrƗt erbettim, see erbe. ardu, nom. male slave. wardum u amtum šunu mƗrnj mƗtim, the male slave and the female slave were native to the land; šarrum warassu uballaÓ, the king will let his slave live; ana bƯt warad ekallim u lnj warad muškƝnim irrubma, she entered the house of a slave of the palace or of a slave of a worker; wardum ina qƗt ÑƗbitƗnišu i¨taliq, the slave has escaped from the control of his captors; wardam šuƗti ina bƯtišu iktalƗšu warka wardum ina qƗtišu iÓÓaÑbat, he has kept that slave in his house, afterwards the slave was found in his possession; wardam kƯma wardim iriab, he shall recompense the slave with a slave; abbutti wardim, a slave-mark. ardnjtu, nom. slavery. mƗrnj ¨Ưrtim ana mƗrƯ amtim ana wardnjtim ul iraggumnj, the sons of the wife shall have no claim for slavery against the sons of the slave. ar¨iš, adv. quickly. ar¨iš likšudašu, may he do it for him quickly. ar¨u, nom. month. ištu rƝš šattim adi ¨amšim war¨im, from the beginning of the year until the fifth month. arka, 1. after (subordinating conj. + subjunctive); 2. afterwards (adv. + indicative); 3. ina warka, afterwards. —1. warka abum ana šƯmtim ittalku, after the father has died. —2. warka wardum ina qƗtišu ittaÑbat, afterwards the slave was found in his possession; warka mƗrƯ irtašƯma, afterwards he has had children. —3. ina warka mussa itturamma, afterwards her husband came back. arkƗnu, arkƗnum, arkƗnumma, adv. afterwards. warkƗnum (L167: alt. wa-ar-ka{-nuum}) amtum šî itti bƝltiša uštatam¨ir, afterwards that slave-girl has tried to rival her mistress; warkƗnumma dƯnšu Ưtene, it was afterwards that he has changed his

278

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

decision; šû warkƗnumma ina snjniša ittatƯlma, it was afterwards that he himself has had intercourse with her. arkatu, nom. 1. circumstances; 2. possessions. —1. dayyƗnnj warkat bƯt mutiša panîm iparrasnjma, the judges shall investigate the conditions in her former husband’s house; warkassa ina bƗbtiša ipparrasma, her circumstances shall be investigated in her city-gate. —2. ummum warkassa ana mƗriša ša irammu inaddin, the mother may give her possessions to the son whom she loves. arki, prep. 1. after (temporal); 2. behind (local). —1. warkišu eqelšu u kirƗšu ana šanîm iddinnjma, they gave his field and orchard to another after his departure; awƯlum warki abišu ina snjn ummišu ittatƯl, a man has had intercourse with his mother after the death of his father. —2. mƗrnj warki abišunu illaknj, the sons shall go after their father. arkƯtu, nom. future. ana warkiƗt njmƯ ana mƗtima šarrum ša ina mƗtim ibbaššû, a king who is found in this land at any time in the future. arkû, adj. 1. subsequent (temporal, CAD s.v. 1b2'); 2. rear (local, CAD s.v. 1d2'c). —1. ana mutiša warkîm, by her later husband; mƗrnj ma¨rûtum u warkûtum, the earlier and later children. —2. idƯ alpim ša warka 4 kur šeam, the fee for the rear ox: four kur of barley. arnu, nom. 1. offence; 2. blame; 3. penalty. —1. arnam kabtam ša ina aplnjtim nasƗ¨im la ublam, he did not commit an offence serious enough for exclusion from the inheritance. —2. mƗrƯ arnam immidnj, they shall lay the blame on the sons. —3. aran dƯnim šuƗti ittanašši, he will always have to pay the penalty in that trial; arnam kabtam, a harsh punishment. arqu, nom. verdure. mušalbiš warqim gigunƝ Aya, decorating the shrine of Aya with greenery. arratu, see erretu, curse. arû, vb. G: to lead away, take away (CAD arû A; AHw. warûm II). ana mƗt nukurtišu kamîš lƯrnjšu, let her remove him to a hostile land far away (col. li:23; alt. may she lead him captive to the land of his enemy; CAD s.v. 1c: A/2, 314a). Gtn (CAD, s.v. 2: A/2: itarrû): ina mƯšƯtim littarrnjšu, may they take him away into oblivion (col. l:6; alt. take him away (into captivity) unnoticed; CAD 315a). âru, vb. G: to advance. D: (AHw. wâru, D) to give an order. innjma Marduk ana šutƝšur nišƯ mƗtim njsim šnj¨uzim uwaeranni, when Marduk ordered me to show justice and make the people of the land adopt good practice. asakku, nom. demon. asakkam lemnam, wicked demon. asû, nom. physician for people and animals. asûm eÑemti awƯlim šebirtam uštallim, a physician has mended a man’s broken bone; asûm qerebšu la ilammadu, no physician understands the cause of it; asî alpim ulu imƝrim, a physician for cattle or sheep. aÑû, vb. G: 1. to leave, abandon; 2. to come out in a trial, produce evidence; 3. rise (of the sun). —1. la naÑratma waÑiƗt bƯssa usappa¨, she was not watchful, she was going out, she is wasting her home; ina bƯt mutiša ul uÑÑi, she shall not leave her husband’s house. —2. ina dƯnim ana šƯbnjt sarrƗtim njÑiamma, he came out in a trial with evidence fraudulent. —3. kƯma ¼amaš ana ÑalmƗt qaqqadim waÑêmma mƗtim

GLOSSARY

279

nuwwurim, to rise like Shamash over the mass of humanity and to illuminate the land. ¼: 1. to bring out, expel; 2. to lease property; 3. to cause to be light, allow to appear; 4. to cause to advance, cause to develop. —1. ina bƯtim šnjÑîm usa¨¨amnjši, they put pressure on her to leave the house; Ɨlam ušeÑÑûšu, they shall make him leave the town; ana šisƯt nƗgirim la uštƝÑiam, he has not brought him out at the shout of the herald. —2. eqlam ana errƝšnjtim ušƝÑƯma, he has leased out a field to be cultivated. —3. pušqƯ wašÓnjtim upetti nnjram ušƝÑišinƗšim, I have solved impossible difficulties, I have made light shine for them; ela ana la ¨assim rƝqƗ ana emqim ana tanƗdƗtim šuÑâ, although to the senseless they are empty to the wise they appear as treasures. —4. murÑam kabtam … ina biniƗtišu lišƗÑiaššuma, let him cause a serious disease … to develop on his body; cf. mušƝÑû, ptcp. ašƗbu, vb. G: 1. to reside; 2. to remain; 3. to be occupied with. —1. aššat awƯlim ša ina bƯt awƯlim wašbat ana waÑêm panƯša ištakanma, the wife of a man, who has been living in the man’s house, has determined to leave. —2. itti dayyƗnƯ ina dƯnim ul uššab, he shall not stay with the judges in the court. —3. ina ¨arrƗnim wašibma, he is involved in a journey. [¼: to allow to dwell. [ina bƯtišu ušešibma], he allowed him to live in his house (text resored with some uncertainty).] ašaridu (= ašru, place + Ɲdu, one), nom. chief. ašared šarrƯ, the chief of the kings. ašƗru A, vb. G: to provide for; cf. Ɨširu, ptcp. ašƗru C (AHw. wašƗrum; CAD (s.v. ešƝru) refers to uššuru) vb. G: to hang loose. Dt: to to go away free (AHw. s.v. Dt, 2b). nƯš ilim izakkarma njtaššar, he shall make a sworn statement and go away free; sinništum šî njtaššar, that woman shall go away free; itammƗma njtaššar, he shall swear and go away free. ašƗšu, vb. G: to be in distress. D: to misuse. ina ma¨ƗÑim ulu ina uššušim imtnjt, it has died from beating or abuse. [ašbu, resident, tenant. wašbum [bƯt muškƝnim] išƗm, a tenant will purchase a worker’s house.] Ɨširu, ptcp. (cf. ašƗru A). organising, providing. šarrum … Ɨšer bƯt Ema¨, the king… providing for the temple of Emah. aškƗpu, nom. leather worker. idƯ aškƗpim, the fees for a leather worker. ašnan, nom. grain. ašnƗn napišti nišƯ, grain for the sustenance of my people. ašru nom. place. ašar tam¨Ɨrim, the place of battle; ašar tƗ¨azim u qablim, the place of conflict and strife; mutƝr Eridu ana ašrišu, restoring Eridu as a holy place; ašar šipÓim, a place for judgment; ašar illiku, where he went; ašar Ưrubu, where she entered. ašru, adj. humble. wašrum muštƝmiqum, humble and prayerful. [aššƗbu (cf. ašbu), occupant, tenant. ana waššƗbim ina njmƯšu la malûtim waÑâm iqtabi, he has told the occupant to leave before his time expired.] aššatu, nom. wife. aššat awƯlim ša ina bƯt awƯlim wašbat, a man’s wife who resides in a man’s house; ana mƗrƯ ša iršû aššƗtim Ư¨uz ana mƗrišu Ñe¨rim aššatam la Ư¨uz, he took wives for the sons he raised but he did not take a wife for the smallest son; awƯlum ana aššatišu eqlam kirâm bƯtam u bƯšam išrukšim, a man donated to his wife a field, an orchard, a house or property; emušu ana bƝl aššatim mƗrtƯ ul ta¨¨az iqtabi,

280

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

his father-in-law has said to the wife’s intended husband, “You shall not take my daughter”; šumma awƯlum aššatam Ư¨uzma riksƗtiša la iškun sinništum šî ul aššat, if a man took a wife but did not make a contract with her, that woman is not a wife; aššatam Ư¨uzma mƗrƯ la ušaršƯšu, he took a wife but she did not provide him with sons; awƯlum aššatam Ư¨uzma labum iÑÑabassi, a man took a wife but she has been afflicted with disease; aššat awƯlim aššum zikarim šanîm mussa ušdƯk, a man’s wife has had her husband killed because of another man; aššat munnabtim ana mutiša ul itâr, the wife of a fugitive shall not return to her husband; aššassu mƗrašu u mƗrassu ana kaspim iddin, he sold his wife, his son or his daughter for silver. aššum, non-decl. 1. conj. because (+ subjunctive verb); 2. conj. so that (+ stative); 3. prep. because of, concerning. —1. aššum šamallâšu ikkiru, because he disputed with his trader; aššum mƗrƯ uldu, because she bore sons; aššum bƯt Ưpušu la udanninuma imqutu, because he did not strengthen the house he built and it collapsed. —2. aššum bƝl ¨ubullim ša mutiša la ÑabƗtiša mussa urtakkis, she will then make her husband agree so that no creditor of her husband seizes her. —3. aššum zikarim šanîm, because of another man; aššum ina bƯtim šnjÑîm usa¨¨amnjši, they pester her about leaving the house. ašÓu, adj. hard, difficult. pušqƯ wašÓnjtim upetti, I solved difficult problems. atappu, nom. ditch. atappašu ana šiqƯtim ipte, he has opened his dyke for irrigation. atƗru, vb. G: to be excessive. [D: to augment. uwatterma, he shall augment the official rate of interest.] ¼: to proclaim as excellent. BƗbilam šumšu ÑƯram ibbinj in kibrƗtim ušƗternjšu, they gave Babylon an exalted name and throughout the earth proclaimed it great; šarrum ša in šarrƯ šnjturu anƗku, I am the king proclaimed as excellent among kings; cf. mušƗtiru, ptcp. atkuppu, nom. basketmaker. idƯ atkuppim, the fees for a basketmaker. atru, adj. extra, superfluous. suluppƯ watrnjtim ša ina kirîm ibbaššu, the extra dates that are produced in the orchard. atta, pron. you (masc. sg.). ul abƯ attƗ, you are not my father. atti, pron. you (fem. sg.). ul ummƯ attƯ, you are not my mother. awƗtu, nom. statement, words. awat iqbû la uktƯn, he cannot substantiate the statement he spoke; awƯlum ¨ablum ša awatam iraššû, a man in trouble who will make a statement; awatam likallimšu, let him explain his words; awƗt mƯšarim, words of justice; awƗtiya la uštepƝl, let him not change my words; ina awat Marduk, according to the word of Marduk; awatum maruštum ša ¼amaš ar¨iš likšussu, let the terrible word of Shamash quickly overpower him. awƯltu, nom. woman. awƯltam šuƗti iqallnjši, that woman, they shall burn her. awƯlu, nom. man. passim. awƯlnjtu, nom. person, human being. awƯlnjtum ša šumam nabiat, a person who has been given a name; zƝr awƯlnjtim ay ibni, let him produce no human descendant. ay, also Ɨ, prohibitive particle. not. dƯnšu ay idƯn, let him not pass judgment. ayyƗbu, nom. enemy. mutamme¨ ayyƗbƯ, grasping the enemies.

GLOSSARY

281

B babƗlu (variant of abƗlu, see AHw.), vb. to bring, see bƗbilu. bƗbilu, ptcp. (< babƗlu), bringing. bƗbil ¨egallim ana Egišnugal, bringing wealth to Egishnugal. babtu, nom. community. babtašu njtebbir, he has made an accusation against his community; warkassa ina babtiša ipparrasma, her circumstances shall be investigated by her community. bƗbu, nom. doorway. awƯlam šuƗti idukknjšuma ina bƗbišu i¨allalnjšu, they shall kill that man, they shall hang him in his doorway. bƗiru, nom. hunter. rƝdûm bƗirum, a soldier, a hunter. balƗÑu, vb. to ogle, see palƗsu, to covet (cf. BAL3 xiv). balƗÓu, vb. G: to live. adi balÓat, as long as she lives. D: to allow to live, restore to life, restore to health. aššassu uballaÓ u šarrum warassu uballaÓ, he may allow his wife to live and the king may allow his subject to live; awƯlam ubtalliÓ, he has saved the man’s life; simmam kabtam Ưpušma ubtalliÓ, he performed a serious operation and has restored its health; Ưn awƯlim ubtalliÓ, he has saved the man’s sight. balƗÓu, nom. life. balƗÓam ša itti mnjtim šitannu ana šƯmtim lišƯmšum, may he destine for him a life that is in conflict with death. balÓu, adj. alive. eliš ina balÓnjtim lissu¨šu, may he cut him off from those who are alive above. balu, prep. 1. without; 2. without the knowledge of. —1. balum šƯbƯ u riksƗtim ištƗm, he purchased without witnesses or contracts. —2. balum abišu u ummišu, without the knowledge of his father and his mother; balum itƝšu, without the knowledge of his neighbour; balum dayyƗnƯ, without the knowledge of the judges. balû, vb. G: to come to an end. adi napištašu ibellû until his soul expires. D: to bring to an end. qablƗtim ubelli, he has made the conflict cease; awƯlum ša ana bullîm illiku, a man who went to extinguish a fire. bƗnƯtu (see CAD banû vb. A), ptcp. (fem.). creator. Nintu … ummum bƗnƯtƯ, Nintu … the mother, my creator. banû, vb. G: to engender, beget. zƝr šarrnjtim ša Sîn ibniušu, descendant of the royalty which Sin engendered; zƝr awƯlnjtim ay ibni, may he not beget human descendants. bƗnû, ptcp. (< banû; see CAD banû vb. A), creator. ittum Dagan bƗnîšu, by the decree of Dagan his creator; Sîn bƝl šamê ilum bƗnî, Sin the lord of the sky, the god who created me. baqƗru, see paqƗru, to claim. baqrnj, nom. claim. nƗdinƗnšu baqrƯ ippal, the one who sold him shall be responsible for the claim. bâru (CAD bƗru A), vb. G: to become certain. D: to make a declaration. mimmâšu ¨alqam ma¨ar ilim ubârma, in the presence of the god he shall declare what has been lost; babtašu ina ma¨ar ilim ubâršuma, the officials of his city shall make a declaration about him in the presence of the god.

282

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

bašû, vb. G: to exist. rugummâm ša ina dƯnim šuƗti ibaššû, the loss that pertains in that trial; ¨ubullum elišu ibašši, he is in debt; ina bƯtišu ša akƗlim ibašši, in his house there is something to eat; bƝlum ša kƯma abim wƗlidim ana nišƯ ibaššû, the lord who exists like a natural father for his people. ¼: 1. to produce crops; 2. to have children; 3. to allow to develop. —1. ina eqlim šeam la uštabši, he has not produced barley from the field; ašnƗn napišti nišƯ ay ušabši, may he not produce grain for the life of the people. —2. mƗrƯ uštabši, she has produced sons; šumšu u zikiršu ina mƗtim la šubšâm, not producing a name or reputation in the land. —3. rƝûm Ưgnjma ina tarbaÑim pissatam uštabši, he hired a shepherd and he has allowed disease to develop in the pen. N (N-theme forms can be confused with G-theme forms, see CAD B 161a, last paragraph of general discussion): 1. to exist; 2. to be produced (agriculturally); 3. to result. —1. šarrum ša ina mƗtim ibbaššû, a king who shall exist in the land; elišunu ¨ubullum ittabši, they have incurred a debt. —2. šeam ša ina eqlim ibbaššû, the barley that was produced from the field. —3. nƝmelam u butuqqâm ša ibbaššû, the profit or the loss that shall result. bƝltu, nom. mistress of a household, lady (as divine epithet). amtum šî itti bƝltiša uštam¨ir, that slave-girl has tried to rival her mistress; ina ma¨ar Marduk bƝliya ZarpƗnƯtum bƝltiya, in the presence of my lord Marduk and my lady Sarpanitu; Ištar bƝlet tƗ¨azim u qablim, Ishtar, the mistress of conflict and strife. bƝlu, nom. 1. lord (an epithet for persons and deities); 2. master, owner, possessor. —1. awƯlum šû lu šarrum lu bƝlum lu iššiakkum ulu awƯlnjtum ša šumam nabiat, whether that man is a king, a lord, a governor, or a person with designated responsibility; Ñammurabimi bƝlum, the lord Hammurabi; Marduk bƝlišu, his lord Marduk; Adad bƝl ¨egallim, Adad lord of plenty; bƝlum tukultƯ, the lord, my trust. —2. bƝl bƯtim, the owner of a house; bƝl eqlim, the owner of a field; bƝl wardim, the owner of a slave; bƝl alpim, the owner of an ox; bƝl šƝbultim, the owner of a package; bƝl ¨ulqim, the owner of lost property; bƝl ¨ubullim, creditor (lit. “the owner of capital”); bƝl simmim, the person with an injury. bennu, nom. epilepsy. benni elišu imtaqut, epilepsy has struck him. bibbulu, see bubbulu. biblu, nom. marriage gift. awƯlum ša ana bƯt emišu biblam ušƗbilu, the man who had the marriage gift brought to his father-in-law’s house. biltu, nom. rent. bilat kirƯm, rent for the orchard; eqelšu ana biltim ana errƝšim iddinma u bilat eqlišu imta¨ar, he gave his field for rent to a labourer and has received rent for his field; nƗši biltim, one who pays rent. binâtu, nom. (pl.), limbs, body. biniƗtišu kƯma Ñalam Óiddim li¨buš, may he shatter his limbs like a clay statue; murÑam kabtam … ina biniƗtišu lišƗÑiaššuma, let him cause a serious disease to break out in his body. bƯru, nom. divination. ina bƯrišu šƯram lemnam … liškunšum, in his divination may he provide a bad omen … for him. bƯšu, nom. possessions, goods for trade. bƯtam ipušnj bƯšam iršû, they made a house and acquired possessions; muttat eqlim kirîm u bƯšim, a half of the field, the orchard and the goods; šeam šƯpƗtim šamnam u mimma bƯšam ana pašƗrim iddin, he gave barley,

GLOSSARY

283

wool, oil or some other product for reselling; kaspam ¨urƗÑam abnam u bƯš qƗtišu ana awƯlim iddinma, he gave silver, gold, jewels or small possessions to the man. bitiqtu, nom. loss. bitiqtum ša errƝšimma, the loss will be the labourer’s; ašar illiku bitiqtam Ưtamar, he makes a loss in the place where he went. bƯtu, nom. 1. house, household, shrine. —1. bƯtam ana awƯilim Ưpušma, he built a house for the man; bƯt imqutu, the house which collapsed; ina bƯt Ưpušu uššamma, she shall dwell in the house that he built; ana bƯtiša itâr, she shall return to her house; bƯt mubbirišu itabbal, he shall take away the house of his accuser; awƯlum bƯtam ipluš, the man burgled the house; šƝšu ana našpƗknjtim ina bƯt awƯlim išpukma, he stacked his barley in another man’s house for storage; ana 1 musar bƯtim, for one unit of measurement of the building; šƗyyimƗnum ina bƯt nƗdinƗnim kasap išqulu ileqqe, the purchaser shall take from the seller’s house the silver he paid; bƯt abim, the house of the father; bƯt wardim, the house of the slave; bƯt ilim, the house of the god; ina Esagil bƯtim ša kƯma šamê u erÑetim išdƗšu kƯnƗ, in Esagila, the shrine whose foundations are as secure as heaven and earth; bƯt il ƗlƯšu, the shrine of the god of his city; šƝd bƯtim, the demon of the shrine. bubbulu, nom. floodwater. eqlam Adad irta¨iÑ ulu bibbulum itbal, Adad has swept across the field or a flood has eroded it. bubnjtu, nom. famine. mƗssu ina ¨uša¨¨im u bubnjtim li¨alliq, may he annihilate his land by hunger and famine. bulÓu, nom. life. ina bulÓišu, during his life. buru, nom. measurement of area. ana 1 burum 10 kur šeam imaddad, he shall measure out ten kur of barley per bur. butuqqû, nom. loss. nƝmelam u butuqqâm ša ibbašû, any profit or loss that resulted.

D dadmnj, nom. (pl.), settlements. nišƯ dadmƯ aburrƯ ušarbiÑ, I let the people of the settlements in the pastureland rest. dâku, vb. G: to kill, put to death (judicially). awƯlum alpam imƝram Ưgurma ina ÑƝrim nƝšum iddnjkšu, a man hired an ox or a sheep and a lion killed it in the desert; mƗrašu idukknj, they shall execute his son; ina pani pilšim šuƗti idukknjšuma i¨allalnjšu, they shall kill him in front of that opening and they shall hang him up. ¼: to arrange a murder. aššat awƯlim aššum zikarim šanîm mussa ušdƯk, a woman had her husband murdered because of another man. N: to be executed. ša šurqam ina qƗtišu im¨uru iddâk, the one who received the stolen property into his possession should be killed. damƗmu, vb. G: to grieve. ana eÓlnjtišu liddammam, let him grieve with his young men. damƗqu, vb. G: to be good. D: to show kindness. njmišam ina ma¨ar Marduk bƝlƯya ZarpƗnƯtum bƝltƯya lidammiqnj, let them show kindness every day in the presence of my lord Marduk and my lady Zarpanitum; cf. mudammiqu, ptcp. damiqtu, nom. blessing, favour. damqƗtišu ana lemnƝtim litƝr, may he change his blessings into troubles.

284

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

damqu, adj. good, beneficent. mƗtam ussam kƯnam u rƯdam damqam ušaÑbitu, he made the land accept proper behaviour and good customs; mutêr lamassišu damiqtim ana Ɨlim Aššur, bringing back the beneficent statue to Asshur. damu, nom. blood. qarrƗdƯšu lišamqit damƯšunu erÑetam lišqi, may he let his warriors fall, may he let the earth drink their blood. danƗnu, vb. G: to be strong. D: 1. to strengthen, repair; 2. to perform reliable work. —1. kƗršu la udanninma, he did not strengthen his dyke; igƗram šuƗti udannan, he shall strengthen the wall; eleppam šuƗti inaqqarma ina makknjr ramanišu udannanma, he shall dismantle that boat and repair it properly from his own resources. —2. šipiršu la udanninma, he did not perform strong enough work; aššum bƯt Ưpušu la udanninuma, because he did not made the house he constructed strong enough. dannatu, nom. place of security (CAD s.v. 2b). ša ina dannat šarrim turru, who was taken back to the king’s camp. dannu, adj. strong. šarrum dannum, the mighty king; dannum enšam ana la ¨abƗlim, so that the strong should not oppress the weak; Nergal dannum ina ilƯ, Nergal, strongest of the gods; eleppam dannatam, a strengthened boat. dânu, vb. G: to conduct a trial, legislate. dayyƗnum dƯnam idƯn, a judge conducted a trial; dƯn mƗtim ša adƯnu, the law of the land which I administered. dƗriš, adv. for ever. dƗriš išƯmnj, they made an everlasting decree. dƗriu, see dƗrû, everlasting. dƗru, nom. generation; ana dƗr, for ever. šumƯ ina damiqtim ana dƗr lizzakir, let my name be uttered as a blessing for ever. dƗrû, adj. everlasting. šarrnjtam dƗrƯtam ša kƯma šamê u erÑetim išdƗša šuršudƗ, an everlasting kingdom with foundations as secure as heaven and earth. dâÑu, vb. G: to trick. awƯlum gallƗbam idƗÑma, a gentleman tricked the barber. dâšu, vb. G: to thresh. alpam ana diƗšim Ưgur, he hired an ox to thresh. dayyƗnu (CAD dayƗnu), nom. judge. dayyƗnum dƯnam idƯn, purussâm iprus, kunukkam ušƝzib, the judge conducted the trial, reached a decision, had a seal placed on the document; dayyƗnnj adannam ana šeššet war¨Ư išakkannjšumma, the judges shall fix a date for him in six months; ina qibƯt ¼amaš dayyƗnim rabîm ša šamê u erÑetim, by the will of Shamash, the great judge of heaven and earth. dayyƗnnjtu (see CAD dayƗnnjtu), nom. judiciary. ina pu¨rim ina kussî dayyƗnnjtišu ušetbûšuma, they shall have him removed from the assembly, from his seat of judgment. dekû, vb. G: to move, perpetrate. tuššamma idke! (vnt. iqbi) iddƗk, he perpetrated corruption, he shall be killed (L11: for idkƝ read iddi; so Roth and CAD). dešû, vb. G: to be abundant. D: to make abundant; cf. mudeššnj, ptcp. dimmatu, nom. moaning. ina tƗnƝ¨im u dimmatim, with moaning and wailing. dƯnu, nom. 1. law; 2. legal problem; 3. verdict; 4. trial, tribunal. —1. dƯnƗt mƯšarim ša Ñammurabi šarrum lƝûm ukinnuma, laws of justice which Hammurabi, the able king, established. —2. awatam likallimšu dƯnšu lƯmur libbašu linappišma, let him explain the statement, let him see his problem, let him relax in his heart; rƝdiam ina dƯnim ana dannim ištarak, he has given a soldier to a strong man in a legal dispute;

GLOSSARY

285

aran dƯnim šuƗti ittanašši, he shall pay the penalty in that case. —3. dƯnšina lidƯn, let him reach a verdict for them; dƯnšu Ưtene, he has changed his decision. —4. itti dayyƗnƯ ina dƯnim ul uššab, he shall not sit with the judges in a trial; ina dƯnim ana šƯbnjt sarrƗtim njÑiamma, he came into the tribunal with false evidence. dumqu, nom. favour. Ninkarrak mƗrat Anim qƗbiat dumqiya, Ninkarrak, the daughter of Sin, speaking in my favour. duppuru, vb. D: to absent onself. ina pani ilkim iddƯma uddappir, he was negligent about his duty and has absented himself.

E ebƝbu, vb. G: to be clean. D: 1. to cleanse (CAD s.v. 2.b.2ƍ); 2. to be cleared of an accusation (CAD, s.v. 2.d). —1. awƯlam šuƗti Id njtebbibaššuma (vnt. njtabbibaššuma), the River has cleansed that man. —2. rƝûm ma¨ar! ilim ubbamma (vnt. ubbabma), the shepherd shall be cleared before the god; cf. mubbibu, ptcp. ebnjru, nom. harvest. ina ebnjrim kƯma riksƗtišu šeam ileqqe, he shall take the barley at harvest-time according to his contract. edƝšu vb. G: to be new. D: to renew; cf. muddišu, ptcp. edû, see idû, to know. egirrû, see igirrû, reputation. egû, vb. to be negligent. šamallûm ƯtegƯma kanƯk kaspim ša ana tamkƗrim iddinu la ilteqe, the salesman has been careless and has not taken the sealed receipt for the silver he gave to the merchant; malƗ¨um ƯgƯma, the boatman was negligent; ana ÑalmƗt qaqqadim ša Ellil išrukam rƝûssina Marduk iddinam ul Ɲgu, I did not neglect the people whom Enlil gave me and whose shepherding Marduk entrusted to me. eiltu, Ưltu, nom. debt (CAD). awƯlam eiltum iÑbassuma, the man fell into debt (lit. “debt took hold of him”); ana eiltišu inaddin, he shall give in exchange for his debt. ekallu, nom. palace. makknjr ilim u ekallim išriq, he stole property from the god or from the palace; ana ekallim ireddƯšu, he shall escort him to the palace; ekallum ipaÓÓarišu!, the palace shall ransom him; lu warad ekallim lu amat ekallim, a male or female slave of the palace; muzzaz ekallim, a palace attendant. eknjtu, nom. orphan girl. eknjtam almattam šutƝšurim, to show justice to the orphan and to the widow. ela, non-decl. (adv.), only. ela ana la ¨assim rƝqƗ ana emqim ana tanƗdƗtim šnjÑâ, only for the one who does not understand are they useless, by the wise they are uttered in praise. elƝnu, elƝnumma, conj. furthermore, in addition. elƝnumma ana 1 burum 20 kur šeam ana bƝl eqlim inaddin, in addition he shall give twenty kur of barley per bur to the owner of the field. eleppu (CAD elippu), nom. boat. eleppam išriq, he stole a boat; bƝl eleppim ša eleppušu Óebiat, the owner of the boat whose boat was sunk; mimma ša ina eleppišu ¨alqu, whatever was lost from that boat; elep ša muqqelpƯtim, a boat moving with the current; elep ša mƗ¨irtim, a boat moving against the current.

286

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

eli, prep. 1. against, on; 2. more than. awƯlum eli ugbabtum u aššat awƯlim ubƗnam ušatriÑma, a man pointed the finger at a priestess or a man’s wife; ¨ubullum elišu ibaššƯma, he is in debt; awƯlum eli awƯlim šeam u kaspam išnjma, a man has a claim against a man for barley or silver; benni elišu imtaqut, he has been afflicted with epilepsy; nƝrtam elišu iddƯma, he accused him of murder; eli Ɨlišu ezziš lissƯma, may he shout violently against his city; eli Ištar ÓƗba, pleasing to Ishtar. —2. awƯlum lƝt awƯlim ša elišu rabû imta¨aÑ, a man has struck the cheek of a man who is more important than himself. eliatu, see ƝlƯtu, additional amount. eliš, adv. above. nakrƯ eliš u šapliš assu¨, I eradicated my enemy above and below; eliš ina balÓnjtim lissu¨šu šapliš ina erÑetim eÓemmašu mê lišaÑmi, may he cut him off from the living above, may he let his ghost thirst for water in the land below. elƯtu, nom. extra part (AHw. s.v. ƝlƯtu, 202b-203a). eliƗt zittišu kasap ter¨atim išakkannjšumma aššatam uša¨¨aznjšu, as additions to his share they shall set aside for him silver for a bridal gift and make him marry a wife. ellilnjtu (AHw. Ellilnjtu), nom. leadership. ellilnjt kiššat nišƯ, the leadership of the people of the world. ellu, adj. pure, holy. zƯbƯ ellnjtim, holy sacrifices; rubûm ellum, holy prince. elû, vb. G: 1. to go up; 2. to give up, forfeit. —1. ištu ÑƝnum ugƗrim Ưtelianim, after the flocks came up from the meadow. —2. ina kaspišu Ưtelli, he shall forfeit his silver. D: to “raise the head”, exalt. ina BƗbilim Ɨlim ša Anum u Ellil rƝšƯšu ullû, in Babylon, the city which Anu and Enlil exalted; cf. mullnj, ptcp. ¼: to raise. malƗ¨um elep awƯlim uÓÓebbƯma uštƝlliašši, a boatman let a man’s boat sink but he has raised it. [elû, adj. upper, subsequent. Óuppam eliam la išÓur, he has not written a subsequent tablet (§5.12; cf. BAL 72+e: e(?)-[lil(?)]-am); alt. Óuppam eššam, new tablet (cf. Roth).] Ɲma, adv. wherever. warkassa Ɲma eliša ÓƗbu nadƗnam, giving her possessions wherever she wants. emƝdu, vb. G: to impose. mƗrƯ arnam immidnj, they shall impose the penalty on the sons; arnam kabtam šƝressu rabƯtam ša ina zumrišu la i¨alliqu lƯmussuma, let him impose a heavy punishment with great condemnation that will not disappear from his body. N: to come together. ištu innemdnj bƯtam Ưpušnj bƯšam iršû, after they came together they established a household and acquired property. emƝqu, vb. G (AHw.): to be wise. ¼t: cf. šutƝmuqu (CAD), to pray, supplicate; cf. muštƝmiqu, ptcp. emqu, adj. wise. emqum muttabbilum, the wise one, the accomplisher; ana emqim ana tanƗdƗtim šnjÑâ, by the wise they are uttered as praise. emu, nom. father-in-law. ana emišu mƗratka ul a¨¨az iqtabi, he has said to his prospective father-in-law, “I will not take your daughter”; awƯlum ša ana bƯt emišu biblam ušƗbilu, a man who had the gift brought to his prospective father-in-law’s house. emnjqu, nom. value. a¨¨njša kƯma emuq bƯt abim šeriktam išarraknjšimma, her brothers shall offer her a dowry proportionate to the value of the father’s property. enƝqu, vb. G: to suck. ¼: to allow to suck; cf. mušƝniqtu, ptcp. (fem.).

GLOSSARY

287

enƝšu, vb. G: to be weak. D: aldâm ilqƝma liƗtim njtenniš!, he took the feed and he has weakened the cattle. enšu, nom. weak. dannum enšam ana la ¨abƗlim, so that the strong should not oppress the weak. Ɲntu, see ugbabtu. enû, vb. to change, modify. ina dƯn idƯnu enêm ukannnjšuma, they shall convict him of changing the judgment he made; riksƗtišu ul inni, he shall not change his contracts. epƝsu, vb. G: to object. D: to make a problem. bƝl eqlim ul uppas, the owner of the field shall not make a problem. epƝšu, vb. to work, perform a task. bƯt šƗyyimƗnišunu u kƗšišišunu ippešnj, they shall work in the house of their purchaser or their controller; ina bƯt Ưpušu uššamma, she shall live in the house he made; eqlam šipram ippešma, he shall do the work in the field; simmam kabtam ina karzilli siparrim Ưpušma, he performed a serious operation with a bronze knife; bƯt Ưpušu imqutma, the house he made collapsed. epinnu, nom. plough. awƯlum epinnam ina ugƗrim išriq, a man stole a plough from a field. epištu, nom. work, achievement. mê iptƝma epšƝtim ša eqel itƝšu mê uštƗbil, he let out his water and allowed the water to erode the work in his neighbour’s field; eqel epšƝtim ša šeim ulu šamaššammƯ, a field for producing barley or sesame; epšƝtušu eli Ištar ÓƗba, his achievements please Ishtar. eqlu, nom. field. bƝl eqlim, the owner of the field; awƯlam ana panƯ eqlišu uzuzzim Ưgurma, he hired a man to stand in front of his field; ana kƗr eqlišu dunnunim a¨šu iddƯma, he was negligent about repairing the dyke on his field; eqlam ana errƝšnjtim ušƝÑƯma, he let out the field for cultivation; eqlam mayyƗrƯ ima¨¨aÑ, he shall break up the soil with mattocks; reûm eqel ušƗkilu inaÑÑarma, the shepherd shall look after the field he allowed to be grazed; eqlam ša innadnušum ana kirîm la izqup, he did not plant out the land that was given to him as an orchard. erbe, nom. four. kibrƗt erbettim, the four parts of the earth; erbe šanƗtim kiriam urabba, he shall make the orchard grow for four years; idƯ alpim ša warka 4 kur šeam, the fee for the rear ox is four kur of barley. erƝbu, vb. G: to enter, take up residence. ana šikarim ana bƯt sƯbim Ưterub, she has entered a drinking house for beer; innjma i¨¨uzuši qadum šeriktim ša bƯt abiša ana bƯt warad ekallim ulu warad muškƝnim Ưrubma, after he married her she moved into the house of the palace slave or the worker’s slave with the dowry from her father’s house; lƗma ana bƯt awƯlim irrubu ¨ubullum eliša ibašši, she was in debt before she moved into the man’s house; cf. Ɲribu, ptcp. ¼: to bring into. ana bƯtišu ušerrebši (vnt. ušerreb), he shall make her move into his house. ereqqu, see eriqqu. erƝšu A, vb. G: to demand. eqelšu kirƗšu u bƯssu irriš, he demanded his field, his orchard and his house. erƝšu B, vb. G: to cultivate. errƝssuma! eqelšu irrišma, his cultivator shall cultivate his field; eqlam la Ưrišma ittadi, he did not cultivate the field but has abandoned it; eqlam erƝšam iqtabi, he has asked someone to cultivate the field; mƗna¨Ɨt erƝšim, the costs of cultivation.

288

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

Ɲribu, ptcp. (< erƝbu). entering. ilnj Ɲribnjt Esagil, the gods entering Esagila. ereqqu, nom. waggon. liƗtim ereqqam u murteddƯša Ưgur, he hired oxen, a waggon and its driver. errƝšu, nom. cultivator. eqelšu ana biltim ana errƝšim iddinma, he gave his field to a cultivator for a rent; errƝšum ina eqlim šeam ulu šamaššammƯ uštabši, the cultivator has produced barley or sesame from the field; errƝšum aššum ina šattim ma¨rƯtim mƗnahƗtišu la ilqû eqlam erƝšam iqtabi, because he did not regain his costs from the previous year the cultivator has asked for the field to be cultivated. errƝšnjtu, nom. ploughing, cultivation. eqlam ana errƝšnjtim ušƝÑƯma, he let out the field for cultivation. erretu, nom. curse. errƝtiya imƝšma errƝt ilƯ la Ưdurma, he forgot my curses and did not fear the divine curses; errƝtam maruštam lƯrurnj, let them curse him with an evil curse. erÑetu, nom. 1. territory; 2. earth; 3. underworld. —1. rabiƗnum ša ina erÑetišunu u paÓÓišunu ¨ubtum i¨¨abtu, the governor in whose territory or province the robbery was committed. —2. ina erÑetišu ašnƗn napišti nišƯ ay ušabši, let there be no grain in the earth to nourish the people; damƯšunu erÑetam lišqi, let the ground drink their blood; Adad bƝl ¨egallim gugal šamê u erÑetim rƝÑnja, Adad lord of plenty, irrigator of heaven and earth, my helper; šarrnjtam dƗrƯtam ša kƯma šamê u erÑetim išdƗša šuršudƗ, an everlasting kingdom the foundations of which are as sure as heaven and earth; ilnj rabûtum ša šamê u erÑetim, the great gods of heaven and earth; mušaklil mimma šumšu ana Nippur markas šamê erÑetim, providing every kind of thing for Nippur, the bond between heaven and earth. —3. eliš ina balÓnjtim lissu¨šu šapliš ina erÑetim eÓemmašu mê lišaÑmi, may he cut him off from those living above, make his shadow thirst for water in the underworld below. eršu A, adj. wise. ša ušaklilušu erištum Mama, whom the wise one, Mama, brought to perfection. eršu B, adj. cultivated. eqel < šeim> eršam ulu eqel šamaššammƯ eršam iddin, he gave a field planted with barley or a field planted with sesame. esƝpu, vb. G: to gather. eqlam erišma šeam ulu šamaššammƯ ša ibbasšû esip tabal, cultivate the field, gather the barley and the sesame which will be produced, take it away. esƝru A, vb. G: to press for payment. tamkƗršu Ưsiršuma, his merchant pressed him for payment. eÑƝdu, vb. harvest. bƝl eqlim eqelšu iÑÑid, the owner of the field shall harvest his field. eÑemtu, nom. bone. šumma eÑemti awƯlim ištebir eÑemtašu ušebbirnj, if he has broken the bone of a man they shall break his bone. ešƝru vb. G: to be straight. anƗkuma rƝûm mušallimum ša ¨aÓÓašu išarat, I am the shepherd who rules with justice (lit. whose staff is straight, cf. AHw. 254b, s.v. G 2b). ¼: to show justice; cf. mušnjšeru, ptcp. ¼t: 1. to show justice; 2. to regulate affairs, keep in order. —1. Marduk ana šutƝšur nišƯ mƗtim njsim šnj¨uzim uwaeranni, Marduk urged me to show justice to the people in the land to take charge of the law; purussƝ mƗtim ana parƗsim ¨ablim šutƝšurim, to make decisions for the land, to grant

GLOSSARY

289

justice to the wronged. —2. šƯram ÓƗbam ana nišƯ ana dƗr išƯm u mƗtam uštƝšer, he set health and prosperity before the people for ever and he has regulated the land; cf. muštƝširu, ptcp. ešir (AHw. ešer), num. ten. ana 1 burum 10 kur šeam imaddad, he shall measure out ten kur of barley per bur; 10 šiqil kaspam išaqqal, he shall pay ten shekels of silver. ešƯtu, nom. revolt. išƯtam sa¨maštam liškunšum, may she instigate a revolt and an insurrection for him. ešrƗ, num. twenty. elƝnumma ana 1 burum 20 kur šeam ana bƝl eqlim inaddin, he shall give in addition twenty kur of barley per bur to the owner of the field. [eššu, adj. new. Óuppam eššam la išÓur, he has not written a new tablet (§5.12, thus Roth; BAL: eliam; cf. elû, adj.] ešû, vb. G: to confuse. šarrnjssu liskip dƯnšu ay idƯn uru¨šu lƯši išdƯ ummƗnišu liš¨elÑi, may he overthrow his kingdom, not judge his cause, confuse him on his path, make the foundations of his people crumble. etellu, nom. leader. etel šarrƯ qabal la ma¨Ɨrim, leader of kings, unrivalled in conflict. eÓemmu. nom. ghost. eliš ina balÓnjtim lissu¨šu šapliš ina erÑetim eÓemmašu mê lišaÑmi, above may he cut him off from the living, below may he make his shadow thirst for water in the land. etƝqu, vb. G: to pass along. ¼: to allow time to expire (L118; cf. CAD etƝqu 4f; also Roth). wardam ulu amtam ana kiššƗtim ittandin tamkƗrum ušetteq ana kaspim inaddin, whenever he hands over a male or female slave as a security, the merchant shall let the time expire, he shall sell for silver; alt. the merchant shall deport him (or her) (cf. CAD, s.v. 4a). eÓƝru, vb. G: to remove. agâm kussâm ša šarrnjtim lƯÓeršu, may he remove from him the crown and throne of kingship; aplam lƯÓeršuma šumam ay ušaršƯšu, let him take away his heir and not let him have any reputation; uznam u nƝmeqam lƯÓeršuma, let him deprive him of wisdom and understanding; zunnƯ ina šamê mƯlam ina naqbim lƯÓeršu, let him deprive him of showers from the sky, floods from the depths. eÓlu, nom. young man. adi napištašu ibellû ana eÓlnjtišu liddammam, let him moan to his young men until his soul is exhausted. ezƝbu, vb. G: to leave, abandon. nukaribbum eqlam ina zaqƗpim la igmurma nidƯtam Ưzib, the gardener did not complete the planting of the orchard but left a neglected area; nudunnâm ša mussa iddinušim ana mƗrƯša izzib, she shall leave for her sons the gift which her husband gave her (L172); kunukkam Ưzibšim, he left her with a sealed document; šumma mussa ezƝbša iqtabi izzibši, if her husband has said he will abandon her, he may abandon her; ¨Ưrtašu ša mƗrƯ la uldušum izzib, he will abandon the wife who did not bear him sons; aššassu ša labum iÑbatu ul izzibši, he shall not abandon his wife because a disease attacked her. ¼: to arrange to deposit. Óuppam ušezzebnjšunnjti, they shall make them deposit a document; kunukkam ušƝzib, he arranged to deposit a sealed document. ezziš, adv. angrily. eli Ɨlišu ezziš lissƯma, let him shout angrily over his city. ezzu, adj. angry, violent. kƯma išƗtim ezzetim, like a raging fire.

290

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE G

gabara¨¨u, nom. upheaval. gabara¨ ¨alƗqišu ina šubtišu lišappi¨aššum, let him instigate against him a riot to destroy him in his dwelling place. gagû, nom. cloister. nadƯtum ugbabtum ša ina gagîm la wašbat bƯt sƯbim iptete, a devotee or a priestess who has not been living in the cloister has opened a drinking house; abum ana mƗrtišu nadƯt gagîm lu sekretim šeriktam la išrukšim!, a father did not give a dowry to his daughter, a devotee of the cloister or a priestess. galƗtu, vb. G: to be restless. D: to frighten; cf. mugallitu, ptcp. gallƗbu, nom. barber. gallƗbum balum bƝl wardim abbutti wardim la šêm ugallib, the barber shaved away the mark of a slave who is not his own without the slave’s owner knowing. gamƗlu, vb. G: to act kindly. šû igmilu nišƯ Mera u Tuttul, he is the one who treated kindly the inhabitants of Mari and Tuttul; cf. gƗmilu, ptcp. gamartu, nom. completion. kannu gamartim ina abullim itta¨lalnj, the flags for the completion have been hung on the city-gate. gamƗru, vb. G: to complete. nukaribbum eqlam ina zaqƗpim la igmurma, the gardener did not complete the planting of the orchard. gƗmilu, ptcp. (< gamƗlu), showing kindness. qarrƗdum gƗmil Larsa, the warrior showing kindness to Larsa. gamru, adj. complete. idƯšu gamrƗtim ma¨ir libbašu ÓƗb, with his complete fees received he is glad in his heart; ina libbišu gamrim likrubam, let him bless me with his whole heart; ana gamrim ittakir, he has changed completely. garƗnu, vb. G: to store. D: to store in heaps; cf. mugarrinu, ptcp. gašƯšu, nom. stake. sinništam šuƗti ina gašƯšim išakkannjši, as for that woman, they shall impale her on a stake. gašru, adj. strong, mighty. mugarrin kƗrê ana Uraš gašrim, stacking up the granaries in mighty Urash. gigunû, nom. shrine. mušalbiš warqim gigunƝ Aya, decorating the shrine of Aya with foliage. girseqû, nom. attendant. mƗr girseqîm muzzaz ekallim u mƗr sekretim ul ibbaqqar, the son of an attendant, an official of the temple and the son of a priestess shall not be reclaimed. gitmƗlu, adj. perfect. Ñammurabi šarrum gitmƗlum anƗku, I am Hammurabi, the perfect king; muštƗlum gitmƗlum, the perfect adviser. gugallu, nom. chief irrigation official. Adad bƝl ¨egallim gugal šamê u erÑetim, Adad, lord of plenty, in charge of the water in the sky and on the earth. gullubu, vb. G: to shave. abbutti wardim la šêm ugallib, he shaved away the mark of a slave who was not his own. gurunnu, nom. heap. gurun šalmƗt ummƗnƗtišu, a heap of human bodies.

GLOSSARY

291

Ñ  ¨abƗlu, vb. G: to exploit. numƗt rƝdîm ilteqe rƝdiam i¨tabal, he has taken a soldier’s property or has exploited a soldier; dannum enšam ana la ¨abƗlim eknjtam almattam šutƝšurim, so that a mighty man might not exploit a weak man, and an orphan and a widow may be treated properly. ¨abƗšu, vb. G: to shatter. biniƗtišu kƯma Ñalam Óiddim li¨buš, may he shatter his limbs like a clay image. ¨abƗtu, vb. G: to rob. ¨ubtam i¨butma ittaÑbat, he has committed a robbery and been caught. N: to be robbed. alum u rabiƗnum ša ina erÑetišunu u paÓÓišunu ¨ubtum i¨¨abtu, the city and governor in whose territory and district the lost object was stolen. ¨abbƗtu, nom. robber. ¨abbƗtum la ittaÑbat, the robber has not been caught. ¨ablu, adj. exploited. awƯlum ¨ablum, a wronged man; dƯn mƗtim ana diƗnim purussê mƗtim ana parƗsim ¨ablim šnjtƝšurim, so that disputes in the land may be settled, so that decisions for the land may be made, so that the oppressed may be treated properly. ¨abtu, adj. robbed. awƯlum ¨abtum, a man who has been robbed (L23: cf. AHw.; CAD: prisoner). ¨adû, vb. G: to be glad. D: to make happy; cf. mu¨addnj, ptcp. ¨Ɨiru, see ¨Ɨwiru. ¨alƗlu, see alƗlu. ¨alƗqu, vb. G: to be lost, disappear, come to an end. wardum ina qƗt ÑƗbitƗnišu i¨taliq, a slave has disappeared from the control of his captors; arnam kabtam šƝressu rabƯtam ša ina zumrišu la i¨alliqu lƯmussuma, let him impose on him a heavy penalty, his great condemnation, which will not disappear from his body; nasƗ¨ išdƯ šarrnjtišu u ¨alƗq mƗtišu liškunšum, the destruction of the foundations of his kingdom and the loss of his land; mimmûšu la ¨alqu, nothing of his was lost (L126, stative vb.; alt. ¨alqu adj.). D: 1. to lose; 2. to destroy, bring to an end. —1. mimma ša ana maÑÑarnjtim iddinušumma u¨alliqu ušallamma, whatever had been given him to look after and he lost he shall repay; eleppam uÓÓebbi ulu u¨talliq, he has sunk the boat and he has lost it. —2. šumma makknjram u¨talliq mimma ša u¨alliqu iriab, if it has destroyed property he shall make recompense for whatever it destroyed; mƗssu ina ¨uša¨¨im u bnjbutim li¨alliq, may he annihilate his land by hunger and famine; raggam u ÑƝnam ana ¨ulluqim, to bring wickedness and persecution to an end. ¨alqu, adj. lost, missing. mimmâšu ¨alqam ma¨ar ilim ubârma, he shall declare anything he has missing in the presence of the god; lu wardam lu amtam ¨alqam, a lost male or female slave. ¨amiš, num. five. adi ¨amšƯšu, and adi 5-šu, five times; 5 šiqil kaspam išaqqal, he shall pay five shekels of silver. ¨amšu, num. fifth. ištu rƝš šattim adi ¨amšim war¨im, from the beginning of the year to the fifth month.

292

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

¨amuštu, num. one-fifth. 1⁄5 šƯmƯšu, one fifth of its price (L225; 248: cf. BAL: indistinct; Roth: ¼).

¨arƗÑu, vb. G: to deduct. ina šeriktiša mala ter¨atiša i¨arraÑma, he shall subtract from the dowry the amount of the bridal gift. [¼t: to deduct. la ušta¨riÑma, he made no deduction.] ¨arbu, nom. plough. ¨arbam ulu maškakƗtim ištariq, he has stolen a plough or a harrow. ¨arrƗnu, nom. expedition, journey. ana ¨arrƗn šarrim alƗkšu qabû, he is told to go on an expedition for the king; ¨arrƗnam ina alƗkišu, while he was travelling on an expedition; ina ¨arrƗnim wašibma, he was staying away on a journey; ¨arrƗnša uzzubnjša mimma ul innaddiššim, nothing at all shall be given to her for her journey or as her divorce settlement. ¨âru, vb. G: to choose. ana mƗrišu kallatam i¨Ưrma, he has chosen a bride for his son. ¨assu, nom. intelligent. ana la ¨assim, for the unintelligent. ¨aÓÓu, nom. sceptre. simat ¨aÓÓim u agêm, the sign of the crown and sceptre; ša ¨aÓÓašu išarat, the one whose sceptre is straight; ¨aÓÓašu lišbir, may he break his sceptre; ¼amaš ¨aÓÓašu lirrik, may Shamash lengthen his sceptre; ša ¨aÓÓim (¨aÓÓƗtim), sceptre-bearer, captain. ¨âÓu, vb. G: to discover. innjma ilqûšu abašu u ummašu i¨iaÓ tarbƯtum šî ana bƯt abišu itâr, when he took him he may find out about his father and his mother, (so) that adopted child shall return to his father’s house. ¨Ɨwiru, nom. first husband. sinništum šî ana ¨Ɨwiriša itâr, that woman shall go back to her first husband; šeriktaša mƗrnj ¨Ɨwirišama ileqqû, the children of the first husband shall take her dowry. ¨egallu, nom. wealth. bƗbil ¨egallim ana Egišnugal, bringing wealth to Egishnugal; Adad bƝl ¨egallim, Adad, lord of plenty. ¨epû, vb. [G: to break. Óuppi rikistišu [i¨eppe], he shall break the contract-tablet]. N: to be broken. Óuppašu i¨¨epe, his document was destroyed. ¨Ưrtu, nom. first wife. ¨Ưrtum šeriktaša u nudunnƗm ša mussa iddinušim ina Óuppim išÓurušim ileqqƝma, the first wife shall take the dowry and the gift which her husband gave her by writing on a tablet for her; ¨Ưrtašu ša mƗrƯ la uldušum, his first wife did not bear him sons; mƗrnj ¨Ưrtim ana mƗrƯ amtim ana wardnjtim ul iraggumnj, the sons of the first wife shall have no claim for slavery against the sons of the slave. ¨iÑbu, nom. abundant produce. mukammer ¨iÑbim ana Anim u Ištar, heaping up produce for Anum and Ishtar. ¨iÓƯtu, nom. fault, crime. eleppum šî iÑÑabar ¨iÓƯtam irtaši, the boat has begun to leak because it has a fault; ¨iÓƯt pissatim! ša ina tarbaÑim ušabšû, the damage from the disease which he has allowed to develop in the pen; ¨iÓƯtam la išu, there is no crime. ¨ubtu, nom. robbery. ¨ubtum i¨¨abtu, a robbery was committed. ¨ubullu, nom. debt. ¨ubullum elišu ibaššƯma, he is in debt (lit. “a debt exists for him”); bƝl ¨ubullim, creditor (lit. “the owner of the debt”). ¨ulqu, nom. lost property. awƯlum ša ¨ulqum ina qƗtišu Ñabtu, the man in whose possession the lost property was found; bƝl ¨ulqim, the owner of lost property.

GLOSSARY

293

¨uppudu, vb. to poke out (an eye). šumma awƯlum Ưn mƗr awƯlim u¨tappid Ưnšu u¨appadnj, if a man has poked out the eye of another man’s son they shall poke out his eye; alpam Ưgurma Ưnšu u¨tappid, he hired an ox and he has poked out its eye. ¨urƗÑu, nom. gold. kaspam ¨urƗÑam abnam u bƯš qƗtišu, silver, gold, a gem or personal property. ¨uša¨¨u, nom. famine. mƗssu ina ¨uša¨¨im u bubnjtim li¨alliq, may he annihilate his land by hunger and famine; šanƗt ¨uša¨¨im, years of famine.

I iâti, pron. me. Ñammurabi … iâti … Anum u Ellil … šumƯ ibbû, Anum and Enlil ordained me, Hammurabi; awƯlum šû kƯma iâti, that man is like me. ibbû (CAD imbû B) nom. loss. ina qarƯtim ibbûm ittabši, in the granary a loss has occurred. ibru, nom. friend, neighbour. ibiršu uktarrissu, his friend has maligned him; aššassu ibiršu ul i¨¨az, his neighbour shall not take his wife. idu, wage (AHw. s.v. 9) cf. idnj, wages. idû, vb. G: 1. to know, recognise; 2. to have a sexual relationship. —1. ina idû la am¨aÑu itamma, he said, “I did not strike knowingly”; rubûm ellum ša nƯš qƗtišu Adad idû, the sacred prince, whose raised hand (i.e. ‘prayer’) Adad recognised. —2. aššat awƯlim ša zikaram la idûma, a man’s wife who did not know a man. D: to identify. bƯt abišu uweddƯma, he identified his father’s house; cf. mudû, ptcp. (cf. GAG 106q). ¼: to make known. kƯma nakkƗpû bƗbtašu ušƝdƯšumma, his community made known to him that it was one that gored. idnj, nom. (pl.), wages, fees, charges (cf. AHw. idu, arm, paragraph 9: pp. 365b-66a). 1⁄6 kaspam ana asîm idƯšu inaddin, he shall pay the surgeon his fees, one sixth of silver; idƯšu gamrƗtim ma¨ir libbašu ÓƗb, with all his wages received, his heart is happy. igƗru, nom. wall. igƗrum iqtnjp, the wall collapsed; ina kasap ramanišu igƗram šuƗti udannan, he shall repair that wall with his own silver. igigallu, nom. omniscience. ina igigallim ša Ea išƯmam, with the omniscience that Ea assigned to me; ilu šarrƯ mudƝ igigallim, a god among kings, understanding wisdom. igirrû (CAD egirrû 1b) nom. reputation. bƝltum mudammiqat igirrƝya, the lady making my reputation acceptable. igru, nom. hire. eleppašu ana malƗ¨im ana igrim iddinma, he gave his boat for hire to a boatman; rƝdiam ana igrim ittadin, he has given a soldier for hire. i¨iltu, cf. eiltu. ikkaru, nom. labourer. awƯlum ikkaram Ưgur, a man hired a labourer. ikletu, nom. darkness. eklet la nawƗrim, darkness without any light. ikû, cf. buru, surface measure. ilku, nom. 1. duty; 2. duty-bound person. —1. ilik eqlim kirûm u bƯtim ša išammu illak, he shall perform the duty of the field, orchard and house which he purchases; mƗrušu ilkam alƗkam ilei, his son is able to perform the duty; šalaš šanƗtim ilikšu ittalak, he has performed the duty for three years; ina eqlim kirîm u bƯtim ša ilkišu ana aššatišu

294

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

u mƗrtišu ul išaÓÓar, he shall not sign over to his wife or daughter a field, orchard and house related to his duty; eqelšu kirƗšu u bƯssu ina pani ilkim iddƯma, he abandoned his field, his orchard and his house because of the duty. —2. nadƯtum tamkƗrum u ilkum a¨ûm, a priestess, a merchant and some other duty-bound person. ilu, nom. god. Anum rabûm abu ilƯ, great Anu, the father of the gods; Sîn bƝl šamê ilum bƗnî, Sin the lord of the sky, my divine creator; Ea … apkal ilƯ, Ea … the wisest of the gods; Nergal dannum ina ilƯ, Nergal the strongest of the gods; ilnj Ɲribnjt Esagil, the gods entering Esagila; errƝt ilƯ la Ưdurma, he did not fear the curse of the gods; ša têressu! ina ilƯ šnjpât, whose oracular decision shines out among the gods; ana ilim iššƯma, he raised for the god; awƯlum alpam Ưgurma ilum im¨assuma, a man hired an ox, a god struck it; šƯbnj mudƝ ¨ulqim mudnjssunu ma¨ar ilim iqabbûma, witnesses who know about the lost property shall state what they know in the presence of the god; ilu šarrƯ mudƝ igigallim, the god among kings, who knows great wisdom (col. iii:16; alt. Roth: < šubat> ili šarrƯ, the dwelling of the god of kings); ina bƯt il Ɨlišu ippaÓÓar, he shall be redeemed by the house of the god of his city; makknjr ilim, sacred property; nƯš ilim, an oath by god. imbû B, see ibbû. imƝru, nom. donkey. alpam imƝram Ưgurma, he hired an ox or a donkey; imƝram ana diƗšim Ưgur, he hired a donkey to thresh. immeru, nom. sheep. lu alpam lu immeram lu imƝram lu ša¨am lu eleppam, an ox or a sheep or a donkey or a pig or a boat. imnu, nom. right side. Ɨliku imniya, walking on my right. in, ina, prep. 1. temporal: for, in, at, during; 2. local: in, on, to, from; 3. by means of; 4. together with; 5. + inf.; 6. + second prep.; 7. other compound expressions. —1. in pušqim, in (a time of) distress; ina njmim ištƝn, for one day; ina šeššet war¨Ư, in six months; ina bulÓišu, in his life; ina ebnjrim, at harvest; ina dƯnim, during a trial. —2. in BƯt Karkara, in Bit Karkara; ina Ninua, in Nineveh; ina eqlim, in the field; ina qƗti, in the possession (lit. “hand”) of; ina narîya, on my stele; ina utliya, to my breast; ina bƯt nƗdinƗnim kasap išqulu ileqqe, he shall take the silver he has paid from the seller’s house; ina zumrišu la i¨alliqu, they shall not destroy it from his body; ina ilƯ, among the gods. —3. ina kakkim, with a weapon; ina karzilli siparrim, with a bronze scalpel; ina ¨uša¨¨im, by famine; ina šƯmƗtiša imtnjt, it has died because of its destiny. —4. ina tƗnƝ¨im u dimmatim, together with weeping and wailing. —5. ina eqlam zaqƗpim la igmurma, he did not complete the planting out of the field; dayyƗnam šuƗti ina dƯn idƯnu Ɲnem ukannnjšuma, they shall convict that judge of changing the decision he made. —6. ina balum bƝl eqlim, without the knowledge of the owner of the field; ina bƯrišu, in the midst of it; innjma ina libbnj mƗtim ittalkamma, when he has come back into the homeland; mimma ša ina libbiša u¨alliqu, whatever he lost from within it; ina ma¨ar, in the presence of; ina pani, in front of; ina qerbit, in the middle of. —7. ina warka, later; ina la mê, without water. Ưnu, adv. when. Ưnu Anum … Ellil…ana Marduk … ellilnjt kiššat nišƯ išƯmnjšum, when Anum … and Enlil … determined that Marduk … should govern as Enlil.

GLOSSARY

295

Ưnu, nom. 1. eye, eyesight; 2. idiomatic expressions. —1. Ưnšu inassa¨nj, they shall gouge out his eye; Ưn awƯlim ubtalliÓ, he has saved a man’s sight; Ưn awƯlim u¨tappid, he has destroyed a man’s sight. —2. mnjt niÓil Ưnim ana šƯmtim lišƯmšum, let him ordain for him the destiny of a sudden death (lit. “the death of the glance of the eye”); ana numƗt bƝl bƯtim Ưnšu iššƯma, he coveted (lit. “he raised his eye towards”) the property of the owner of the house; ana aplišu ša Ưnšu ma¨ru eqlam kirâm u bƯtam išruk, he presented a field, an orchard and a house to the son whom he liked (lit. “who is accepted in his eye). innjma, adv. when. warka abum ana šƯmtim ittalku innjma a¨¨nj izuzznj, after the father has gone to his destiny, when the brothers do the sharing; innjma ana bƯt šanîm irrubu, when she will move into the house of someone else; innjma ina libbnj mƗtim ittalkamma, when he has come into the homeland; innjma Marduk ana šutƝšur nišƯ mƗtim njsim šnj¨uzim uwaerranni, when Marduk directed me to administer justice for the people of the land and to take over control. innjmišu, adv. at that time. Ưnu Anu … Ellil … BƗbilam … ukinnnjšum innjmišu Ñammurabi … šumƯ ibbû, when Anu … and Enlil … established … Babylon … at that time … they named me Hammurabi. ipru, nom. barley ration. kƯma emnjq zittiša ipram piššatam u lubnjšam inaddinnjšimma, they shall give her food, oil and garments according to the size of her share. ipÓirnj, nom. (pl.), ransom. eqelšu kirƗšu u bƯssu ana ipÓerƯšu ul innaddin, his field, his orchard and his house shall not be given as his ransom. irnittu, nom. triumphal shout, victory. Nergal … mušakšidu irnittiya, Nergal … is the one who lets me achieve my victory. iÑu, nom. tree. iÑam ikkis, he felled a tree. ƯÑu, adj. insufficient. njmƯ ƯÑnjtim šanƗt ¨uša¨¨im, days of insufficiency, years of famine. išƗtu, nom. fire. ina bƯt awƯlim išƗtum innapi¨ma, fire flared up in a man’s house; ana išƗtim šuƗti innaddi, he shall be thrown into that fire; kƯma išƗtim ezzetim ša appim nišƯšu liqmi, let him burn his people like a fierce fire in the reeds. išdu, nom. foundation. bƯtim ša kƯma šamê u erÑetim išdƗšu kƯnƗ, the house whose foundations are as firm as heaven and earth; mukƯn išdƯ Sippar, securing the foundations of Sippar; nasƗ¨ išdƯ šarrnjtišu, tearing out the foundations of his kingdom. išƯtu, see ešƯtu. iššakku, nom. state official, governor. lu šarrum lu bƝlum lu iššiakkum, a king or a lord or a governor. ištƝn (masc.), ištiat (fem.), num. one. zittam kƯma aplim ištƝn izâzma, she shall have the share of one heir; ištƝn pƯ¨am, one jug of beer; ina njmim ištƝn, for one day; ana 1 šiqil kaspim, for one shekel of silver; šattam ištiatma, for one year; ana nipûtim ištiat, for one restrained item. ištƯššu, + ana, adv. for his first time. ana ištiššu panƯšu ubbalnj, for his first time they shall excuse him. ištu. 1. prep. from, because of (CAD I, 286; AHw. s.v. B); 2. conj. since (CAD I, 284; AHw. s.v. C). —1. šeriktam ša ištu bƯt abiša ublam, the dowry she brought from her

296

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

father’s house. —2. ištu sinništum šî ana bƯt awƯlim Ưrubu, after that woman entered the man’s house; ištu rƝš šattim adi ¨amšim war¨im, from the beginning of the year until the fifth month; ištu ÑƝnum ugƗrim Ưtelianim, after the flocks have left the meadow. išû, see ešû. išû, vb. (defective), to have. kaspam ana turrim la išu, he does not have silver to give back; šarrƗqƗnum ša nadƗnim la išu, the thief has nothing for paying; awƯlum šû tašƯmtam išnjma, that man has authority; leûtƯ šƗninam ul išû, my power has no rival; sinništum šî arnam ul išu, that woman has no blame; dƯnum šû rugummâm ul išu, that case does have a claim; eli awƯlim šeam u kaspam išnjma, he lent (lit. “he has against”) a man barley and silver. itinnu, nom. builder. itinnum bƯtam ana awƯlim Ưpušma, a builder built a house for a man. itti, prep. 1. with, together with; 2. + leqû, from. —1. itti dayyƗnƯ ina dƯnim ul uššab, he shall not sit with the judges in a trial; itti bƝl eqlim la imtagarma, he has not made an agreement with the owner of the field; šugƯtum šî itti nadƯtim ul uštama¨¨ar, that priestess shall not be treated together with the devotee; amtum šî itti bƝltiša uštam¨ir, that slave has rivalled her mistress; mimmûšu itti mimmê bƝl bitim, his property as well as the property of the owner of the house; balƗÓam ša itti mnjtim šitannu, a life which is striving with death. —2. itti šarrƗqƗnišu ileqqe, he shall take away from the one who stole from him. ittu, omen. ittum Dagan bƗnîšu, in accordance with the omen of his creator, Dagan (alt. idu, strength; nƗru, river). itû, nom. neighbour. šeam kƯma itƝšu ana bƝl eqlim inaddin, he shall give barley to the owner of the field like his neighbour. itnjlu, vb. G: to copulate. aššat awƯlim itti zikarim šanîm ina itnjlim (also utnjlim) ittaÑbat, a man’s wife has been seized while lying with another man; ukabbilšima ina snjniša ittatƯlma, he raped her and has had intercourse with her. izuzzu, vb. G: to stand in position. —1. ša njmƯšu izzazzu ana Esagil, who at his proper time stood in position in Esagil; awƯlum awƯlam ana panƯ eqlišu uzuzzim Ưgurma, he hired a man to stand in front of his field. ¼: to allow to dominate. nakiršu elišu lišzƯz, let him allow his enemy to stand over him.

K kabƗlu, vb. G: to be paralysed. D: to rape (AHw. to gag). ukabbilšima ina snjniša ittatƯlma, he raped her and he has had intercourse with her. kabƗtu, vb. G: to be important. Ninlil ummum rabƯtum ša qibƯssa ina Ekur kabtat, Ninlil, the great mother, whose utterance is important in Ekur. kabtu, adj. serious. ina pƯšu kabtim, with his grave utterance; arnam kabtam, a serious offence; murÑam kabtam, serious illness; simmam kabtam, a deep incision. kadru, adj. wild. rƯmum kadrum munakkip zƗiri, a wild ox that tosses its foe.

GLOSSARY

297

kakku, nom. weapon. ina kakkim dannim, with a fierce weapon; pƗtiat kakkiya, she who draws out my weapons; in kakkišu … li¨buš, may he destroy him with his powerful weapon; kakkašu lišbir, may he shatter his weapons. kallatu, nom. bride, daughter-in-law. ana mƗrišu kallatam i¨Ưrma, he chose a bride for his son. kalû, vb. G: to restrain. wardam šuƗti ina bƯtišu iktalƗšu, he has restrained the slave in his house. D: to hold. ina utliya nišƯ mƗt ¼umerim u Akkadîm ukƯl, I held the people of Sumer and Akkad in my arms; cf. mukillu, ptcp. kamƗru, vb. G: to heap up. D: to heap up; cf. mukammeru, ptcp. kƗmidu, nom. weaver. idƯ kƗmidim, the wages of a weaver. kamîš, adv. in bonds (CAD: kamîš A); alt. outside, far away (CAD: kamîš B). ana mƗt nukurtišu kamîš lƯrnjšu, let him remove him to a hostile land in bonds (or far away). kammƗlu, nom. rival. kammƗl šarrnjtim, the rival for his kingdom. kanƗšu (AHw. kanƗšu I), vb. G: to submit. D: to force into submission; cf. mukannišu, ptcp. kanƯku, nom. sealed document. kanƯk kaspim, a sealed document for silver; kasap la kanƯkim, silver without any sealed document. kankallu, (formerly read eqel nidûtim), nom. hard soil, neglected ground. kankallam ana šalaš šanƗtim ana teptƯtim ušƝÑƯma, he took over a neglected field to develop over three years. kannu B, nom. signal (= AHw. kannu II); alt. kannu A, pot-stand (= AHw. kannu I). CAD: kannu gamartim, the signal for the finish; alt. AHw. s.v. kannu I, 3e: a potstand for all the animals. kânu, vb. G: to be firm. D: 1. to provide proof; 2. to convict; 3. to fix securely; 4. to establish. —1. awat iqbû la uktƯn, he did not prove the statement he made; kƯma warassu ukânšuma, he shall prove that he is his slave; ina šeim leqêm ukannnjšuma, they shall prove that it was him taking the barley. —2. tamkƗršu ukânma, he shall convict his merchant; šiprim la epƝšim ukannnjšuma, they shall convict him of not doing the work; ina dƯn idƯnu enêm ukannnjšuma, they shall convict him of changing his decision. —3. awatiya šnjqurƗtim … ina ma¨ar Ñalmiya šar mƯšarim ukƯn, my precious words I fixed securely on this statue of me, the king of justice. —4. šarrnjtam dƗrƯtam … ukinnnjšum, they established an everlasting kingdom for him; dƯnƗt mƯšarim ša Ñammurabi šarrum lƝûm ukinnuma, just laws which the able king Hammurabi established; cf. mukƯnu, ptcp. kapƗlu, see kabƗlu. karƗbu, vb. G: to pray. ina libbišu gamrim likrubam, let him pray with his whole heart. karƗÑu, vb. G: to snap off. D: ana bƯt emišu biblam ušƗbil ter¨atam iddinma ibiršu uktarrissu, he took a present to the house of his father-in-law but his friend has maligned him. karašû, nom. catastrophe. mušpazzir nišƯ MalgƯm in karašîm, protecting the people of Malgium from catastrophe. karÑillu, see karzillu.

298

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

kƗru, nom. dyke. kƗr eqlišu, the dyke in his field; kƗršu la udanninma, he did not strengthen his dyke; ina kƗrišu pƯtum ittepte, a break has been opened in his dyke. karû, nom. pile. mugarrin karê, heaping up piles. karzillu, nom. bronze knife (cf. siparru, bronze). simmam kabtam ina karzilli siparrim Ưpušma, he made a dangerous incision with a bronze knife. kaspu, nom. silver. kaspam itti tamkƗrim ilqƝma, he borrowed silver from a merchant; bƝlessa ana kaspim ul inaddišši, her mistress shall not give her for silver; tamkƗrum ana šamallîm kaspam … ittadinma, a merchant has given silver to an agent; kasap išqulu, the silver which he weighed out; qaqqad kaspim ana tamkƗrim utâr, he shall return to the merchant the original amount of silver; kaspam ana turrim la išu, he has no silver for repaying; ina kaspišu Ưtelli, he shall forfeit his silver; kaspam mala ter¨atiša inaddiššim, he shall give her silver to the value of her bridal gift; ̃ mana kaspam inaddiššim, he shall give her one third of a mana of silver; 2 šiqil kaspam bƝl wardim inaddiššum, the owner of the field shall give him two shekels of silver; ina abnim rabƯtim kaspam imta¨ar, he has received the silver according to the heavier weight. kasû, vb. G: to bind. ikassûšunnjtima ana mê inaddûšunnjti, they shall bind them and throw them into the water. kašƗdu, vb. G: 1. to overpower, conquer; 2. to reach; 3. to achieve. —1. Id iktašassu, the river has overpowered him; Ellil … ar¨iš likšudašu, may Enlil overpower him quickly. —2. Ɨlšu iktašdam, he has reached his city; šû ikšudu nagab uršim, he who reached the source of wisdom. —3. irnitti Marduk eliš u šapliš ikšud, he secured the triumph of Marduk above and below. ¼: to enable to reach, enable to achieve. tamkƗrum ipÓuraššuma Ɨlšu ustakšidaššu, the merchant has ransomed him and enabled him to reach his home town; ša Erra rnjšu ušakšidu (vnt. ušakšidušu) nizmassu, whom his friend Erra enabled to achieve his ambition; cf. mušakšidu, ptcp. kašƗšu, vb. G: to enforce the payment of a debt; cf. kƗšišu, ptcp. kƗšišu, ptcp. (< kašƗšu), creditor. šalaš šanƗtim bƯt šƗyyimƗnišunu u kƗšišišunu ippešu, she shall work at the house of the purchaser or the creditor for three years. kašnjšu, nom. supernatural power. ina kašnjšišu rabîm … nišƯšu liqmi, let him burn his people by his mighty power. katƗtu, vb. G: to be low, tremble (AHw.). ¼t: to be submissive (alt. AHw. to be excited). ana awat Marduk bƝlišu uštaktitma, he was submissive to the word of his lord Marduk. kî, adv. like. muÑƯr bƯt Ebabbar ša kî šubat šamƗi, protecting the house of Ebabbar, which is like the mantle of the sky. kibrƗtu, nom. (pl.), areas of the world. BƗbilam šumšu ÑƯram ibbinj in kibrƗtim ušƗternjšu, they gave Babylon its important name and made it excellent in the world; kibrƗt arbaim and kibrƗt erbettim, the four regions of the world. kibsu, nom. path, way of life. kibsam rƯdam dƯn mƗtim ša adƯnu, the behaviour, custom and rule which I decreed for the land. kilallƗn, nom. both. kilallƗšunu tamkƗram ippalnj, both of them will repay the merchant; kilallƯšunu iqallûšunnjti, they shall burn both of them.

GLOSSARY

299

kƯma, 1. prep.; 2. conj. —1. kƯma ¼amaš, like Shamash; kƯma abim, like a father; kƯma šamê u erÑetim, like heaven and earth; kƯma iâti, like me; kƯma Ñalam Óiddim, like a clay image; kƯma nišik mnjtim, like the bite of death; mƗr awƯlim ša kƯma šuati, a son of a man who is like himself; wardam kƯma wardim iriab, he shall replace the slave with a similar slave; kƯma ubbalu ana tamkƗrišu inaddin, he shall give to his merchant according to what it is worth; šeam kƯma itƝšu imaddad, he shall measure grain like his neighbour; kƯma riksƗtišu šeam ileqqe, he shall take grain according to the contracts; a¨¨njša kƯma emnjq bƯt abim šeriktam išarraknjšimma, her brothers shall grant her a dowry according to the wealth of her father’s house. —2. kƯma mimmûšu la ¨alqu babtašu ina ma¨ar ilim ubâršuma, his community shall make him declare before the god that nothing of his was lost; kƯma warassu ukânšuma, he proves that he is his slave. kƯnƗtu (pl.), see kittu. kƯnu, adj. secure, established. bƯtim ša kƯma šamê u erÑetim išdƗšu kƯnƗ, the house whose foundations are as firm as heaven and earth; ussam kƯnam, secure rule. kirû, nom. orchard. balum bƝl kirîm ina kirƯ awƯlim iÑam ikkis, he felled a tree in a man’s orchard without the owner of the orchard knowing; kirƗšu ana nukaribbim ana rukkubim iddin, he gave his orchard to a gardener to pollinate; bilat kirîm, produce from the orchard. [kiÑru, nom. agreed payment (alt. riksu; cf. CAD s.v. 3 a 1ƍ). kasap kiÑrišu gamram ša šanat, all the money agreed for the year; kiÑrim ša ippušu, the rent obligation which he shall perform.] kišpnj, nom. (pl.), sorcery. kišpƯ eli awƯlim iddƯma, he charged a man with sorcery; ša elišu kišpƯ iddû, the one who charged him with sorcery; ša elišu kišpnj nadû, the one who has been accused of sorcery. kiššatu, nom. mass. ellilnjt kiššat nišƯ išƯmnjšum, they ordained him to the leadership of the mass of people. kiššƗtu, nom. (pl.), pledge, security. aššassu mƗrašu u mƗrassu ana kaspim iddin ulu ana kiššƗtim ittandin, he gave his wife, son and daughter for silver or he has handed them over as a pledge. kittu A (AHw. kittu I), nom. (pl. kƯnƗtu), justice. kittam u mƯšaram ina pƯ mƗtim aškun, I made the land speak with justice and truth; mušƝpƯ kinƗtim, making justice appear (AHw. s.v. 4b); Ñammurabi šar mƯšarim ša ¼amaš kƯnƗtim išrukušum anƗku, I am Hammurabi, the king of justice to whom Shamash has given the law (AHw. s.v. 4c). kitû, nom. flax-worker. [idi] ša kitîm, the hire for a flax-worker. kullizu, nom. ox-driver. kullizam Ưgur, he hired an ox-driver. kullumu, vb. D: to show, explain. mimma mala inaddinu šƯbƯ ukallam, he shall show to witnesses however much he gives; narî awatam likallimšu, let my stela explain the meaning to him. kulmašƯtu, nom. priestess. abum nadƯtam qadištam ulu kulmašƯtam ana ilim iššƯma, a father offered to the god a priestess, a prostitute or a hierodule.

300

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

kunukku, nom. sealed document. kunukkam Ưzibšim, he deposited a sealed document; kunukkam ušƝzib, he arranged to deposit a sealed document; kunukkam išÓuršum, he wrote out a sealed document for him. kurru, nom. 1. measure for grain; 2. unit of capacity. —1. ina šanat ana 1 kur šeim 5 qa šeam idƯ našpakim inaddin, he shall pay the storage charge of five qa of barley for one kur of barley per year; idƯ alpim ša qabla 3 kur šeam, the fees for a front ox: three kur of barley; idƯ alpim ša warka 4 kur šeam, the fees for a rear ox: four kur of barley. —2. elep 60 kur, a boat of sixty kur (capacity). kussû, nom. official seat, throne. ina kussî dayyƗnnjtišu ušetbûšuma, they shall remove him from his seat of judgment; agâm kussâm ša šarrnjtim lƯÓeršu, may he remove from him the crown and the throne of kingship.

L la (AHw.: lƗ ), negative particle. passim. labânu, nom. neck-muscle. alpam Ưgurma šƝpšu ištebir ulu labiƗnšu ittakis, he hired an ox and has broken its foot or has cut its neck-muscle. labƗšu, vb. G: to put on clothing. ¼: to cover (CAD s.v. 5c); cf. mušalbišu, ptcp. labu, nom. disease. aššatam Ư¨uzma labum iÑÑabassi, he took a wife and a disease has gripped her. lƗma, conj. before. lƗma sinništam šuƗti i¨¨azu ¨ubullum elišu ibaššƯ, before he took that woman the debt against him existed. lamƗdu, vb. G: 1. to learn, understand; 2. to have a sexual relationship. —1. asûm qerebšu la ilammadu, a doctor will not understand its nature. —2. mƗrassu iltamad, he has had sex with his daughter. lamassu, nom. guardian (a large protective statue), guardian spirit, protection. šƝdum lamassum ilnj Ɲribnjt Esagil, the demon, the guardian, the deities going into Esagila; Ištar … lamassƯ damiqtum, Ishtar … my beneficent guardian-spirit; ina lamassiya i¨¨išƗ, under my protection he gets to prosper. lapƗtu, vb. G: to touch (AHw. to lay hold of). ¼: to defile. šulput mƗtišu ¨alƗq nišƯšu tabƗk napištišu kƯma mê ina pƯ Ellil šarrim lišaškin, make Enlil the king decree that his land be defiled, that his people be lost, that his life flow away like a stream. laputtû, nom. officer. laputtûm ÑƗb nis¨Ɨtim irtaši, an officer has acquired a deserting soldier. lemƝnu, vb. G: to fall into misfortune. D: to defame, denigrate. awassu lilemmin, may she denigrate his statement. lemnƝtu, see lemuttu. lemnu, adj. bad. šƯram lemnam, evil omen; asakkam lemnam, a terrible curse. lemuttu, nom. misfortune, calamity. damqƗtišu ana lemnƝtim litƝr, may he turn his blessings into a calamities. leqû, vb. G: 1. to take, borrow. šƗyyimƗnum ina bƯt nƗdinƗnim kasap išqulu ileqqe, the purchaser shall take from the house of the seller the silver he paid; qƯšti šarrum ana rƝdîm iddinu ilteqe, he has taken the gift the king gave the soldier; mimma ša ilqû,

GLOSSARY

301

whatever he took; ina šeim leqêm ukannnjšuma, they shall convict him of taking the barley; itti šarrƗqƗnišu ileqqe, he shall take it from the person who stole it from him; zittašu inassaqma ileqqe, he shall subtract his share and take (it); ina ebnjrim 5 sut šeam ileqqe, she shall take five sutu-measures of barley at harvest; Ñibassu ša itti tamkƗrim ilqû, his interest which he received from the merchant; mƗrat awƯlim šeriktaša ileqqe, the daughter of the man shall take her wedding-gift; qƯšti abum iddinušum ileqqƝma, he shall take the gift the father gave him; kanƯk kaspim ša ana tamkƗrim inaddinu ileqqe, he shall take a sealed document for the silver he will give to the merchant; Ñe¨ram ina mêšu ana mƗrnjtim ilqƝma, he took a small child at birth as a son; kaspam itti tamkƗrim ilqƝma, he borrowed silver from a merchant. lƝtu, nom. cheek. warad awƯlim lƝt mƗr awƯlim imta¨aÑ, a man’s slave has struck the cheek of a man’s son. leû, vb. G: to be able, have sufficent personal or financial resources. mƗrušu ilkam alƗkam ilei, his son is capable of performing the duty; awƯlum šû tašƯmtam išnjma mƗssu šutƝšuram ilei, that man has intelligence and is able to guide his land aright; šeam riƗbam la ilei, he is not able to make recompense for the barley; cf. lƝu, ptcp. lƝu, ptcp. (< leû), capable, masterly. dƯnƗt mƯšarim ša Ñammurabi šarrum lƝûm ukinnuma, the laws of justice the capable king, Hammurabi, established. lƝnjtu, nom. power. ina lƝûtim ša Marduk iddinam, by the power that Marduk gave me. liƗtu (= AB2.GUD.ÑI.A, Sumerian collective noun; alt. sukullu), see littu. libbu, nom. 1. heart, desire; 2. midst. —1. libbašu ÓƗb, contented in his heart; libbi Marduk bƝlišu uÓƯb, he pleased the heart of his lord Marduk; mu¨addi libbi Ištar, making the heart of Ishtar rejoice; munƝ¨ libbi Adad, making the heart of Adad quiet; libbašu linappišma, may he let his heart relax; ina libbišu gamrim likrubam, let him pray for me with his whole heart; ina libbiša aggim, with an angry heart; mut libbiša i¨¨assi, the man of her heart shall take her; mala libbiša la ušamÑƯši, he did not allow her to act freely (lit. “to find her heart completely”). —2. ina libbnj mƗtim within the land; ša libbiša u¨talliq, he has made (the boat) lose her cargo; ša libbiša uštaddƯši, he has made (the girl) lose her foetus. libittu, nom. brickwork. libitti Esagil, the brickwork of Esagila; libitti Ebabbara, the brickwork of Ebabbar. liblibbu (AHw. libbu), nom. descendant. liplippim ša Sumulail aplum dannum ša SƯnmuballiÓ, the descendant of Shumu-la’il, the mighty heir of Sin-muballit. liplippu, see liblibbu. liptu, nom. affliction. ina tarbaÑim lipit ilim ittabši, an inexplicable disaster has occurred in the pen. lišƗnu, nom. tongue. lišanšu inakkisnj, they shall cut out his tongue. littu, nom. cow (collective noun liƗtu, formerly read sugullu or sukullu, herd, cattle). liƗt awƯlim ana igrim ittadin, a man’s cattle have been given for hire; ina liƗtim imtanaššarnjšu, they shall drag him continuously with cattle; liƗtim uÑÑa¨¨ir, he has diminished the herd. lu (AHw. lnj, copula). or. lu wardam lu amtam, a male or a female slave; lu rƝdum ulu bƗirum, a soldier on the land or on the water; ina mƝgûtim ulu ina ma¨ƗÑim, through

302

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

neglect or beating; ulu ina pilšim ulu ina nabalkattim, because of a break-in or a burglary; ana bƝl alpim ulu imƝrim, to the owner of the ox or of the sheep; qaranšu išbir zibbassu ittakis ulu šašallašu ittasak, he has broken its horn or has cut off its tail. lubnjšu, nom. clothing. kƯma emnjq zittiša ipram piššatam u lubnjšam inaddinnjšimma, they shall give her food, oil and clothing according to the size of her share.

M madƗdu, vb. G: to measure. ana 1 burum 10 kur šeam imaddad, he shall calculate ten kur of barley per bur; šeam kƯma itƝšu imaddad, he shall calculate the barley like his neighbour. magal, adv. greatly. mussa waÑƯma magal ušamÓƗši, her husband was leaving and he disparaged her greatly. magƗru, vb. G: to give permission. awƯlam šuƗti ul imaggarnjšu, they shall not give permission to that man. Gt: to agree with one another. itti bƝl eqlim la imtagarma, he did not agree with the owner of the field; ina bƯt mutiša wašƗbam la imtagar, she did not agree to live in her husband’s house. N: to come to an agreement. tamkƗrum šû ul immaggar, that merchant shall not come to an agreement. ma¨ar, prep. (cf. ma¨ru, nom. front). 1. in front of; 2. + ina, + ana. —1. ma¨ar šƯbƯ, before witnesses; ma¨ar dayyƗnƯ inaÓÓûšu, they shall flog him before the judges; mudnjssunu ma¨ar ilim iqabbûma, they shall declare in the god’s presence what they know; ša ma¨rišunu šƯmum iššƗmu, before whom the purchase was made. —2. ša ina ma¨rišunu išƗmu, in whose presence he made the purchase; ina ma¨ar ilim u šƯbƯ, in the presence of the god and witnesses; ina ma¨ar Ñalmiya … ukƯn, I … have placed them on my image; ana ma¨ar Ñalmiya, in front of my statue. ma¨Ɨru, vb. G: 1. to receive; 2. to acquire; 3. to be comparable; 4. to find acceptable. —1. ša šurqam ina qƗtišu im¨uru, the one who received the stolen property in his hand; ana maÑÑarnjtim im¨ur, he received it for safe keeping; bilat eqlišu imta¨ar, he has received the rent for the field; idƯšu gamrƗtim ma¨ir libbašu ÓƗb, with all his dues received, his heart is happy. —2. ana ¨arrƗn šarrim agram pnj¨am im¨urma, he obtained a hired substitute for the king’s expedition. —3. eÓel šarri qabal la ma¨Ɨrim, the heroic king, incomparable in battle. —4. ša Ưnšu ma¨ru, one who is acceptable in his eye. ¼t: to show rivalry. šugƯtum šî itti nadƯtim ul uštama¨¨ar, that priestess shall never rival the devotee; amtum šî itti bƝltiša uštatam¨ir, that slave showed rivalry with her mistress. ma¨ƗÑu, vb. G: to strike, treat violently. awƯlum awƯlam ina risbƗtim imta¨aÑma, a man has struck a man in a brawl; ina ma¨ƗÑišu imtnjt, he has died when fighting him; ina ma¨ƗÑim uštamƯt, he has caused it to die through striking; ilum im¨assuma, the god struck it; eqlam ša iddû mayyƗri ima¨¨aÑ, with mattocks he shall break up the field he neglected; elep ša mƗ¨irtim elep ša muqqelpƯtim im¨aÑma, a rowing boat struck a sailing boat. N: to be beaten. ina qinnaz alpim imma¨¨aÑ, he shall be beaten with an ox-tail.

GLOSSARY

303

mƗ¨irtu, adj. fem. (masc. mƗ¨iru, cf. CAD s.v. 2), confronting (the current), moving upstream. elep ša mƗ¨irtim, the boat which is moving upstream; mƗ¨irtam Ưgur, he hired a boat moving upstream; ša mƗ¨irtim, the one in the boat moving upstream. ma¨Ưru, nom. tariff, value. ma¨Ưr šikarim ana ma¨Ưr šeim umtaÓÓi, she has diminished the value of the beer compared with the value of the barley. ma¨ra, + ina, adv. in front. Ea rubûm rabium ša šƯmƗtušu ina ma¨ra illakƗ, Ea, the almighty prince, whose decisions come first (CAD s.v. 2). ma¨ru, nom. front, see ma¨ar. ma¨rû, adj. former. ina šattim ma¨rƯtim, in the earlier year; mƗrnj ma¨rûtum u warkûtum izuzznj, the children of the earlier wife and of the later wife shall share. mƗkƗlu, food. mudeššƯ mƗkalƯ ellnjtim ana Nintu, providing in abundance the pure offerings for Nintu; šƗkin mƗkalƯ ellnjtim ana Ninazu, arranging pure feasts for Ninazu. makknjru, nom. property. makknjr ilim, property of the god; bƝl makknjrim, the owner of the property; makknjrum ana bƝlišu itâr, the property shall return its owner; makknjram u¨talliq, it has destroyed property; ina makknjr ramanišu bƯt imqutu ippeš, he shall reconstruct the house that has collapsed from his own property. mala, adv. as much as. suluppƯ mala ina kirîm, as many dates as there are in the orchard; mimma mala inaddinu, whatever and however much he will give; mala libbiša, as much as she wanted. malƗ¨u, nom. boatman. malƗ¨am u eleppam Ưgurma, he hired a boat and a boatman; malƗ¨um elep awƯlim uÓÓebbƯma uštƝlliašši, a boatman has sunk a man’s boat and he has refloated it; malƗ¨um eleppam šuƗti inaqqarma, the boatbuilder will strip that boat apart. malû (AHw. malû IV), vb. G: to be full, expire (of time). awƯlum wardam amtam išƗmma wara¨šu la imlƗma benni elišu imtaqut, a man purchased a male or female slave and epilepsy has struck him before one month expired. D: to hand over. ana qƗt nakrƯšu limallƯšuma, let him hand him over to his enemy. [malû (AHw. malû I), adj. full, expired (of time). ina njmƯšu la malûtim, before his time has expired.] mƗna¨tu, nom. expenses. aššum ina šattim ma¨rƯtim mƗna¨Ɨtišu la ilqû, because he did not recover his outlay from the previous year; mƗna¨Ɨt erƝšim ana tamkƗrim inaddin, he shall give the costs of cultivation to the merchant. manû, vb. G: 1. to count time; 2. to reckon together. —1. njmišu imannûma, he shall count up the time. —2. itti mƗrƯšu la imtanûšu, he has not reckoned him in with his own sons. manû (AHw. manû II), nom. mana (a standard measure for silver). ̃ mana kaspam išaqqal, he shall weigh out one-third of a mana of silver; 1 mana kaspam ana uzubbêm inaddiššim, he shall give her one mana of silver as a divorce payment. maqƗtu, vb. G: to fall. bƯt Ưpušu imqutma, the house he built collapsed; benni elišu imtaqut, epilepsy has struck (lit. has fallen on) him. ¼: to cause to fall. qarrƗdƯšu lišamqit damƯšunu erÑetam lišqi, let her make his heroes fall, let him make the earth drink their blood.

304

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

marƗru B, vb. G: to harrow. eqlam mayyƗrƯ ima¨¨aÑ imarrar u išakkakma, he shall break up the field with mattocks, he shall harrow and scuffle (it). markasu (alt. riksu), nom. link, metaphysical bond (CAD s.v. 4). Nippur rikis šƗmƝ u erÑƝtim, Nippur, the bond of heaven and earth. marÑu, adj. (fem. maruštu). 1. painful, diseased; 2. evil. —1. šer¨anam marÑam ubÓalliÓ, he has freed a painful muscle; simmam marÑam ša la ipašše¨nj, an infected wound which they cannot soothe. —2. errƝtam maruštam lƯrurnj, let them curse him with an evil curse; awatum maruštum, a wicked message (CAD s.v. 2b2'). mƗrtu, nom. daughter. mƗrat awƯlim, a man’s daughter; abum ana mƗrtišu … šeriktam la išrukšim, the father … did not give a dowry to his daughter; mƗrtƯ ul ta¨¨az, you shall not have my daughter; mƗrassu ana kaspim iddin, he exchanged his daughter for silver; mƗrassu iltamad, he has got to know his daughter; mƗrassu idukknj, they shall put his daughter to death; Ninkarrak mƗrat Anim, Ninkarrak, Anu’s daughter. mƗru, nom. 1. son (human and divine), child; pl. often children (male and female); 2. a member of a particular group, or the son of such a person. —1. mƗrušu Ñe¨erma ilik abišu alƗkam la ilei, his son is small and unable to do the duty of his father; aplum mƗr ¨Ưrtim, the heir is the son of the first wife; mƗrƯ la ušaršƯšu, she did not provide him with sons; mƗrnj ¨Ưrtim ana mƗrƯ amtim ana wardnjtim ul iraggumnj, the children of the first wife shall make no claims about slavery against the sons of the slave; šugƯtim ša mƗrƯ uldušum, a priestess who bore him sons; almattum ša mƗrnjša Ñe¨¨ernj, a widow whose sons are small; ana mƗrƯ ša iršû aššƗtim Ư¨uz ana mƗrišu Ñe¨rim aššatam la Ư¨uz, he chose wives for the sons he acquired but did not choose a wife for the youngest son; mƗrum abašu imta¨aÑ, a son has struck his father; mƗrnjša aššum ina bƯtim šnjÑîm usa¨¨amnjši, her sons pester her about leaving the house; mƗr bƝl bƯtim uštamƯt, he has caused the death of the son of the owner of the house; Marduk mƗrim reštîm ša Ea, Marduk, the eldest son of Ea; Zababa qarrƗdum rabium mƗrum rƝštûm ša Ekur, the great warrior Zababa, the eldest son of Ekur. —2a. mƗr awƯlim, a privileged class of society: ina qƗt mƗr awƯlim ulu warad awƯlim balum šƯbƯ u riksƗtim ištƗm, he has made a purchase from a gentleman or a gentleman’s slave without witnesses or contracts; šumma mƗr awƯlim mƗrašu idukknj, if it is a gentleman they shall kill his son; mƗr awƯlim lƝt mƗr awƯlim ša kƯma šuƗti imta¨aÑ, a gentleman has struck the cheek of a gentleman like himself; —2b. mƗr ummƗnim, a class of craftsmen: awƯlum mƗr ummƗnim iggar, a man has hired a craftsman; mƗr ummƗnim Ñe¨ram ana tarbƯtim ilqƝma šipir qƗtišu uštƗ¨issu, a craftsman took a child for adoption and he has made him learn his manual skill; —2c. mƗr muškƝnim, a class of working men: mƗr muškƝnim, a workman’s son; —2d. mƗrnj ugƗrim, agricultural workers: mƗrnj ugƗrim ša šešunu mû ublnj, the farm labourers whose barley the waters destroyed; —2e. mƗrnj mƗtim, indigenous inhabitants: wardum u amtum šunu mƗrnj mƗtim, the male and the female slave are native to the land. maruštu, see marÑu. mƗrnjtu, nom. adoption. Ñe¨ram ina mêšu ana mƗrnjtim ilqƝma urtabbƯšu, he took a child at birth for adoption and has brought him up.

GLOSSARY

305

maÑÑarnjtu, nom. custody. balum šƯbƯ u riksƗtim ištƗm u lnj ana maÑÑarnjtim im¨ur, he made a purchase without witnesses or contracts or accepted something for safekeeping. maÑû, vb. G: to be equal; ¼: to grant full discretion. mala libbiša la ušamÑƯši, he did not grant her full discretion; cf. mala libbi maÑû, to have full discretion (CAD s.v. 2). mašƗru, vb. G: to drag. ina eqlim šuƗti ina liƗtim imtanaššarnjšu, they shall drag him continuously in that field with oxen. maškakƗtu, nom. (pl.), harrow. ¨arbam ulu maškakƗtim ištariq, he has stolen a plough or a harrow. maškanu, nom. threshing place. ina našpakim ulu ina maškanim šeam ilteqe, he has taken barley from the granary or from the threshing place. mašqƯtu, nom. water supply. šƗim mirƯtim u mašqƯtim ana Lagaš u Girsim, providing Lagash and Girsu with pastureland and a water supply. matima, adv. whenever. ana warkiƗt njmƯ ana matima, whenever, until the end of time. mƗtu, nom. land, country, nation, world. šƯr mƗtim uÓƯb, I improved the health of the nation; dƯn mƗtim ana diƗnim purussê mƗtim ana parƗsim, to judge the cases in the land and to take the decisions for the land; ina mƗtišu raggam u ÑƝnam lissu¨, let him weed out evil and wickedness from the land; mušƝÑi nnjrim ana mƗt ¼umerim u Akkadîm, who sheds light all over the land of Sumer and Akkad; šulput mƗtišu ¨alƗq nišƯšu, the plague on his land and the destruction of his people; massu ina ¨uša¨¨im u bubnjtim li¨alliq, may he destroy his land by famine and pestilence; mƗssu ana til abnjbim litƝr, turn his land into a flooded rubbish-tip; mƗrnj mƗtim šanƯtim, immigrants; ana mƗt nukurtišu kamîš lƯrûšu, let her remove him to a hostile land in bonds; kƯma ¼amaš ana ÑalmƗt qaqqadim waÑêmma mƗtim nuwwurim, to illuminate the land like Shamash rising over the mass of humanity; Nintu bƝltum ÑƯrtum ša mƗtƗtim, Nintu, the noble lady of the nations. mâtu, vb. to die. sinništum šî imtnjt, that woman has died; alpam Ưgurma ilum im¨assuma imtnjt, a man hired an ox and the god struck it and it has died. ¼: to cause death. simmam kabtam ina karzilli siparrim Ưpušma awƯlam uštamƯt, he made a deep incision with the bronze knife and he has caused the death of the man; bƯt Ưpušu imqutma bƝl bƯtim uštamƯt, the house he made collapsed and he has caused the death of the owner of the house; alpam Ưgurma ina mƝgûtim ulu ina ma¨ƗÑim uštamƯt, he hired an ox and let it die through neglect or rough treatment. maÓû, vb. G: to be less. D: to lessen. kirâm la urakkibma biltam umtaÓÓi, he did not pollinate the orchard and he has reduced the yield; ma¨Ưr šikarim ana ma¨Ưr šeim umtaÓÓi, she has diminished the value of the beer compared with the value of the barley; tƗlittam umtaÓÓi, he has diminished the birth-rate. ¼: to denigrate. sikiltam isakkil bƯssa usappa¨ mussa ušamÓa, she was being mischievous, she was spoiling her house and she denigrated her husband; magal ušamÓƗši, he denigrated her very much. [maÓû, adj. small. kaspam ina abnim maÓƯtim, silver according to the small weight.] mayyƗru, nom. plough, mattock. eqlam ša iddû mayyƗrƯ ima¨¨aÑ, he shall smash the field he neglected with mattocks.

306

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

mƝgûtu, nom. neglect. ina mƝgûtim ulu ina ma¨ƗÑim uštamƯt, he has let it die through neglect or rough treatment. melammu, nom. radiance. muštas¨ir melammƝ Emeteursag, surrounding Emetursag with radiance; melammƯ šarrnjtim lƯÓeršu, may he remove the splendour of his kingdom from him. mƝreštu B, nom. arable land. mušaddil mƝreštim ša Dilbat, developing the land in Dilbat. mêšu, vb. G: to disdain. errƝtiya imƝšma, he disdained my threats. migru, nom. favourite. migir Ištar, favourite of Ishtar; migir telƯtim, favourite of the capable lady. mi¨ru, nom. equal. šumma awƯlum šinni awƯlim me¨rišu ittadi šinnašu innaddû, if a man has knocked out the tooth of a man like himself they shall knock out his tooth. mƯlu, nom. flood. zunnƯ ina šamê mƯlam ina naqbim lƯÓeršu, let him remove from him the rain from the sky and the flood from the wadi. mimma, pron. something. mimma bƯšam ana pašƗrim iddin, whatever goods he gave for trade; mimma ul innaddiššim, nothing shall be given her. mimma mala inaddinu, whatever and however much he gives; mimma ša našû, whatever he was carrying; mimma ša tamkƗrum iddinušum, whatever the merchant gave him; mimma ša nadƗnim la ibaššišum, he does not have anything for paying; šeam šipƗtim šamnam sulippƯ u mimma šumšu, grain, wool, oil, dates or anything else; apkal ilƯ mudƝ mimma šumšu, the wisest of the gods who knows the name of anything; mušaklil mimma šumšu ana Nippur, gathering for Nippur anything with a name. mimmû, nom. property. mimmâšu ana maÑÑarnjtim iddinma, the man gave his property into safe-keeping; mimmâšu ¨alqam, missing property; mimmê ¨aliq iqtabi, he said, “Something of mine is lost”. miqittu, nom. damaged property, dead animals. miqitti tarbaÑim bƝl tarbaÑim ima¨¨aršu, the owner of the enclosure shall receive the debris from the enclosure. mirƯtu, nom. pasture. mirƯtim u mašqƯtim, pastureland and a water supply. mƯru A, young bull (CAD), see alpum ša qabla, leading ox. mƯšaru, nom. justice. nišƯšu ina mƯšarim lirƝ, may he feed his people in righteousness; awât mƯšarim ša ina narîya ašÓuru, the statement of justice that I inscribed on my stele; Ñammurabi šar mƯšarim, Hammurabi the king of justice. mƯšƯtu, nom. confusion. uznam u nƝmeqam lƯÓeršuma ina mƯšƯtim littarnjšu, let him deprive him of wisdom and understanding and may they lead him away in confusion. mišlƗnnj, nom. (pl.), halves. ulu ana mišlƗni ulu ana šaluš eqlam iddin, whether he gave the field in halves or in thirds. mišlu, nom. half. kaspam mišil šƯmišu išaqqal, he shall pay half his value in silver. 2½ uÓÓet kaspam, two and a half grains of silver. mit¨Ɨriš, adv. equally. bƝl kirîm u nukaribbum mit¨Ɨriš izuzznj, the owner of the orchard and the cultivator shall share equally. mû A, nom. (pl.), water, water supply. šƗkin mê nu¨šim ana nišƯšu, providing abundant water for its people; ina la mê šeum ina eqlim la ittabši, there has not been any grain in the field because of a lack of water; eqel itƝšu mê uštƗbil, he has allowed the water to erode his neighbour’s land; ikassûšunnjtima ana mê inaddûšunnjti, they shall bind

GLOSSARY

307

them and throw them into the water; ¨alƗq nišƯšu tabƗk napištišu kƯma mê, the loss of his people, the pouring out of his life like water; Ñe¨rum ina mêšu, a new-born baby (lit. “a tiny one in its water”). mû B, nom. (pl.), ritual. šarrum ša ina Ninua ina Emesmes ušnjpiu mê Ištar, the king who performed the ritual for Ishtar in Emesmes in Nineveh. muballiÓu, ptcp. (< balƗÓu D), reviving. bƝlum muballiÓ Uruk, the lord reviving Uruk. mubbibu, ptcp. (< ebƝbu D), purifying. mubbib šulu¨ Eabzu, purifying the lustrations in Eabzu. mubbiru, nom. (ptcp. < abƗru D), accuser. mubbiršu iddâk, his accuser shall be killed; mubbiršu bƯssu itabbal, his accuser shall take possession of his house. mudammiqu, ptcp. (< damƗqu D), benefitting. mudammiqat igirrƝya, making my reputation good. muddišu, ptcp. (< edƝšu D), making new. muddiš Ebabbar ana ¼amaš rƝÑišu, making Ebabbar new for Shamash his helper. mudeššnj, ptcp. (< dešû D), making abundant. muddeššƯ mƗkalƯ ellnjtim ana Nintu, making the supplies of sacred food for Nintu abundant. mudû, ptcp. (< idû G; cf. GAG 106q), knowing. šƯbƯ mudƝ ¨ulqišu itbalam, he has brought the witnesses who know it is his property; apkal ilƯ mudƝ mimma šumšu, the wisest of the gods, knowing the name of anything. mudûtu, nom. knowledge. šƯbnj mudƝ ¨ulqim mudnjssunu ma¨ar ilim iqabbûma, the witnesses who recognise the missing property shall say before the god what they know. mugallitu, ptcp. (< galƗtu D), frightening. nišƯ dadmƯ aburrƯ ušarbiÑ mugallitam ul ušaršƯšinƗti, I let the people lie down in well-watered pastures, I let no terrifying person possess them. mugarrinu, ptcp. (< garƗnu D), storing up. mugarrin karê ana Uraš gašrim, piling up the granaries in mighty Urash. mu¨addû, ptcp. (< ¨adû D), gladdening. mu¨addi libbi Ištar, gladdening the heart of Ishtar. mukammiru, ptcp. (< galƗtu D), heaping up. mukammer nu¨šim u Óu¨dim, heaping up plenty and abundance; mukammer ¨iÑbim ana Anim u Ištar, heaping up luxury for Anum and Ishtar. mukannišu, ptcp. (< kanƗšu D), controlling. mukanniš dadmƝ nƗr Purattim ittum Dagan bƗnîšu, controlling the communities of the River Euphrates with the sign of Dagan, his creator. mukillu, ptcp. (< kalû D), holding. mukƯl nindabê rabûtim ana Eninnu, holding the magnificent offerings in Eninnu. mukƯnu, ptcp. (< kânu D), establishing. mukƯn uÑurƗtim ša Keš, establishing the design of Kish; mukƯn išdƯ Sipparim, establishing the foundations of Sippar. mullû, ptcp. (< elû D), raising. mullî rƝš Eanna mukammer ¨iÑbim ana Anim u Ištar, raising the pinnacle of Eanna, heaping up luxury for Anum and Ishtar. munaggiru, ptcp. (< nagƗru D), informing. munaggiršu bƯssu itabbal, one who informs on him shall take away his house.

308

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

muna¨¨išu, ptcp. (< na¨ašu D), giving prosperity. munahhiš Urim, making Ur prosper. munakkipu, ptcp. (< nakƗpu D), tossing. rƯmum kadrum munakkip zƗirƯ, a raging ox, tossing opponents. munammiru, ptcp. (< namƗru D), shedding light. rubûm naadum munawwer pani Tišpak, the obedient prince, shedding light on the face of Tishpak. munƝ¨u, ptcp. (nâ¨u D), quietening. munƝ¨ libbi Adad qurƗdim in BƯt Karkara, who quietens the heart of Adad as he fights in Bitkarkara. munnabtu, nom. (ptcp. < abƗtu N), fugitive. aššum Ɨlšu izƝruma innabitu aššat munnabtim ana mutiša ul itâr, because he has hated his city and fled, the wife of the fugitive shall not return to her husband. mupa¨¨iru, ptcp. (< pa¨Ɨru D), assembling. Ñulnjl mƗtim mupa¨¨ir nišƯ sap¨Ɨtim ša Isin, a shade for the land, assembling the people from everywhere in Isin. mupparkû, ptcp. (< naparkû), abandoning. nadum la mupparkûm ana Ezida, the devoted one, not neglecting Ezida. muqqelpƯtu, nom. (ptcp. fem. < neqelpû), drifting boat. ša muqqelpƯtim, the one in a drifting boat. murabbƯtu, nom. (ptcp. fem. < râbu D), foster mother. ana abim murabbƯšu u ummim murabbƯtišu ul abƯ atta ul ummƯ atti iqtabi, he has said to his foster father and to his foster mother, “You are not my father; You are not my mother”. murabbû, nom. (ptcp. masc. < râbu D), foster father. ana abim murabbƯšu, to his foster father. murappišu, ptcp. (< rapƗšu D), expanding. mušƗter Kutî murappiš mimma šumšu ana Meslam, making Kuta excellent, expanding Meslam in every way. murƯšu, ptcp. (< râšu D), bringing pleasure. narƗm Tutu murƯš Barsippa, loved by Tutu, pleasing Borsippa. murÑu, nom. illness. murÑam kabtam asakkam lemnam simmam marÑam, serious illness, demonic pain, an infected sore. murteddû, nom. driver. ereqqam u murteddƯša Ưgur, he hired a waggon and a driver for it. musaru, cf. mušaru, measure of surface area. muÑƯru, ptcp. (< Ñurru), making famous. muÑƯr bƯt Ebabbar ša kî šubat šamƗi, making famous the Ebabbar shrine, which is like a dwelling in heaven. mušaddilu, ptcp. (< šadƗlu D), developing. mušaddil mƝreštim ša Dilbat mugarrin karê ana Uraš gašrim, developing land to be ploughed in Dilbat, piling up the granaries for mighty Urash. mušaklil, ptcp. (< šuklulu), supplying, fulfilling. mušaklil mimma šumšu ana Nippur, supplying Nippur with whatever it needs; mušaklil tƝrƝtim ša Sugal, fulfilling the oracles for Sugal. mušakšidu, ptcp. (< kašƗdu ¼), granting victory. mušakšidu irnittiya, granting me the victory. mušalbišu, ptcp. (< labƗšu ¼), decorating. mušalbiš warqim gigunƝ Aya muÑƯr bƯt Ebabbar ša kî šubat šamƗi, covering the chapels of Aya with greenery (CAD labƗšu, 5.c.1, line 22a).

GLOSSARY

309

mušallimu, ptcp. (< šalƗmu D), bringing peace. anƗkuma rƝûm mušallimum, I am the shepherd who brings peace. mušarbû, ptcp. (< rabû ¼), extolling. mušarbi zikru BƗbilim muÓƯb libbi Marduk bƝlišu, extolling the name of Babylon, making happy the heart of Marduk his lord; mušarbû šarrnjtišu, making his kingdom magnificent. mušƗriku, ptcp. (< arƗku ¼), lengthening. apkal ilƯ mudƝ mimma šumšu mušƗriku njm balƗÓiya, counsellor of the gods, knowing anything by its name, lengthening the days of my life. mušaršidu, ptcp. (< rašƗdu ¼), protecting. mušaršidu šubƗtišin in nu¨šim, protecting their homes for prosperity. mušaru, surface area measurement. ana 1 musar bƯtim 2 šiqil kaspam ana qƯštišu inaddišum, for one mushar of the house he shall give him two shekels of silver in compensation. mušassiku, ptcp. (< nasƗku ¼), removing. ina awat Marduk bƝliya uÑurƗtnja mušassikam ay iršia, by the word of Marduk, my lord, may my engraving not have a remover. mušƗtiru, ptcp. (< atƗru ¼), making excellent. mušƗter Kutî murappiš mimma šumšu ana Meslam, who made Kuta excellent, who expanded Meslam in every way. mušƝniqtu, nom. (ptcp. < enƝqu ¼) nurse. mƗrašu ana mušƝniqtim iddinma Ñe¨rum šû ina qƗt mušƝniqtim imtnjt mušƝniqtum balum abišu u ummišu Ñi¨ram šaniamma irtakas, he has given his son to a nurse but that child has died in the care of the nurse and the nurse has then made an agreement about another child without the knowledge of the father and the mother. mušeppû, ptcp. (< šapû D), silencing. mutêr lamassišu damiqtim ana Ɨlim Aššur mušeppi nƗbi¨Ư, bringing back its beneficent protector to the city of Asshur, silencing the objectors. mušƝpû, ptcp. (< apû ¼), making visible. mušƝpƯ kƯnƗtim mušnjšer ammi, making justice visible, treating the people correctly. mušƝÑû, ptcp. (< aÑû ¼), bringing out. šarrum dannum šamšu BƗbilim mušƝÑi nnjrim ana mƗt ¼umerim u Akkadîm, the mighty king, the sun of Babylon, who producing light in the land of Sumer and Akkad. mušešqû, ptcp. (< šaqû ¼), giving to drink. mušešqi nu¨šim ana Meslam, supplying abundant drink to Meslam. mušƯmu, mušimmu, ptcp. (< šâmu B; cf. GAG 104k), determining. mušƯm šƯmƗtim, controller of destiny. muškƝnu, nom. commoner. warad muškƝnim, a worker’s slave; mƗr muškƝnim, a worker’s son; lƝt muškƝnim imta¨aÑ, he has struck the cheek of a commoner. mušpazzir, ptcp. (< pazƗru ¼D), protecting. mušpazzir nišƯ MalgƯm in karašîm, who protected the people of Malgium from catastrophe. muštƗlu, nom. (ptcp. < šâlu Gt), arbitrator. muštƗlum gitmƗlum, the perfect arbitrator. muštakkƯnu, ptcp. (< šakƗnu Gt), establishing. muštakkin simƗtim in Eudgalgal, arranging the destinies in Eudgalgal. muštas¨iru, ptcp. (< sa¨Ɨru ¼t), surrounding. muštas¨ir melemmƝ Emeteursag, surrounding the splendour of Emeteursag.

310

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

muštƝmiqu, ptcp. (< emƝqu ¼t), making supplication. wašrum muštƝmiqum bƗbil ¨egallim ana Egišnugal, the devoted one making supplication, gathering riches for Egishnugal; muštƝmiqum ana ilƯ rabûtim, supplicating the mighty gods. mušteÑbû, ptcp. (< Ñebû ¼t), arranging. mušteÑbî parÑƯ rabûtim ša Ištar, arranging the great ceremonies for Ishtar. muštƝširu, ptcp. (< ešƝru ¼t), treating fairly. muštƝšer šaknat napištim, treating fairly what is endowed with life. muštešmû, ptcp. (< šemû ¼t), being obeyed. šarrum muštešmi kibrƗt arbaim, I am the king who is obeyed in the four parts of the world. mnjšu, nom. night. njmam ana mnjšim litƝršumma, let him turn his day into night. mušnjšeru, ptcp. (< ešƝru ¼), showing justice. mušnjšer ammi, showing the people justice. mutammi¨u, ptcp. (< tamƗ¨u D), grasping. mutamme¨ ayyƗbƯ, grasping the enemy. muterru, ptcp. (< târu D), restoring, returning. mutêr Eridu ana ašrišu, bringing back Eridu to its position; mutêr lamassišu damiqtim ana Ɨlim Aššur, who has brought back the protective statues to the city of Asshur. muttabbilu, nom. leader. emqum muttabbilum, the wise one, the organiser (CAD M, 302, s.v. a). muttatu, nom. part. muttassu ugallabnj, they shall partly shave him; muttat eqlim kirîm u bƯšim inaddinnjšimma, they shall give her a part of the field, orchard or property. mutu, nom. husband. ana mutim iddišši, he gave her to a husband; mutu libbiša i¨¨assi, she shall choose the husband of her heart; sinništum mussa izƝrma ul ta¨¨azanni iqtabi, the woman hated her husband and has said, “You shall not hold me”; amtam ana mutiša iddinma, she gave a slave-girl to her husband; aššat awƯlim mussa ubbiršima itti zikarim šanîm ina utnjlim la iÑÑabit, a man’s wife was accused by her husband of lying with another man but was not caught; mussa ezƝbša iqtabi, her husband has said he will leave her; warki mutiša mƗrnjša ul ipaqqarnjši, after her husband’s death her sons will not claim against her; bƯtam ša mutiša panîm ana mutiša warkîm u sinništim šuƗti ipaqqidnjma, they shall entrust the house of her former husband to that woman and her later husband. mnjtu, nom. death. mnjt niÓil Ưnim, instant death (lit. “death of the glance of the eye”); balƗÓam ša itti mnjtim šitannu, a life which is striving with death; kƯma nišik mnjtim la innassa¨u, like the bite of death. muÓa¨¨idu, ptcp. (< Óa¨Ɨdu D), showing generosity. muÓa¨¨id nu¨šim bƯt Egalma¨, showing generosity in the abundance of the shrine of Egalmah. muÓibbu, ptcp. (< Óâbu D), making happy. muÓƯb libbi Marduk bƝlišu, pleasing the heart of his lord Marduk. muzzazu, nom. attendant. mƗr girseqîm muzzaz ekallim u mƗr sekretim ul ibbaqqar, an attendant, a temple official and the son of a priestess shall not be reclaimed.

GLOSSARY

311

N naƗdu, see nadu. nabƗ¨u, see nƗbi¨u. nabalkattu, nom. climbing over. ina pilšim ulu ina nabalkattim, whether by breaking in or climbing over. nabalkutu, vb. G: to intrude. ištu bƯtika ibbalakkatnjnim, from your house they will intrude into mine. nabƗu A (= AHw. nabƗu I), vb. G: to rise up in flood; nabƗu B, vb. G: to plunder; cf. nƗbi¨u, insurgent. nƗbi¨u, nom. (ptcp. < nabƗu A, so AHw.; perhaps < nabƗu B), insurgent, rebel. mušeppi nƗbi¨Ư, silencing rebels. nabû, vb. G: to nominate, designate. BƗbilam šumšu ÑƯram ibbinj, they gave Babylon its exalted name; cf. nƗbû, ptcp. nƗbû, ptcp. (< nabû), designating. Anum rabûm abu ilƯ nƗbû palêya, the father of the gods, designating my reign. nadƗnu, vb. G: 1. to give, entrust; 2. + ana kaspim, to sell. 3. to pay. —1. qƯšti abum iddinušum, the gift that his father gave him; ana eiltišu ul inaddin, he shall not give for a debt; mussa nudunnâm la iddiššim, her husband did not give her a marriage gift; 1 mana kaspam ana uzzubêm inaddiššim, he shall give her one mana of silver as a divorce payment; mƗrtƯ ul anaddikkum, I shall not give you my daughter; rƝdiam ana igrim ittadin, he has given a soldier for hire; ÑalmƗt qaqqadim ša Ellil išrukam rƝûssina Marduk iddinam, the mass of humankind, which Enlil entrusted to me, whose shepherding Marduk gave me; eleppašu … ana igrim iddinma, he gave his boat on hire; liƗt awƯlim ana igrim ittadin, he has given on hire a man’s cattle; aššassu mƗrašu u mƗrassu ana kaspim iddin ulu ana kiššƗtim ittandin, he sold his wife, his son, or his daughter or gives them in pledge; awƯlum eqelšu ana biltim ana errƝšim iddinma, a man gave his field for rent to a cultivator; ana maÑÑarnjtim inaddin, he entrusts for safe-keeping; ašar šnjbulu la iddinma, he did not give it at the place of delivery; elippam dannatam ana bƝl eleppim inaddin, he shall give back the repaired boat to the owner of the boat. —2. uniƗtim ana kaspim ul inaddin, they shall not sell the household goods. —3. uštašanƗma ana bƝl šeim inaddin, he shall double the amount and pay the owner of the barley; biltam inaddin, he shall pay the rent; idƯ našpakim inaddin, he shall pay the fees for storage; 2 šiqil kaspam ana qƯštišu inaddiššum, he shall pay him two shekels of silver as his fee; cf. nadinu, ptcp. N: to be given. mimma ša ana mƗrƯša innadnu, whatever was given to her sons; eqelšu … ana ipÓerišu ul innaddin, his field … shall not be given as his ransom; mimma ul innaddiššim, nothing at all shall be given to her. nƗdinƗnu, nom. seller. nƗdinƗnummi iddinam … iqtabi, he has said, “A seller gave it to me …”. nƗdinu, ptcp. (< nadƗnu), giving. šarrum nƗdin napištim, the king, giver of life.

312

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

nadƯtu, nom. devotee, priestess. nadƯtim ša mƗrƯ ušaršušu, a priestess who provided him with sons. nadu, nom. devout person. nadum la mupparkûm ana Ezida, the devoted one, not neglecting Ezida. nadû, vb. G: —1. to knock away; 2. + eli, to charge; 3. to abandon, leave fallow; 4. + a¨nj, to be lazy. —1. šinnašu inaddû, they shall knock out his tooth; ana mê inaddûšunnjti, they shall throw them into the water. —2. ša elišu kišpnj nadû, the one who has been charged with sorcery (lit. “against whom sorcery has been thrown). — 3. Ɨlšu iddƯma ittƗbit, he abandoned his city and he has fled; eqlam ša iddû, the field which he left fallow. —4. a¨šu iddƯma, he was lazy (lit. “he threw down his arm”). ¼: to cause to drop. nakrum mimma ša našû uštaddƯšu, an aggressor made him surrender what was being carried; mƗrat awƯlim im¨aÑma ša libbiša uštaddƯši, he has struck a gentleman’s daughter and made her lose her unborn child. N: 1. to be thrown; 2. to be neglected. —1. awƯlum šû ana išƗtim šuƗti innaddi, that man shall be thrown into that fire. —2. bilat eqlim ša šanƗtim ša innadû, rent for the field for the years when it was abandoned. nagƗru, vb. G: to be disloyal?; cf. nƗgiru, ptcp. D: to denounce; cf. munaggiru, ptcp. nagbu, nom. water-source. nƗrƗtišu ina nagbim liskir, let him stop up his rivers at the source. naggƗru, nom. carpenter. idƯ naggƗrim, the wages of a carpenter. nƗgiru, nom. (ptcp.? < nagƗru) herald. ana šisƯt nƗgirim la uštƝÑiam, he has not brought him out at the shout of the denouncer. na¨Ɨšu, vb. G: to prosper. ina lamassiya i¨¨iša, under my protection they came to prosper. D: to make prosper; cf. muna¨¨išu, ptcp. nâ¨u, vb. G: to be still. D: to soothe. ina Ñimdi la una¨¨ušu, which he cannot soothe with a binding; cf. munƝ¨u, ptcp. nakƗpu, vb. G: to gore (of an ox). alpum snjqam ina alƗkišu awƯlam ikkipma uštamƯt, an ox gores a man while it is walking in the street and causes his death. D: to gore; cf. munakkipu, ptcp. nakƗru, vb. G: to disagree. tamkƗrum mimma ša samallûm iddinušum ittakiršu, the merchant has argued with him about what the salesman gave him. D: to change. purussƝ mƗtim ša aprusu ay unakkir, let him not change the decisions I have taken for the land; šimtam uttakkir, he has changed the marking. Dt: to be changed. ša qibƯssu la uttakkaru, whose word cannot be changed. nakƗsu, vb. to cut down, sever. ina kirƯ awƯlim iÑam ikkis, he felled a tree in a man’s orchard; lišƗnšu inakkisnj, they shall sever his tongue. nakkaptu, nom. eye-socket. nakkapti awƯlim ina karzilli iptƝma, he opened a man’s eye socket with a bronze scalpel. nakkƗpû, nom. prone to gore. alap awƯlim nakkƗpƯma kƯma nakkƗpû bƗbtašu ušƝdƯšumma, a man’s ox was prone to gore and his community had informed him that it was prone to gore.

GLOSSARY

313

nakru, nom. enemy. nakrum mimma ša našû uštaddƯšu, an aggressor has made him drop what was being carried; nakiršu elišu lišzƯz, let him make his enemy to stand over him. namƗru, nawƗru, vb. G: to shine, become bright. iklet la nawƗrim, darkness with no brightening. D: to shed light. kƯma ¼amaš ana ÑalmƗt qaqqadim waÑêmma mƗtim nuwwurim, to rise like Shamash over the dark headed ones and shed light on the land; cf. munammir, ptcp. namknjr, see makknjru. napƗ¨u, vb. G: to blow, kindle a fire. N: to flare up. ina bƯt awƯlim išƗtum innapi¨ma, a fire flared up in a man’s house. naparkû (AHw. naparkû II), to cease doing something; cf. mupparku, ptcp. napƗšu, vb. G: to breathe freely. D: to ease. dƯnšu lƯmur libbašu linappišma, let him understand his problem, let him ease his heart. nap¨aru, nom. assembly of the gods. ilnj rabûtum ša šamê u erÑetim Anunnaknj ina nap¨arišunu, the almighty gods of heaven and earth, the Anunnaki in their assembly. napištu, nom. life. dƯnum šû dƯn napišti, that trial is a trial for a life; muštƝšer šaknat napištim, showing justice to that which has life; šarrum nƗdin napištim ana Adab, the king who gave life to Adab. nappƗ¨u, nom. smith. [idƯ] nappƗ¨im, the fees for a smith. naqƗru, vb. G: to pull apart. malƗ¨um eleppam šuƗti inaqqarma, the boat-builder shall pull that boat apart. naqbu, see nagbu. nƗqidu, nom. (cf. Sum. na.gada), herdsman. nƗqidam ana liƗtim u ÑƝnim reîm Ưgur, he hired a herdsman to pasture the cattle and sheep. narƗmu, adj. beloved. narƗm Tutu, beloved of Tutu. narû, nom. stele. awâtia šnjqurƗtim ina narîya ašÓurma, I inscribed my precious words on my stela. nƗru, nom. 1. river; 2. Id, the god of the river (+ divine determinative). —1. nƗr Purattim, the River Euphrates; nƗrƗtišu ina nagbim liskir, may he stop up his rivers at the source. —2. ša elišu kišpnj nadû ana Id illak Id išalliamma, the person against whom witchcraft has been alleged shall go to the river and jump into the river; awƯlam šuƗti Id njtebbibaššuma, the river has cleansed that man. nasƗ¨u, vb. G: 1. to remove vilolently; 2. to disinherit. —1. nasƗ¨ išdƯ šarrnjtišu, ripping out of the foundations of his kingdom; Ưnšu inassa¨nj, they shall gouge out his eye; nakrƯ eliš u šapliš assu¨, I rooted out the enemies above and below; eliš ina balÓnjtim lissu¨šu, may he cut him off from those living above. —2. mƗrƯ anassa¨ iqtabi, he has said, “I will disinherit my son”. N: 1. to be removed; 2. to be disinherited. —1. kƯma nišik mnjtim la innassa¨u, like the sting of death it will not be removed. —2. ina bƯt abim innassa¨, he shall be disinherited from his father’s estate. nasƗku A, vb. G: to throw away. ¼: to throw out. uÑurƗtiya ay ušassik, let no-one throw out my plans; cf. mušassiku, ptcp. nasƗku B, vb. G: to wound. alpam Ưgurma … šašallašu ittasak!, he hired an ox and … wounded its rump.

314

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

nasƗqu, vb. G: to choose. zittašu inassaqma, he shall choose his share. nasqu, nom. pre-eminent. awâtnja nasqƗ epšƝtnja šƗninam ul išâ, my words are preeminent, my deeds have no rival. naÑƗru, vb. G: 1. to take care of; 2. to observe. —1. bƯtam inaÑÑarnj u Ñe¨¨ernjtim urabbû, they shall take care of the house and bring up the children; pagarša la iÑÑurma, she did not look after her body. —2. awât mƯšarim … liÑÑur, let him observe the words of justice. našpaku, nom. granary. ina našpakim … šeam ilteqe, he took barley from the granary. našpaknjtu, nom. storage. šeašu ana našpaknjtim ina bƯt awƯlim išpukma, he put his barley in storage in a man’s house. našû, vb. G: 1. to carry; 2. to support; 3. to offer; 4. to pay a penalty; 5. + Ưnu, to covet (lit. “to lift the eyes”). —1. mimma ša našû uštaddƯšu, he made him drop what was being carried. —2. adi balÓat ittanaššƯši, he will continue to support her while she lives. —3. nadƯtam qadištam ulu kulmašƯtam ana ilim iššƯma, he offered to the god a priestess, a holy girl or a hierodule.—4. aran dƯnim šuƗti ittanašši, he will always pay the penalty in that judgment. —5. ana numƗt bƝl bƯtim Ưnšu iššƯma, he coveted (lit. “he lifted his eye towards”) the property of the owner of the house; cf. nƗšû, ptcp. nƗšû, ptcp. carrying. rƝdûm bƗirum u nƗši biltim, a soldier on the land or on the water or one carrying tribute. naÓƗlu, vb. G: to see. ¼: to make visible. kammƗl šarrnjtim lišaÓÓilšu, may he allow him to see a rival for his kingdom. naÓû, vb. G: to flog. ma¨ar dayyƗnƯ inaÓÓnjšu, they shall flog him before the judges. ¼: to have someone beaten. in kakkišu dannim lišaÓÓƯšuma, with his powerful weapons may he have him beaten (col. li:36; alt. “may he strike him” (< šatû, to strike); see CAD N/2, 133b, s.v. naÓû 3). nawƗru, see namƗru, to shine. ne¨elÑû, vb. G: to slip. ¼: to allow to crumble. išdƯ ummƗnišu liš¨elÑi, may he make the foundations of his people crumble. nƝmelu, nom. profit. nƝmelam la Ưtamar, he has not seen any profit. nƝmequ, nom. wisdom. uznam u nƝmeqam lƯÓeršuma, let him deprive him of wisdom and understanding. nepû, vb. G: to take as a pledge. alpam ana nipûtim ittepe, he has taken an ox as a pledge; cf. nƝpû, ptcp. nƝpû, nom. (ptcp. < nepû), creditor, one who takes a pledge. nipûtum ina bƯt nƝpƯša ina šƯmƗtiša imtnjt, the pledge has died according to its fate in the house of the creditor. neqelpû, vb. (root n-q-l-p-), to drift; cf. muqqelpƯtu, ptcp. nƝrtu, nom. murder. nƝrtam elišu iddƯma, he charged him with murder. nƝšu, nom. lion. ina ÑƝrim nƝšum iddnjkšu, a lion killed it in the open country. nibƯtu, nom. nominee. nibƯt Ellil anƗku, I am Enlil’s nominee. nidƯtu, nom. neglected land. nidƯtam Ưzib, he went away from the abandoned land. nidûtu (or kankallu), nom. neglected land. eqel nidûtim ana šalaš šanƗtim ana teptƯtim ušƝÑƯma, he took over a neglected field to develop over three years. nikkassu, nom. financial account. ana nikkassim ul iššakkan, it will not be set in the account.

GLOSSARY

315

nindabû, nom. offering. nindabê rabûtim ana Eninnu, the great offerings for Eninnu. nipiltu, nom. supplementary payment, compensation. eqlam … upƯ¨ u niplƗtim iddin, he acquired by exchange the field … and made supplementary payments. nipûtu, nom. pledge, security. alpam ana nipûtim ittepe, he has seized an ox as a pledge; ana nipûtim ištiat ̃ mana kaspam išaqqal, for one pledge he shall pay one-third of a mana of silver. nisi¨tu, nom. deserter. ÑƗb nis¨Ɨtim irtaši, he has acquired one of the deserting soldiers. nismatu, see nizmatu. nišku, nom. bite. kƯma nišik mnjtim la innassa¨u, which, like the bite of death, will not be removed. nišnj, nom. pl. people, local community. kiššat nišƯ, the mass of the people; ša kƯma abim wƗlidim ana nišƯ ibaššû, who became like a natural father to the people; kƯma išƗtim ezzetim ša appim nišƯšu liqmi, let him burn his people with a fierce fire in the reeds; ina utliya nišƯ mƗt ¼umerim u Akkadîm ukƯl, I held the people of Sumer and Akkad in my arms; 1 mana kaspam ana nišƯšu išaqqalnj, they shall pay one mana of silver to his community. nƯšu A, nom. life, oath. nƯš ilim izakkarma, he shall swear an oath by the god (lit. “he shall mention the life of the god”). nƯšu B, nom. raising. rubûm ellum ša nƯš qƗtišu Adad idû, the sacred prince, the raising of whose hand Adad recognises. niÓlu, nom. glance. mnjt niÓil Ưnim, sudden death (lit. “death at the glance of an eye”). nizmatu, nom. wish. ušakšidu nizmassu, who allowed him to achieve his ambition. nudunnû, nom. marriage-gift. mussa nudunnâm la iddiššim, her husband did not given her a marriage-gift. nu¨šu, nom. abundance. mukammer nu¨šim u Óu¨dim, supplying abundance and plenty; mušaršidu šubƗtišin in nu¨šim, providing their homes with abundance; mušešqi nu¨šim ana Meslam, who gives abundant drink to Meslam; šƗkin mê nu¨šim ana nišƯšu, establishing water in abundance for his people. nukaribbu, nom. gardener. eqlam ana kirîm zaqƗpim ana nukaribbim iddin, he gave a field to a gardener to plant as an orchard. nukurtu, nom. hostility. ina mƗt nukurtim, in a hostile land. numƗtu, nom. pl. movable property. ana numƗt bƝl bƯtim Ưnšu iššƯma, he coveted the property of the owner of the house; numƗt rƝdîm ilteqe, he has taken the property of a soldier. nnjru, nom. light. mušƝÑi nnjrim (vnt. nnjrium) ana mƗt ¼umerim u Akkadîm, shedding light on the land of Sumer and Akkad; nnjram ušƝÑišinƗšim. he brought out the light for them.

P pagru, nom. body. sinništum šû pagarša la iÑÑurma ana bƯt šanîm Ưterub, that woman did not safeguard her body and she has entered the house of another man. pa¨Ɨru, vb. G: to come together. D: to bring together; cf. mupa¨¨iru, ptcp. palƗhu, vb. G: to worship; cf. pƗli¨u, ptcp.

316

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

palƗsu (formerly read balƗÑu, to ogle; cf. BAL3 xiv), vb. G: to look at. D: to desire. ana sinništim šanƯtim uptallisma, he has desired another woman. palƗšu, vb. G: to break into. awƯlum bƯtam ipluš, a man broke into a house. pƗlihu, ptcp. (< palƗhu), worshipping. rubâm nadam pƗli¨ ilƯ, the devout prince, fearing the gods. palû, nom. rule, reign. abu ilƯ nƗbû palêya, the father of the gods, supporting my rule; šanƗt palƝšu, the years of his reign; palê tƗnƝ¨im, a reign of weariness. pƗnu A (AHw. pƗnu I), nom. face. 1. face; 2. + abƗlu, to excuse (lit. “to move the face”); 3. + šakƗnu, to decide (lit. “to fix the face”); 4. ina pƗni, because of, in front of; 5. ana pƗni, previously, in front of. —1. munawwer pani Tišpak, bringing light to the face of Tishpak. —2. ana ištiššu panƯšu ubbalnj, for his first offence they shall excuse him. —3. ezƝbim pƗnƯšu ištakan, he has decided to leave. —4. bƯssu ina panƯ ilkim iddƯma, he neglected the estate because of the duty; ina panƯ pilšim šuƗti idukknjšuma, they shall kill him in front of the hole. —5. ana panƯšu aššassu ana bƯt šanîm Ưterubma, before that his wife has entered another man’s house; ana panƯ eqlišu uzzuzim Ưgurma, he hired him to stand in front of his field. [pƗnu B (AHw. pƗnu II), nom. measure for grain. ana 1 kurrum 1 pƗn 4 snjt šeam Ñibtam ileqqe, he shall receive one pan and four sa of barley in interest per kur.] pƗnû, adj. previous. warkat bƯt mutiša panîm iparrasnjma, they shall examine the condition of her former husband’s house. paqƗdu, vb. G: to entrust. aldâm iqƯpšu liƗtim ipqissum, he lent him seed and entrusted him with oxen; bƯtam ša mutiša panîm ana mutiša warkîm u sinništim šuƗti ipaqqidnjma, they shall entrust her former husband’s house to her later husband and the woman herself; cf. pƗqidu, ptcp. paqƗru, OB: baqƗru, vb. G: to claim. mƗrnjša ul ipaqqarnjši, her sons shall have no claim against her. N: ul ippaqqar, he shall not be reclaimed. pƗqidu, nom. (ptcp.), caring for. pƗqid bƯtim Ñursagkalamma, caring for the temple of Hursagkalamma. parƗsu, vb. to decide. dayyƗnnj warkassu iparrasnjma, the judges shall decide his circumstances; purussƝ mƗtim ša aprusu ay unakkir, let him not change the decisions I took for the land. N: to be decided. warkassa ina bƗbtiša ipparrasma, her circumstances will be decided in her community. parkullu, nom. seal-cutter, lapicide. [idƯ] purkullim, the wages of a lapicide. parsiktu, measure for grain. ina njmim ištƝn 3 parsikat šeam inaddin, he shall give three parsiktu of barley for one day. parÑu, nom. rite. parÑƯ rabûtim ša Ištar, the great ceremonies for Ishtar. pasƗsu, vb. G: to break. D: to smash, annul. dƯn adƯnu uptassis, he has annulled the rules I ordained. pašƗ¨u, vb. G: to soothe. simmam marÑam ša la ipašše¨nj, a painful wound which they will not soothe. pašƗru, vb. G: to trade. tamkƗrum ana šamallîm šeam šƯpƗtim šamnam u mimma bƯšam ana pašƗrim iddin, a merchant gave a trader barley, wool, oil or some other product for trading.

GLOSSARY

317

pašƗÓu, vb. G: to remove. šumƯ šaÓram ipšiÓma, he removed my inscribed name. paÓƗru, vb. G: to repurchase, redeem. bƝl amtim išaqqalma amassu ipaÓÓar, the owner of the slave shall pay and repurchase his slave; šûma ramanšu ipaÓÓar, he shall redeem himself. N: to be redeemed. ina bƯt il Ɨlišu ippaÓÓar, he shall be redeemed in the shrine of his god. pƗtiu, ptcp. (< petû), making effective (see AHw. petû II, G 8; lit. “opening”). Ištar bƝlet tƗ¨azim u qablim pƗtiat kakkiya lamassƯ damiqtum rƗimat palêya, Ishtar, lady of war and conflict, who makes my weapons effective. pƗÓu, nom. district. Ɨlum u rabiƗnum ša ina erÑetišunu u paÓÓišunu ¨ubtum i¨¨abtu, the city and governor in whose territory and district the robbery occurred. pazƗru, vb. G: to abscond, hide. ¼t: to protect (CAD s.v. 5a). ina šulmim attabbalšinƗti ina nƝmeqia uštapziršinƗti, I always led them in peace, I protected them by my wisdom. ¼D (CAD s.v. 5b); cf. mušpazziru, ptcp. pe¨û, vb. G: to seal, caulk. malƗ¨um elep 60 kur ana awƯlim ip¨e, the boatman caulked for a man a sixty-gur boat. petû, vb. G: 1. to open; 2. to open a gap; 3. to develop. —1. bƝl bƯtim našpakam iptƝma šeam ilqe, the owner opened the storehouse and took the barley; bƯt sƯbim iptete, she opened a house for drinking; nakkapti awƯlim ina karzilli siparrim iptƝma, he opened a man’s eye-socket with the bronze knife; atappašu ana šiqƯtim ipte, he opened his dyke for irrigation. —2. mê iptƝma epšƝtim ša eqel itƝšu mê uštƗbil, he opened a gap for water and let the water erode his neighbour’s work; —3. a¨su iddƯma eqlam la iptete, he was lazy and did not develop the field; cf. pƗtiu, ptcp. D: to solve. pušqƯ wašÓnjtim upetti I solved awkward difficulties. N: to be opened. ina kƗrišu pƯtum ittepte u ugƗram mê uštƗbil, a break has been opened in the dyke and he has let the water erode the meadow; awƯlum ša ina kƗrišu pƯtum ippetû, the man in whose dyke the opening was made. pƯ¨Ɨtu, nom. debt. pƯ¨assu apƗlam la ilei, he was not able to pay his debt. pƯ¨u, nom. jug (of beer). sƗbƯtum ištƝn pƯ¨am! ana qƯptim iddin, the drink-seller gave one jug on credit. pilšu, nom. burglary, break-in. ulu ina pilšim ulu ina nabalkattim, either by breaking in or by scaling over. pissƗtu, nom. disease (of an animal). ina tarbaÑim pissƗtam uštabšƯ, he has allowed disease to develop in the pen. piššatu, nom. oil. ipram piššatam u lubnjšam inaddinnjšimma, they shall give her food, oil and clothing. pƯtu, nom. opening. ina kƗrišu pƯtum ittepte, an opening has been made in his dyke. pû, nom. 1. mouth; 2. command; 3. words, terms. —1. kittam u mƯšaram ina pƯ mƗtim aškun, I have put rules and justice in the mouth of the nation. —2. ina pƯ Ellil šarrim, by the command of Enlil the king. —3. ana pƯ riksƗtišu, according to the words of his agreement; kaspam u Ñibassu ša pƯ Óuppišu, silver and the interest on it according to the words of the document; ina pƯšu kabtim liqbi, may he speak with his serious words.

318

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

pu¨¨u, vb. D: to exchange. eqlam … upƯ¨ u niplƗtim iddin, he acquired by exchange the field … and paid a supplement. pu¨ru, nom. assembly. ina pu¨rim ina kussî dayyƗnnjtišu ušetbûšuma, they shall have him removed from the assembly and from his judicial seat. pnj¨u, nom. substitute. agram Ưgurma pnj¨šu iÓÓarad, he hired a mercenary and sent him as his substitute. purussu, nom. decision. purussâm iprus, he reached a decision; ašar šipÓim u purussêm ina ma¨ar Ellil, the place of judgment and decision in the presence of Enlil. pušqu, nom. distress. šƗÓip nišƯšu in pušqim, saving his people in distress.

Q qa, see qû. qabla (adv.), see qablû. qablu (CAD qablu B), nom. conflict. ašar tƗhazim u qablim, the place of conflict and strife; Nergal dannum ina ilƯ qabal la ma¨Ɨr, Nergal, strongest of the gods unrivalled in the battle; qablƗtim ubelli, I made conflicts cease. qablû, nom. midst; adv. qabla (CAD s.v. 1a, Q: 16b-17a). idƯ alpim ša qabla 3 kur šeam ana bƝlišu inaddin, as fees for the ox in the middle he shall give three kur of barley to its owner. qabû, vb. G: to speak, state, say, ask. annƯtam liqbƯma, let him speak in this way; mudnjssunu ma¨ar ilim iqabbûma, they shall state what they know in the presence of the god; ezƝbša iqtabi, he has said he will divorce her; awƯlum mimmûšu la ¨aliqma mimmê ¨aliq iqtabi, a man with nothing lost has said, “Something is lost”; ul abƯ atta ul ummƯ atti iqtabi, he has said, “You are not my father, you are not my mother”; eqlam erƝšam iqtabi, he has asked for the field to be cultivated; cf. qƗbû, ptcp. qƗbû, ptcp. (< qabû), speaking. Ninkarrak mƗrat Anim qƗbiat dumqiya, Ninkarrak the daughter of Sin who speaks in my favour. qadištu, nom. temple-prostitute. abum nadƯtam qadištam ulu kulmašƯtam ana ilim iššƯma, a father offered to the god a devotee, a temple-prostitute or a hierodule. qadu, (CAD adi B) prep. with. qadum šeriktim ša bƯt abiša ana bƯt warad ekallim … Ưrubma, she entered the house of a palace-slave … with the dowry from her father’s house. qalû, vb. G: to execute by burning. awƯltam šuƗti iqallnjši, they shall burn such a woman. qâlu, vb. G: to heed. ana awâtim ša ina narîya ašÓuru liqnjlma, let him heed the words which I have inscribed on my stele. qamû, vb. to burn. ina kašnjšišu rabîm kƯma išƗtim ezzetim ša appim nišƯšu liqmi, let him burn his people by his mighty power, like a raging fire in the reeds. qâpu A, vb. G: to entrust. aldâm iqƯpšu liƗtim ipqissu, he lent him seed, he entrusted him with the oxen. qâpu B, vb. G: to crumble, collapse. igƗrum iqtnjp, the wall has collapsed.

GLOSSARY

319

qaqqadu, nom. principal amount; head. —1. qaqqad kaspim ana tamkƗrim utâr, he shall repay the principal amount to the merchant. —2. ÑalmƗt qaqqadim, humankind, see Ñalmu. qarƯtu, nom. granary. ina qarƯtim ibbûm ittabši, a loss has occurred in the granary. qarnu, nom. horn. qaranšu išbir zibbassu ittakis, he broke its horn or he has cut its tail. qarrƗdu, nom. hero. qarrƗdƯšu lišamqit damƯšunu erÑetam lišqi, may he make his heroes fall, make the land drink their blood; Zababa qarrƗdum rabium mƗrum rƝštûm ša Ekur Ɨliku imniya, Zababa, mighty warrior, first son born of Ekur, walking at my right hand. qâšu, vb. G: to give. šû iqƯšu napšatam ana Maškan-šƗpir, it was he who granted life to Mashkan-shapar. qatû, vb. G: to come to an end. ¼: to terminate. umƯ war¨Ư šanƗt palƝšu ina tƗnƝ¨im u dimmatim lišaqti, may he bring each day, each month, each year of his rule to a close with weeping and wailing. qƗtu, nom. 1. hand; 2. possession. —1. rubûm ellum ša nƯš qƗtišu Adad idû, the pure prince, the raising of whose hand Adad knows; mƗr ummƗnim Ñe¨ram ana tarbƯtim ilqƝma šipir qƗtišu uštƗ¨issu, a professional person took a junior in adoption and he has made him learn his manual skill. —2. bƯš qƗtišu, property in his possession; šuƗti ana qƗt nakrƯšu limallƯšuma, may he hand him over into the possession of his enemies; ¨alqam ina qƗti awƯlim iÑÑabat, he has found the missing property in the possession of man; ina qƗt mušƝniqtim imtnjt, he has died in a nurse’s charge. qerbƯtu, nom. midst. ina qerbƯt nišƯšu zƝr awƯlnjtim ay ibni, may he not raise a human family amidst the people. qerbu, nom. 1. inside; 2. qerbum, adv. —1. asakkam lemnam simmam marÑam ša la ipašše¨nj asûm qerebšu la ilammadu, devilish pain, an infected sore, which they will not relieve, a physician does not understand its nature (lit. “its inside”). —2. qerbum Akkadim ribƯtim, within the enclosure at Akkad; qerbum BƗbilim, within Babylon. qerƝbu, vb. G: to be near. šƯbnjšu la qerbu, his witnesses are not near. qibƯtu, nom. command. ina qibƯt ¼amaš, at the command of Shamash; ša qibƯssu la uttakkaru, whose decrees will not be changed. qinnazu, nom. tail. ina qinnaz alpim 1 šnjši imma¨¨aÑ, he shall be beaten sixty times with an ox-tail. qƯptu, nom. trust. sƗbƯtum ištƝn pƯham ana qƯptim iddin, the drink-seller sold one jug on trust. qƯštu, nom. 1. gift; 2. fee. —1. qƯšti šarrum ana rƝdîm iddinu ilteqe, he has taken the gift the king gave to the soldier. —2. 2 šiqil kaspam ana qƯštišu inaddiššum, he shall give him two shekels of silver as his fee. qû, nom. measure for grain. ina šanat ana 1 kur šeim 5 qa šeam idƯ našpakim inaddin, he shall pay the storage charge of five qu of barley for one kur of barley per year. qurƗdu, nom. hero. munƝ¨ libbi Adad quradim in Karkara, quietening the heart of Adad, the hero at Karkara.

320

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

R rabƗÑu, vb. G: to lie down. ¼: to pasture. nišƯ dadmƯ aburrƯ ušarbiÑ, I pastured the people in quiet meadows. rabiƗnu, nom. governor. Ɨlum u rabiƗnum ša ina erÑetišnjnu u paÓišunu ¨ubtum i¨¨abtu, the city and governor in whose territory and district the robbery occurred. rabƯtu, nom. principal wife (lit. “great lady”). warki abišu ina snjn rabƯtišu ša mƗrƯ waldat ittaÑbat, after the death of his father he has been caught in the bosom of his principal wife. rabnj, nom. 1. large; 2. mighty, excessive; 3. important; 4. almighty. —1. ina abnim rabƯtim kaspam imta¨ar, she has received silver according to the large weight. —2. ina kašnjšišu rabîm, by his mighty power; ina uzzƗtiša rabiƗtim, with excessive anger; arnam kabtam šƝressu rabƯtam, heavy punishment and great condemnation. —3. parÑƯ rabûtim ša Ištar, important rituals; nindabê rabûtim, important offerings. —4. ilnj rabûtim ša šamê u erÑetim, the almighty gods of heaven and earth; Anum rabûm abu ilƯ, almighty Anu, father of the gods; Ninlil ummum rabƯtum, Ninlil, almighty mother; ina qibƯt ¼amaš dayyƗnim rabîm ša šamê u erÑetim, at the command of Shamash, the almighty judge of heaven and earth. rabû, vb. G: 1. to be important; 2. to be grown up. awƯlum lƝt awƯlim ša elišu rabû imta¨aÑ, a man has struck the cheek of a man more important than himself. —2. ana mƗrƯ ša iršû! aššƗtim Ư¨uz, he has taken wives for the sons he has acquired (L166; but emend: mƗrƯ ša irbû sons who have grown up; cf. Roth). D: 1. to grow crops; 2. to bring up children. —1. kiriam urabba, he shall make the orchard grow. —2. ummašu urabbƗšu, his mother shall bring him up; Ñe¨ram ina mêšu ana mƗrutim ilqƝma urtabbƯšu, he adopted a new-born child as his son and has brought him up; cf. murabbnj, foster father (ptcp. masc.); murabbƯtu, foster mother (ptcp. fem.). ¼: to glorify, extol. in IgigƯ ušarbinjšu, they glorified him among the Igigi; cf. mušarbnj, ptcp. râbu, vb. G: to compensate, restitute. šeam ša u¨alliqu iriab, he shall compensate for the barley that he lost; eleppam ana bƝl eleppim iriab, he shall compensate the owner of the boat with a boat; wardam kƯma wardim iriab, he shall restitute the slave with a similar slave; adi 10-šu iriab, he shall make a ten-fold restitution. ragƗmu, vb. G: to claim. ana šeriktiša abuša ul iraggum šeriktaša ša mƗrƯšama, her father has no claim on her dowry; mƗrnj ¨Ưrtim ana mƗrƯ amtim ana wardnjtim ul iraggumnj, the sons of the first wife shall not claim from the sons of the slave for service. raggu, nom. wicked. ina mƗtišu raggam u ÑƝnam lissu¨ šƯr nišƯšu liÓƯb, let him weed out evil and wickedness from the land. ra¨ƗÑu, vb. G: to devastate. eqlam Adad irta¨iÑ ulu bibbulum itbal, Adad has inundated the field and has removed the produce. rƗimu, ptcp. (< râmu ), loving. Ištar … rƗimat palêya, Ishtar … who loves my reign.

GLOSSARY

321

rakƗbu, vb. G: to ride. D: to pollinate. kirƗšu ana nukaribbim ana rukkubim iddin, he gave his orchard to a gardener to pollinate; nukaribbum kirâm la urakkibma, the gardener did not pollinate the orchard. rakƗsu, vb. G: to agree formally. mušƝniqtum balum abišu u ummišu Ñi¨ram šaniamma irtakas, the nurse has agreed about another youngster without the father or the mother knowing. D: to make someone agree. [ana] eqlim erƝšim urakkissu, he made him agree to cultivate the field; mussa urtakkis, she has made her husband agree. N: to meet by agreement. sƗbƯtum sarrnjtum ina bƯtiša ittarkasnjma, deceivers have arranged to meet in the house of a drink-seller. ramƗnu, nom. oneself. šûma ramanšu ipaÓÓar, he shall redeem himself; ina kasap ramanišu igƗram šuƗti udannan, he shall repair that wall at his own expense; ereqqamma ana ramaniša Ưgur, he hired a waggon by itself. râmu, vb. G: to love. warkassa ana mƗriša ša irammu inaddin, she will give her property to the son she loves; ina Esagil ša arammu šumƯ … lizzakir, let my name be uttered … in Esagila which I love; cf. rƗimu, ptcp. rapƗšu, vb. G: to be wide. D: to make wide; cf. murappišu, ptcp. raqû, vb. G: to hide. ina bƯtišu irtaqƯma, he has hidden him in his house. râÑu, vb. G: to come to help; cf. rêÑu, ptcp. rašƗdu, vb. G: to be grounded (possibly denominative < išdu, foundation, cf. AHw.). ¼: to fix firmly. kƯma šamê u erÑetim išdƗša suršudƗ, its foundations are firm like heaven and earth; cf. mušaršidu, ptcp. rašû, vb. G: 1. to possess; 2. to permit. —1. mimma ša mussa u šî ištu innemdnj iršû, whatever she and her husband acquired after they came together; awƯlum ¨ablum ša awatam iraššû, a wronged man who has a complaint; ÑƗb nis¨Ɨtim irtaši, he has taken possession of deserting troops; warka mƗrƯ irtašƯma, afterwards he has had children; eleppum šî iÑÑabar ¨iÓƯtam irtaši, that boat has leaked, it has had a fault; wardam amtam išƗmma baqrƯ irtaši, he bought a male or female slave and he has had claims. —2. uÑurƗtnja mušassikam ay iršia, may my plans have no remover. ¼: to cause to have, provide. aššatam Ư¨uzma mƗrƯ la ušaršƯšu, he took a wife, she did not provide him with sons; nadƯtim ša mƗrƯ ušaršûšu, a devotee who provided him with sons; šumam ay ušaršƯšu, may he not provide him with a reputation; ummƗnšuma rƝmam ay ušarši, for his soldiers let him provide no mercy; mugallitam ul ušaršƯšinƗti, I did not offer them opposition. râšu (= riƗšu), vb. G: to be glad. D: to make glad; cf. murƯšu, ptcp. raÓƗbu, vb. G: to be moist. D: to moisten. Óuppašu uraÓÓab u Ñibtam ša šattim šuƗti ul inaddin, he shall moisten the tablet (i.e. to erase what had been written) and he shall not pay interest for that year. rebƯtu, nom. wide street. qerbum Akkadim ribƯtim, in the midst of the wide street of Akkad. rebû, num. fourth. ina rebûtim šattim, in the fourth year. redû, vb. G: to obtain, catch. ina šeššet war¨Ư šƯbƯšu la irdeam, he did not obtain his witnesses within six months; lu wardam lu amtam ¨alqam ina ÑƝrim iÑbatma, he caught a male or female slave in the desert; ana ¨arran šarrim agram pnj¨am

322

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

im¨urma irtede, for the expedition of the king he received and kept a hired substitute; cf. rƝdû, ptcp. Gt. to lead away; cf. murtednj, waggon-driver (ptcp.). rƝdû, nom. (ptcp. < redû) soldier. lu rƝdûm ulu bƗirum ša ana ¨arrƗn šarrim alƗkšu qabû, a soldier or a hunter who is asked to go on an royal expedition; rƝdûm bƗirum u nƗši biltim ina eqlim kirîm u bƯtim ša ilkišu ana aššatišu u mƗrtišu ul išaÓÓar, a soldier, hunter or tribute-bearer shall not sign over to his wife or daughter a field or orchard or house pertaining to his duty. rƝmu, nom. love. rƝmam ay ušarši, may he not provide love. rƝÑu, nom. (ptcp. < râÑu), helper. muddiš Ebabbar ana ¼amaš rƝÑišu, renewing Ebabbar for Shamash his helper; Adad … rƝÑnja, Adad … my helper. rƝštû, adj. oldest. ana Marduk mƗrim rƝštîm ša Ea, for Marduk, the oldest son of Ea; Zababa … mƗrum rƝštûm ša Ekur, Zababa … first son in Ekur. rƝšu, nom. 1. top, height; 2. beginning. —1. mullî rƝš Eanna, raising the top of Eanna; ina BƗbilim Ɨlim ša Anum u Ellil rƝšƯšu ullû, in Babylon, the city whose height Anu and Enlil raised. —2. ištu rƝš šattim, from the beginning of the year. reû, vb. G: to tend. nƗqidam ana liƗtim u ÑƝnim reîm Ưgur, he hired a herdsman to care for the cattle and sheep; nišƯšu in mƯšarim lirƝ, may he tend his people with righteousness. rƝû, nom. 1. shepherd; 2. carer. —1. rƝûm ÑƝnam ana eqlim iddƯma, a shepherd left his flock in a field; reûm Ưgnjma, a shepherd was negligent. —2. Ñammurabi rƝûm nibƯt Ellil anƗku, I am Hammurabi, the shepherd chosen by Enlil; rƝî nišƯ, the shepherd of the people; anƗkuma rƝûm mušallimum, I am the shepherd who brings peace. rƝûtu, nom. governance. šarrum gitmƗlum anƗku ana ÑalmƗt qaqqadim ša Ellil išrukam rƝûssina Marduk iddinam, I am the perfect king for the mass of humanity whom Enlil entrusted to me, whose governance Marduk gave me. riƗšu, see râšu. ribƯtu, see rebƯtu. rƯdu, nom. tradition. mƗtam ussam kƯnam u rƯdam damqam ušaÑbitu, he made the land adopt proper conduct and a good tradition; kibsam rƯdam dƯn mƗtim ša adƯnu, the custom, tradition, rules of the land which I decreed. [rikistu, nom. contract. Óuppi rikistišu [i¨eppe], he shall break the tablet for the contract.] riksu, nom. agreement, contract. ina ebnjrim kƯma riksƗtišu šeam ileqqe, he shall pay the barley at harvest according to the contracts; balum šƯbƯ u riksƗtim ištƗm, he bought without witnesses and contracts; awƯlum aššatam Ư¨uzma riksƗtiša la iškun, he took a wife but did not made contracts for her. rƯmu, nom. ox. rƯmum kadrum munakkip zƗirƯ, the raging ox tossing opponents. râqu (riƗqu), vb. G: to be empty. ela ana la ¨assim rƝqƗ ana emqim ana tanƗdƗtim šnjÑâ, although they are empty for those without understanding by the wise they are uttered as praise. rƯqnjtu, nom. emptiness. Ñe¨rum šû reqnjssu ul ittallak, that son shall not go away empty. risbatu, nom. fight. ina risbƗtim imta¨aÑma simmam ištakanšu, he has struck him in a fight and he has wounded him. rittu, nom. wrist. ritti gallƗbim šuƗti inakkisnj, they shall cut off the wrist of that barber.

GLOSSARY

323

rubƗtu, see bƝltu. rubû, nom. prince. rubâm nadam pƗli¨ ilƯ, the favoured prince, fearing the gods; Ea rubûm rabium, Ea the great prince. rugummû, nom. loss. rugummƝ dƯnim šuƗti, the loss in that case; dƯnum šû rugummâm ul išu, there shall be no loss in that case. rnju, nom. comrade. Erra rnjšu ušakšidu nizmassu, Erra, his friend, made him achieve his ambition.

S sƗbƯtu, nom. innkeeper (fem.; cf. CAD s.v. sƗbû, masc.). sƗbƯtum sarrnjtum ina bƯtiša ittarkasnjma, an innkeeper in whose house deceivers have congregated. sƗbû, beer-seller. bƯt sƗbƯ, house of a beer-seller, see sƯbu, beer; bƯt sƯbim, beer-house. sadƗru, vb. G: to set out in order. samallûm kaspam isaddarma ana tamkƗrim utâr, the trader shall set out the value and pay it back to the merchant. sa¨Ɨmu, vb. G: to be under pressure. D: to put under presssure, pester. mƗrnjša aššum ina bƯtim šnjÑîm usa¨¨amnjši, her sons pestered her to get her out of the house. sa¨Ɨru vb. G: to go around. ¼: to place around; cf. muštas¨er, ptcp. sa¨maštu, nom. anarchy. išƯtam sa¨maštam liškunšum, let him grant him a revolt and an insurrection. sakƗlu A (AHw. sakƗlu I), vb. G: to appropriate by fraud (CAD). sikiltam isakkil bƯssa usappa¨ mussa ušamÓa, she engages in fraudulent practice, she spoils her house, she disparaged her husband. sakƗpu, vb. G: to overturn. šarrnjssu liskip, may he overturn his kingdom. sanƗqu, vb. G: to supervise. D: to keep in control. alapšu la usanniqma, he did not keep control of his ox. sapƗ¨u, vb. G: to disturb. D: to disrupt. bƯssa usappa¨, she disrupts her house. N: to be scattered. naspu¨ nišƯšu, the scattering of his people. saparru, nom. net. sapar nakirƯ ša Erra rnjšu ušakšidu nizmassu, a net for the enemies, the one whose ambition his friend Ea granted. sap¨u, adj. widespread. mupa¨¨ir nišƯ sap¨Ɨtim ša Isin, gathering the scattered people of Isin. sarƗru, vb. G: to deceive. awƯlum šû sƗr, that man is a deceiver. D: to deceive. usarrirma šimtam uttakkir, he cheated and he has changed the mark. sarru, adj. criminal. sarrnjtum ina bƯtiša ittarkasnjma sarrnjtim šunnjti la iÑÑabtamma, criminal men have assembled in her house and she has not arrested those criminals. sartu, nom. lie. šƯbnjt sarrƗtim njÑiamma, he produced lies in evidence. sasinnu, nom. bow-maker (CAD S, 192; read earlier as zadimmu, stonemason). [idƯ] sasinnim, the fees for a bow-maker. sekƝru, vb. G: to close, shut off. nƗrƗtišu ina nagbim liskir, let him shut off his rivers at the source.

324

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

sekretu (also read as zikru), nom. cloistered woman, priestess. sekretum ša abuša šeriktam išrukušim, a priestess whose father gave her a dowry; mƗr sekretim, the son of a priestess. sƯbu, nom. beer. bƯt sƯbim, beer-house (read earlier as bƯt sƗbƯ, house of a beer-seller, or bƯt šikarim, house of beer); bƯt sƯbim iptete ulu ana šikarim ana bƯt sƯbim Ưterub, she opened a beer-house or she has entered a beer-house for beer. sikiltu, nom. fraudulent practice, acquisition (cf. CAD, s.v. sakƗlu). sikiltam isakkil, she gets hold of goods illegally. simmu, nom. injury. simmam ištakanšu, he has inflicted an injury on him; simmam marÑam ša la ipašše¨nj, a terrible injury they will not cure; bƝl simmim, an injured man; simmam kabtam, a dangerous incision. simtu, nom. symbol. bƝlum simat ¨aÓÓim u agêm, the lord with the symbol of the sceptre and the crown; muštakƯn simƗtim ina Eudgalgal, who maintains the symbols in Eudgalgal. sinništu, nom. woman. sinništum šî ul aššat, that woman is not a wife; ana sinništim šanƯtim uptallisma, he has paid attention to another woman; sinništum šî kƯma amtim ina bƯt mutiša uššab, that woman shall dwell in her husband’s house like a slave; sinništam šuƗti ina gašƯšim išakkannjši, they shall impale that woman on a stake; sinništum šî njtaššar, that woman shall be released; sinništum šî arnam ul išu, that woman has committed no crime; sinništum šî lƗma ana bƯt awƯlim irrubu ¨ubullum eliša ibašši, that woman incurred a debt before she entered the man’s house; sinništum mussa izƝrma ul ta¨¨azanni iqtabi, the woman hated her husband and has declared, “You shall not have me”; warkiša sinništam šanƯtam Ưta¨azma, after her death he has married another woman; sinništum šî ašar Ưrubu ana mutiša warkîm mƗrƯ ittalad, that woman has borne sons to her subsequent husband in the place she entered; sinništum šî ana šƯmtim ittalak, that woman went to her fate. siparru, see karzillu. sugullu, sukullu, see littu. suluppnj, nom. pl. dates. šeam šipƗtim šamnam suluppƯ, barley, wool, oil, dates; suluppƯ watrnjtim ša ina kirîm ibbaššû, the extra dates that are to be found in the orchard. snjnu, nom. lap, pudenda. ukabbilšima ina snjniša ittatƯlma, he overpowered her and had intercourse with her; ina snjn ummišu ittatƯl, he had intercourse with his mother. snjqu, nom. street. alpum snjqam ina alƗkišu awƯlam ikkipma, an ox while walking in the street gored a man. snjtu, nom. measure for grain. 4 snjt šeam inaddin, he shall pay four sutu of barley.

6  ÑabƗru (AHw. zapƗru), vb. G: to be unstable. ina šattimma šuƗti eleppum šî iÑÑabar, in that very year that boat has become unstable. ÑabƗtu, vb. G: to seize, take possession of. lu wardam lu amtam ¨alqam ina ÑƝrim iÑbatma, he seized a lost male or female slave in the open-country; ¨alqam ina qƗti awƯlim iÑÑabat, he has seized the lost property in the man’s possession; awƯlum ša

GLOSSARY

325

¨ulqum ina qƗtišu Ñabtu, the man from whose possession the lost property was seized; ittnjramma aššassu iÑÑabat, he has returned and he has taken possession of his wife; bƝl ¨ubullƯša mussa ul iÑabbatnj, her creditors shall not seize her husband; ina snjniša ittatƯlma iÑÑabtnjšu, he has had sexual intercourse with her and they have caught him; šanûm warkišu eqelšu kirƗšu u bƯssu iÑbatma, someone else after him takes possession of his field, his orchard and his house; adi kirâm Ñabtu, as long as the orchard is possessed; labum iÑÑabassi, she has caught a disease (lit. a disease has possessed her); awƯlam eiltum iÑbassuma, the man was overcome with debt (lit. “debt seized the man”). ¼: to oblige to accept. mƗtam ussam kƯnam u rƯdam damqam ušaÑbitu, he made the land adopt solid leadership and good discipline. N: to be seized. awƯlum šû zƝram ulu ukullâm išriqma ina qƗtišu ittaÑbat, that man stole seed or foodstuff and it has been seized in his possession; awƯlum ¨ubtam i¨butma ittaÑbat, a man committed a robbery and he has been seized; aššat awƯlim itti zikarim šanîm ina itnjlim ittaÑbat, a man’s wife has been seized while lying with another man. ÑƗbitƗnu, nom. captor. wardum ina qƗt ÑƗbitƗnišu i¨taliq, a slave has slipped out of the hand of his captor. ÑƗbu, nom. soldier. šuƗti zƝrašu mƗssu ÑƗbašu nišƯšu u ummƗnšu errƝtam maruštam lƯrurnj, let them curse him, his descendants, his land, his soldiers, his people and his army with a terrible curse. Ñalmu, adj. (CAD, 6 p. 77: Ñalmu, adj.; AHw.: Ñalmu I) black. kƯma ¼amaš ana ÑalmƗt qaqqadim waÑêmma, rising like Shamash over humankind (lit.“those black on the head”). Ñalmu, nom. (CAD, 6 p. 78: Ñalmu, subst.; AHw.: Ñalmu II) statue, figurine. ana ma¨ar ÑalmƯya, in front of my statue; ina ma¨ar Ñalmiya, upon my statue; kƯma Ñalam ÓƯddim li¨buš, may he shatter his body like a clay figurine. Ñamû vb. G: to be thirsty. ¼: to make thirsty. šapliš ina erÑetim eÓemmašu mê lišaÑmi, below in the underworld may he make his ghost thirst for water. Ñebû, vb. G: to wish (so CAD; AHw.: Ñabû IV). D: to observe from afar, look at comprehensively. ¼t: to make careful arrangements; cf. mušteÑbƯ, ptcp. Ñe¨Ɲru, vb. G: to be small, be young. mƗrušu Ñe¨erma ilik abišu alƗkam la ilei, his son is young and is not able to perform the duty of his father. D: to diminish. liƗtim uÑÑa¨¨ir ÑƝnam uÑÑa¨¨ir, he has diminished the herd, he has diminished the flock. Ñe¨¨eru, adj. very young. almattum ša mƗrnjša Ñe¨¨ernj, a widow whose sons are very young; Ñe¨¨ernjtim urabbnj, they shall raise the youngsters. Ñe¨ru (sometimes read as mƗru), nom. youngster. Ñe¨ram istariq, he has kidnapped a youngster; ana mƗrišu Ñe¨rim aššatam la Ư¨uz, he did not take a wife for the youngest son; Ñe¨ram ina mêšu ana mƗrnjtim ilqƝma urtabbƯšu, he took a child at birth as a son and he has brought him up; Ñe¨rum šû ina qƗt mušƝniqtim imtnjt, that youngster died in the care of a nurse. ÑƝnu, nom. flock (CAD 6, 128b). rƝûm ÑƝnam ana eqlim iddƯma, a shepherd left his flock in a field; liƗtim u ÑƝnƯ ša šarrum ana rƝdîm iddinu, the cattle or sheep which the king gave to a soldier; liƗtim uÑÑa¨¨ir ÑƝnam uÑÑa¨¨ir, he has diminished the herd, he has diminished the flock.

326

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

ÑƝnu, adj. wicked (CAD 6, 127b, ÑƝnu A adj.). ina mƗtišu raggam u ÑƝnam lissu¨ šƯr nišƯšu liÓƯb, may he root out the evil and the wicked from the land and benefit the life of his people. Ñênu, vb. to load. G: mimma šumšu ša Ñênim iÑƝnši, any cargo at all he loaded on it. ÑƝru, nom. open country. alpam imƝram Ưgurma ina ÑƝrim nƝšum iddnjkšu, he hired an ox or an ass and a lion has killed it in the desert; gurun šalmƗt ummƗnƗtišu ina ÑƝrim littaddi, let the pile of the bodies of his soldiers be thrown down in the desert. ÑiƗru (AHw.), vb. G: to be outstanding. D: to make outstanding, see Ñurru (so CAD), to make famous. Ñibtu, nom. interest. Ñibtam ša šattim šuƗti ul inaddin, he shall pay no interest for that year; ÑibƗt kaspim mala ilqû isaddarma, he shall set out the interest on all the silver he has taken; kaspam u Ñibassu ša pƯ Óuppišu, the silver and the interest according to the terms on the tablet. Ñillu, nom. shadow. ÑillƯ ÓƗbum ana Ɨliya tariÑ, my shadow of safety is cast over my city. Ñimdatu, nom. decree. ana pƯ Ñimdat šarrim ana tamkƗrim inaddin, he shall pay the merchant according to the decree of the king. Ñimdu, nom. bandaging. ina Ñimdi la una¨¨ušu, which he will not soothe with a bandage. ÑƯru, adj. exalted. Anum ÑƯrum, Anum the exalted one; BƗbilam šumšu ÑƯram ibbinj, he gave Babylon its illustrious name; Nintu bƝltum ÑƯrtum, Nintu, the exalted lady. Ñubbû D: to view comprehensively. ¼t (CAD s.v. 4): to make careful arrangements. šipiršu la ušteÑbƯma, he has not performed his task carefully; cf. mušteÑbu, ptcp. Ñulnjlu, nom. shade. Ñulnjl mƗtim, a shade for the land. Ñurru (CAD; AHw. s.v. ÑiƗru), vb. D: to make famous; cf. muÑƯru, ptcp.

¼ ša, relative particle: 1. introducing a relative clause; 2. introducing an epithet for a preceding noun or noun phrase; 3. nominalised. —1. ana aplišu ša Ưnšu ma¨ru eqlam …išruk, he presented the field … to the son who was accepted in his eyes; ina Esagila ša arammu, in Esagila which I love; ša ¼amaš kƯnƗtim išrukušum, to whom Shamash has presented justice; Ellil ina pƯšu ša la uttakkaru lƯruršuma, may Enlil curse him with his utterance which will not be changed; mƗrnj ugƗrim ša šešunu mû ublnj, the people of the field whose barley the water carried away. —2. aplum dannum ša Sîn-muballiÓ the mighty heir of Sin-muballit; lu wardam lu amtam ¨alqam ša ekallim, a male or female slave lost from the palace; šeam ša šattim ištiat, barley for one year; šamaššammƯ ana ma¨ƯrƗtišunu ša kaspišu … inaddin, he shall give … sesame seeds according to their current value for his silver; bƝlum ša kƯma abum wƗlidim, a master like a natural father; mimma ša, whatever. —3a. + noun or noun phrase: ša ilim, something belonging to the god; šeriktaša ša bƯt abišama, her dowry is something belonging to her father’s house; ša akƗlim, something for eating; ša ¨aÓÓƗtim (formerly read wakil ¨aÓÓƗtim, “overseer of the sceptres”; see CAD A/1, 280b, para. 2), captain: lu ša ¨aÓÓƗtim ulu laputtûm ÑƗb nis¨Ɨtim irtaši, a captain or officer has acquired one of the deserting soldiers; ša libbiša, cargo, foetus: eleppam

GLOSSARY

327

uÓÓebbi u ša libbiša u¨talliq, he has sunk the boat and has lost its cargo (lit. “what was within her”); mƗrat awƯlim im¨aÑma ša libbiša uštaddƯši, he has struck a man’s daughter and made her a miscarry (lit. “made her drop what was within her”); ša mƗ¨irtim, someone in a boat moving upstream: ša mƗ¨irtim ša elep ša muqqelpƯtim uÓebbu eleppašu u mimmašu ¨alqam iriabšum, the person in the boat moving upstream who sank the boat of the one in the boat moving downstream shall repay him for his vessel and for whatever else was lost. —3b. + verb (subjunctive): ša išriqu, that which he stole; ša šurqam ina qƗtišu im¨uru iddâk, the one who received the stolen property in his hand shall be killed. šabƗ¨u, cf. šapƗ¨u, to scatter. šadƗlu, vb. G: to be broad. D: to make broad; cf. mušaddil, ptcp. ša¨û, nom. pig. lu alpam lu immeram lu imƝram lu ša¨âm lu eleppam išriq, he stole an ox or an ass or a sheep or a pig or a boat. šƗimu, ptcp. (< šâmu B), deciding. šƗim (vnt. šƗkin) mirƯtim u mašqƯtim ana Lagaš u Girsîm, deciding the pastures and the drinking places in Lagash and Girsu. šakƗku, vb. G: to harrow. ima¨¨aÑ imarrar u išakkakma, he shall break up, plough and harrow. šakƗnu, vb. G: 1. to set a time; 2. to arrange; 3. to place; 4. + panû, to set one’s mind. — 1. dayyƗnu adannam ana šeššet war¨Ư išakkannjšumma, the judges shall set a time limit of six months for him. —2. kasap ter¨atim išakkannjšumma, they shall arrange for him the silver for the bride-price; šƯbƯ iškun, he arranged witnesses; išƯtam sa¨maštam liškunšum, may he arrange for him revolt and insurrection. —3. sinništam šuƗti ina gašƯšim išakkannjši, they shall place that woman on a stake; nidƯtam ana libbi zittišu išakkannjšum, they shall put the abandoned area in the middle of his share; kittam u mƯšaram ina pƯ mƗtim aškun, I have set justice and righteousness in the mouth of the people; abbuttam išakkanšimma, she shall put a slave-mark on her; simmam ištakanšu, he has inflicted an injury on him. —4. panƯšu ištakan, he has set his mind; cf. šƗkinu, ptcp. Gtn: cf. muštakkinu, ptcp. ¼: to establish. ina pƯ Ellil šarrim lišaškin, may she establish by the word of Enlil the king. N: to be set, be arranged. kasap la kanƯkim ana nikkassim ul iššakkan, silver without a sealed document may not be set in the account; andurƗršunu iššakkan, their liberation shall be arranged. šakintu, see šaknu. šƗkinu, ptcp. (< šakƗnu). arranging. šƗkin mê nu¨šim ana nišƯšu, arranging plentiful supplies of water for his people. šaknu (fem. šakintu, as sbst.), adj. provided with. šaknat napištim, what has been provided with life (alt. “the living world”, CAD, s.v. 2b). šalƗlu A, vb. G: to take into captivity. N: to be taken into captivity. awƯlum iššalilma, a man was taken into captivity. šalamtu, nom. corpse. gurun šalmƗt ummƗnƗtišu ina ÑƝrim littaddi, may the pile of bodies of his soldiers be cast in the desert. šalƗmu, vb. G: to be free, be safe. awƯlam šuƗti Id njtebbibaššuma ištalmam (vnt. ištalma), that man, the river has cleansed him and he has become free. D: to reinstate,

328

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

heal. ušallamma ana bƝl makknjrim iriab, he shall restore and reimburse the owner of the property; šeriktam ša ištu bƯt abiša ublam ušallamšimma izzibši, he shall reinstate for her the dowry which she brought from her father’s house and divorce her; asûm eÑemti awƯlim šebirtam uštallim, a physician has restored a man’s broken bone; cf. mušallim, ptcp. šalaš, num. three. kankallam ana šalaš šanƗtim ana teptƯtim ušƝÑƯma, he leased a neglected field to develop over three years; 3 šiqil kaspam inaddin, he shall give three shekels of silver; adi 3-šu ana tamkƗrim inaddin, he shall give three times its value to the merchant. šalƗšƗ, num. thirty. adi 30-šu inaddin, he shall pay a rate of thirty times. šalšu, num. one-third. nukaribbum adi kirâm Ñabtu ina bilat kirîm šittƯn ana bƝl kirîm inaddin šaluštam šû ileqqe, as rent for the orchard the gardener shall give the owner of the orchard two-thirds according to the produce in the orchard; he shall take onethird himself. šalû B, vb. G: to immerse oneself. ša elišu kišpnj nadû ana Id illak Id išalliamma, the one who has been accused of witchcraft shall go to the river and immerse herself in the river. šâlu A, vb. G: to ask. Gt: to take counsel; cf. muštƗlu, ptcp. šamallû, nom. trader. tamkƗrum ana šamallîm šeam šƯpƗtim šamnam u mimma bƯšam ana pašƗrim iddin, a merchant gave a trader barley, wool, oil or another product for trade; šamallûm ana tamkƗrim inaddin, the trader shall pay the merchant. šamaššammnj, nom. sesame. eqel epšƝtim ša šeim ulu šamaššammƯ ana tamkƗrim iddin, he gave to the merchant a field cultivated for barley or sesame. šammnj, nom. grass. rƝûm ana šammƯ ÑƝnim šnjkulim itti bƝl eqlim la imtagarma, a shepherd has not agreed with the owner of a field to let his flock feed on the grass. šamnu, nom. oil. šeam šipƗtim šamnam u mimma bƯšam ana pašƗrim, barley, wool, oil or some other product for resale. šamšu, nom. sun. šarrum dannum šamšu BƗbilim mušƝÑi nnjrim, the mighty king, the sun of Babylon, shedding light. šamû, nom. sky, heaven. Sîn bƝl šamê ilum bƗnî, Sin lord of the sky, divine creator; zunnƯ ina šamê mƯlam ina nagbim lƯÓeršu, may he deprive him of showers from the sky and floods from the depths; ilnj rabûtum ša šamê u erÑetim, the great gods of heaven and earth. šâmu A, vb. G: to buy. ina qƗt mƗr awƯlim lu warad awƯlim balum šƯbƯ u riksƗtim ištƗm, he has bought from a man’s son or a man’s slave without witnesses or contracts; eqlam kirâm u bƯtam ša rƝdîm bƗirim u nƗši biltim ištƗm, he has bought a field an orchard or a house from a soldier, a hunter or a tax-payer; wardam amtam išƗmma, he purchased a male or female slave. N: to be bought. šƯbƯ ša ina ma¨rƯšunu iššƗmu, the witnesses before whom it was bought. šâmu B (AHw. šiƗmu), vb. G: to determine, assign. ana Marduk mƗrim rƝštîm ša Ea ellilnjt kiššat nišƯ išƯmnjšum, for Marduk, the first son born to Ea, they determined that he should govern as Enlil all the peoples of the world; ina igigallim ša Ea išƯmam, with the wisdom that Ea has assigned to me; balƗÓam ša itti mnjtim šitannu ana šƯmtim

GLOSSARY

329

lišƯmšum, may he ordain for him a life that is struggling with death as a destiny; cf. mušƯmu, ptcp. (GAG 104k). šanƗnu, vb. G: to strive. Gt: to struggle. balƗÓam ša itti mnjtim šitannu, a life which is struggling with death. šƗninu, nom. rival. lƝûtƯ šƗninam ul išû, there is no rival to my power. šanû, šanƯtum (fem.), adj. another. Ñi¨ram šaniamma irtakas, she has agreed to have another child; itti zikarim šanîm ina itnjlim la iÑÑabit, she was not caught lying with another man; mussa sinništam šanƯtam i¨¨az, her husband shall take another woman; mƗrnj mƗtim šanƯtim, people from another country; šanûm warkišu eqelšu kirƗšu u bƯssu iÑbatma, another man has taken his field or orchard after his departure; ana bƯt šanîm ul irrub, she shall not return to another man’s house; ana šanƯtim a¨Ɨzim panƯšu ištakkan, he has set his mind on taking another woman. šanû A, vb. G: to do again. ¼: to double. kasap ilqû uštašannƗma, he shall double the quantity of silver he took; mimma ša irgumu ustašannƗma, he shall double the amount of the complaint; mimma mala ibbablušum uštašannƗma, he shall double the full value of the gift. šapƗ¨u, vb. G: to scatter. D: (so AHw.) to scatter widely; see šuppu¨u (so CAD). šapƗku, vb. G: to store. šeašu ana našpaknjtim ina bƯt awƯlim išpukma, he stored his barley in a granary in a man’s house. N: to be stored. šeam ša ina bƯtƯšu iššapku, the barley which was stored in his house. šapliš, adv. below. nakrƯ eliš u šapliš assu¨, I eradicated my enemies above and below; šapliš ina erÑetim eÓemmašu mê lišaÑmi, below in the underworld may he make his ghost thirst for water. šapû C, vb. G: to be silent. D: to silence. tƝšî la šubbîm a revolt which cannot be silenced (CAD s.v. 2); cf. mušeppnj, ptcp. šaqƗlu, vb. to weigh out, pay. kasap tamkƗrum išqulu bƝl amtim išaqqalma, the silver the merchant weighed out the owner of the slave shall weigh out; kaspam mišil šƯmišu išaqqal, he shall pay half its price in silver; 1 mana kaspam ana nišƯšu išaqqalnj, they shall pay one mana of silver to his people. šaqû, vb. G: to give to drink. qarrƗdƯšu lišamqit damƯšunu erÑetam lišqi, may he make his heroes fall and may he let the earth drink their blood. ¼: to make drink; cf. mušešqnj, ptcp. šarƗku, vb. G: 1. to hand over; 2. to grant; 3. to give a dowry. —1. rƝdiam ina dƯnim ana dannim ištarak, he handed over a soldier to a powerful man in a trial. —2. ana ÑalmƗt qaqqadim ša Ellil išrukam … ul Ɲgu, I was not lazy … towards the human beings which Ellil granted to me; ana aššatišu eqlam kirâm bƯtam u bƯšam išrukšim, he granted his wife a field, an orchard, a house and goods. —3. abum ana mƗrtišu … šeriktam la išrukšim!, the father did not give a dowry … to his daughter. šarƗmu, vb. G: to cut to size. D: to cut to size (alt. to cover). kƯma nakkƗpû bƗbtašu ušƝdƯšumma qarnƯšu la ušarrim, his community informed him that it was a gorer but he did not trim (alt. cover) its horns. šarƗqu, vb. G: to steal. makknjr ilim u ekallim išriq, he stole the property of a god or of the temple; lu alpam lu immeram lu imƝram lu ša¨âm ulu eleppam išriq, he stole an

330

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

ox or an ass or a sheep or a pig or a boat; mƗr awƯlim Ñehram ištariq, he stole a man’s small son; adi 10-šu ša išriqu, ten times the value of what he stole. šarrƗqƗnum, nom. thief. šarrƗqƗnum ša nadƗnim la išu, the thief does not have anything with which to pay; itti šarrƗqƗnišu ileqqe, they shall take it from his thief. šarrƗqu, nom. thief. nƗdinƗnum šarrƗq iddâk, the seller is a thief, he shall be killed. šarru, nom. king. dƯnƗt mƯšarim ša Ñammurabi šarrum lƝûm ukinnuma, righteous laws which Hammurabi the powerful king established; šarrum ša in šarrƯ šnjturu anƗku, I am the king who is better than the other kings; šarrum lƝûm mutƝr Eridu ana ašrišu, the powerful king who restored Eridu as a shrine; awƯlum šû kƯma Ưâti šar mƯšarim ¼amaš ¨aÓÓašu lirrik, may Shamash lengthen that man’s rule, as me (i.e. as he lengthened my rule), the king of righteousness; liƗtim u ÑƝnƯ ša šarrum ana rƝdîm iddinu, cattle or sheep which the king gave to a soldier; šarrum warassu uballaÓ, the king shall let his servant live; ana pƯ Ñimdat šarrim, according to the terms (lit. “mouth”) agreed by the king; Anum ÑƯrum šar AnunnakƯ, exalted Anum, king of the Anunnaki. šarrnjtu, nom. kingship, dynasty. šarrnjtam dƗrƯtam ša kƯma šamê u erÑetim išdƗša šuršudƗ ukinnnjšum, they established an everlasting kingdom, the foundations of which were established like those of heaven and earth; zƝr šarrnjtim ša Sîn ibniušu, a descendant of royalty whom Sin created; melemmƯ šarrnjtim lƯÓeršu, let him take away from him the splendour of his kingdom; naspu¨ nišƯšu šarrnjssu šupƝlam, the scattering of his people, the downfall of his kingdom; šƯram lemnam ša nasƗ¨ išdƯ šarrnjtišu u ¨alƗq mƗtišu liškunšum, let him ordain for him a bad omen that will overthrow the foundations of his kingdom and destroy his land; agâm kussiam ša šarrnjtim lƯÓeršu, remove the kingly crown and throne. šasû, vb. G: to shout. eli Ɨlišu ezziš lissƯma, may he shout against his city angrily. Gtn: to shout continually. narî šaÓram lištassƯma awâtiya šnjqurƗtim lišmƝma, may he keep shouting the inscription on my stela and heed my precious words. šašallu, nom. tendon of the hoof (CAD); animal skin, pelt (AHw. s.v. 3a). šašallašu ittasak, he has injured its hoof (alt. “its skin”). šattu, nom. year. ištu rƝš šattim adi ¨amšim war¨im, from the beginning of the year to the fifth month; šattam ištiatma (vnt. išteatat) udappirma, he was absent for one year; ana šattim ištiat Ưgur, he hired for one year; Ñibtam ša šattim šuƗti, interest for that year (L48); šalaš šanƗtim ilikšu ittalak, he has performed the duty for three years; ina rebûtim šattim, in the fourth year; bilat eqlim ša šanƗtim ša innadû, rent for the field for the years when it was neglected; njmƯ ƯÑnjtim šanƗt ¨uša¨¨im, days of need and years of famine. šaÓƗpu, to preserve life; cf. šƗÓipu, ptcp. šaÓƗru, vb. G: 1. to inscribe, write; 2. to state in writing, assign. —1. awƗtiya šnjqurƗtim ina narîya ašÓurma, I wrote out my precious words on my stela; šumƯ šaÓram ipšiÓma šumšu ištaÓar, he removed my inscribed name and has written his name; ina tuppim išÓurušim, on a tablet he wrote for her; kunukkam išÓuršum, he wrote a sealed document for him. —2. ana aššatišu u mƗrtišu ul išaÓÓar, he shall not assign to his wife or his sons.

GLOSSARY

331

šƗÓipu, ptcp. (< šaÓƗpu), saving, preserving life. šƗÓip nišƯšu in pušqim, the saviour of his people in distress. šaÓru, adj. inscribed. narî šaÓram lištassƯma awâtiya šnjqurƗtim lišmƝma, and let him shout out my inscribed stela and let him listen to my precious words. šƗyyimƗnum, nom. purchaser. šƗyyimƗnum nƗdin iddinušum u šƯbƯ ša ina ma¨rišunu išƗmu itbalam, the purchaser shall bring the person who gave it to him together with witnesses in whose presence it was purchased; šƗyyimƗnum šarrƗq iddâk, the purchaser is a thief, he shall be killed. šebƝru, vb. G: to break. šumma eÑemti awƯlim ištebir eÑemta išebbirnj, if he has broken the bone of a man they shall break his bone; ašar tƗhazim u qablim kakkašu lišbir, in the place of battle and conflict may he break his weapon. šebru, šebirtu (fem.), adj. broken. asûm eÑemti awƯlim šebirtam uštallim, a physician has healed a man’s broken bone. šƝbultu, see šnjbulltu. šƝdu, nom. protecting spirit. šƝdum lamassum ilnj Ɲribnjt Esagil libitti Esagil igirrê njmišam ina ma¨ar Marduk bƝliya ZarpƗnƯtum bƝltiya lidammiqnj, may the guardian and protector, the deities going into Esagila, the brickwork of Esagila, look kindly on the daily petitions in the presence of my lord Marduk and of my lady Zarpanitum. šƝm, see šû, his. šemû, vb. G: to listen to, obey. awâtiya šnjqurƗtim lišmƝma, let him listen to my precious words; cf. šƝmû, ptcp.; ¼t: to allow to listen to one another; cf. muštešmû, ptcp. šƝmû, ptcp. (< šemû), listening. šar tašƯmtim šƝmû ¼amaš, the king in authority, listening to Shamash. šƝpu, nom. foot. alpam Ưgurma šƝpšu ištebir, he hired an ox and he has broken its foot. šerƗnu, nom. muscle. asûm … šerƗnam marÑam ubÓalliÓ, a physician has restored a damaged muscle. šeriktu (CAD širiktu), nom. dowry. šeriktaša u nudunnâm ša mussa iddinušim ina Óuppim išÓurušim ileqqƝma, she shall take her dowry and the gift which her husband gave her with the document he wrote out for her; šeriktaša utarrnjšim, they shall return her dowry to her; ana šeriktiša abuša ul iraggum šeriktaša ša mƗrƯšama, her father shall have no claim to her dowry, her dowry belongs only to her sons; šerikti ummƗtišunu ileqqûma, they shall take the dowries of their mothers. šƝrtu B, nom. condemnation. arnam kabtam šƝressu rabƯtam ša ina zumrišu la i¨alliqu lƯmussuma, may he lay on him a heavy penalty as his great condemnation which will not disappear from his body. šƝrtu D, nom. brilliance. Sîn bƝl šamê ilum bƗnî ša šƝressu ina ilƯ šnjpât, Sin, lord of heaven, creator god, whose brilliance outshines all other gods (alt. read têressu < tƝrtu, oracle, “whose oracular decision”. see CAD; Roth p. 142, note 53). šeru, nom. (formerly read as absinnu), furrowed field. šumma eqlam ša innadnušum ana kirîm la izqup šumma šerum, if he did not plant out the field that had been given to him as an orchard, if it was a cultivated field. šeššet, num. six. adannam ana šeššet war¨Ư išakkannjšumma šumma ina šeššet war¨Ư šƯbƯšu la irdeam, he shall set him a time limit of six months, but if he did not obtain

332

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

witnesses within six months; mimma ša ilqû adi 6-šu ana šamallîm inaddin, he shall pay the trader six times as much as he took. šeššu, num. 1. sixth; 2. one-sixth (always written ideographically in CH). —1. ištu šiššim war¨im adi taqtƯt šattim, from the sixth month to the end of the year. —2. ana 1 šiqil kaspim 1⁄6 u 6 uÓÓet Ñibtam ileqqe, for one shekel of silver he shall receive one-sixth of a shekel and six grains in interest. šeu, nom. grain (barley). šeam šipƗtim šamnam u mimma bƯšam, barley, wool, oil or some other item; sƗbƯtum ana šƯm šikarim šeam la imta¨ar, the woman who sells beer has not received barley for the price of the drink; errƝšum ina eqlim šeam ulu šamaššammƯ uštabši, the cultivator has produced barley or sesame from the field; ina eqlim šeam la uštabši, he has not produced any barley in the field; ina našpakim ulu ina maškanim šeam ilteqe, he has removed barley from the granary or the threshingfloor; tašna šeam ša im¨uru, twice the amount of barley which he received; ina njmim ištƝn 3 parsikat šeam inaddin, he shall pay three parsikat of barley for one day; ina šanat ana 1 kur šeim 5 qa šeam idƯ našpakim inaddin, he shall pay the storage charge of five qa of barley for one kur of barley per year; šeam ša kaspišu u Ñibassu ša itti tamkƗrim ilqû, barley for the silver and its interest which he has borrowed from the merchant; ana šƯbnjt šeim u kaspim njÑiam, he produced evidence about barley or silver; bƝl šeim ma¨ar ilim šeašu ubârma, the owner of the barley shall declare how much barley he had before the god. šeû, vb. Gt: to search. ašrƯ šulmim ešteƯšinƗšim, I have searched for peaceful places for them. Gtn: to search thoroughly. bƝl bƯtim mimmâšu ¨alqam išteneƯma itti šarrƗqƗnišu ileqqe, the owner of the house shall thoroughly search for whatever was lost and he shall take it from the thief. šî, 1. pron. she; 2. adj. (demonstrative), that. —1. mimma ša mussa u šî ištu innemdnj iršû, whatever she and her husband acquired after they came together. —2. sinništum šî, that woman; eleppum šî, that boat. šiƗti, see šuƗti. šƯbu, nom. witness. šƯbƯ ša ina ma¨rƯšunu išƗmu itbalam, he has produced witnesses in whose presence he made the purchase; ina ma¨ar ilim u šƯbƯ, in the presence of a god and witnesses; šƯbnjšu la qerbu, his witnesses were not within; balum šƯbƯ u riksƗtim ištƗm, he bought without witnesses or contracts. šƯbultu, see šnjbultu, load of goods. šƯbnjtu, nom. evidence. ana šƯbnjt (vnt. šƝbnjt) sarrƗtim njÑiamma, he came out with a lying testimony. šikaru, nom. beer. ana šikarim ana bƯt sƯbim Ưterub, she has entered a beer-house for beer; bƯt šikarim is now read bƯt sƯbim (see sƯbum). šimtu, nom. cattle-mark (CAD s.v. 2b'). usarrirma šimtam uttakkir, he cheated and has changed the mark. šƯmtu, nom. 1. destiny, decision; 2. + alƗku, to die (of a person); 3. + mâtu, to die (of an animal). —1. Ellil bƝl šamê u erÑetim šƗim šƯmƗt mƗtim, Enlil, the lord of heaven and earth, determining the destiny of the land; ana šƯmtim lišƯmšum, may he fix as a destiny for him; šƯmƗtišu lƯrur, may he curse his destiny; Ea rubûm rabium ša

GLOSSARY

333

šƯmƗtušu ina ma¨ra illakƗ, Ea, the almighty prince whose decisions come first. —2. ana šƯmtim ittalak, he died by fate. —3. ina šimƗtiša imtnjt, it has died according to its fate. šiƗmu (AHw.), see šâmu B. šƯmu, nom. sale, price. šƯbnj ša ma¨rišunu šƯmum iššƗmu, witnesses in whose presence the sale was conducted; ana šƯm šikarim šeam la imta¨ar, she has not received barley for the price of the beer; mišil šƯmišu išaqqal, he shall pay half its price. šina, num. two. ana šinƯšu izuzznjma, they shall divide into two; arnam kabtam adi šinƯšu itbalam, he has incurred serious punishment for a second time; 2 šiqil kaspam bƝl wardim inaddiššum, the owner of the slave shall pay two shekels of silver. šinƗti, adj. (demonstrative, fem. pl.), these. aššum errƝtim! šinƗti, because of these curses. šinnu, nom. tooth. šumma awƯlum šinni awƯlim me¨rišu ittadi šinnašu innaddû, if a man knocked out the tooth of a man like himself they shall knock out his tooth; šinni! muškƝnim, the tooth of a commoner. šipƗtu, nom. pl. (AHw. šƯpƗtu), wool. šeam šipƗtim šamnam u mimma bƯšam ana pašƗrim iddin, he gave barley, wool, oil or something else for trade. šipru, nom. 1. task; 2. skill. —1. ina eqlim šiprim la epƝšim ukannnjšumma, they shall convict him of not doing the work in the field; šipiršu la udanninma, he did not reinforce his work. —2. šipir qƗtišu uštƗ¨issu, he has made him learn his manual skill. šipÓu, nom. decision. ašar šipÓim u purussêm ina ma¨ar Ellil awassu lilemmin, may he deprecate his words in the place of judgment and decision before Ellil. šiqƯtu, nom. irrigation. atappašu ana šiqƯtim ipte, he opened his canal for irrigation. šiqlu, nom. measure for silver, shekel. 2 šiqil kaspam bƝl wardim inaddiššum, the owner of the slave shall pay him two shekels of silver; ana asîm 2 šiqil kaspam inaddin, he shall give the physician two shekels of silver; 5 šiqil kaspam ana bƝl epinnim inaddin, he shall give five shekels of silver to the owner of the plough. šƯru, nom. flesh. Anum u Ellil ana šƯr nišƯ Óubbim šumƯ ibbû, Anum and Enlil have nominated me to improve the flesh of the people; ina bƯrišu šƯram lemnam … liškunšum, in his divination let him ordain bad flesh … for him. šisƯtu, nom. shout. ana šisƯt nƗgirim la uštƝÑiam, at the shout of the herald he has not produced him. šiššu, see šeššu. šitannu, see šanƗnu. šittƗn, num. two thirds. ina bilƗt kirîm šittƯn ana bƝl kirîm inaddin, he shall give twothirds of the produce of the orchard to the owner of the orchard. šu, relative pron. (CAD ¼/3, 152b; AHw., p. 1254a-b) he who. šu (vnt. ša) iqƯšu napšatam ana Maškan-šƗpir … šu (vnt. ša) ikšudu nagab uršim, he who gave life to Mashkan-shapar … he who achieved all of he wished (CAD s.v. b; AHw. s.v. 2b). šnj, pron. (AHw., p. 1254b; CAD ¼/3, 155a, šû, pron.). 1. pron. he (AHw. s.v. šnj, 1, + indicative verb); 2. adj. (demonstrative), this, that (AHw. s.v. 2; CAD s.v. 2, p. 160). —1. ša iÑÑabtuma ilikšu ittalku šûma illak, the one who has taken possession and has done the duty, he shall do it; šaluštam šû ileqqe, he shall take one-third himself; šû

334

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

warkƗnumma ina snjniša ittatƯlma, at some later time he himself has lain with her. —2. narûm šû, this stele; awƯlum šû, that man; dƯnum šû, that law. šû (AHw., p. 1254b, šû(m) I; CAD ¼/3, 153b, šû, adj.), possessive pron. his. abbutti wardim la šêm ugdallib, he has shaved off the mark of a slave that was not his (CAD, 154a, s.v. b2'; AHw., p. 1255a, s.v. 2a). šuƗti. 1. pron. him; 2. adj. (demonstrative, oblique), that. —1. šuƗti ana qƗt nakrƯšu limallƯšuma, may he betray him into the hands of his enemy; mƗr awƯlim ša kƯma šuƗti imta¨aÑ, the son of a man like himself. —2. ritti gallƗbim šuƗti inakkisnj, they shall cut off the wrist of that barber; sinništam šuƗti, that woman; eleppam šuƗti, that ship; ana šerikti sinništim šuƗti, about the dowry of that woman; aran dƯnim šuƗti, the penalty in that case; ina šattim šuƗti, in that year, ina šattimma šuƗti in that actual year; sƗbƯtam šuƗti (vnt. šiƗti) that drink-seller. šubbû, see šuppû. šubbu¨u, see šuppu¨u. šubtu, nom. dwelling, home. ina šubat mutiša uššab, she shall dwell in the home of her husband; mušaršid šubat Kiš, establishing Kish as a dwelling place; gabara¨ ¨alƗqišu ina šubtišu lišappi¨aššum, may he kindle up for him a destructive riot in his dwelling place. šnjbultu, nom. consignment, load. awƯlum ina ¨arrƗnim wašibma kaspam ¨uraÑam abnam u bƯš qƗtišu ana awƯlim iddinma ana šƝbultim ušƗbilšu, a man starting a journey gave silver, gold, stones or personal property to a man and made him transport it as a consignment. šugƯtu, nom. priestess. ana mƗrtƯšu šugƯtim šeriktam išrukšim, he gave the marriage gift to his daughter, a priestess; ana šugƯtim a¨Ɨzim panƯšu ištakan, he has determined to marry a priestess; ana šugƯtim ša mƗrƯ uldušum, concerning a priestess who bore him sons; šugƯtum šî itti nadƯtim ul uštama¨¨ar, that priestess shall not rival the prostitute. šuklulu, vb. ¼: to make complete. itinnum bƯtam ana awƯlim Ưpušma ušaklilšum, a builder made a house for a man and completed it for him; bƝlum simat ¨aÓÓim u agêm ša ušaklilušu (vnt. ušaklilušum) erištum Mama, the lord whom wise Mama made complete with the symbol of crown and sceptre; cf. mušaklil, ptcp. šulmƗniš, adv. securely. mukinnu išdƯšin qerbum BƗbilim šulmƗniš, establishing its foundations in Babylon securely. šulmu, nom. well-being, peace. ašrƯ šulmim ešteƯšinƗšim, I have searched out for them places of peace; ina šulmim attabbalšinƗti, I have always led them in peace. šulu¨¨u, nom. purification ritual, lustration. mubbib šulu¨ Eabzu, purifying the lustrations in Eabzu. šumma, non-decl. (conditional particle), if. passim. šumu, nom. name, reputation. šumƯ šaÓram ipšiÓma šumšu ištaÓar, he removed my inscribed name and has written his own name; šumšu ÑƯram ibbinj, he gave its illustrious name; šumƯ ina damiqtim ana dƗr lizzakir, may my name be uttered as a blessing for evermore; aplam lƯÓeršuma šumam ay ušaršƯšu, may he remove his heir and stop him having a reputation; awƯlnjtum ša šumam nabiat, a human being who was given a name (i.e. anyone at all); mimma šumšu, anything at all (see mimma).

GLOSSARY

335

šunu, pron. they. wardum u amtum šunu mƗrnj mƗtim, the male and female slave are native to the land. šupêlu, vb. (root š-p--l) G: to exchange. naspu¨ nišƯšu šarrnjssu šupƝlam, the scattering of his people, the exchange of his kingdom; awâtiya la uštepƝl (vnt. uštapƗl) uÑurƗtiya la unakkir, he should not change my words, he should not alter my purposes. šuppû, to silence, see šapû C. šuppu¨u (CAD; AHw. šapƗ¨u D), vb. D: to scatter about. gabara¨ ¨alƗqišu ina šubtišu lišappi¨aššum, in his dwelling place may he scatter destructive unrest for him. šnjquru, nom. very precious. awâtiya šnjqurƗtim ina narîya ašÓurma, I inscribed my very precious words on my stele. šurqu, nom. stolen property. ša šurqam ina qƗtišu im¨uru iddƗk, the one who acquired stolen property from his hand shall be killed. šnjši, num. sixty. elep šnjšim Ưgur, he hired a sixty kur boat; ina pu¨rim ina qinnaz alpim 1 šnjši imma¨¨aÑ, he shall be beaten sixty times with an ox-tail in the assembly; 60 kur šeam ana bƝl eqlim imaddad, he shall measure out sixty kur of barley for the owner of the field. šuššƗn, num. (= dual of šuššu, “two sixths”), one third. ̃ mana kaspam išaqqal, he shall weigh out one-third of a mana of silver. šuššu, num. one-sixth. 1⁄6 kaspam ana asîm idƯšu inaddin, he shall pay one sixth in silver to the physician as his fees. šutƝmuqu, vb. ¼t. to pray; cf. muštƝmiqu, ptcp. šutlumu, vb. ¼t: to bestow. ina kakkim dannim ša Zababa u Ištar ušatlimnjnim, with the fierce weapon that Zababa and Ishtar have presented to me (CAD s.v. b.2ƍ).

T tabƗku, vb. G: to pour out. tabƗk napištišu kƯma mê, the pouring out of his life like water. tabƗlu, vb. (some forms resemble –t– forms of abƗlu). G: to remove, confiscate. šamaššammƯ ša ibaššû esip tabal, collect and remove the sesame that is there; mimma ša šnjbulu ašar šnjbulu la iddinma itbal, what was to be delivered he did not give at the place for delivery, he removed it; mubbiršu bƯssu itabbal, his accuser shall confiscate his house; niplƗtim ša innadnušum itabbal, he shall confiscate the extra payment that was given to him. Gtn: to take into safety. ina šulmim attabbalšinƗti, I have always taken them into safety. ¼: see abƗlu ¼t. tadmiqtu, nom. kindness, interest free investment (AHw.). tamkƗrum ana šamallîm kaspam ana tadmiqtim ittadinma, a merchant has given silver to a merchant for free investment. tƗ¨azu, nom. conflict. Ištar bƝlet tƗhazim u qablim, Ishtar the lady of conflict and strife; ašar tƗ¨azim u qablim, the place of conflict and strife. takƗlu, vb. G: to trust. D: to give confidence, show trustworthiness. šipiršu la utakkilma, he did not do his work well.

336

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

talƯmu, nom. devoted follower. ušumgal šarrƯ talîm Zababa, the leader of kings, the follower of Zababa. tƗlittu, nom. young animal. tƗlittam u biltam inaddin, he shall give a young animal for an offering; tƗlittam umtaÓÓi, he has made the birth rate less. tamƗ¨u, vb. G: to hold. D: to grasp; cf. mutammi¨u, ptcp. tam¨Ɨru, nom. conflict. ašar tam¨Ɨrim, the place of battle. tamkƗru, nom. merchant. nadƯtum tamkƗrum u ilkum a¨um, a priestess, a merchant or a contracted labourer; mimma ša tamkƗrum iddinušum, whatever the merchant gave him; kasap tamkƗrum išqulu, the silver which the merchant weighed out; tamkƗrum kaspam šamallâm iqƯpma, a merchant entrusted silver to a trader; tamkƗrum šû ina ma¨ar ilim u šƯbƯ ina kaspim leqêm šamallâm ukânma, that merchant shall affirm in the presence of a god and witnesses that the tradesman took the money; tamkƗram ukânma, he shall bring charges against the merchant; šamallûm kanƯk kaspim ša ana tamkƗrim inaddinu ileqqe, the trader shall take the sealed tablet about the silver which he will give to the merchant; šamallûm kaspam itti tamkƗrim ilqƝma, a trader received silver from a merchant. tamû, vb. G: to swear. awƯlum šû ina idû la am¨aÑu itamma, that man shall swear, “I did not strike intentionally”; gallƗbum ina idû la ugallibu itammƗma, the barber shall swear that he did the shaving without the information. tanattu, tanƗdƗtu (AHw), nom. honour, praise. ana emqim ana tanƗdƗtim šnjÑâ, by the wise they are uttered as praise. tƗnƝ¨u, nom. weariness. palƝšu ina tƗnƝ¨im u dimmatim lišaqti, may he bring his reign to an end with weariness and sadness; palê tƗnƝ¨im, a reign of weariness. tappûtu, nom. partnership. kaspam ana tappûtim iddin, he gave silver for a partnership. taqtƯtu, nom. end. ištu šiššim war¨im adi taqtƯt šattim, from the sixth month to the end of the year. [tarƗku, vb. G: to beat. itarrakaššu, he shall beat him.] tarƗÑu, vb. G: to stretch out. ÑillƯ ÓƗbum ana Ɨliya tariÑ, my beneficent shadow is spread over my city. ¼: to point. eli ugbabtim u aššat awƯlim ubƗnam ušatriÑma, he pointed a finger at a priestess or a man’s wife. N: to be stretched out towards. ubƗnum eliša ittariÑma, the finger was pointed at her. tarbaÑu, nom. animal pen. ina tarbaÑim lipit ilim ittabšƯ, a natural disaster (lit. “a touch of the god”) has occurred in the pen. tarbƯtu, nom. adopted child. šumma awƯlum Ñe¨ram ina mêšu ana mƗrnjtim ilqƝma urtabbƯšu tarbƯtum šî ul ibbaqqar, if a man adopted a new-born child as his own and has brought him up that adopted child shall not be reclaimed; mƗr ummƗnim Ñe¨ram ana tarbƯtim ilqƝma šipir qƗtišu uštƗ¨issu, a professional person took a son to adopt and has taught him his manual skill; ana tarbƯtim nasƗ¨im panam ištakan, he has made up his mind to dispossess the adopted child. tarkibtu, nom. pollination. kirâšu ištu tarkibtim ana tamkƗrim iddinma, he gave his orchard after pollination to a merchant. tarû (AHw. tarû I), vb. G: to lead off. uznam u nƝmeqam lƯÓeršuma ina mƯšƯtim littarušu, let him deprive him of hearing and understanding and lead him off into confusion.

GLOSSARY

337

târu, vb. G: 1. to return (+ personal subject); 2. to revert (+ inanimate subject). —1. sinništum šî ana ¨Ɨwiriša itâr, that woman shall return to her first husband; aššat munnabtim ana mutiša ul itâr, the wife of a deserter shall not return to her husband; itnjramma eqelšu kirƗšu u bƯssu irriš, he returned and took possession of his field, his orchard and his house; tarbƯtum šî ana bƯt abišu itâr, that foster-child shall return to his father’s house; ina pu¨rim ina kussî dayyƗnnjtišu ušetbûšuma ul itârma, they shall remove him from his seat of judgment in the assembly and he shall not return. —2. eqlum kirûm u bƯtum ana bƝlišu itâr, the field, the orchard and the house shall revert to the owner. D: 1. to repay, return property; 2. to detain; 3. to change (AHw. p. 1335f., s.v. târu, 21). —1. ina šattim šuƗti šeam ana bƝl ¨ubullišu ul utâr, he shall not repay the barley to his creditor in that year; kaspam u Ñibassu ana tamkƗrim utâr, he shall repay the silver and the interest; ter¨atam ša awƯlum šû ana bƯt emišu ublu emušu uttƝršum, his father-in-law returns to him the bride-price which that man took to his father-in-law’s house; eqelšu u kirƗšu utarrnjšumma, they shall give him back his field and his orchard. —2. ša ina dannat šarrim turru, who is detained in a stronghold of the king. —3. mƗssu ana til abnjbim litƝr, may he change his land into a ruin; njmam ana mnjšim litƝršumma, may he change day into night for him; damqƗtišu ana lemnƝtim litƝr, may he change his blessings to troubles. tašƯmtu, nom. authority. šumma awƯlum šû tašƯmtam išnjma mƗssu šutƝšuram ilei, if that man has authority he will be empowered to regulate his land; šar tašƯmtim, the king with authority. tašna, adv. twice as much. tašna šeam ša im¨uru iriab, he shall repay double the barley that he has received. tebû, vb. G: to attack. ¼: to remove. ina pu¨rim ina kussî dayyƗnnjtišu ušetbûšuma, they shall remove him from his seat of judgment in the assembly. telƯtu, adj. “the Uplifted Lady” (an epithet of Ishtar). migir telƯtim, favourite of the Uplifted One. teptƯtu, nom. development. kankallam ana šalaš šanƗtim ana teptƯtim ušƝÑƯma, he leased neglected land for three years for development. ter¨atu, nom. bridal price. kaspam mala ter¨atiša inaddiššim, he shall give her silver to the value of her bridal gift; ter¨atam ša awƯlum šû ana bƯt emišu ublu, the bridal gift which that man had brought to his father-in-law’s house; eliƗt zittišu kasap ter¨atim išakkanušumma, in addition to his share they shall set aside silver for a bridal gift. têrtu, nom. oracle. mušaklil tƝrƝtim ša Sugal, fulfilling the oracles of Sugal; Sîn bƝl šamê ilum bƗnî ša têressu ina ilƯ šnjpât, Sin, the lord of heaven, the god who created me, whose oracular decision is clear (col. l:43: emendation, for Stele šêressu (< šƝrtu B, brilliance) read têressu; see Roth). tƝšû, nom. turmoil. tƝšî la šubbîm, turmoil which cannot be suppressed. tƯbu, nom. attacking. tƯb kibrƗt erbettim, attacking the four regions. tillu, nom. desolate mound. mƗssu ana til abnjbim litƝr, may he turn his land into a mound from the Deluge. tukultu, nom. faith. bƝlum tukultƯ, the lord, my faith. tulû, nom. breast. tulƗša inakkisnj, they shall cut off her breast. tuššu, nom. deception. sƗr tuššamma iddƯ!, he is a liar; he planned deception.

338

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

  Óâbu (AHw. ÓiƗbu), vb. G: to be good, acceptable. idƯšu gamrƗtim ma¨ir libbašu ÓƗb, having received all his wages his heart is glad; rƝî nišƯ ša epšƝtušu eli Ištar ÓƗbƗ, the shepherd of the people, whose achievements are acceptable to Ishtar; warkassa Ɲma eliša ÓƗbu nadƗnam la išÓuršimma, he did not write to give her possessions as would be acceptable to her. D: to improve. Anum u Ellil ana šƯr nišƯ Óubbim šumƯ ibbû, Anum and Enlil named me to improve the welfare of the people; libbaša uÓabbnj, they shall make her happy (lit. “improve her heart”). ÓƗbu, adj. good, beneficent. Ñilli ÓƗbum ana Ɨliya tariÑ, my beneficent shadow is stretched over my city; šƯram ÓƗbam ana nišƯ ana dƗr išƯm, he ensured good health (lit. “good flesh”) for his people for evermore. Óa¨Ɨdu, vb. G: to be plentiful. D: to make plentiful; cf. muÓa¨¨idu, ptcp. ÓarƗdu, vb. G: to send. agram Ưgurma pnj¨šu iÓÓarad (vnt. ittarad), he hired a mercenary and he has sent him as his substitute; ana ¨arrƗnim iÓrussu, he sent him on an expedition. Óebû, vb. G: to sink (intransitive). bƝl eleppim ša eleppašu Óebiat, the boat-owner whose boat sank. D: to sink (transitive). eleppam ša uÓebbû, the boat which he sank; malƗ¨um šû ƯgƯma eleppam uÓÓebbi, that sailor was negligent, he has sunk the boat. Óe¨û, vb. G: to be near. [D: to aggregate. lu ÑibƗtim ana qaqqƗdim uÓÓe¨¨i, he has aggregated the interest together with the principal.] Óe¨¨û, nom. neighbour. ÓƝ¨ušu […], his neighbour. [ÓƝmu, nom. report. Óemam iškun, he made a declaration (L68+b, Finet; cf. Roth: šƯbƯ iškun, he secured witnesses)]. ÓiƗbu, see Óâbu, to be good. ÓƯdu, nom. clay. biniƗtišu kƯma Ñalam Óiddim li¨buš, may he shatter his body like clay. Óu¨du, nom. plenty. mukammer nu¨šim u tu¨dim, provider of abundance and plenty. Óuppu, nom. tablet, document. Óuppašu i¨¨eppe, the tablet shall be broken; Óuppašu uraÓÓab, he shall moisten the tablet; kaspam u Ñibassu ša pƯ Óuppišu, silver and its interest according to the terms on his tablet; mussa urtakkis Óuppam uštƝzib, she has made a contract with her husband and made him deposit a tablet.

U u, conj. and; indistinguisable in writing from nj, or. abim u ummim, father and mother; eqlim kirîm u bƯtim, a field, an orchard or a house; eleppašu u mimmašu ¨alqam, a boat or something else that is lost; awƯlum šû iddâk u ša šurqam ina qƗtišu im¨uru iddâk, that man shall be put to death and the one who received the lost property into his possession shall be put to death; u lu = njlnj, see lu. ubƗnu, nom. finger. aššum zikarim šanîm ubƗnum eliša ittariÑma, the finger was pointed at her because of another man. ubburu (CAD; AHw. abƗru III), see abƗru D-theme.

GLOSSARY

339

ugƗru, nom. arable land. ina kƗrišu pƯtum ittepte u ugƗram mê uštƗbil, a break has been opened in the dyke and has allowed the water to go over the arable land; ištu ÑƝnum ugƗrim Ưtelianim, after the flocks have come away from the arable land. ugbabtu (formerly read entu), priestess. nadƯtum ugbabtum ša ina gagîm la wašbat, a devotee or a priestess who is not resident in the cloister; ugbabtum nadƯtum ulu sekretum ša abuša šeriktam išrukušim, a priestess, a devotee or a confined woman, whose father granted a dowry to her. ukullû, nom. foodstuff. zƝram ulu ukullâm išriqma, he stole the seed or the foodstuff. ul, negative particle. not. 1. + finite verb; 2. + stative; 3. + nom. —1. passim. —2. ul aššat, she is not to be regarded as a wife. —3. ul abƯ atta ul ummƯ attƯ, you are not my father, you are not my mother. ulu (AHw. njlnj; also read u lu) > lu. njmišam, adv. daily. igirrê njmišam … lidammiqnj, may they treat my prayers kindly each day. ummƗnu, nom. 1. workforce, army; 2. craftsman. —1. išdƯ ummƗnišu liš¨elÑi, may the foundations of his workforce crumble; gurun šalmƗt ummƗnƗtišu (vnt. ummƗnišu), a pile of bodies of his soldiers; šuƗti zƝrašu mƗssu ÑƗbašu nišƯšu u ummƗnšu errƝtam maruštam lƯrurnj, may they curse him, his descendants, his land, his soldiers, his people and his army with a terrible curse. —2. awƯlum mƗr ummƗnim iggar, a man hires a craftsman. ummu, nom. mother. innjma ilqûšu abašu u ummašu i¨iaÓ, after he took him he longs for his father and mother; awƯlum warki abišu ina snjn ummišu ittatƯl, after the death of his father, a man has had intercourse with his mother; Ninlil ummum rabƯtum, Ninlil, the great mother; Nintu bƝltum ÑƯrtum ša mƗtƗtim ummum bƗnƯtƯ, O Nintu, noble lady of the nations, the mother who created me. njmu, nom. day, period of time, occasion. ina njmim ištƝn, for one day; njmƯ war¨Ư šanƗt palƝšu, the days, the months, the years of his rule; njmam ana mnjšim litƝršumma, may he turn the day into the night for him. ša njmƯšu izzazzu ana Esagil, stands in Esagil at his proper time; njmƯšu imannûma, he shall count his days; ana warkiƗt njmƯ ana matima, until future time, for ever; mušƗriku njm balƗÓiya, lengthening the time for my life. unnjtu, nom. household goods. šƗyyimƗnum ša unnjt mƗrƯ almattim išammu ina kaspišu Ưtelli makknjrum ana bƝlišu itâr, the person who buys the household goods of a widow’s sons shall be parted from his silver and the property shall return to its owner. ur¨u, nom. way. dƯnšu ay idƯn uru¨šu lƯši, may he not juge his case, let him confuse his path. urƯÑu, nom. goat. urƯÑam ana diƗšim Ưgur, he hired a goat to thresh. uršu, nom. wisdom. šu ikšudu nagab uršim, the one who reached the source of wisdom. njsu (AHw. njsu I), ussu, nom. order. njsim šnj¨uzim uwaeranni, he appointed me to take control of behaviour (for šnj¨uzu (a¨Ɨzu, ¼) see AHw. s.v. 2 and 3a); ussam kƯnam u rƯdam damqam, proper order and good behaviour.

340

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE

uÑurtu, nom. plan, purpose. mukƯn uÑurƗtim ša Keš, establishing the design of Kish; ina awat Marduk bƝliya uÑurƗtnja mušassikam ay iršia, may Marduk, my lord, forbid anyone to throw out my plans. uššuru (CAD s.v. ašƗru C, to release, refers to (w)uššuru; cf. AHw. wašƗrum D), vb. D: to prove innocent. Dt: (cf. AHw. s.v. wašƗrum, to hang loose, Dt 2b) to be proved innocent, go away free. nƯš ilim izakkarma njtaššar, he shall make a sworn statement and go free; sinništum šî njtaššar, that woman shall go free; itammƗma njtaššar, he shall swear and go away free. ušumgallu, nom. mighty leader. ušumgal šarrƯ talƯm Zababa, the leader of kings, the supporter of Zababa. utlu, nom. breast. ina utliya nišƯ mƗt ¼umerim u Akkadîm ukƯl, I clasped the people of Sumer and Akkad to my breast. utnjlu (AHw.), see itnjlu (CAD), to lie. uÓÓetu, nom. measure for silver (lit. “grain”). ana 1 šiqil kaspim 1⁄6 u 6 uÓÓet Ñibtam ileqqe, for each shekel of silver he shall receive one-sixth of a shekel and six grains in interest. uznu, nom. 1. ear; 2. understanding. —1. uzunšu inakkisnj, they shall cut off his ear; uznam u nƝmeqam lƯÓeršuma ina mƯšƯtim littarušu, may he deprive him of wisdom and understanding and may he remove him into oblivion. uzubbû, nom. divorce payment. 1 mana kaspam ana uzubbêm inaddiššim, he shall give her one mana of silver as a divorce payment. uzzatu, nom. anger. ina uzzƗtiša rabiƗtim šarrnjssu lƯrur, in her great fury may she curse his kingdom.

W wabƗlu, see abƗlu; wakil ¨aÓÓim, see ša ¨aÓÓƗtim; walƗdu, see alƗdu; wapû, see apû; wardu, see ardu; war¨u, see ar¨u; warku, see arkû; warqu, see arqu; wašƗbu, see ašƗbu; watru, see atru.

Z zadimmu, see sasinnu. zƗiru, nom. foe. rƯmum kadrum munakkip zƗirƯ, a wild ox tossing the opponents. zakƗru, vb. G: to utter a statement. wardum šû bƝlšu la izakkar, that slave will not name his master; nƯš ilim izakkarma, he shall utter an oath by the god. N: to be spoken. šumƯ ina damiqtim ana dƗr lizzakir, my name shall be uttered as a blessing. zanƗnu, vb, G: to care for; cf. zƗninu, ptcp. zƗninu, ptcp. (< zanƗnu). caring for. zƗninum nadum ša Ekur, the attentive carer of Ekur. zapƗru, see ÑabƗru. zaqƗpu, vb. to plant. G: eqlam ana kirîm zaqƗpim ana nukaribbim iddin nukaribbum kiriam izqup, he gave the field to a gardener to plant as an orchard, the gardener planted the orchard.

GLOSSARY

341

zâzu, vb. G: 1. to share goods; 2. to divide up an estate. —1. mƗrnj ugƗrim ša šešunu mû ublu izuzznj, the people in the irrigated land whose barley the water destroyed shall share; mit¨Ɨriš izuzznj, they shall share equally. —2. warka abum ana šƯmtim ittalku innjma a¨¨nj izuzznj, after the father went to his destiny, when the brothers do the sharing; mƗrnj amtim itti mƗrƯ ¨Ưrtim ul izuzznj, the sons of the slave shall not share with the sons of the chosen wife; šalušti aplnjtiša izâzma, she shall have a one third share as her inheritance. zƝru, nom. 1. seed; 2. descendants. zƝram ulu ukullâm išriqma, he stole the seed or the fodder. —2. zƝr šarrnjtim ša Sîn ibniušu, royal descendants which Sin created for him; liplippim ša Sumulail aplum dannum ša Sîn-muballiÓ zƝrum dƗrium ša šarrnjtim … anƗku, I am the descendant of Sumula’il, strong heir of Sin-muballit, with generations of royal descendants. zêru, vb. G: to hate. aššum Ɨlšu izƝruma innabitu, because he hated his city and escaped; sinništum mussa izƝrma ul ta¨¨azanni iqtabi, a woman hated her husband and has said, “You shall not hold me”. zibbatu, nom. tail. qaranšu išbir zibbassu ittakis, he broke off its horn or he has cut off its tail. zƯbu, nom. sacrifice. dƗriš išƯmu zƯbƯ ellnjtim, he instigated holy sacrifices for evermore. zikaru, nom. man. aššat awƯlim ša zikaram la idûma, a man’s wife who did not know another male; aššat awƯlim itti zikarim šanîm ina itnjlim ittaÑbat, a woman has been seized while lying with another male. zikru, nom. name, reputation. mušarbi zikru BƗbilim, making the name of Babylon great; šumšu u zikiršu ina mƗtim la šubšâm, not producing a reputation or fame in the land. zittu, nom. share of an estate, allocation. bƝl kirîm zittašu inassaqma ileqqe, the owner of the orchard shall choose his share and take it; aplum mƗr ¨Ưrtim ina zittim inassaqma, the heir as son of the preferred wife shall select from the share and take it; eliƗt zittišu kasap ter¨atim išakkannjšumma, for the marriage they shall allocate for him silver additional to his share; nidƯtam ina libbi zittišu išakkannjšum, they shall arrange for him to have the rough ground in the middle of his share. zumru, nom. body. arnam kabtam šƝressu rabƯtam ša ina zumrišu la i¨alliqu, heavy affliction and serious disease which will not disappear from his body. zunnu, nom. rain. zunnƯ ina šamê mƯlam ina nagbim lƯÓeršu, let him deprive him of the rain from the sky and the flood-water from the wadi.

BIBLIOGRAPHY It seemed appropriate in a book like this for the list of particularly relevant material to be presented chronologically (with more recent publications before older ones) rather than alphabetically. In this way it becomes clear how colleagues have valued the work of their predecessors. Full bibliographical information to works referred to incidentally are given in related footnotes. The official names of publishers have sometimes been abbreviated, for the sake of consistency: CUP: Geuthner: Biblical Institute:

Cambridge University Press; P. Geuthner; Librairie Orientaliste Paul Geuthner; Biblical Institute Press; Pontificio Istituto Biblico; Pontificium Institutum Biblicum.

Only works primarily concerned with the text of CH are included. For a fuller description of the life and times of Hammurabi, see most recently: 2005 2003 1977 1971

van de Mieroop, Marc. King Hammurabi. Oxford: Blackwell. Charpin, Dominique. Hammu-rabi de Babylone. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France. Klengel, Horst. Hammurapi von Babylon und seine Zeit. Berlin: VEB Deutscher Verlag der Wissenschaften. Schmökel, Hartmut. Hammurabi von Babylon. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft.

All these books contain suggestions for further reading. ***

2006 2005

Borger, Rykle. Babylonisch-assyrische Lesestücke (3rd edn; see 1979 and 1963). Viel, H.-Dieter. The Complete Code of Hammurabi. 2 vols. Munich: Lincom. Cf. Richardson, M.E.J., in Bibliotheca Orientalis 63 (2006) 322-23.

344 2004 2004 2004 2001 2001 2000 1997 1997 1997 1996 1995 1995 1992 1991 1988 1988 1988 1983

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE Borger, Rykle. Mesopotamische Zeichenlexicon. Münster: Ugarit Verlag (replacing Borger 1988). Huehnergard, John, and Christopher Woods. “Akkadian and Eblaite”, in Woodard 2004: 218-87. Woodard, Roger D., ed. Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: CUP. Bodi, Daniel. Petite grammaire de l’akkadien à l’usage des debutants. Paris: Geuthner. Malbran-Labat, Florence. Manuel de langue akkadienne. Louvain la Neuve: Université Catholique de Louvain, Institut Orientale. Richardson, M.E.J. Hammurabi’s Laws. Text, Translation and Glossary. The Biblical Seminar, 73; Semitic Texts and Studies, 2. Sheffield: Sheffield Academic Press. Buccellati, Giorgio. “Akkadian”, in Hetzron 1997: 69-99. Hetzron, Robert. The Semitic Languages. London: Routledge. Huehnergard, John. A Grammar of Akkadian. Harvard Semitic Studies, 45. Atlanta: Scholars Press. Buccellati, Giorgio. A Structural Grammar of Babylonian. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Roth, Martha T. Law Collections from Mesopotamia and Asia Minor. Writngs from the Ancient World, Society of Biblical Literature, 7. Atlanta, Ga.: Scholars Press. von Soden, Wolfram, with W.R. Mayer. Grundriss der Akkadischen Grammatik. Analecta Orientalia, 33. Rome: Biblical Institute, 3rd edn. Cf. von Soden 1952; 1969a; 1969b. Hoffner, H.A. Akkadian Grammar. Atlanta: Scholars Press (an English version of Ungnad and Matouš 1964). von Soden, Wolfram. Das akkadische Syllabar. Rome: Biblical Institute, 4th edn. Borger, Rykle. Assyrisch-babylonische Zeichenliste. Kevelaer: Butzon & Bercker; Neukirchen–Vluyn: Neukirchener Verlag, 4th edn. Caplice, Richard, with the collaboration of Daniel Snell. Introduction to Akkadian. Studia Pohl, series maior, 9. Rome: Biblical Institute, 3rd edn. Labat, R. Manuel d’épigraphie akkadienne. Augmented with addenda by Florence Malbran-Labat. Paris: Geuthner, 6th edn. Finet, André. Le Code de Hammurapi. Paris: Les Éditions du Cerf, 2nd edn (1st edn, 1973).

BIBLIOGRAPHY 1982 1979 1978 1977 1973 1973 1973 1969 1969 1969a 1969b 1966 1964 1963 1955

1953

345

Borger, Rykle. “Der Codex Hammurapi”, in Otto Kaiser (ed.), Texte aus der Umwelt des Alten Testaments I/i, 39-80. Gütersloh: Verslaghaus Gerd Mohn. Borger, Rykle. Babylonisch-assyrische Lesestücke. 2 vols. Analecta Orientalia, 54. Rome: Biblical Institute, 2nd edn (1st edn, 1963). Marcus, D. A Manual of Akkadian. Washington: University Press of America. Szlechter, Emile. Codex Hammurapi. Rome: Pontificia Universitas Lateranensis. Beek, M.A. et al. Symbolae biblicae et mesopotamicae Francisco Mario Theodoro de Liagre Böhl dedicatae. Leiden: E.J. Brill. Bergmann, E. Codex Hammurabi. Textus Primigenius. Rome: Biblical Institute, 3rd edn (1st edn, 1953). Finet, André. Le Code de Hammurapi. Paris: Les Éditions du Cerf (2nd edn, 1983). Meek, Theophile J. “The Code of Hammurabi”, in J.B. Pritchard (ed.), Ancient Near Eastern Texts Relating to the Old Testament, 163-80. Princeton NJ: Princeton University Press. Riemschneider, Kaspar. Lehrbuch des Akkadischen. Leipzig: VEB Verlag Enzyklopädie. von Soden, Wolfram. Grundriss der akkadischen Grammatik. Analecta Orientalia, 33/47. Rome: Biblical Institute, 2nd edn (cf. von Soden 1952). von Soden, Wolfram. Ergänzungsheft zum Grundriss der akkadischen Grammatik. Analecta Orientalia, 47. Rome: Biblical Institute. Reiner, Erica. A Linguistic Analysis of Akkadian. The Hague: Mouton. Ungnad, A., and L. Matouš. Babylonisch-assyrische Grammatik. Munich: Beck (see Hoffner 1992). Borger, Riekele, Babylonisch-assyrische Lesestücke. 3 vols. Rome: Biblical Institute, 1st edn. (2nd edn, 1979). Driver, G.R., and John C. Miles. The Babylonian Laws. II. Transliterated Text, Translation, Philological Notes, Glossary. Oxford: The Clarendon Press. (The contribution of Miles was published in vol. I of Driver and Miles 1952). Bauer, Theo. Akkadische Lesestücke. Rome: Biblical Institute.

346 1953 1952 1952 1950 1947 1942 1941 1906 1902

A COMPREHENSIVE GRAMMAR TO HAMMURABI’S STELE Bergmann, E. Codex Hammurabi. Textus primigenius. Rome: Biblical Institute, 3rd edn. Driver, G.R., and John C. Miles. The Babylonian Laws. I. Legal Commentary. Oxford: The Clarendon Press. von Soden, Wolfram. Grundriss der akkadischen Grammatik. Analecta Orientalia, 33. Rome: Biblical Institute. von Soden, Wolfram. Review of Franz M.Th. Böhl, Akkadian Chrestomathy I (ZA 49 [1950]: 333-35). Böhl, Franz M. Th. Akkadian Chrestomathy I (no subsequent volume). Leiden: Nederlandsch Archaeologisch-Philologisch Instituut voor het Nabije Oosten. von Soden, Wolfram, Review of P. Naster, Chrestomathie akkadienne (OLZ 45 [1942]: 345-53). Naster, Paul. Chrestomathie accadienne. Louvain: Bureaux du Muséon. Scheil, Vincent. La loi de Hammourabi, vers 2000 av. J.-C. Paris: Leroux, 3rd edn. Scheil, Vincent, in Jacques de Morgan. La délégation en Perse du Ministère de l’Instruction Publique. Mémoires publiées sous la direction de Jaques de Morgan, délégué général. Textes Élamites—Sémitiques, deuxième série. Paris: Ernest Leroux. Pages 12-162 of vol. IV.